Description of STM32F30xx/31xx Standard Peripheral Library

Description of STM32F30xx/31xx Standard Peripheral Library
UM1581
User manual
Description of STM32F30xx/31xx Standard Peripheral Library
Introduction
The STM32F30xx and STM32F31xx Standard Peripheral Library covers 3 abstraction levels, and
includes:

A complete register address mapping with all bits, bitfields and registers declared in C. This avoids
a cumbersome task and more important, it brings the benefits of a bug free reference mapping file,
speeding up the early project phase.

A collection of routines and data structures covering all peripheral functions (drivers with common
API). It can directly be used as a reference framework, since it also includes macros for supporting
core-related intrinsic features, common constants, and definition of data types.

A set of examples covering all available peripherals with template projects for the most common
development tools. With the appropriate hardware evaluation board, this allows to get started with
a brand-new micro within few hours.
Each driver consists of a set of functions covering all peripheral features. The development of each
driver is driven by a common API (application programming interface) which standardizes the driver
structure, the functions and the parameter names.The driver source code is developed in „Strict ANSI-C‟
(relaxed ANSI-C for projects and example files). It is fully documented and is MISRA-C 2004 compliant.
Writing the whole library in „Strict ANSI-C‟ makes it independent from the development tools. Only the
start-up files depend on the development tools. Thanks to the Standard Peripheral Library, low-level
implementation details are transparent so that reusing code on a different MCU requires only to
reconfigure the compiler. As a result, developers can easily migrate designs across the STM32 series to
quickly bring product line extensions to market without any redesign. In addition, the library is built
around a modular architecture that makes it easy to tailor and run it on the same MCU using hardware
platforms different from ST evaluation boards.
The Standard Peripheral Library implements run-time failure detection by checking the input values for
all library functions. Such dynamic checking contributes towards enhancing the robustness of the
software. Run-time detection is suitable for user application development and debugging. It adds an
overhead which can be removed from the final application code to minimize code size and execution
speed. For more details refer to Section 1.1.5: "Run-time checking".
Since the Standard Peripheral Library is generic and covers all peripheral features, the size and/or
execution speed of the application code may not be optimized. For many applications, the library may
be used as is. The firmware library user manual is structured as follows:



Document conventions, rules, architecture and overview of the Library package.
How to use and customize the Library (step by step).
Detailed description of each peripheral driver: configuration structure, functions and how to use the
provided API to build your application.
The STM32F30xx and STM32F31xx Standard Peripheral Library will be referred to as STM32F30xx
Library throughout the document, unless otherwise specified.
Table 1: Applicable products
Type
Part numbers
Microcontrollers
STM32F30xx and STM32F31xx
October 2012
DocID023800 Rev 1
1/584
www.st.com
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
UM1581
Contents
1
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library ...................... 14
1.1
Coding rules and conventions ............................................. 14
1.1.1 Acronyms ....................................................................................... 14
1.1.2 Naming conventions ...................................................................... 14
1.1.3 Coding rules .................................................................................. 15
1.1.4 Bit-Banding .................................................................................... 18
1.1.5 Run-time checking ......................................................................... 19
1.1.6 MISRA-C 2004 compliance ........................................................... 21
1.2
Architecture ......................................................................... 23
1.3
Package description ............................................................ 24
1.3.1 Library folder structure................................................................... 24
1.3.2 Project folder ................................................................................. 27
1.3.3 Utilities folder ................................................................................. 29
1.4
Supported devices and development tools .......................... 31
1.4.1 Supported devices ......................................................................... 31
1.4.2 Supported development tools and compilers ................................ 31
2
How to use and customize the library ............................ 32
2.1
Library configuration parameters ......................................... 32
2.2
Library programming model ................................................. 34
2.3
Peripheral initialization and configuration ............................ 35
2.4
How to run your first example .............................................. 36
2.4.1 Prerequisites.................................................................................. 36
2.4.2 Run your first example................................................................... 37
2.4.3 Run a peripheral example ............................................................. 38
2.5
STM32F30/31xx programming model using the library ....... 39
2.6
How to develop your first application ................................... 41
2.6.1 Starting point ................................................................................. 41
2.6.2 Library configuration parameters ................................................... 42
2.6.3 system_stm32f30x.c ...................................................................... 42
2.6.4 main.c ............................................................................................ 43
2.6.5 stm32f30x_it.c ............................................................................... 44
3
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) ................................... 46
3.1
ADC Firmware driver registers structures ............................ 46
3.1.1 ADC_Common_TypeDef ............................................................... 46
3.1.2 ADC_CommonInitTypeDef ............................................................ 46
2/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
3.1.3 ADC_InitTypeDef........................................................................... 47
UM1581
3.1.4 ADC_InjectedInitTypeDef .............................................................. 48
3.1.5 ADC_TypeDef ............................................................................... 48
3.2
ADC Firmware driver API description .................................. 51
3.2.1 How to use this driver .................................................................... 51
3.2.2 Initialization and Configuration functions ....................................... 51
3.2.3 Analog Watchdog configuration functions ..................................... 52
3.2.4 Temperature Sensor - Vrefint (Internal Reference Voltage) and
VBAT management functions .................................................................. 53
3.2.5 Regular Channels Configuration functions .................................... 53
3.2.6 Regular Channels DMA Configuration functions ........................... 54
3.2.7 Injected channels Configuration functions..................................... 54
3.2.8 Interrupts and flags management functions .................................. 55
3.2.9 Initialization and Configuration functions ....................................... 57
3.2.10 Analog Watchdog configuration functions ..................................... 65
3.2.11 Temperature Sensor- Vrefint (Internal Reference Voltage) and
VBAT management function .................................................................... 69
3.2.12 Regular Channels Configuration functions .................................... 71
3.2.13 Regular Channels DMA Configuration functions ........................... 81
3.2.14 Injected channels Configuration functions..................................... 82
3.2.15 Interrupts and flags management functions .................................. 84
3.3
ADC Firmware driver defines .............................................. 90
3.3.1 ADC ............................................................................................... 90
4
Controller area network (bxCAN) .................................. 105
4.1
CAN Firmware driver registers structures .......................... 105
4.1.1 CAN_TypeDef ............................................................................. 105
4.1.2 CAN_FIFOMailBox_TypeDef ...................................................... 106
4.1.3 CAN_TxMailBox_TypeDef .......................................................... 107
4.1.4 CAN_FilterRegister_TypeDef ...................................................... 107
4.1.5 CAN_InitTypeDef......................................................................... 107
4.1.6 CAN_FilterInitTypeDef................................................................. 109
4.1.7 CanRxMsg ................................................................................... 110
4.1.8 CanTxMsg ................................................................................... 110
4.2
CAN Firmware driver API description ................................ 111
4.2.1 How to use this driver .................................................................. 111
4.2.2 Initialization and Configuration functions ..................................... 112
4.2.3 CAN Frames Transmission functions .......................................... 112
4.2.4 CAN Frames Reception functions ............................................... 112
4.2.5 CAN Operation modes functions ................................................. 112
DocID023800 Rev 1
3/584
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
UM1581
4.2.6 CAN Bus Error management functions ....................................... 113
4.2.7 Interrupts and flags management functions ................................ 113
4.2.8 Initialization and Configuration functions ..................................... 115
4.2.9 CAN Frames Transmission functions .......................................... 118
4.2.10 CAN Frames Reception functions ............................................... 119
4.2.11 CAN Operating mode functions ................................................... 120
4.2.12 CAN Bus Error management functions ....................................... 121
4.2.13 Interrupts and flags management functions ................................ 123
4.3
CAN Firmware driver defines ............................................ 126
4.3.1 CAN ............................................................................................. 126
5
Comparators (COMP) ..................................................... 137
5.1
COMP Firmware driver registers structures ...................... 137
5.1.1 COMP_TypeDef .......................................................................... 137
5.1.2 COMP_InitTypeDef ..................................................................... 137
5.2
COMP Firmware driver API description ............................. 138
5.2.1 COMP Peripheral features .......................................................... 138
5.2.2 How to use this driver .................................................................. 140
5.2.3 Initialization and Configuration functions ..................................... 140
5.2.4 Window mode control function .................................................... 140
5.2.5 Initialization and Configuration functions ..................................... 141
5.2.6 Write mode control functions ....................................................... 144
5.2.7 COMP configuration locking function .......................................... 144
5.3
COMP Firmware driver defines ......................................... 145
5.3.1 COMP .......................................................................................... 145
6
CRC calculation unit (CRC) ............................................ 152
6.1
CRC Firmware driver registers structures ......................... 152
6.1.1 CRC_TypeDef ............................................................................. 152
6.2
CRC Firmware driver API description ................................ 152
6.2.1 How to use this driver .................................................................. 152
6.2.2 CRC configuration functions ........................................................ 153
6.2.3 CRC computation functions ......................................................... 153
6.2.4 CRC Independent Register (IDR) access functions .................... 153
6.2.5 CRC Independent Register (IDR) access functions .................... 153
6.2.6 CRC computation of one/many 32-bit data functions.................. 156
6.2.7 CRC Independent Register (IDR) access functions .................... 158
6.3
CRC Firmware driver defines ............................................ 158
6.3.1 CRC ............................................................................................. 158
4/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
UM1581
7
Digital-to-analog converter (DAC) ................................. 160
7.1
DAC Firmware driver registers structures .......................... 160
7.1.1 DAC_TypeDef ............................................................................. 160
7.1.2 DAC_InitTypeDef......................................................................... 161
7.2
DAC Firmware driver API description ................................ 161
7.2.1 DAC Peripheral features ............................................................. 161
7.2.2 How to use this driver .................................................................. 162
7.2.3 DAC channels configuration: trigger, output buffer, data format . 163
7.2.4 DMA management functions ....................................................... 163
7.2.5 Interrupts and flags management functions ................................ 163
7.2.6 DAC channels configuration ........................................................ 163
7.2.7 DAC management functions ....................................................... 168
7.2.8 Interrupts and flags management functions ................................ 169
7.3
DAC Firmware driver defines ............................................ 171
7.3.1 DAC ............................................................................................. 171
8
Debug support (DBGMCU) ............................................. 176
8.1
DBGMCU Firmware driver registers structures ................. 176
8.1.1 DBGMCU_TypeDef ..................................................................... 176
8.2
DBGMCU Firmware driver API description ........................ 176
8.2.1 Device and Revision ID management functions ......................... 176
8.2.2 Peripherals Configuration functions ............................................ 176
8.2.3 Device and Revision ID management functions ......................... 177
8.2.4 Peripherals Configuration functions ............................................ 177
8.3
DBGMCU Firmware driver defines .................................... 179
8.3.1 DBGMCU ..................................................................................... 179
9
DMA controller (DMA) ..................................................... 182
9.1
DMA Firmware driver registers structures ......................... 182
9.1.1 DMA_Channel_TypeDef.............................................................. 182
9.1.2 DMA_TypeDef ............................................................................. 182
9.1.3 DMA_InitTypeDef ........................................................................ 182
9.2
DMA Firmware driver API description................................ 184
9.2.1 How to use this driver .................................................................. 184
9.2.2 Initialization and Configuration functions ..................................... 184
9.2.3 Data Counter functions ................................................................ 185
9.2.4 Interrupts and flags management functions ................................ 185
9.2.5 Initialization and Configuration functions ..................................... 186
9.2.6 Data counter functions................................................................. 188
DocID023800 Rev 1
5/584
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
UM1581
9.2.7 Interrupts and flags management functions ................................ 189
9.3
DMA Firmware driver defines ............................................ 196
9.3.1 DMA ............................................................................................. 196
10
External interrupt/event controller (EXTI) ..................... 207
10.1 EXTI Firmware driver registers structures ......................... 207
10.1.1 EXTI_TypeDef ............................................................................. 207
10.1.2 EXTI_InitTypeDef ........................................................................ 208
10.2 EXTI Firmware driver API description................................ 208
10.2.1 EXTI features............................................................................... 208
10.2.2 How to use this driver .................................................................. 209
10.2.3 Initialization and Configuration functions ..................................... 209
10.2.4 Interrupts and flags management functions ................................ 209
10.2.5 Initialization and Configuration functions ..................................... 210
10.2.6 Interrupts and flags management functions ................................ 211
10.3 EXTI Firmware driver defines ............................................ 212
10.3.1 EXTI ............................................................................................. 212
11
FLASH Memory (FLASH) ................................................ 216
11.1 FLASH Firmware driver registers structures ...................... 216
11.1.1 FLASH_TypeDef ......................................................................... 216
11.1.2 OB_TypeDef ................................................................................ 216
11.2 FLASH Firmware driver API description ............................ 217
11.2.1 How to use this driver .................................................................. 217
11.2.2 FLASH Interface configuration functions ..................................... 218
11.2.3 FLASH Memory Programming functions ..................................... 218
11.2.4 Option Bytes Programming functions .......................................... 219
11.2.5 Interrupts and flags management functions ................................ 220
11.2.6 FLASH Interface configuration functions ..................................... 220
11.2.7 FLASH Memory Programming functions ..................................... 221
11.2.8 Option Bytes Programming functions .......................................... 224
11.2.9 Interrupts and flags management functions ................................ 230
11.3 FLASH Firmware driver defines......................................... 232
11.3.1 FLASH ......................................................................................... 232
12
General-purpose I/Os (GPIO) ......................................... 234
12.1 GPIO Firmware driver registers structures ........................ 234
12.1.1 GPIO_TypeDef ............................................................................ 234
12.1.2 GPIO_InitTypeDef ....................................................................... 235
12.2 GPIO Firmware driver API description ............................... 235
6/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
12.2.1 How to use this driver .................................................................. 235
UM1581
12.2.2 Initialization and Configuration .................................................... 236
12.2.3 GPIO Read and Write.................................................................. 236
12.2.4 GPIO Alternate functions configuration functions ....................... 236
12.2.5 Initialization and Configuration .................................................... 237
12.2.6 GPIO Read and Write functions .................................................. 238
12.2.7 GPIO Alternate functions configuration functions ....................... 241
12.3 GPIO Firmware driver defines ........................................... 242
12.3.1 GPIO ............................................................................................ 242
13
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C) ........................... 247
13.1 I2C Firmware driver registers structures ............................ 247
13.1.1 I2C_TypeDef ............................................................................... 247
13.1.2 I2C_InitTypeDef........................................................................... 248
13.2 I2C Firmware driver API description .................................. 248
13.2.1 How to use this driver .................................................................. 248
13.2.2 Initialization and Configuration functions ..................................... 249
13.2.3 Communications handling functions............................................ 250
13.2.4 SMBUS management functions .................................................. 250
13.2.5 I2C registers management functions........................................... 251
13.2.6 Data transfers management functions ........................................ 251
13.2.7 DMA transfers management functions ........................................ 251
13.2.8 Interrupts and flags management functions ................................ 252
13.2.9 Initialization and Configuration functions ..................................... 253
13.2.10 Communications handling functions ......................................... 259
13.2.11 SMBUS management functions ............................................... 263
13.2.12 I2C registers management functions ........................................ 267
13.2.13 Data transfers management functions...................................... 267
13.2.14 DMA transfers management functions ..................................... 268
13.2.15 Interrupts and flags management functions ............................. 268
13.3 I2C Firmware driver defines .............................................. 271
13.3.1 I2C ............................................................................................... 271
14
Independent watchdog (IWDG) ...................................... 278
14.1 IWDG Firmware driver registers structures ....................... 278
14.1.1 IWDG_TypeDef ........................................................................... 278
14.2 IWDG Firmware driver API description .............................. 278
14.2.1 IWDG features ............................................................................. 278
14.2.2 How to use this driver .................................................................. 279
DocID023800 Rev 1
7/584
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
UM1581
14.2.3 Prescaler and Counter configuration functions ........................... 279
14.2.4 IWDG activation function ............................................................. 279
14.2.5 Flag management function .......................................................... 279
14.2.6 Prescaler and counter configuration functions ............................ 280
14.2.7 IWDG activation function ............................................................. 282
14.2.8 Flag management function .......................................................... 282
14.3 IWDG Firmware driver defines .......................................... 282
14.3.1 IWDG ........................................................................................... 282
15
Miscellaneous add-on to CMSIS functions(misc) ........ 284
15.1 MISC Firmware driver registers structures ........................ 284
15.1.1 NVIC_InitTypeDef........................................................................ 284
15.2 MISC Firmware driver API description ............................... 284
15.2.1 How to configure Interrupts using driver...................................... 284
15.2.2 MISC functions ............................................................................ 285
15.3 MISC Firmware driver defines ........................................... 287
15.3.1 MISC ............................................................................................ 287
16
Operational amplifier (OPAMP) ..................................... 289
16.1 OPAMP Firmware driver registers structures .................... 289
16.1.1 OPAMP_TypeDef ........................................................................ 289
16.1.2 OPAMP_InitTypeDef ................................................................... 289
16.2 OPAMP Firmware driver API description ........................... 289
16.2.1 OPAMP Peripheral Features ....................................................... 289
16.2.2 How to use this driver .................................................................. 290
16.2.3 Initialization and Configuration functions ..................................... 290
16.2.4 Initialization and Configuration .................................................... 291
16.2.5 OPAMP configuration locking function ........................................ 297
16.3 OPAMP Firmware driver defines ....................................... 298
16.3.1 OPAMP ........................................................................................ 298
17
Power control (PWR) ...................................................... 301
17.1 PWR Firmware driver registers structures ......................... 301
17.1.1 PWR_TypeDef............................................................................. 301
17.2 PWR Firmware driver API description ............................... 301
17.2.1 Backup Domain Access function ................................................. 301
17.2.2 PVD configuration functions ........................................................ 301
17.2.3 WakeUp pins configuration functions .......................................... 302
17.2.4 Low Power modes configuration functions .................................. 302
17.2.5 Flags management functions ...................................................... 303
8/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
17.2.6 Backup domain access function .................................................. 304
UM1581
17.2.7 PVD configuration function .......................................................... 304
17.2.8 WakeUp pins configuration functions .......................................... 305
17.2.9 Low power mode configuration functions .................................... 306
17.2.10 Flag management functions ..................................................... 307
17.3 PWR Firmware driver defines ............................................ 308
17.3.1 PWR ............................................................................................ 308
18
Reset and clock control (RCC) ...................................... 311
18.1 RCC Firmware driver registers structures ......................... 311
18.1.1 RCC_TypeDef ............................................................................. 311
18.1.2 RCC_ClocksTypeDef .................................................................. 312
18.2 RCC Firmware driver API description ................................ 313
18.2.1 RCC specific features .................................................................. 313
18.2.2 Internal-external clocks, PLL, CSS and MCO configuration
functions................................................................................................. 313
18.2.3 System, AHB, APB1 and APB2 busses clocks configuration
functions................................................................................................. 314
18.2.4 Peripheral clocks configuration functions .................................... 315
18.2.5 Interrupts and flags management functions ................................ 316
18.2.6 Internal and external clocks, PLL, CSS and MCO configuration
functions................................................................................................. 316
18.2.7 System AHB, APB1 and APB2 busses clocks configuration
functions................................................................................................. 322
18.2.8 Peripheral clocks configuration functions .................................... 325
18.2.9 Interrupts and flags management functions ................................ 334
18.3 RCC Firmware driver defines ............................................ 337
18.3.1 RCC ............................................................................................. 337
19
Real-time clock (RTC) ..................................................... 354
19.1 RTC Firmware driver registers structures .......................... 354
19.1.1 RTC_TypeDef.............................................................................. 354
19.1.2 RTC_InitTypeDef ......................................................................... 356
19.1.3 RTC_TimeTypeDef...................................................................... 356
19.1.4 RTC_DateTypeDef ...................................................................... 357
19.1.5 RTC_AlarmTypeDef .................................................................... 358
19.2 RTC Firmware driver API description ................................ 358
19.2.1 RTC Operating Condition ............................................................ 358
19.2.2 Backup Domain Reset ................................................................. 359
19.2.3 Backup Domain Access............................................................... 359
19.2.4 How to use this driver .................................................................. 359
DocID023800 Rev 1
9/584
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
UM1581
19.2.5 RTC and low power modes ......................................................... 361
19.2.6 Selection of RTC_AF alternate functions .................................... 361
19.2.7 Initialization and Configuration functions ..................................... 362
19.2.8 Backup Data Registers configuration functions .......................... 362
19.2.9 Output Type Config configuration functions ................................ 362
19.2.10 Shift control synchronisation functions ..................................... 362
19.2.11 Interrupts and flags management functions ............................. 362
19.2.12 Time and Date configuration functions ..................................... 363
19.2.13 Alarms (Alarm A and Alarm B) configuration functions ............ 363
19.2.14 WakeUp Timer configuration functions..................................... 364
19.2.15 Daylight Saving configuration functions ................................... 364
19.2.16 Output pin Configuration function ............................................. 364
19.2.17 Digital Calibration configuration functions ................................ 364
19.2.18 TimeStamp configuration functions .......................................... 364
19.2.19 Tampers configuration functions .............................................. 364
19.2.20 Initialization and Configuration functions .................................. 365
19.2.21 Backup Data Registers configuration functions ........................ 368
19.2.22 Output Type Config configuration functions ............................. 369
19.2.23 Shift control synchronisation functions ..................................... 370
19.2.24 Interrupts and flags management functions ............................. 370
19.2.25 Time and Date configuration functions ..................................... 373
19.2.26 Alarm configuration functions ................................................... 376
19.2.27 WakeUp timer configuration functions ...................................... 379
19.2.28 Daylight saving configuration functions .................................... 381
19.2.29 Output pin configuration functions ............................................ 382
19.2.30 Digital calibration configuration functions ................................. 383
19.2.31 Timestamp configuration functions ........................................... 384
19.2.32 Tamper configuration functions ................................................ 385
19.3 RTC Firmware driver defines ............................................. 389
19.3.1 RTC ............................................................................................. 389
20
Serial peripheral interface (SPI) ..................................... 403
20.1 SPI Firmware driver registers structures ........................... 403
20.1.1 SPI_TypeDef ............................................................................... 403
20.1.2 SPI_InitTypeDef .......................................................................... 404
20.1.3 I2S_InitTypeDef ........................................................................... 405
20.2 SPI Firmware driver API description .................................. 406
20.2.1 How to use this driver .................................................................. 406
20.2.2 Initialization and Configuration functions ..................................... 407
10/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
20.2.3 Data transfers functions............................................................... 408
UM1581
20.2.4 Hardware CRC Calculation functions .......................................... 408
20.2.5 DMA transfers management functions ........................................ 409
20.2.6 Interrupts and flags management functions ................................ 409
20.2.7 Initialization and configuration functions...................................... 411
20.2.8 Data transfer functions ................................................................ 418
20.2.9 Hardware CRC Calculation functions .......................................... 419
20.2.10 DMA transfers management functions ..................................... 421
20.2.11 Interrupts and flags management functions ............................. 422
20.3 SPI Firmware driver defines .............................................. 425
20.3.1 SPI ............................................................................................... 425
21
System configuration controller (SYSCFG).................. 433
21.1 SYSCFG Firmware driver registers structures .................. 433
21.1.1 SYSCFG_TypeDef ...................................................................... 433
21.2 SYSCFG Firmware driver API description ......................... 433
21.2.1 How to use this driver .................................................................. 433
21.2.2 SYSCFG Initialization and Configuration functions ..................... 433
21.2.3 SYSCFG initialization and configuration functions ...................... 434
21.3 SYSCFG Firmware driver defines ..................................... 441
21.3.1 SYSCFG ...................................................................................... 441
22
General-purpose timers (TIM) ........................................ 447
22.1 TIM Firmware driver registers structures ........................... 447
22.1.1 TIM_TypeDef ............................................................................... 447
22.1.2 TIM_TimeBaseInitTypeDef .......................................................... 449
22.1.3 TIM_OCInitTypeDef..................................................................... 449
22.1.4 TIM_ICInitTypeDef ...................................................................... 450
22.1.5 TIM_BDTRInitTypeDef ................................................................ 451
22.2 TIM Firmware driver API description ................................. 452
22.2.1 Output Compare management functions .................................... 452
22.2.2 How to use this driver .................................................................. 453
22.2.3 TimeBase management functions ............................................... 455
22.2.4 Input Capture management functions ......................................... 455
22.2.5 Advanced-control timers (TIM1 and TIM8) specific features....... 456
22.2.6 Interrupts, DMA and flags management functions ...................... 457
22.2.7 Clocks management functions .................................................... 457
22.2.8 Synchronization management functions ..................................... 457
22.2.9 Specific interface management functions.................................... 458
DocID023800 Rev 1
11/584
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
UM1581
22.2.10 Specific remapping management function ............................... 458
22.2.11 TimeBase management functions ............................................ 458
22.2.12 Output Compare management functions ................................. 465
22.2.13 Input Capture management functions ...................................... 487
22.2.14 Advanced-control timers (TIM1, TIM8) specific features .......... 492
22.2.15 Interrupts DMA and flags management functions .................... 495
22.2.16 Clock management functions ................................................... 501
22.2.17 Synchronization management functions................................... 504
22.2.18 Specific interface management functions ................................. 507
22.2.19 Specific remapping management functions ............................. 508
22.3 TIM Firmware driver defines .............................................. 509
22.3.1 TIM............................................................................................... 509
23 Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART) ................................................................ 533
23.1 USART Firmware driver registers structures ..................... 533
23.1.1 USART_TypeDef ......................................................................... 533
23.1.2 USART_InitTypeDef .................................................................... 534
23.1.3 USART_ClockInitTypeDef ........................................................... 535
23.2 USART Firmware driver API description ........................... 535
23.2.1 How to use this driver .................................................................. 535
23.2.2 Initialization and Configuration functions ..................................... 536
23.2.3 RS485 mode functions ................................................................ 537
23.2.4 DMA transfers management functions ........................................ 537
23.2.5 Interrupts and flags management functions ................................ 538
23.2.6 STOP Mode functions ................................................................. 539
23.2.7 AutoBaudRate functions .............................................................. 540
23.2.8 Data transfers functions............................................................... 540
23.2.9 Multi-Processor Communication functions .................................. 540
23.2.10 LIN mode functions ................................................................... 541
23.2.11 Half-duplex mode function ........................................................ 542
23.2.12 Smartcard mode functions ........................................................ 542
23.2.13 IrDA mode functions ................................................................. 543
23.2.14 Initialization and Configuration functions .................................. 544
23.2.15 RS485 mode function ............................................................... 551
23.2.16 DMA transfers management functions ..................................... 553
23.2.17 Interrupts and flags management functions ............................. 554
23.2.18 STOP mode functions .............................................................. 559
23.2.19 Data transfer functions ............................................................. 560
12/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
23.2.20 AutoBaudRate functions ........................................................... 561
UM1581
23.2.21 MultiProcessor Communication functions ................................ 562
23.2.22 LIN mode functions ................................................................... 564
23.2.23 Halfduplex mode function ......................................................... 565
23.2.24 Smartcard mode functions ........................................................ 565
23.2.25 IrDA mode functions ................................................................. 567
23.3 USART Firmware driver defines ........................................ 568
23.3.1 USART ........................................................................................ 568
24
Window watchdog (WWDG) ........................................... 577
24.1 WWDG Firmware driver registers structures ..................... 577
24.1.1 WWDG_TypeDef ......................................................................... 577
24.2 WWDG Firmware driver API description ........................... 577
24.2.1 WWDG features .......................................................................... 577
24.2.2 How to use this driver .................................................................. 578
24.2.3 Prescaler, Refresh window and Counter configuration functions 578
24.2.4 WWDG activation function .......................................................... 578
24.2.5 Interrupts and flags management functions ................................ 578
24.2.6 Prescaler, Refresh window and Counter configuration functions 578
24.2.7 WWDG activation functions ......................................................... 580
24.2.8 Interrupts and flags management functions ................................ 581
24.3 WWDG Firmware driver defines ........................................ 581
24.3.1 WWDG ........................................................................................ 581
25
Revision history .............................................................. 583
DocID023800 Rev 1
13/584
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
UM1581
1
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
1.1
Coding rules and conventions
The conventions used in the present user manual and in the library are described in the
sections below.
1.1.1
Acronyms
The table below describes the acronyms used in this document.
Table 2: List of abbreviations
1.1.2
Acronym
Peripheral / unit
ADC
Analog-to-digital converter
CAN
Controller area network
COMP
Analog comparators
CRC
CRC calculation unit
DAC
Digital to analog converter
DBGMCU
Debug MCU
DMA
DMA controller
EXTI
External interrupt/event controller
FLASH
Flash memory
GPIO
General purpose I/O
2
IC
Inter-integrated circuit
I2 S
Inter-integrated sound
IWDG
Independent watchdog
NVIC
Nested vectored interrupt controller
OPAMP
Operational amplifier
PWR
Power control
RCC
Reset and clock controller
RTC
Real-time clock
SPI
Serial peripheral interface
SysTick
System tick timer
TIM
Advanced-control, general-purpose or basic timer
USART
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter
WWDG
Window watchdog
Naming conventions
The following naming conventions are used in the library:

14/584
PPP refers to any peripheral acronym, for example ADC. See Section 1.1: "Coding
rules and conventions" for more information.
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581


















1.1.3
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
System and source/header file names are preceded by „stm32f30x_‟, for example
stm32f30x_conf.h even if they are valid both for STM32F30xx and STM32F31xx
microcontrollers.
Constants used in one file are defined within this file. A constant used in more than
one file is defined in a header file. All constants are written in upper case, except for
peripheral driver function parameters.
typedef variable names should be suffixed with _TypeDef.
Registers are considered as constants. In most cases, their name is in upper case and
uses the same acronyms as in the STM32F30xx reference manual document.
Peripheral registers are declared in the PPP_TypeDef structure (e.g. ADC_TypeDef)
in stm32f30x.h file.
The peripheral function names are preceded by the corresponding peripheral acronym
in upper case followed by an underscore. The first letter in each word is in upper case,
for example USART_SendData. Only one underscore is allowed in a function name to
separate the peripheral acronym from the rest of the function name.
The structure containing the initialization parameters for the PPP peripheral are
named PPP_InitTypeDef (e.g. ADC_InitTypeDef).
The functions used to initialize the PPP peripheral according to parameters specified
in PPP_InitTypeDef are named PPP_Init, e.g. TIM_Init.
The functions used to reset the PPP peripheral registers to their default values are
named PPP_DeInit, e.g. TIM_DeInit.
The functions used to fill the PPP_InitTypeDef structure with the reset values of each
member are named PPP_StructInit, e.g. USART_StructInit.
The functions used to enable or disable the specified PPP peripheral are named
PPP_Cmd, for example USART_Cmd.
The functions used to enable or disable an interrupt source for the specified PPP
peripheral are named PPP_ITConfig, e.g. RCC_ITConfig.
The functions used to enable or disable the DMA interface for the specified PPP
peripheral are named PPP_DMAConfig, e.g. TIM_DMAConfig.
The functions used to configure a peripheral function always end with the string
„Config‟, for example GPIO_PinAFConfig.
The functions used to check whether the specified PPP flag is set or reset are named
PPP_GetFlagStatus, e.g. I2C_GetFlagStatus.
The functions used to clear a PPP flag are named PPP_ClearFlag, for example
I2C_ClearFlag.
The functions used to check whether the specified PPP interrupt has occurred or not
are named PPP_GetITStatus, e.g. I2C_GetITStatus.
The functions used to clear a PPP interrupt pending bit are named
PPP_ClearITPendingBit, e.g. I2C_ClearITPendingBit.
Coding rules
This section describes the coding rules used in the library.
General



All codes should comply with ANSI C standard and should compile without warning
under at least its main compiler. Any warnings that cannot be eliminated should be
commented in the code.
The library uses ANSI standard data types defined in the ANSI C header file
<stdint.h>.
The library has no blocking code and all required waiting loops (polling loops) are
controlled by an expiry programmed timeout.
DocID023800 Rev 1
15/584
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
UM1581
Variable types
Specific variable types are already defined with a fixed type and size. These types are
defined in the file stm32f30x.h
typedef enum {
RESET = 0,
SET = !RESET
}
FlagStatus, ITStatus;
typedef enum {
DISABLE = 0,
ENABLE = !DISABLE
}
FunctionalState;
typedef enum {
ERROR = 0,
SUCCESS = !ERROR
}
ErrorStatus;
Peripherals
Pointers to peripherals are used to access the peripheral control registers. They point to
data structures that represent the mapping of the peripheral control registers.
Peripheral registers structure
stm32f30x.h contains the definition of all peripheral register structures. The example below
illustrates the SPI register structure declaration:
"/*------------------ Serial Peripheral Interface ---------------*/
typedef struct
{
__IO uint16_t CR1;
/*!< SPI control register 1 (not used in
I2S mode), Address offset: 0x00 */
uint16_t
RESERVED0;/*!< Reserved, 0x02
*/
__IO uint16_t CR2;
/*!< SPI control register 2, Address
offset: 0x04 */
uint16_t
RESERVED1;/*!< Reserved, 0x06
*/
__IO uint16_t SR;
/*!< SPI status register, Address offset:
0x08
*/
uint16_t
RESERVED2;/*!< Reserved, 0x0A
*/
__IO uint16_t DR;
/*!< SPI data register,Address offset:
0x0C
*/
uint16_t
RESERVED3;/*!< Reserved, 0x0E
*/
__IO uint16_t CRCPR;
/*!< SPI CRC polynomial register (not
used in I2S mode), Address offset: 0x10 */
uint16_t
RESERVED4;/*!< Reserved, 0x12
*/
__IO uint16_t RXCRCR;
/*!< SPI RX CRC register (not used in I2S
mode),Address offset: 0x14 */
uint16_t
RESERVED5;/*!< Reserved, 0x16 */
16/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
__IO uint16_t TXCRCR;
/*!<
mode),Address offset: 0x18 */
uint16_t
RESERVED6;/*!<
*/
__IO uint16_t I2SCFGR; /*!<
Address offset: 0x1C */
uint16_t
RESERVED7;/*!<
*/
__IO uint16_t I2SPR;
/*!<
offset: 0x20 */
uint16_t
RESERVED8;/*!<
*/
} SPI_TypeDef;
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
SPI TX CRC register (not used in I2S
Reserved, 0x1A
SPI_I2S configuration register,
Reserved, 0x1E
SPI_I2S prescaler register, Address
Reserved, 0x22
The register names are the register acronyms written in upper case for each peripheral.
RESERVEDi (I being an integer that indexes the reserved field) indicates a reserved field.
Each peripheral has several dedicated registers which contain different flags. Registers are
defined within a dedicated structure for each peripheral. Flags are defined as acronyms
written in upper case and preceded by „PPP_FLAG_‟. The flag definition is adapted to each
peripheral case and defined in stm32f30x_ppp.h.
Peripheral declaration
All peripherals are declared in stm32f30x.h. The following example shows the declaration
of the SPI peripheral:
...
/*!< Peripheral base address in the alias region */
#define PERIPH_BASE
((uint32_t)0x40000000)
...
/*!< Peripheral memory map */
#define APB1PERIPH_BASE
PERIPH_BASE
#define APB2PERIPH_BASE
(PERIPH_BASE + 0x00010000)
#define AHB1PERIPH_BASE
(PERIPH_BASE + 0x00020000)
#define AHB2PERIPH_BASE
(PERIPH_BASE + 0x08000000)
...
/*!< APB1 peripherals base address */
#define SPI2_BASE
(APB1PERIPH_BASE + 0x3800)
#define SPI3_BASE
(APB1PERIPH_BASE + 0x3C00)
...
/*!< APB2 peripherals base address */
#define SPI1_BASE
(APB2PERIPH_BASE + 0x3000)
...
/*!< Peripheral Declaration */
...
#define SPI2
((SPI_TypeDef *) SPI2_BASE)
#define SPI3
((SPI_TypeDef *) SPI3_BASE)
...
#define SPI1
((SPI_TypeDef *) SPI1_BASE)
SPIx_BASE is the base address of a specific SPI and SPIx is a pointer to a register
structure that refers to a specific SPI.
The peripheral registers are accessed as follows:
SPI1->CR1 = 0x0001;
DocID023800 Rev 1
17/584
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
Peripheral registers bits
UM1581
All the peripheral registers bits are defined as constants in the stm32f30x.h file. They are
defined as acronyms written in upper-case into the form:
PPP_<register_name>_<bit_name>
Example:
#define SPI_CR1_CPHA
#define SPI_CR1_CPOL
#define SPI_CR1_MSTR
#define SPI_CR1_BR
Rate Control) */
#define SPI_CR1_BR_0
#define SPI_CR1_BR_1
#define SPI_CR1_BR_2
1.1.4
((uint16_t)0x0001)
((uint16_t)0x0002)
((uint16_t)0x0004)
((uint16_t)0x0038)
/*!<
/*!<
/*!<
/*!<
Clock Phase */
Clock Polarity */
Master Selection */
BR[2:0] bits (Baud
((uint16_t)0x0008) /*!< Bit 0 */
((uint16_t)0x0010) /*!< Bit 1 */
((uint16_t)0x0020) /*!< Bit 2 */
Bit-Banding
The Cortex-M4 memory map includes two bit-band memory regions. These regions map
each word in an alias region of memory to a bit in a bit-band region of memory. Writing to a
word in the alias region has the same effect as a read/modify/write operation on the
targeted bit in the bit-band region.
All the STM32F30/F31xx peripheral registers are mapped in a bit-band region. This feature
is consequently intensively used functions performing single bit set/reset in order to reduce
and optimize code size.
The sections below describe how the bit-band access is used in the Library.
Mapping formula
The mapping formula shows how to link each word in the alias region to a corresponding
target bit in the bit-band region. The mapping formula is given below:
bit_word_offset = (byte_offset x 32) + (bit_number × 4)
bit_word_addr = bit_band_base + bit_word_offset
where:





bit_word_offset is the position of the target bit in the bit-band memory region
bit_word_addr is the address of the word in the alias memory region that maps to the
targeted bit.
bit_band_base is the starting address of the alias region
byte_offset is the number of the byte in the bit-band region that contains the targeted
bit
bit_number is the bit position (0-7) of the targeted bit.
Example of implementation
The following example shows how to map the PLLON[24] bit of RCC_CR register in the
alias region:
...
/*!< Peripheral base address in the alias region */
#define PERIPH_BASE
((uint32_t)0x40000000)
...
/*!< Peripheral base address in the bit-band region */
#define PERIPH_BB_BASE
((uint32_t)0x42000000)
...
18/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
/* ------------ RCC registers bit address in the alias region ---------- */
#define RCC_OFFSET
(RCC_BASE - PERIPH_BASE)
...
/* --- CR Register ---*/
/* Alias word address of PLLON bit */
#define CR_OFFSET
(RCC_OFFSET + 0x00)
#define PLLON_BitNumber 0x18
#define CR_PLLON_BB
(PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CR_OFFSET * 32) +
(PLLON_BitNumber * 4))
To code a function which enables/disables the PLL, the usual method is the following:
...
void RCC_PLLCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
{
if (NewState != DISABLE)
{ /* Enable PLL */
RCC->CR |= RCC_CR_PLLON;
}
else
{ /* Disable PLL */
RCC->CR &= ~RCC_CR_PLLON;
}
}
Using bit-band access this function will be coded as follows:
void RCC_PLLCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
{
*(__IO uint32_t *) CR_PLLON_BB = (uint32_t)NewState;
}
1.1.5
Run-time checking
The library implements run-time failure detection by checking the input values of all library
functions. The run-time checking is achieved by using an assert_param macro. This
macro is used in all the library functions which have an input parameter. It allows checking
that the input value lies within the parameter allowed values.
To enable the run-time checking, use the assert_param macro, and leave the define
USE_FULL_ASSERT uncommented in stm32f30x_conf.h file.
Example:PWR_ClearFlag function
stm32f30x_pwr.c:
void PWR_ClearFlag(uint32_t PWR_FLAG)
{
/* Check the parameters */
assert_param(IS_PWR_CLEAR_FLAG(PWR_FLAG));
PWR->CR |= PWR_FLAG << 2;
}
stm32f30x_pwr.h:
/* PWR Flag */
#define PWR_FLAG_WU
#define PWR_FLAG_SB
#define PWR_FLAG_PVDO
#define PWR_FLAG_VREFINTRDY
((uint32_t)0x00000001)
((uint32_t)0x00000002)
((uint32_t)0x00000004)
((uint32_t)0x00000008)
DocID023800 Rev 1
19/584
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
UM1581
...
#define IS_PWR_CLEAR_FLAG(FLAG) (((FLAG) == PWR_FLAG_WU) || ((FLAG)
== PWR_FLAG_SB))
If the expression passed to the assert_param macro is false, the assert_failed function is
called and returns the name of the source file and the source line number of the call that
failed. If the expression is true, no value is returned.
The assert_param macro is implemented in stm32f30x_conf.h:
/* Exported macro -----------------------------------------------------------*/
#ifdef USE_FULL_ASSERT
/**
* @brief The assert_param macro is used for function's
parameters check.
* @param expr: If expr is false, it calls assert_failed function
*
which reports the name of the source file and the source
*
line number of the call that failed.
*
If expr is true, it returns no value.
* @retval None
*/
#define assert_param(expr) ((expr) ? (void)0 :
assert_failed((uint8_t *)__FILE__, __LINE__))
/* Exported functions ------------------------------------------------------ */
void assert_failed(uint8_t* file, uint32_t line);
#else
#define assert_param(expr) ((void)0)
#endif /* USE_FULL_ASSERT */
The assert_failed function is implemented in the main.c file or in any other user C file:
#ifdef USE_FULL_ASSERT
/**
* @brief Reports the name of the source file and the source line
number
*
where the assert_param error has occurred.
* @param file: pointer to the source file name
* @param line: assert_param error line source number
* @retval None
*/
void assert_failed(uint8_t* file, uint32_t line)
{
/* User can add his own implementation to report the file name
and line number */
printf("\n\r Wrong parameter value detected on\r\n");
printf("
file %s\r\n", file);
printf("
line %d\r\n", line);
/* Infinite loop */
while (1)
{
}
}
#endif /* USE_FULL_ASSERT */
Because of the overhead it introduces, it is recommended to use run-time checking during
application code development and debugging, and to remove it from the final application to
improve code size and speed.
20/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
However if you want to keep this functionality in your final application, reuse the
assert_param macro defined within the library to test the parameter values before calling
the library functions.
1.1.6
MISRA-C 2004 compliance
The C programming language is growing in importance for embedded systems. However,
when it comes to developing code for safety-critical applications, this language has many
drawbacks. There are several unspecified, implementation-defined, and undefined aspects
of the C language that make it unsuited for developing safety-critical systems.
The Motor Industry Software Reliability Association‟s Guidelines for the use of the C
language in critical systems (MISRA-C 2004 [1] ) describe a subset of the C language well
suited for developing safety-critical systems.
The STM32F30xx standard peripheral drivers (STM32f30xx_StdPeriph_Driver) have been
developed to be MISRA-C 2004 compliant.
The following section describes how the StdPeriph_Driver complies with MISRA-C 2004
(as described in section 4.4 Claiming compliance of the standard [1]):




A compliance matrix has been completed which shows how compliance has been
enforced.
The whole STM32F30xx_StdPeriph_Driver C code is compliant with MISRA-C 2004
rules. Deviations are documented.
A list of all instances of rules not being followed is being maintained, and for each
instance there is an appropriately signed-off deviation.
All the issues listed in section 4.2 "The programming language and coding context of
the standard" [1], that need to be checked during the firmware development phase,
have been addressed during the development of the STM32F30xx standard
peripherals driver and appropriate measures have been taken.
Compliance matrix
The compliance of the STM32F30xx standard peripherals driver
(STM32F30xx_StdPeriph_Driver) with MISRA-C 2004 has been checked using the IAR
C/C++ Compiler for ARM. MISRA compliance applies only to STM32F30xx standard
peripherals driver source file. Examples and project files are not MISRA compliant.
Two options are available for checking MISRA compliance:


The compiler: IAR C/C++ Compiler for ARM V6.40
Manual checking (code review)
The following table lists the MISCRA-C 2004 rules that are frequently violated in the code.
Table 3: MSIRA-C 2004 compliance matrix
MISRA-C
2004 rule
number
Required/Advisory
Summary
Reason
1.1
Required
Compiler is configured to allow
extensions - all code shall conform to
ISO 9899 standard C, with no
extensions permitted
IAR compiler
extensions are enabled.
This was allowed to
support new CMSIS
types.
5.1
Required
Identifiers (internal and external)
shall not rely on significance of more
than 31 characters
Some long parameters
names are defined for
code readability.
DocID023800 Rev 1
21/584
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
MISRA-C
2004 rule
number
UM1581
Required/Advisory
Summary
Reason
10.1
Required
The value of an expression of integer
type shall not be implicitly converted
to a different underlying type.
Complexity
10.3
Required
The value of a complex expression of
integer type shall only be casted to a
type that is not wider and of the same
signedness as the underlying type of
the expression.
Complexity
10.6
Required
A 'U' suffix shall be applied to all
constants of 'unsigned' type
The "stdint.h" defined
types are used to be
CMSIS compliant.
11.2
Required
Conversions shall not be performed
between a pointer to object and any
type other than an integral type,
another pointer to object type or a
pointer to void.
Needed when
addressing memory
mapped registers
11.3
Advisory
A cast should not be performed
between a pointer type and an
integral type.
Needed when
addressing memory
mapped registers
19.1
Advisory
#include statements in a file shall
only be preceded by other
preprocessor directives or comments
This rule was violated
to be in line with the
CMSIS architecture.
How to check that your code is MISRA-C 2004 compliant
The default IAR project template provided with the STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral
Library is already pre-configured for MISRA-C 2004 compliance. Then, the user has to
enable the MISRA-C 2004 checker if needed.
To enable the IAR MISRA-C 2004 checker, go to Project->Options (ALT+F7) and then in
"General Options" Category select the "MISRA-C:2004" tab and check the "Enable MISRAC" box. With the default EWARM template project, all violated rules described above are
unchecked.
To use the IAR MISRA-C Checker to verify that your code is MISRA-C 2004 compliant,
please follow the following steps:
1.
2.
Enable the IAR MISRA-C 2004 Checker
Uncomment the "USE_FULL_ASSERT" inside the STM32f30x_conf.h file
Only the STM32F30xx standard peripherals driver are MISRA-C 2004 Compliant.
[1] MISRA-C 2004 Guidelines for the use of the C language in critical systems, Motor
Industry Software Reliability Association, October 2004
22/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
UM1581
1.2
Architecture
The library is built around a modular programming model ensuring the independencies
between the several components building the main application and allowing an easy
porting on a large product range, evaluation boards and even the use of some integrated
firmware components for other application with the minimum changes on the code of the
common parts.
The following figure provides a global view of the STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
usage and interaction with other firmware components.
Figure 1: Library architecture
HAL
HAL is a Hardware Abstraction Layer (HAL) that allows controlling the different
STM32F30/F31xx device registers and features.


CMSIS layer

Core Peripheral Access Layer: contains name definitions, address definitions and
helper functions to access core registers and peripherals. It defines also a device
independent interface for RTOS Kernels that includes debug channel definitions.

STM32F30xx Device Peripheral Access Layer: provides definitions for all the
peripheral register's definitions, bits definitions and memory mapping for
STM32F30xx and STM32F31xx devices.
STM32F30xx standard peripheral driver that provides drivers and header files for all
the peripherals. It uses CMSIS layer to access STM32F30xx and STM32F31xx
registers.
BSP
BSP is a board specific package (BSP) that implements an abstraction layer to interact with
the Human Interface resources; buttons, LEDs, LCD and COM ports (USARTs) available
on STMicroelectronics evaluation boards. A common API is provided to manage these
different resources, and can be easily tailored to support any other development board, by
just adapting the initialization routine.
DocID023800 Rev 1
23/584
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
UM1581
Application layer
The application layer consists of a set of examples covering all available peripherals with
template projects for the most common development Tools. With the appropriate hardware
evaluation board, this allows to get started with a brand new micro within few hours.
1.3
Package description
The Library is supplied in one single zip file. The extraction of the zip file generates one
folder, STM32F30xx_StdPeriph_Lib_VX.Y.Z, which contains the following subfolders:
Figure 2: Library package structure
1.
VX.Y.Z refer to the library version, ex. V1.0.0
The library package consists of three main folders, described in Section 1.3.1: "Library
folder structure"
1.3.1
Library folder structure
This folder contains all CMSIS files and STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Drivers.
The library folder structure is shown in the figure below:
24/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
UM1581
Figure 3: Library folder structure
CMSIS subfolder
This subfolder contains the STM32F30/31xx and Cortex-M4 CMSIS files:


Cortex-M CMSIS files containing name definitions, address definitions and helper
functions to access Cortex-M4 core registers and peripherals. It defines also a device
independent interface for RTOS kernels that includes debug channel definitions.
STM32F30/31xx CMSIS files consist of:

stm32f30x.h: this file contains the definitions of all peripheral registers, bits, and
memory mapping for STM32F30/31xx devices. It is the unique include file used in
the application programmer C source code, usually in the main.c.

system_stm32f30x.c/.h: this file contains the system clock configuration for
STM32F30/31xx devices. It exports SystemInit() function which sets up the
system clock source, PLL multiplier and divider factors, AHB/APBx prescalers
and Flash settings. This function is called at startup just after reset and before
connecting to the main program. The call is made inside the startup_stm32f30x.s
file.

startup_stm32f30x.s: this file contains the Cortex-M4 startup code and interrupt
vectors for all STM32F30/31xx device interrupt handlers.
STM32F30xx_StdPeriph_Driver subfolder
This subfolder contains all the subdirectories and files that make up the core of the library.
They do not need to be modified by the user:


inc subfolder contains the peripheral drivers header files.
src subfolder contains the peripheral drivers source files. Each peripheral has a source code file, stm32f30x_ppp.c, and a header file,
stm32f30x_ppp.h. The stm32f30x_ppp.c file contains all the firmware functions required to
use the PPP peripheral.
The library files are listed and described in details in the following tables.
DocID023800 Rev 1
25/584
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
UM1581
Table 4: Description of CMSIS files
File name
Description
core_cm4.h
Describes the data structures for the Cortex-M4 core peripherals and
performs the address mapping of these structures. It also provides basic
access to the Cortex-M4 core registers and core peripherals using efficient
functions defined as static inline.
stm32f30x.h
CMSIS Cortex-M4 STM32F30/31xx peripheral access layer header file.
This file contains the definitions of all peripheral registers, bits, and memory
mapping for STM32F30/31xx devices.
The file is the unique include file used
in the application programmer C source code, usually in the main.c. This file
contains:




Configuration section allowing:

To select the device used in the target application

To use or not the peripheral drivers in your application code
(meaning that the code is based on direct access to
peripheral registers rather than drivers API). This option is
controlled by #define USE_STDPERIPH_DRIVER

To change few application-specific parameters such as the
HSE crystal frequency
Data structures and address mapping for all peripherals
Peripheral registers declarations and bits definition
Macros to access peripheral registers hardware
This file also contains the library release number defined by the define
statement __STM32f30XX_STDPERIPH_VERSION
system_stm32f30x.c
This file contains the system clock configuration for STM32F30/31xx devices.
This file includes two functions and one global variable to be called from the
user application:



SystemInit(): this function setups the system clock source, PLL
multiplier and divider factors, AHB/APBx prescalers and Flash
settings. This function is called at startup just after reset and
before branch to the main program. The call is made inside the
startup_stm32f30x.s file.
SystemCoreClock: this variable contains the core clock (HCLK).
It can be used by the application code to set up the SysTick timer
or configure other parameters.
SystemCoreClockUpdate(): this function updates the variable
SystemCoreClock and must be called whenever the core clock is
changed during program execution.
This file is automatically generated by the clock configuration
tool "STM32f30x_Clock_Configuration.xls". Using this tool, you
can generate a configuration file customized for your application
requirements. For more information, please refer to AN4152
available from ST web site.
system_stm32f30x.h
Header file for system_stm32f30x.c
startup_stm32f30x.s
Provides the Cortex-M4 startup code and interrupt vectors for all
STM32F30/31xx device interrupt handlers.
This module performs the
following functions:



26/584
It sets the initial SP
It sets the initial PC == Reset_Handler
It sets the vector table entries with the exceptions ISR address
DocID023800 Rev 1
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
UM1581
File name
Description

It branches to __main in the C library (which eventually calls
main()).
A file is provided for each compiler.
Table 5: STM32f30xx_StdPeriph_Driver files description
1.3.2
File name
Description
stm32f30x_ppp.c
Driver source code file of PPP peripheral coded in Strict ANSI-C, and
independent from the development Tools.
stm32f30x_ppp.h
Provides functions prototypes and variable definitions used within for
stm32f30x_ppp.c file
stm32f30x_misc.c
Provides all the miscellaneous firmware functions (add-on to CMSIS functions)
stm32f30x_misc.h
Header for misc.c file
Project folder
This folder contains template projects and peripheral examples. Its structure is shown in
the figure below.
Figure 4: Project folder structure
DocID023800 Rev 1
27/584
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
UM1581
STM32F30xx_StdPeriph_Template subfolder
This subfolder contains standard template projects for the supported development tools
that compile the needed STM32F30xx standard peripheral drivers plus all the usermodifiable files that are necessary to create a new project.
The files are listed and described in details in the following table.
Table 6: STM32F30xx_StdPeriph_Templates file description
File name
Description
main.c
Template source file allowing starting a development from scratch using the
library drivers.
main.h
header file for main.c
stm32f30x_conf.h
Header file allowing to enable/disable the peripheral drivers header files
inclusion.
This file can also be used to enable or disable the library run-time
failure detection before compiling the firmware library drivers, through the
preprocessor define USE_FULL_ASSERT
system_stm32f30x.c
This file contains the system clock configuration for STM32F30/31xx devices.
This file provides two functions and one global variable to be called from
user application:



SystemInit(): this function sets up the system clock source, PLL
multiplier and divider factors, AHB/APBx prescalers and Flash
settings. This function is called at startup just after reset and
before branch to main program. This call is made inside the
"startup_stm32f30x.s" file.
SystemCoreClock: this variable contains the core clock (HCLK).
It can be used by the user application to set up the SysTick timer
or configure other parameters.
SystemCoreClockUpdate(): this function updates the variable
SystemCoreClock and must be called whenever the core clock is
changed during program execution.
This file is automatically generated by the clock configuration
tool "STM32f30x_Clock_Configuration.xls". Using this tool, you
can generate a configuration file customized for your application
requirements. For more information, please refer to AN4152
available from ST web site.
stm32f30x_it.c
Template source file containing the interrupt service routine (ISR) for CortexM4 exceptions. You can add additional ISR(s) for the used peripheral(s) (for
the available peripheral interrupt handler name, please refer to the startup file
startup_stm32f30x.s).
stm32f30x_it.h
Header file for stm32f30x_it.c
STM32F30xx_StdPeriph_Examples sub folder
This subfolder contains, for each peripheral, the minimum set of files needed to run a
typical example on this peripheral. In addition to the user files described in the section
above, each subfolder contains a readme.txt file describing the example and how to make
it work.
For more details about the available examples within the library please refer to
Library_Examples.html file located in the root of this folder.
28/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
UM1581
1.3.3
Utilities folder
This folder contains the abstraction layer allowing interacting with the human interface
resources (buttons, LEDs, LCD and COM ports (USARTs)) available on
STMicroelectronics evaluation boards. A common API is provided to manage these
different resources. It and can be easily tailored to support any other development board,
by adapting the initialization routine.
Additional drivers are provided to manage the different memories and storage media
available on these boards.
For each hardware module (e.g. LCD, I2C, EEPROM, external SRAM memory...)
the API is fully compatible across all STMicroelectronics evaluation board drivers.
The Utilities folder structure is shown below.
Figure 5: Utilities folder structure
It contains common files and folder, plus a folder for STM32303C_EVAL board files.
DocID023800 Rev 1
29/584
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
UM1581
Table 7: Utilities/STM32_EVAL files description
File name
Description
stm32303c_eval.c
This file provides:


A set of firmware functions to manage LEDs,
pushbuttons, and COM ports
Low level initialization functions for SDcard (on
SPI) and serial EEPROM (sEE) available on
STM32303C_eval board.
30/584
stm32303C_eval.h
Header file for stm32303C_eval.c
stm32303C_eval_audio_codec.c
This file includes the low layer driver for CS42L52 Audio
Codec available on STM32303C_eval board.
stm32303C_eval_audio_codec.h
Header file for stm32303C_eval_audio_codec.c
stm32303C_eval_i2c_ee.c
This file provides a set of functions needed to manage the
M24M01 I2C EEPROM and the M24LR64 RF EEPROM
mounted on STM32303C_eval board.
stm32303C_eval_i2c_ee.h
Header file for stm32303C_eval_i2c_ee.c
stm32303C_eval_lcd.c
This file includes the LCD driver for AM-240320L8TNQW00H
(ILI9320), AM-240320LDTNQW00H (SPFD5408B) and
AM240320LGTNQW00H (HX8347D) Display Module of
STM32303C-EVAL board
stm32303C_eval_lcd.h
Header file for stm32303C_eval_lcd.c
lcd_log.c
Provides all the LCD Log firmware functions. It allows to
automatically set a header and footer on any application
using the LCD display and to dump user, debug and error
messages by using the following macros, LCD_ErrLog(),
LCD_UsrLog() and LCD_DbgLog().
fonts.c
Provides text fonts for STM32xx-EVAL LCD driver
stm2303c_eval_i2c_eeprom_cpal.c
This file provides the set of functions needed to manage the
M24CXX I2C EEPROM and the M24LR64 RF EEPROM
memory mounted on STM32303C-EVAL board using the I2C
CPAL drivers.
stm32303c_eval_i2c_eeprom_cpal.c
This file provides the set of functions needed to manage the
M24M01 I2C EEPROM and the M24LR64 RF EEPROM.
stm32303c_eval_
i2c_eeprom_cpal.h
Header file for stm32303c_eval_i2c_eeprom_cpal.c.
stm32303c_eval_spi_ee.c
This file provides a set of functions needed to manage the
SPI M95xxx EEPROM memory mounted on STM32303CEVAL board.
stm32303c_eval_spi_ee.h
Header file for stm32303c_eval_spi_ee.c
stm32303c_eval_spi_sd.c
This file provides a set of functions needded to manage the
SPI SD card memory mounted on STM32303C-EVAL board.
stm32303c_eval_spi_sd.h
Header file for stm32303c_eval_spi_sd.c.
DocID023800 Rev 1
STM32F30xx Standard Peripheral Library
UM1581
1.4
Supported devices and development tools
1.4.1
Supported devices
The library supports the STM32F30xx and STM32F31xx microcontroller memory and
peripherals. By using this library moving the application firmware from one STM32F30/31xx
device to another becomes straightforward.
The device part number is defined as follows in stm32f30x.h file:
#if !defined (STM32F30X)
#define STM32F30X
#endif
This define statement can be used at application level to configure the application firmware
for STM32F30/31xx devices.
1.4.2
Supported development tools and compilers
STM32F30/31xx devices are supported by a full range of development solutions from lead
suppliers that deliver start-to-finish control of application development from a single
integrated development environment.
The library is supported by all major tool providers.
A template project is available for each development tool:





IAR Embedded Workbench for ARM (EWARM) development tool

Compiler: IAR‟s C/C++
RealView Microcontroller Development Kit (MDK-ARM) development tool

Compiler: ARM C/C++ compiler
TASKING VX-toolset for ARM Cortex-M development tool

Compiler: Tasking VX C/C++
Raisonance IDE RIDE7 (RIDE) development tool

Compiler: GNU C/C++
Atollic TrueSTUDIO STM32 (TrueSTUDIO) development tool

Compiler: GNU C/C++
.
Refer to the library release notes to know about the supported development tool version.
DocID023800 Rev 1
31/584
How to use and customize the library
2
UM1581
How to use and customize the library
The following sections explain all the steps required to configure, customize, run your first
example, and develop your application based on the library.
2.1
Library configuration parameters
The configuration interface allows customizing the library for your application. It is not
mandatory to modify this configuration and you can use the default configuration without
any modification.
To configure these parameters, you should enable, disable or modify some options by
uncommenting, commenting or modifying the values of the related define statements as
described in the table below.
Table 8: Library configuration parameters
Parameter
File
Description
(1)
STM32F30XX
stm32f30x.h
Default status: enabled
Defines the root number of
STM32F30/31xx devices. This define
statement can be used at application level to
configure the application firmware for
STM32F30/31xx.
USE_STDPERIPH_DRIVER(1)
stm32f30x.h
Default status: enabled
When disabled, the peripheral drivers are
not included and the application code is
based on direct access to peripherals
registers.
HSE_VALUE
stm32f30x.h
Default value: 8 MHz
Defines the value of the external oscillator
(HSE) expressed in Hz. The user must
adjust this define statement when using a
different crystal value.
HSE_STARTUP_TIMEOUT
stm32f30x.h
Default value: 0x0500
Defines the maximum external oscillator
(HSE) startup timeout value. The user must
adjust this define statement when using a
different statement startup time.
HSI_VALUE
stm32f30x.h
Default value: 8 MHz
Defines the value of the internal oscillator
(HSI) expressed in Hz.
__CM4_REV
stm32f30x.h
__MPU_PRESENT
These define statements are used by
Cortex-M4 CMSIS layer to inform about the
options supported by STM32F30/31xx
devices:
__NVIC_PRIO_BITS
__Vendor_SysTickConfig
/*!< Configuration of the
Cortex-M4 Processor and Core
Peripherals
__FPU_PRESENT
32/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
How to use and customize the library
UM1581
Parameter
File
Description
*/
/*!<Core revision r0p1>*/
#define __CM4_REV
0x0001
/*!<STM32F30/31x features an
MPU>*/
#define __MPU_PRESENT
1
/*!<STM32F30/31x features 4
bits for priority levels>*/
#define __NVIC_PRIO_BITS
4
/*!<Set to 1 if different
SysTick configuration is used
>*/
#define
__Vendor_SysTickConfig
0
/*!<STM32F30/31x features an
FPU>*/
#define __FPU_PRESENT
1
They should not be modified by the user.
USE_FULL_ASSERT
stm32f30x_conf.h
Default status: disabled
This define statement is used to enable or
disable the library run-time failure detection
before compiling the firmware library drivers.
When enabled, the "assert_param" macro is
expanded in the library drivers code.
Run-time detection can be used
for user application development
and debugging. It adds an
overhead which can be removed
from the final application code to
minimize code size and maximize
execution speed.
Peripheral header file
inclusion
stm32f30x_conf.h
This file allows to enable/disable the
inclusion of the peripheral driver header
files.
By default all header files are
included.
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
DocID023800 Rev 1
"stm32f30x_adc.h"
"stm32f30x_can.h"
"stm32f30x_crc.h"
"stm32f30x_comp.h"
"stm32f30x_dac.h"
"stm32f30x_dbgmcu.h"
"stm32f30x_dma.h"
"stm32f30x_exti.h"
"stm32f30x_flash.h"
"stm32f30x_gpio.h"
"stm32f30x_syscfg.h"
33/584
How to use and customize the library
Parameter
UM1581
File
Description
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
"stm32f30x_i2c.h"
"stm32f30x_iwdg.h"
"stm32f30x_pwr.h"
"stm32f30x_opamp.h"
"stm32f30x_rcc.h"
"stm32f30x_rtc.h"
"stm32f30x_spi.h"
"stm32f30x_tim.h"
"stm32f30x_usart.h"
"stm32f30x_wwdg.h"
"misc.h"
USE_STM32303C_EVAL(1)
stm32303C_eval.h
Default status: disabled
This define statement is used to include the
driver for STM32303C_EVAL board, when
used.
VECT_TAB_SRAM
system_stm32f30x.c
Default status: disabled
When enabled, this define statement
relocate the vector table in the Internal
SRAM
VECT_TAB_OFFSET
Default value: 0x00
Defines the vector table base offset. It must
be a multiple of 0x200.
Use this define statement to build an
application that will be loaded at an address
different from the Flash memory base
address (for example, when building an
application to be loaded through inapplication programming (IAP) program).
Notes:
(1)
These define statements are declared in the compiler preprocessor section of the template projects
provided within the library. As a consequence, you do not need to enable them in the corresponding
header file.
2.2
Library programming model
Direct register Access
This model is based on direct register access using the CMSIS layer. This layer provides
the definition of all STM32F30/31xx peripheral registers and bits, as well as memory
mapping.
The advantage of this approach if that the code produced is compact and efficient. The
drawback is that the developer should know in details the peripheral operation, registers
and bits meaning, and the configuration procedure. This task is time consuming, and might
lead to programming errors, which may slow down the project development phase.
To use this model, poceed as follows:
1.
2.
34/584
Comment the line #define USE_STDPERIPH_DRIVER in stm32f30x.h file. Make sure
that this define statement is not defined in the compiler preprocessor section.
Use peripheral registers structure and bits definition available within stm32f30x.h to
build the application
DocID023800 Rev 1
How to use and customize the library
UM1581
Peripheral driver access
In this model the application code uses the peripheral driver API to control the peripheral
configuration and operation. It allows any device to be used in the user application without
the need for in-depth study of each peripheral specification. As a result, using the
peripheral drivers saves significant time that would otherwise be spent in coding, while
reducing the application development and integration cost.
However, since the drivers are generic and cover all peripherals functionalities, the size
and/or execution speed of the application code may not be optimized.
To use this model, proceed as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Add the line #define USE_STDPERIPH_DRIVER in the compiler preprocessor section
or uncomment the line #define USE_STDPERIPH_DRIVER in stm32f30x.h.
In stm32f30x_conf.h file, select the peripherals to include their header file (by default
all header files are included in the template file)
Use the peripheral drivers API provided by stm32f30x_ppp.h/.c files under
Libraries\STM32F30xx_StdPeriph_Driver to build your application. For more
information, refer to the detailed description of each peripheral driver.
In addition to the peripheral drivers, you can reuse/adapt the rich set of examples
available within the library. This reduces your application development time and allows
you to start within few hours.
For many applications, the peripheral drivers can be used as is. However, for applications
having tough constraints in terms of code size and/or execution speed, these drivers
should be used as reference on how to configure the peripherals and tailor them to specific
application requirements, in combination with peripheral direct register access.
The application code performance in terms of size and/or speed depends also on the C
compiler optimization settings. To help you make the application code smaller, faster or
balanced between size and speed, fine tune the optimizations according to your application
needs. For more information please refer to your C compiler documentation.
2.3
Peripheral initialization and configuration
This section describes step by step how to initialize and configure a peripheral. The
peripheral is referred to as PPP.
Before configuring a peripheral, its clock must be enabled by calling one of the following
functions:
RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB1Periph_PPPx, ENABLE);
RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_PPPx, ENABLE);
RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_PPPx, ENABLE);
1.
In the main application file, declare a PPP_InitTypeDef structure, for example:
PPP_InitTypeDef
2.
PPP_InitStructure;
The PPP_InitStructure is a working variable located in data memory area. It allows to
initialize one or more PPP instances.
Fill the PPP_InitStructure variable with the allowed values of the structure member.
Two solutions are possible:
a. Configure the whole structure by following the procedure described below:
PPP_InitStructure.member1 =
PPP_InitStructure.member2 =
PPP_InitStructure.memberN =
/* where N is the number of
val1;
val2;
valN;
the structure members */
DocID023800 Rev 1
35/584
How to use and customize the library
UM1581
The previous initialization step can be merged in one single line to optimize the
code size:
PPP_InitTypeDef
b.
PPP_InitStructure = { val1, val2,.., valN}
Configure only a few members of the structure: in this case modify the
PPP_InitStructure variable that has been already filled by a call to the
PPP_StructInit(..) function. This ensures that the other members of the
PPP_InitStructure variable are initialized to the appropriate values (in most cases
their default values).
PPP_StructInit(&PPP_InitStructure);
PPP_InitStructure.memberX = valX;
PPP_InitStructure.memberY = valY;
/*where X and Y are the members the user wants to
configure*/
3.
Initialize the PPP peripheral by calling the PPP_Init(..) function.
PPP_Init(PPP, &PPP_InitStructure);
4.
At this stage the PPP peripheral is initialized and can be enabled by making a call to
PPP_Cmd(..) function.
PPP_Cmd(PPP, ENABLE);
The PPP peripheral can then be used through a set of dedicated functions. These
functions are specific to the peripheral. For more details refer to the peripheral driver
chapter.
PPP_DeInit(..) function can be used to set all PPP peripheral registers to their default
values (only for debug purpose):
PPP_DeInit(PPP);
To modify the peripheral settings after configuring it, you have to proceed as follows:
PPP_InitStucture.memberX = valX;
PPP_InitStructure.memberY = valY;
PPP_Init(PPP, &PPP_InitStructure);
/* where X and Y are the only members that user wants to modify*/
2.4
How to run your first example
The library provides a rich set of examples covering the main features of each peripheral.
All the examples are independent from the development tools. These examples run on
STMicroelectronics STM32303C-EVAL evaluation board and can be easily tailored to any
other supported device and development board. Only source files are provided for each
example and user can tailor the provided project template to run the selected example with
his preferred development Tool.
2.4.1
Prerequisites
1.
2.
3.
4.
36/584
Latest release of documents and library.
You can download the latest version of STM32F30/31xx related documents and library
from STMicroelectronics web site: www.st.com/stm32 Hardware: to run the examples, you need an STM32303C-EVAL evaluation board
from STMicroelectronics or any other compatible hardware. To use your own hardware, simply adapt the example hardware configuration to your
platform.
Development tools
Use your preferred development tool, MDK-ARM (Keil), EWARM (IAR), RIDE
DocID023800 Rev 1
How to use and customize the library
(Raisonance), TASKING or TrueSTUDIO (Atollic). Just check that the version you are
using supports STM32F30/31xx devices (see section Section 1.4.2: "Supported
development tools and compilers"
UM1581
2.4.2
Run your first example
This section describes how to load and execute the template example provided within the
Library. This example configures the system clock to 72 MHz, initializes the evaluation
board LEDs, LCD and USART communication interface, then displays a welcome message
on the LCD, and finally toggles four LEDs in an infinite loop.
To achieve this goal you have to proceed as described below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Download and unzip the STM32F30xx_dsp_stderiph_Lib_VX.Y.Z.zip in the folder of
your choice
Power-up the STM32303C-EVAL board
Connect your JTAG probe to the JTAG connector (CN10) of the EVAL board and to
the USB port of your PC. The STM32303C-EVAL features a build-in ST-Link/V2
debugger and programmer which makes the external hardware debuggers useless to
load and debug your program. Simply select ST-Link/V2 as your debugger in your
Development Tool configuration menu and connect the CN5 to your host PC through
an USB cable. Refer to your development tool documentation to know if it supports the
ST-Link/V2 debugger.
Run the template example: go to
STM32F30xx_StdPeriph_Lib_VX.Y.Z\Project\STM32F30xx_StdPeriph_Templates
folder, and proceed as follows depending on the development tool you are using:
a. EWARM
a. Open the EWARM\Project.eww workspace
b. Rebuild all files: Project->Rebuild all
c. Load project image: Project->Debug
d. Run program: Debug->Go(F5)
b. MDK-ARM
a. Open the MDK-ARM\Project.uvproj project
b. Rebuild all files: Project->Rebuild all target files
c. Load project image: Debug->Start/Stop Debug Session
d. Run program: Debug->Run (F5)
c. TrueSTUDIO
a. Open the TrueSTUDIO development tool.
b. Click File->Switch Workspace->Other and browse to TrueSTUDIO
workspace directory.
c. Click File->Import, select General->Existing Projects into Workspace and
then click Next.
d. Browse to the TrueSTUDIO workspace directory and select the
STM32303C-EVAL project
e. Rebuild all project files: Select the project in the "Project explorer" window
then click on Project->build project menu.
f.
Run program: Select the project in the "Project explorer" window then click
Run->Debug (F11)
d. RIDE
a. Open the Project.rprj project
b. Rebuild all files: Project->build project
c. Load project image: Debug->start(ctrl+D)
d. Run program: Debug->Run(ctrl+F9)
e. TASKING
a. Open the TASKING toolchain.
b.
Click on File->Import, select General->'Existing Projects into Workspace'
and click Next
DocID023800 Rev 1
37/584
How to use and customize the library
UM1581
c. Browse to TASKING workspace directory and select the STM32303C-EVAL
project to configure the project for STM32F30/31xx devices
d.
Rebuild all project files by selecting the project in the "Project explorer"
window and clicking on Project->build project menu
e.
Run the program by selecting the project in the "Project explorer" window
and clicking Run->Debug (F11).
If the above sequence has worked correctly, LED1, 2, 3, and 4 should be blinking and the
following message is displayed on the LCD screen.
Figure 6: Message displayed on the LCD when running the template example
2.4.3
Run a peripheral example
Only the source files of the library peripheral examples are provided. You can tailor the
project template provided to run the selected example with your development tool.
As an example, the following sequence is required to run the ADC_DMA example:
1.
2.
3.
38/584
Copy all source files from
Project\STM32F30xx_StdPeriph_Examples\ADC\ADC_BasicExample to the template
folder under Project\STM32F30xx_StdPeriph_Templates, see Figure 7: "How to run a
peripheral example
"
Open your preferred development tool, and proceed as described in section Section
2.4.2: "Run your first example"
If the example use additional source files which are not included in the template
project, add manually the files to the project source list. Refer to the readme.txt file of
your example for more details.
DocID023800 Rev 1
How to use and customize the library
UM1581
Figure 7: How to run a peripheral example
2.5
STM32F30/31xx programming model using the library
This chapter contains useful general information for using the library to develop application
based on STM32F30/31xx devices. It describes in details the sequence to use a peripheral,
from the configuration of the system to the configuration of the peripheral registers.
After reset the device is running from Internal High Speed oscillator (HSI 8 MHz) with 0
Flash wait state, Flash prefect buffer, D-Cache and I-Cache disabled, and all peripherals
off except internal SRAM, Flash and JTAG:



There is no prescaler on High speed (AHB) and Low speed (APB) buses. All the
peripherals mapped on these buses are running at HSI speed.
The clock for all peripherals is switched off, except for SRAM and FLASH.
All GPIOs are in input floating state, except for JTAG pins which are assigned to
debug.
Once the device started from reset, the user application has to configure the
system clock and all peripheral hardware resources (GPIO, Interrupt, DMA…) .
DocID023800 Rev 1
39/584
How to use and customize the library
UM1581
Figure 8: STM32F30/31xx programming model using the library
1.
2.
3.
40/584
System clock configuration: the STM32F30/31xx devices can run at frequency up to
72 MHz and feature several prescalers to configure the AHB, APB1 and APB2
frequencies. The maximum frequency of the AHB domain is 72 MHz. The maximum
allowed frequency of the high-speed APB2 domain is 72 MHz, while the maximum
allowed frequency of the low speed APB1 domain is 36 MHz. If the application
requires higher frequency/performance, follow the sequence below to configure the
system clock:
a. Configure the Flash wait state through FLASH_ACR register. For more details
refer to Section 11: "FLASH Memory (FLASH)"
b.
Select the clock source to be used. Internal (HSI 8MHz) or external (HSE up to 8
MHz).
c. Configure the PLL (optional), system input clock and AHB, APB1 and APB2
prescaler. For more details, refer to Section 18: "Reset and clock control
(RCC)"You can use the clock configuration tool
(STM32F30xx_Clock_Configuration.xls) to generate a customized
system_stm32f30x.c file depending on your application requirements.
Enable the clock for the peripheral(s) to be used: Before starting to use a
peripheral, enable the corresponding interface clock, as well as the clock for the
associated GPIOs. This is done by using one of the following functions:
RCC_AHB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB1Periph_PPPx, ENABLE);
RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_PPPx, ENABLE);
RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_PPPx, ENABLE);For example,
the following function should be used to enable USART1 interface clock :
RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_USART1, ENABLE);For more
details, refer to Section 19: "Real-time clock (RTC)"
Configure the clock source(s) for peripherals which clocks are not derived from the
System clock:
a. RTC: STM32F30/31xx RTC clock can be derived either from a LSI, LSE or HSE
clock divided by 2 to 31. For more details, refer to Section 19: "Real-time clock
(RTC)"
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
How to use and customize the library
USB FS: in STM32F30/31xx devices, the USB FS requires a frequency equal to
48MHz to work correctly.
c. 12-bit ADC: STM32F30/31xx12-bit ADC features two clock schemes:

Clock for the analog circuitry (ADCCLK). This clock is generated from the
PLL output. It can reach 72 MHz and can be divided by 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12,
16, 32, 64, 128 or 256. The ADCCLK clock can be configured through RCC
registers. The AHB clock divided by a programmable prescaler can also be
generated. This clock allows the ADC to work at fHCLK/1, /2 or /8. ADCCLK
maximum value is 72 MHz when the AHB clock is 72 MHz. ADCCLK is
configure through the ADC registers.

Clock for the digital interface (used for register read/write access). This clock
is equal to the AHB clock. The digital interface clock can be
enabled/disabled individually for the ADC through the RCC AHB peripheral
clock enable register (RCC_AHBENR).

For more details, refer to Section 3: "Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)"
d.
Configure the peripheral GPIOs: Whatever the peripheral mode, the I/Os
should be configured as alternate function, before being used as input or output.
To configure the I/Os, follow the steps below:
a. Connect the pin to the desired peripheral alternate function (AF) using
GPIO_PinAFConfig() function
b. Use GPIO_Init() function to configure the I/O pin

Configure the desired pin in alternate function mode using
GPIO_InitStructure->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AF;

Select the type, pull-up/pull-down and output speed via GPIO_PuPd,
GPIO_OType and GPIO_Speed members
For more details, refer to
Section 12: "General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)"
Configure the peripheral in the desired mode: refer to the peripheral firmware
driver section for details on the initialization procedure and how to use the available
API. Other modules need to be configured when using interrupt and DMA:
a.
Using the interrupts: after enabling the interrupt source(s) in the peripheral
registers, enable the peripheral interrupt line and configure its priority in the
NVIC. For more details, refer to Section 15: "Miscellaneous add-on to CMSIS
functions(misc)"
b.
Using the DMA: after enabling the DMA source(s) in the peripheral registers,
configure and enable the peripheral DMA channel in the DMA controller. For
more details, refer to Section 9: "DMA controller (DMA)"
b.
4.
2.6
How to develop your first application
This section describes all steps required for using and customizing the library to build an
application from scratch. It gives a real example based on the requirements described
below:




2.6.1
STM32303C-EVAL board used as reference hardware
System clock configured to 72 MHz, with 2 Flash wait state, Flash prefetch enabled.
PE6 pin used as EXTI Line6. This pin is connected externally to a pushbutton.
PE8 and PE9 pins used in output mode to drive LED1 and LED2, respectively.
Starting point
The typical starting point is the template project provided within the library package
(Project\STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Templates). This folder contains all the required template
files as well as the project files for different development tools.
Reuse the template files as follow:
DocID023800 Rev 1
41/584
How to use and customize the library
UM1581

main.c: first move the template main.c file to another location (to backup the template
for future use), then create a new empty C file and rename it to main.c. This file will be
used to implement the program code as described in the section below.

stm32f30x_it.c: use this template file to add the code required to manage the EXTI
Line2 interrupt.

stm32f30x_it.h: use this template file to add the EXTI Line6 interrupt prototype.

stm32f30x_conf.h: use this template file without any change

system_stm32f30x.c: use the template file without any change
Follow the steps described in Section 2.5: "STM32F30/31xx programming model using the
library" to develop your application.
2.6.2
Library configuration parameters
To configure the library for your application, use the library default parameters as defined in
Section 2.1: "Library configuration parameters"
2.6.3
system_stm32f30x.c
This file contains the SystemInit() function that configures the system clock, system clock
source, PLL Multiplier and Divider factors, AHB/APBx prescalers and Flash settings. This
function is called at startup just after reset and before branch to main program. This call is
made inside the "startup_stm32f30x.s" file.
The clock configuration tool "STM32f30x_Clock_Configuration.xls" is used to generate
system_stm32f30x.c file that configures the device as follow. The table below shows the
default configuration of system_stm32f30xx.c provided within the library:
Table 9: Default clock configuration in system_stm32f30x.c
42/584
System Clock source
HSE (System Clock source )
SYSCLK
72000000 Hz
HCLK
72000000 Hz
AHB Prescaler
1
APB1 Prescaler
2
APB2 Prescaler
1
HSE Frequency
8000000 Hz
PLL MUL
9
PREDIV
1
USB clock
ENABLED
Flash latency (number of WS)
2
Prefetch Buffer
ON
DocID023800 Rev 1
How to use and customize the library
UM1581
2.6.4
main.c
The main.c file calls the library driver functions to configure the EXTI, GPIO and NIVC
peripherals.
Include the library and STM32303C-EVAL-EVAL board resources:
/* Includes -----------------------------------------------------*/
#include "stm32f30x.h" /* The Library entry point */
#include "stm32303C_eval" /* Needed when using STM32303C-EVAL
board*/
Declare three structure variables, used to initialize the EXTI, GPIO and NIVC peripherals:
/* Private typedef
EXTI_InitTypeDef
GPIO_InitTypeDef
NVIC_InitTypeDef
----------------------------------------------*/
EXTI_InitStructure;
GPIO_InitStructure;
NVIC_InitStructure;
Declare prototype for a local function:
/* Private function prototypes ----------------------------------*/
void Delay(__IO uint32_t nCount);
The main program will be structured as follow:
/**
* @brief Main program.
* @param None
* @retval None
*/
int main(void)
{
1.
System clock configuration:
/*!< At this stage the microcontroller clock setting is already
configured,
this is done through SystemInit() function which is called from
startup
file (startup_stm32f30x.s) before to branch to application
main.
To reconfigure the default setting of SystemInit() function,
refer to
system_stm32f30x.c file */
2.
Enable the clock for the peripheral(s) to be used (EXTI interface clock is always
enabled):
/* Enable GPIOA's AHB interface clock */
RCC_AHB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOE, ENABLE);
/* Enable SYSCFG's APB interface clock */
RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SYSCFG, ENABLE);
3.
Configure the peripheral GPIOs:
/* Connect EXTI6 Line to PE6 pin */
SYSCFG_EXTILineConfig(EXTI_PortSourceGPIOE, EXTI_PinSource6);
/* Configure PE6 pin in input mode */
GPIO_InitStructure.GPIO_Pin = GPIO_Pin_6;
GPIO_InitStructure.GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_IN;
DocID023800 Rev 1
43/584
How to use and customize the library
GPIO_InitStructure.GPIO_PuPd = GPIO_PuPd_DOWN;
GPIO_Init(GPIOE, &GPIO_InitStructure);
4.
UM1581
Configure the peripheral in the desired mode:
/* Configure EXTI line 6 */
EXTI_InitStructure.EXTI_Line = EXTI_Line6;
EXTI_InitStructure.EXTI_Mode = EXTI_Mode_Interrupt;
EXTI_InitStructure.EXTI_Trigger = EXTI_Trigger_Rising;
EXTI_InitStructure.EXTI_LineCmd = ENABLE;
EXTI_Init(&EXTI_InitStructure);
/* Enable and set EXTI line 6 nterrupt to the lowest
priority */
NVIC_InitStructure.NVIC_IRQChannel = EXTI9_5_IRQn;
NVIC_InitStructure.NVIC_IRQChannelPreemptionPriority = 0x0F;
NVIC_InitStructure.NVIC_IRQChannelSubPriority = 0x0F;
NVIC_InitStructure.NVIC_IRQChannelCmd = ENABLE;
NVIC_Init(&NVIC_InitStructure);
5.
Insert the code below to use the evaluation board HAL to drive the LEDs:
/* Initialize LED1 and LED2 mounted on STM32303C-EVAL board */
STM_EVAL_LEDInit(LED1);
STM_EVAL_LEDInit(LED2);
while (1)
{
/* Toggle LD1 */
STM_EVAL_LEDToggle(LED1);
/* Insert some delay */
Delay(0xFFFFF);
}
}
/**
* @brief Inserts a delay time.
* @param nCount: specifies the delay time length.
* @retval None
*/
void Delay(__IO uint32_t nCount)
{
for(; nCount != 0; nCount--);
}
2.6.5
stm32f30x_it.c
The stm32f30x_it.c file can be used to implement the EXTI Line2 interrupt service routine
(ISR) in which LED2 toggles each time the ISR is executed.
1.
In “STM32F30xx Peripherals Interrupt Handlers“ section, add the following code:
/**************************************************************
***/
/*
STM32F30xx Peripherals Interrupt Handlers
*/
/* Add here the Interrupt Handler for the used peripheral(s)
(PPP),
*/
/* for the available peripheral interrupt handler's name
please
*/
/* refer to the startup file (startup_stm32f30x.s).
*/
44/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
How to use and customize the library
/**************************************************************
************/
/**
* @brief This function handles External line 6
* interrupt request.
* @param None
* @retval None
*/
void EXTI9_5_IRQHandler(void)
{
if(EXTI_GetITStatus(EXTI_Line6) != RESET)
{
/* Toggle LD1 */
STM_EVAL_LEDToggle(LED1);
UM1581
/* Clear the EXTI line 6 pending bit */
EXTI_ClearITPendingBit(EXTI_Line6);
}
}
2.
In stm32f30x_it.h file add the EXTI Line2 ISR prototype as follows (just after the line
void SysTick_Handler(void); )
void EXTI9_5_IRQHandler(void);
DocID023800 Rev 1
45/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581
3
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
3.1
ADC Firmware driver registers structures
3.1.1
ADC_Common_TypeDef
ADC_Common_TypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x.h
Data Fields




__IO uint32_t CSR
uint32_t RESERVED
__IO uint32_t CCR
__IO uint32_t CDR
Field Documentation




3.1.2
__IO uint32_t ADC_Common_TypeDef::CSR

ADC Common status register, Address offset: ADC1/3 base address + 0x300
uint32_t ADC_Common_TypeDef::RESERVED

Reserved, ADC1/3 base address + 0x304
__IO uint32_t ADC_Common_TypeDef::CCR

ADC common control register, Address offset: ADC1/3 base address + 0x308
__IO uint32_t ADC_Common_TypeDef::CDR

ADC common regular data register for dual AND triple modes, Address offset:
ADC1/3 base address + 0x30C
ADC_CommonInitTypeDef
ADC_CommonInitTypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x_adc.h
Data Fields





uint32_t ADC_Mode
uint32_t ADC_Clock
uint32_t ADC_DMAAccessMode
uint32_t ADC_DMAMode
uint8_t ADC_TwoSamplingDelay
Field Documentation


46/584
uint32_t ADC_CommonInitTypeDef::ADC_Mode

Configures the ADC to operate in independent or multi mode. This parameter
can be a value of ADC_mode
uint32_t ADC_CommonInitTypeDef::ADC_Clock
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
Select the clock of the ADC. The clock is common for both master and slave
ADCs. This parameter can be a value of ADC_Clock
uint32_t ADC_CommonInitTypeDef::ADC_DMAAccessMode

Configures the Direct memory access mode for multi ADC mode. This parameter
can be a value of ADC_Direct_memory_access_mode_for_multi_mode
uint32_t ADC_CommonInitTypeDef::ADC_DMAMode

Configures the DMA mode for ADC. This parameter can be a value of
ADC_DMA_Mode_definition
uint8_t ADC_CommonInitTypeDef::ADC_TwoSamplingDelay

Configures the Delay between 2 sampling phases. This parameter can be a
value between 0x0 and 0xF




3.1.3
ADC_InitTypeDef
ADC_InitTypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x_adc.h
Data Fields








uint32_t ADC_ContinuousConvMode
uint32_t ADC_Resolution
uint32_t ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent
uint32_t ADC_ExternalTrigEventEdge
uint32_t ADC_DataAlign
uint32_t ADC_OverrunMode
uint32_t ADC_AutoInjMode
uint8_t ADC_NbrOfRegChannel
Field Documentation







uint32_t ADC_InitTypeDef::ADC_ContinuousConvMode

Specifies whether the conversion is performed in Continuous or Single mode.
This parameter can be set to ENABLE or DISABLE.
uint32_t ADC_InitTypeDef::ADC_Resolution

Configures the ADC resolution. This parameter can be a value of
ADC_resolution
uint32_t ADC_InitTypeDef::ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent

Defines the external trigger used to start the analog to digital conversion of
regular channels. This parameter can be a value of
ADC_external_trigger_sources_for_regular_channels_conversion
uint32_t ADC_InitTypeDef::ADC_ExternalTrigEventEdge

Select the external trigger edge and enable the trigger of a regular group. This
parameter can be a value of
ADC_external_trigger_edge_for_regular_channels_conversion
uint32_t ADC_InitTypeDef::ADC_DataAlign

Specifies whether the ADC data alignment is left or right. This parameter can be
a value of ADC_data_align
uint32_t ADC_InitTypeDef::ADC_OverrunMode

Specifies the way data overrun are managed. This parameter can be set to
ENABLE or DISABLE.
uint32_t ADC_InitTypeDef::ADC_AutoInjMode
DocID023800 Rev 1
47/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581

Enable/disable automatic injected group conversion after regular group
conversion. This parameter can be set to ENABLE or DISABLE.

uint8_t ADC_InitTypeDef::ADC_NbrOfRegChannel

Specifies the number of ADC channels that will be converted using the
sequencer for regular channel group. This parameter must range from 1 to 16.
3.1.4
ADC_InjectedInitTypeDef
ADC_InjectedInitTypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x_adc.h
Data Fields







uint32_t ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConvEvent
uint32_t ADC_ExternalTrigInjecEventEdge
uint8_t ADC_NbrOfInjecChannel
uint32_t ADC_InjecSequence1
uint32_t ADC_InjecSequence2
uint32_t ADC_InjecSequence3
uint32_t ADC_InjecSequence4
Field Documentation







3.1.5
uint32_t ADC_InjectedInitTypeDef::ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConvEvent

Defines the external trigger used to start the analog to digital conversion of
injected channels. This parameter can be a value of
ADC_external_trigger_sources_for_Injected_channels_conversion
uint32_t ADC_InjectedInitTypeDef::ADC_ExternalTrigInjecEventEdge

Select the external trigger edge and enable the trigger of an injected group. This
parameter can be a value of
ADC_external_trigger_edge_for_Injected_channels_conversion
uint8_t ADC_InjectedInitTypeDef::ADC_NbrOfInjecChannel

Specifies the number of ADC channels that will be converted using the
sequencer for injected channel group. This parameter must range from 1 to 4.
uint32_t ADC_InjectedInitTypeDef::ADC_InjecSequence1
uint32_t ADC_InjectedInitTypeDef::ADC_InjecSequence2
uint32_t ADC_InjectedInitTypeDef::ADC_InjecSequence3
uint32_t ADC_InjectedInitTypeDef::ADC_InjecSequence4
ADC_TypeDef
ADC_TypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x.h
Data Fields





48/584
__IO uint32_t ISR
__IO uint32_t IER
__IO uint32_t CR
__IO uint32_t CFGR
uint32_t RESERVED0
DocID023800 Rev 1
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581
































__IO uint32_t SMPR1
__IO uint32_t SMPR2
uint32_t RESERVED1
__IO uint32_t TR1
__IO uint32_t TR2
__IO uint32_t TR3
uint32_t RESERVED2
__IO uint32_t SQR1
__IO uint32_t SQR2
__IO uint32_t SQR3
__IO uint32_t SQR4
__IO uint32_t DR
uint32_t RESERVED3
uint32_t RESERVED4
__IO uint32_t JSQR
uint32_t RESERVED5
__IO uint32_t OFR1
__IO uint32_t OFR2
__IO uint32_t OFR3
__IO uint32_t OFR4
uint32_t RESERVED6
__IO uint32_t JDR1
__IO uint32_t JDR2
__IO uint32_t JDR3
__IO uint32_t JDR4
uint32_t RESERVED7
__IO uint32_t AWD2CR
__IO uint32_t AWD3CR
uint32_t RESERVED8
uint32_t RESERVED9
__IO uint32_t DIFSEL
__IO uint32_t CALFACT
Field Documentation








__IO uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::ISR

ADC Interrupt and Status Register, Address offset: 0x00
__IO uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::IER

ADC Interrupt Enable Register, Address offset: 0x04
__IO uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::CR

ADC control register, Address offset: 0x08
__IO uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::CFGR

ADC Configuration register, Address offset: 0x0C
uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::RESERVED0

Reserved, 0x010
__IO uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::SMPR1

ADC sample time register 1, Address offset: 0x14
__IO uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::SMPR2

ADC sample time register 2, Address offset: 0x18
uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::RESERVED1

Reserved, 0x01C
DocID023800 Rev 1
49/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)


























50/584
UM1581
__IO uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::TR1

ADC watchdog threshold register 1, Address offset: 0x20
__IO uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::TR2

ADC watchdog threshold register 2, Address offset: 0x24
__IO uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::TR3

ADC watchdog threshold register 3, Address offset: 0x28
uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::RESERVED2

Reserved, 0x02C
__IO uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::SQR1

ADC regular sequence register 1, Address offset: 0x30
__IO uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::SQR2

ADC regular sequence register 2, Address offset: 0x34
__IO uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::SQR3

ADC regular sequence register 3, Address offset: 0x38
__IO uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::SQR4

ADC regular sequence register 4, Address offset: 0x3C
__IO uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::DR

ADC regular data register, Address offset: 0x40
uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::RESERVED3

Reserved, 0x044
uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::RESERVED4

Reserved, 0x048
__IO uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::JSQR

ADC injected sequence register, Address offset: 0x4C
uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::RESERVED5[4]

Reserved, 0x050 - 0x05C
__IO uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::OFR1

ADC offset register 1, Address offset: 0x60
__IO uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::OFR2

ADC offset register 2, Address offset: 0x64
__IO uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::OFR3

ADC offset register 3, Address offset: 0x68
__IO uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::OFR4

ADC offset register 4, Address offset: 0x6C
uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::RESERVED6[4]

Reserved, 0x070 - 0x07C
__IO uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::JDR1

ADC injected data register 1, Address offset: 0x80
__IO uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::JDR2

ADC injected data register 2, Address offset: 0x84
__IO uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::JDR3

ADC injected data register 3, Address offset: 0x88
__IO uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::JDR4

ADC injected data register 4, Address offset: 0x8C
uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::RESERVED7[4]

Reserved, 0x090 - 0x09C
__IO uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::AWD2CR

ADC Analog Watchdog 2 Configuration Register, Address offset: 0xA0
__IO uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::AWD3CR

ADC Analog Watchdog 3 Configuration Register, Address offset: 0xA4
uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::RESERVED8

Reserved, 0x0A8
DocID023800 Rev 1
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581



3.2
uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::RESERVED9

Reserved, 0x0AC
__IO uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::DIFSEL

ADC Differential Mode Selection Register, Address offset: 0xB0
__IO uint32_t ADC_TypeDef::CALFACT

ADC Calibration Factors, Address offset: 0xB4
ADC Firmware driver API description
The following section lists the various functions of the ADC library.
3.2.1
How to use this driver
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
select the ADC clock using the function RCC_ADCCLKConfig()
Enable the ADC interface clock using RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd();
ADC pins configuration

Enable the clock for the ADC GPIOs using the following function:
RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOx, ENABLE);

Configure these ADC pins in analog mode using GPIO_Init();
Configure the ADC conversion resolution, data alignment, external trigger and edge,
sequencer lenght and Enable/Disable the continuous mode using the ADC_Init()
function.
Activate the ADC peripheral using ADC_Cmd() function.
ADC channels group configuration






To configure the ADC channels features, use ADC_Init(), ADC_InjectedInit() and
ADC_RegularChannelConfig() functions or/and ADC_InjectedChannelConfig()
To activate the continuous mode, use the ADC_ContinuousModeCmd() function.
To activate the Discontinuous mode, use the ADC_DiscModeCmd() functions.
To activate the overrun mode, use the ADC_OverrunModeCmd() functions.
To activate the calibration mode, use the ADC_StartCalibration() functions.
To read the ADC converted values, use the ADC_GetConversionValue() function.
DMA for ADC channels features configuration


3.2.2
To enable the DMA mode for ADC channels group, use the ADC_DMACmd()
function.
To configure the DMA transfer request, use ADC_DMAConfig() function.
Initialization and Configuration functions
This section provides functions allowing to:
1.
2.
3.
Initialize and configure the ADC injected and/or regular channels and dual mode.
Management of the calibration process
ADC Power-on Power-off
DocID023800 Rev 1
51/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581
4.
Single ended or differential mode
5.
Enabling the queue of context and the auto delay mode
6.
The number of ADC conversions that will be done using the sequencer for regular
channel group
7.
Enable or disable the ADC peripheral

ADC_DeInit()

ADC_Init()

ADC_StructInit()

ADC_InjectedInit()

ADC_InjectedStructInit()

ADC_CommonInit()

ADC_CommonStructInit()

ADC_Cmd()

ADC_StartCalibration()

ADC_GetCalibrationValue()

ADC_SetCalibrationValue()

ADC_SelectCalibrationMode()

ADC_GetCalibrationStatus()

ADC_DisableCmd()

ADC_GetDisableCmdStatus()

ADC_VoltageRegulatorCmd()

ADC_SelectDifferentialMode()

ADC_SelectQueueOfContextMode()

ADC_AutoDelayCmd()
3.2.3
Analog Watchdog configuration functions
This section provides functions allowing to configure the 3 Analog Watchdogs (AWDG1,
AWDG2 and AWDG3) in the ADC.
A typical configuration Analog Watchdog is done following these steps :
1.
2.
3.







52/584
The ADC guarded channel(s) is (are) selected using the functions:

ADC_AnalogWatchdog1SingleChannelConfig().

ADC_AnalogWatchdog2SingleChannelConfig().

ADC_AnalogWatchdog3SingleChannelConfig().
The Analog watchdog lower and higher threshold are configured using the functions:

ADC_AnalogWatchdog1ThresholdsConfig().

ADC_AnalogWatchdog2ThresholdsConfig().

ADC_AnalogWatchdog3ThresholdsConfig().
The Analog watchdog is enabled and configured to enable the check, on one or more
channels, using the function:

ADC_AnalogWatchdogCmd().
ADC_AnalogWatchdogCmd()
ADC_AnalogWatchdog1ThresholdsConfig()
ADC_AnalogWatchdog2ThresholdsConfig()
ADC_AnalogWatchdog3ThresholdsConfig()
ADC_AnalogWatchdog1SingleChannelConfig()
ADC_AnalogWatchdog2SingleChannelConfig()
ADC_AnalogWatchdog3SingleChannelConfig()
DocID023800 Rev 1
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581
3.2.4
Temperature Sensor - Vrefint (Internal Reference Voltage) and VBAT
management functions
This section provides a function allowing to enable/ disable the internal connections
between the ADC and the Vbat/2, Temperature Sensor and the Vrefint source.
A typical configuration to get the Temperature sensor and Vrefint channels voltages is
done following these steps :
1.
2.
3.



3.2.5
Enable the internal connection of Vbat/2, Temperature sensor and Vrefint sources
with the ADC channels using:

ADC_TempSensorCmd()

ADC_VrefintCmd()

ADC_VbatCmd()
select the ADC_Channel_TempSensor and/or ADC_Channel_Vrefint and/or
ADC_Channel_Vbat using

ADC_RegularChannelConfig() or

ADC_InjectedChannelConfig() functions
Get the voltage values, using:

ADC_GetConversionValue() or

ADC_GetInjectedConversionValue().
ADC_TempSensorCmd()
ADC_VrefintCmd()
ADC_VbatCmd()
Regular Channels Configuration functions
This section provides functions allowing to manage the ADC regular channels.
To configure a regular sequence of channels use:
1.
2.
ADC_RegularChannelConfig() this fuction allows:

Configure the rank in the regular group sequencer for each channel

Configure the sampling time for each channel
ADC_RegularChannelSequencerLengthConfig() to set the length of the regular
sequencer
The regular trigger is configured using the following functions:
1.
2.
ADC_SelectExternalTrigger()
ADC_ExternalTriggerPolarityConfig()
The start and the stop conversion are controlled by:
1.
2.
ADC_StartConversion()
ADC_StopConversion()
Please Note that the following features for regular channels are configurated
using the ADC_Init() function : (++) continuous mode activation (++) Resolution
(++) Data Alignement (++) Overrun Mode.
Get the conversion data: This subsection provides an important function in the ADC
peripheral since it returns the converted data of the current regular channel. When the
Conversion value is read, the EOC Flag is automatically cleared.
To configure the discontinous mode, the following functions should be used:
DocID023800 Rev 1
53/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581
1.
ADC_DiscModeChannelCountConfig() to configure the number of discontinuous
channel to be converted.
2.
ADC_DiscModeCmd() to enable the discontinuous mode.
To configure and enable/disable the Channel offset use the functions: (++)
ADC_SetChannelOffset1() (++) ADC_SetChannelOffset2() (++) ADC_SetChannelOffset3()
(++) ADC_SetChannelOffset4() (++) ADC_ChannelOffset1Cmd() (++)
ADC_ChannelOffset2Cmd() (++) ADC_ChannelOffset3Cmd() (++)
ADC_ChannelOffset4Cmd()


















3.2.6
ADC_RegularChannelConfig()
ADC_RegularChannelSequencerLengthConfig()
ADC_ExternalTriggerConfig()
ADC_StartConversion()
ADC_GetStartConversionStatus()
ADC_StopConversion()
ADC_DiscModeChannelCountConfig()
ADC_DiscModeCmd()
ADC_GetConversionValue()
ADC_GetDualModeConversionValue()
ADC_SetChannelOffset1()
ADC_SetChannelOffset2()
ADC_SetChannelOffset3()
ADC_SetChannelOffset4()
ADC_ChannelOffset1Cmd()
ADC_ChannelOffset2Cmd()
ADC_ChannelOffset3Cmd()
ADC_ChannelOffset4Cmd()
Regular Channels DMA Configuration functions
This section provides functions allowing to configure the DMA for ADC regular channels.
Since converted regular channel values are stored into a unique data register, it is useful to
use DMA for conversion of more than one regular channel. This avoids the loss of the data
already stored in the ADC Data register.
1.
2.


3.2.7
ADC_DMACmd() function is used to enable the ADC DMA mode, after each
conversion of a regular channel, a DMA request is generated.
ADC_DMAConfig() function is used to select between the oneshot DMA mode or the
circular DMA mode
ADC_DMACmd()
ADC_DMAConfig()
Injected channels Configuration functions
This section provide functions allowing to configure the ADC Injected channels, it is
composed of 2 sub sections :
1.
54/584
Configuration functions for Injected channels: This subsection provides functions
allowing to configure the ADC injected channels : (+) Configure the rank in the injected
group sequencer for each channel (+) Configure the sampling time for each channel
(+) Activate the Auto injected Mode (+) Activate the Discontinuous Mode (+)
External/software trigger source (+) External trigger edge (+) injected channels
sequencer.
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
2.
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
Get the Specified Injected channel conversion data: This subsection provides an
important function in the ADC peripheral since it returns the converted data of the
specific injected channel.
This section provide functions allowing to configure the ADC Injected channels, it is
composed of 2 sub sections : (#) Configuration functions for Injected channels: This
subsection provides functions allowing to configure the ADC injected channels :













3.2.8
Configure the rank in the injected group sequencer for each channel
Configure the sampling time for each channel
Activate the Auto injected Mode
Activate the Discontinuous Mode
External/software trigger source
External trigger edge
injected channels sequencer. (#) Get the Specified Injected channel conversion data:
This subsection provides an important function in the ADC peripheral since it returns
the converted data of the specific injected channel.
ADC_StartInjectedConversion()
ADC_StopInjectedConversion()
ADC_GetStartInjectedConversionStatus()
ADC_AutoInjectedConvCmd()
ADC_InjectedDiscModeCmd()
ADC_GetInjectedConversionValue()
Interrupts and flags management functions
This section provides functions allowing to configure the ADC Interrupts, get the status and
clear flags and Interrupts pending bits.
The ADC provide 11 Interrupts sources and 11 Flags which can be divided into 3 groups:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Flags and Interrupts for ADC regular channels
a. Flags (+) ADC_FLAG_RDY: ADC Ready flag (+) ADC_FLAG_EOSMP: ADC End
of Sampling flag (+) ADC_FLAG_EOC: ADC End of Regular Conversion flag. (+)
ADC_FLAG_EOS: ADC End of Regular sequence of Conversions flag (+)
ADC_FLAG_OVR: ADC overrun flag
b.
Interrupts (+) ADC_IT_RDY: ADC Ready interrupt source (+) ADC_IT_EOSMP:
ADC End of Sampling interrupt source (+) ADC_IT_EOC: ADC End of Regular
Conversion interrupt source (+) ADC_IT_EOS: ADC End of Regular sequence of
Conversions interrupt (+) ADC_IT_OVR: ADC overrun interrupt source
Flags and Interrupts for ADC regular channels
a. Flags (+) ADC_FLAG_JEOC: ADC Ready flag (+) ADC_FLAG_JEOS: ADC End
of Sampling flag (+) ADC_FLAG_JQOVF: ADC End of Regular Conversion flag.
b.
Interrupts (+) ADC_IT_JEOC: ADC End of Injected Conversion interrupt source
(+) ADC_IT_JEOS: ADC End of Injected sequence of Conversions interrupt
source (+) ADC_IT_JQOVF: ADC Injected Context Queue Overflow interrupt
source
General Flags and Interrupts for the ADC
a. Flags (+) ADC_FLAG_AWD1: ADC Analog watchdog 1 flag (+)
ADC_FLAG_AWD2: ADC Analog watchdog 2 flag (+) ADC_FLAG_AWD3: ADC
Analog watchdog 3 flag
b. Flags (+) ADC_IT_AWD1: ADC Analog watchdog 1 interrupt source (+)
ADC_IT_AWD2: ADC Analog watchdog 2 interrupt source (+) ADC_IT_AWD3:
ADC Analog watchdog 3 interrupt source
Flags for ADC dual mode
DocID023800 Rev 1
55/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581
a. Flags for Master (+) ADC_FLAG_MSTRDY: ADC master Ready (ADRDY) flag
(+) ADC_FLAG_MSTEOSMP: ADC master End of Sampling flag (+)
ADC_FLAG_MSTEOC: ADC master End of Regular Conversion flag (+)
ADC_FLAG_MSTEOS: ADC master End of Regular sequence of Conversions
flag (+) ADC_FLAG_MSTOVR: ADC master overrun flag (+)
ADC_FLAG_MSTJEOC: ADC master End of Injected Conversion flag (+)
ADC_FLAG_MSTJEOS: ADC master End of Injected sequence of Conversions
flag (+) ADC_FLAG_MSTAWD1: ADC master Analog watchdog 1 flag (+)
ADC_FLAG_MSTAWD2: ADC master Analog watchdog 2 flag (+)
ADC_FLAG_MSTAWD3: ADC master Analog watchdog 3 flag (+)
ADC_FLAG_MSTJQOVF: ADC master Injected Context Queue Overflow flag
b.
Flags for Slave (+) ADC_FLAG_SLVRDY: ADC slave Ready (ADRDY) flag (+)
ADC_FLAG_SLVEOSMP: ADC slave End of Sampling flag (+)
ADC_FLAG_SLVEOC: ADC slave End of Regular Conversion flag (+)
ADC_FLAG_SLVEOS: ADC slave End of Regular sequence of Conversions flag
(+) ADC_FLAG_SLVOVR: ADC slave overrun flag (+) ADC_FLAG_SLVJEOC:
ADC slave End of Injected Conversion flag (+) ADC_FLAG_SLVJEOS: ADC
slave End of Injected sequence of Conversions flag (+) ADC_FLAG_SLVAWD1:
ADC slave Analog watchdog 1 flag (+) ADC_FLAG_SLVAWD2: ADC slave
Analog watchdog 2 flag (+) ADC_FLAG_SLVAWD3: ADC slave Analog watchdog
3 flag (+) ADC_FLAG_SLVJQOVF: ADC slave Injected Context Queue Overflow
flag The user should identify which mode will be used in his application to
manage the ADC controller events: Polling mode or Interrupt mode. In the Polling
Mode it is advised to use the following functions: - ADC_GetFlagStatus() : to
check if flags events occur. - ADC_ClearFlag() : to clear the flags events. In the
Interrupt Mode it is advised to use the following functions: - ADC_ITConfig() : to
enable or disable the interrupt source. - ADC_GetITStatus() : to check if Interrupt
occurs. - ADC_ClearITPendingBit() : to clear the Interrupt pending Bit
(corresponding Flag).
The ADC provide 11 Interrupts sources and 11 Flags which can be divided into 3 groups:
(#) Flags and Interrupts for ADC regular channels (##)Flags

















56/584
ADC_FLAG_RDY: ADC Ready flag
ADC_FLAG_EOSMP: ADC End of Sampling flag
ADC_FLAG_EOC: ADC End of Regular Conversion flag.
ADC_FLAG_EOS: ADC End of Regular sequence of Conversions flag
ADC_FLAG_OVR: ADC overrun flag
a.
Interrupts
ADC_IT_RDY: ADC Ready interrupt source
ADC_IT_EOSMP: ADC End of Sampling interrupt source
ADC_IT_EOC: ADC End of Regular Conversion interrupt source
ADC_IT_EOS: ADC End of Regular sequence of Conversions interrupt
ADC_IT_OVR: ADC overrun interrupt source (#) Flags and Interrupts for ADC regular
channels
a. Flags
ADC_FLAG_JEOC: ADC Ready flag
ADC_FLAG_JEOS: ADC End of Sampling flag
ADC_FLAG_JQOVF: ADC End of Regular Conversion flag.
a.
Interrupts
ADC_IT_JEOC: ADC End of Injected Conversion interrupt source
ADC_IT_JEOS: ADC End of Injected sequence of Conversions interrupt source
ADC_IT_JQOVF: ADC Injected Context Queue Overflow interrupt source (#) General
Flags and Interrupts for the ADC
a. Flags
ADC_FLAG_AWD1: ADC Analog watchdog 1 flag
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581


































Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
ADC_FLAG_AWD2: ADC Analog watchdog 2 flag
ADC_FLAG_AWD3: ADC Analog watchdog 3 flag
a. Flags
ADC_IT_AWD1: ADC Analog watchdog 1 interrupt source
ADC_IT_AWD2: ADC Analog watchdog 2 interrupt source
ADC_IT_AWD3: ADC Analog watchdog 3 interrupt source (#) Flags for ADC dual
mode
a. Flags for Master
ADC_FLAG_MSTRDY: ADC master Ready (ADRDY) flag
ADC_FLAG_MSTEOSMP: ADC master End of Sampling flag
ADC_FLAG_MSTEOC: ADC master End of Regular Conversion flag
ADC_FLAG_MSTEOS: ADC master End of Regular sequence of Conversions flag
ADC_FLAG_MSTOVR: ADC master overrun flag
ADC_FLAG_MSTJEOC: ADC master End of Injected Conversion flag
ADC_FLAG_MSTJEOS: ADC master End of Injected sequence of Conversions flag
ADC_FLAG_MSTAWD1: ADC master Analog watchdog 1 flag
ADC_FLAG_MSTAWD2: ADC master Analog watchdog 2 flag
ADC_FLAG_MSTAWD3: ADC master Analog watchdog 3 flag
ADC_FLAG_MSTJQOVF: ADC master Injected Context Queue Overflow flag
a.
Flags for Slave
ADC_FLAG_SLVRDY: ADC slave Ready (ADRDY) flag
ADC_FLAG_SLVEOSMP: ADC slave End of Sampling flag
ADC_FLAG_SLVEOC: ADC slave End of Regular Conversion flag
ADC_FLAG_SLVEOS: ADC slave End of Regular sequence of Conversions flag
ADC_FLAG_SLVOVR: ADC slave overrun flag
ADC_FLAG_SLVJEOC: ADC slave End of Injected Conversion flag
ADC_FLAG_SLVJEOS: ADC slave End of Injected sequence of Conversions flag
ADC_FLAG_SLVAWD1: ADC slave Analog watchdog 1 flag
ADC_FLAG_SLVAWD2: ADC slave Analog watchdog 2 flag
ADC_FLAG_SLVAWD3: ADC slave Analog watchdog 3 flag
ADC_FLAG_SLVJQOVF: ADC slave Injected Context Queue Overflow flag The user
should identify which mode will be used in his application to manage the ADC
controller events: Polling mode or Interrupt mode. In the Polling Mode it is advised to
use the following functions: - ADC_GetFlagStatus() : to check if flags events occur. ADC_ClearFlag() : to clear the flags events. In the Interrupt Mode it is advised to use
the following functions: - ADC_ITConfig() : to enable or disable the interrupt source. ADC_GetITStatus() : to check if Interrupt occurs. - ADC_ClearITPendingBit() : to clear
the Interrupt pending Bit (corresponding Flag).
ADC_ITConfig()
ADC_GetFlagStatus()
ADC_ClearFlag()
ADC_GetCommonFlagStatus()
ADC_ClearCommonFlag()
ADC_GetITStatus()
ADC_ClearITPendingBit()
3.2.9
Initialization and Configuration functions
3.2.9.1
ADC_DeInit
DocID023800 Rev 1
57/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
Function Name
3.2.9.2
3.2.9.3
58/584
UM1581
void ADC_DeInit ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx)
Function Description
Deinitializes the ADCx peripheral registers to their default reset
values.
Parameters

ADCx : where x can be 1, 2,3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_Init
Function Name
void ADC_Init ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx, ADC_InitTypeDef *
ADC_InitStruct)
Function Description
Initializes the ADCx peripheral according to the specified
parameters in the ADC_InitStruct.
Parameters


ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
ADC_InitStruct : pointer to an ADC_InitTypeDef structure
that contains the configuration information for the specified
ADC peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_StructInit
Function Name
void ADC_StructInit ( ADC_InitTypeDef * ADC_InitStruct)
Function Description
Fills each ADC_InitStruct member with its default value.
Parameters

ADC_InitStruct : : pointer to an ADC_InitTypeDef structure
which will be initialized.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581
3.2.9.4
3.2.9.5
3.2.9.6
ADC_InjectedInit
Function Name
void ADC_InjectedInit ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx,
ADC_InjectedInitTypeDef * ADC_InjectedInitStruct)
Function Description
Initializes the ADCx peripheral according to the specified
parameters in the ADC_InitStruct.
Parameters


ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
ADC_InjectInitStruct : pointer to an ADC_InjecInitTypeDef
structure that contains the configuration information for the
specified ADC injected channel.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_InjectedStructInit
Function Name
void ADC_InjectedStructInit ( ADC_InjectedInitTypeDef *
ADC_InjectedInitStruct)
Function Description
Fills each ADC_InjectedInitStruct member with its default value.
Parameters

ADC_InjectedInitStruct : : pointer to an
ADC_InjectedInitTypeDef structure which will be initialized.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_CommonInit
Function Name
void ADC_CommonInit ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx,
ADC_CommonInitTypeDef * ADC_CommonInitStruct)
Function Description
Initializes the ADCs peripherals according to the specified
parameters in the ADC_CommonInitStruct.
Parameters


ADCx : where x can be 1 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral.
ADC_CommonInitStruct : pointer to an
ADC_CommonInitTypeDef structure that contains the
DocID023800 Rev 1
59/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581
configuration information for All ADCs peripherals.
3.2.9.7
3.2.9.8
60/584
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_CommonStructInit
Function Name
void ADC_CommonStructInit ( ADC_CommonInitTypeDef *
ADC_CommonInitStruct)
Function Description
Fills each ADC_CommonInitStruct member with its default value.
Parameters

ADC_CommonInitStruct : pointer to an
ADC_CommonInitTypeDef structure which will be initialized.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_Cmd
Function Name
void ADC_Cmd ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx, FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the specified ADC peripheral.
Parameters


ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
NewState : new state of the ADCx peripheral. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581
3.2.9.9
3.2.9.10
3.2.9.11
ADC_StartCalibration
Function Name
void ADC_StartCalibration ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx)
Function Description
Starts the selected ADC calibration process.
Parameters

ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_GetCalibrationValue
Function Name
uint32_t ADC_GetCalibrationValue ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx)
Function Description
Returns the ADCx calibration value.
Parameters

ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_SetCalibrationValue
Function Name
void ADC_SetCalibrationValue ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx,
uint32_t ADC_Calibration)
Function Description
Sets the ADCx calibration register.
Parameters

ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
61/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
3.2.9.12
UM1581
ADC_SelectCalibrationMode
Function Name
void ADC_SelectCalibrationMode ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx,
uint32_t ADC_CalibrationMode)
Function Description
Select the ADC calibration mode.
Parameters


3.2.9.13
3.2.9.14
62/584
ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
ADC_CalibrationMode : the ADC calibration mode. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

ADC_CalibrationMode_Single : to select the
calibration for single channel

ADC_CalibrationMode_Differential : to select the
calibration for differential channel
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_GetCalibrationStatus
Function Name
FlagStatus ADC_GetCalibrationStatus ( ADC_TypeDef *
ADCx)
Function Description
Gets the selected ADC calibration status.
Parameters

ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
Return values

The new state of ADC calibration (SET or RESET).
Notes

None.
ADC_DisableCmd
Function Name
void ADC_DisableCmd ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx)
Function Description
ADC Disable Command.
Parameters

ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581
3.2.9.15
3.2.9.16
3.2.9.17
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_GetDisableCmdStatus
Function Name
FlagStatus ADC_GetDisableCmdStatus ( ADC_TypeDef *
ADCx)
Function Description
Gets the selected ADC disable command Status.
Parameters

ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
Return values

The new state of ADC ADC disable command (SET or
RESET).
Notes

None.
ADC_VoltageRegulatorCmd
Function Name
void ADC_VoltageRegulatorCmd ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the specified ADC Voltage Regulator.
Parameters


ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
NewState : new state of the ADCx Voltage Regulator. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_SelectDifferentialMode
Function Name
void ADC_SelectDifferentialMode ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx,
DocID023800 Rev 1
63/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581
uint8_t ADC_Channel, FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Selectes the differential mode for a specific channel.
Parameters


3.2.9.18
64/584
ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
ADC_Channel : the ADC channel to configure for the analog
watchdog. This parameter can be one of the following values:

ADC_Channel_1 : ADC Channel1 selected

ADC_Channel_2 : ADC Channel2 selected

ADC_Channel_3 : ADC Channel3 selected

ADC_Channel_4 : ADC Channel4 selected

ADC_Channel_5 : ADC Channel5 selected

ADC_Channel_6 : ADC Channel6 selected

ADC_Channel_7 : ADC Channel7 selected

ADC_Channel_8 : ADC Channel8 selected

ADC_Channel_9 : ADC Channel9 selected

ADC_Channel_10 : ADC Channel10 selected

ADC_Channel_11 : ADC Channel11 selected

ADC_Channel_12 : ADC Channel12 selected

ADC_Channel_13 : ADC Channel13 selected

ADC_Channel_14 : ADC Channel14 selected
Return values

None.
Notes

: Channel 15, 16 and 17 are fixed to single-ended inputs
mode.
ADC_SelectQueueOfContextMode
Function Name
void ADC_SelectQueueOfContextMode ( ADC_TypeDef *
ADCx, FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Selects the Queue Of Context Mode for injected channels.
Parameters


ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
NewState : new state of the Queue Of Context Mode. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581
3.2.9.19
ADC_AutoDelayCmd
Function Name
void ADC_AutoDelayCmd ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Selects the ADC Delayed Conversion Mode.
Parameters


ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
NewState : new state of the ADC Delayed Conversion Mode.
This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
3.2.10
Analog Watchdog configuration functions
3.2.10.1
ADC_AnalogWatchdogCmd
Function Name
void ADC_AnalogWatchdogCmd ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx,
uint32_t ADC_AnalogWatchdog)
Function Description
Enables or disables the analog watchdog on single/all regular or
injected channels.
Parameters


ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
ADC_AnalogWatchdog : the ADC analog watchdog
configuration. This parameter can be one of the following
values:

ADC_AnalogWatchdog_SingleRegEnable : Analog
watchdog on a single regular channel

ADC_AnalogWatchdog_SingleInjecEnable : Analog
watchdog on a single injected channel

ADC_AnalogWatchdog_SingleRegOrInjecEnable :
Analog watchdog on a single regular or injected channel

ADC_AnalogWatchdog_AllRegEnable : Analog
watchdog on all regular channel

ADC_AnalogWatchdog_AllInjecEnable : Analog
watchdog on all injected channel

ADC_AnalogWatchdog_AllRegAllInjecEnable :
Analog watchdog on all regular and injected channels

ADC_AnalogWatchdog_None : No channel guarded
by the analog watchdog
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
65/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
3.2.10.2
UM1581
ADC_AnalogWatchdog1ThresholdsConfig
Function Name
void ADC_AnalogWatchdog1ThresholdsConfig (
ADC_TypeDef * ADCx, uint16_t HighThreshold, uint16_t
LowThreshold)
Function Description
Configures the high and low thresholds of the analog watchdog1.
Parameters



3.2.10.3
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_AnalogWatchdog2ThresholdsConfig
Function Name
void ADC_AnalogWatchdog2ThresholdsConfig (
ADC_TypeDef * ADCx, uint8_t HighThreshold, uint8_t
LowThreshold)
Function Description
Configures the high and low thresholds of the analog watchdog2.
Parameters



66/584
ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
HighThreshold : the ADC analog watchdog High threshold
value. This parameter must be a 12bit value.
LowThreshold : the ADC analog watchdog Low threshold
value. This parameter must be a 12bit value.
ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
HighThreshold : the ADC analog watchdog High threshold
value. This parameter must be a 8bit value.
LowThreshold : the ADC analog watchdog Low threshold
value. This parameter must be a 8bit value.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581
3.2.10.4
ADC_AnalogWatchdog3ThresholdsConfig
Function Name
void ADC_AnalogWatchdog3ThresholdsConfig (
ADC_TypeDef * ADCx, uint8_t HighThreshold, uint8_t
LowThreshold)
Function Description
Configures the high and low thresholds of the analog watchdog3.
Parameters



3.2.10.5
ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
HighThreshold : the ADC analog watchdog High threshold
value. This parameter must be a 8bit value.
LowThreshold : the ADC analog watchdog Low threshold
value. This parameter must be a 8bit value.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_AnalogWatchdog1SingleChannelConfig
Function Name
void ADC_AnalogWatchdog1SingleChannelConfig (
ADC_TypeDef * ADCx, uint8_t ADC_Channel)
Function Description
Configures the analog watchdog 2 guarded single channel.
Parameters


ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
ADC_Channel : the ADC channel to configure for the analog
watchdog. This parameter can be one of the following values:

ADC_Channel_1 : ADC Channel1 selected

ADC_Channel_2 : ADC Channel2 selected

ADC_Channel_3 : ADC Channel3 selected

ADC_Channel_4 : ADC Channel4 selected

ADC_Channel_5 : ADC Channel5 selected

ADC_Channel_6 : ADC Channel6 selected

ADC_Channel_7 : ADC Channel7 selected

ADC_Channel_8 : ADC Channel8 selected

ADC_Channel_9 : ADC Channel9 selected

ADC_Channel_10 : ADC Channel10 selected

ADC_Channel_11 : ADC Channel11 selected

ADC_Channel_12 : ADC Channel12 selected

ADC_Channel_13 : ADC Channel13 selected

ADC_Channel_14 : ADC Channel14 selected

ADC_Channel_15 : ADC Channel15 selected

ADC_Channel_16 : ADC Channel16 selected

ADC_Channel_17 : ADC Channel17 selected
DocID023800 Rev 1
67/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581

3.2.10.6
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_AnalogWatchdog2SingleChannelConfig
Function Name
void ADC_AnalogWatchdog2SingleChannelConfig (
ADC_TypeDef * ADCx, uint8_t ADC_Channel)
Function Description
Configures the analog watchdog 2 guarded single channel.
Parameters


68/584
ADC_Channel_18 : ADC Channel18 selected
ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
ADC_Channel : the ADC channel to configure for the analog
watchdog. This parameter can be one of the following values:

ADC_Channel_1 : ADC Channel1 selected

ADC_Channel_2 : ADC Channel2 selected

ADC_Channel_3 : ADC Channel3 selected

ADC_Channel_4 : ADC Channel4 selected

ADC_Channel_5 : ADC Channel5 selected

ADC_Channel_6 : ADC Channel6 selected

ADC_Channel_7 : ADC Channel7 selected

ADC_Channel_8 : ADC Channel8 selected

ADC_Channel_9 : ADC Channel9 selected

ADC_Channel_10 : ADC Channel10 selected

ADC_Channel_11 : ADC Channel11 selected

ADC_Channel_12 : ADC Channel12 selected

ADC_Channel_13 : ADC Channel13 selected

ADC_Channel_14 : ADC Channel14 selected

ADC_Channel_15 : ADC Channel15 selected

ADC_Channel_16 : ADC Channel16 selected

ADC_Channel_17 : ADC Channel17 selected

ADC_Channel_18 : ADC Channel18 selected
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581
3.2.10.7
ADC_AnalogWatchdog3SingleChannelConfig
Function Name
void ADC_AnalogWatchdog3SingleChannelConfig (
ADC_TypeDef * ADCx, uint8_t ADC_Channel)
Function Description
Configures the analog watchdog 3 guarded single channel.
Parameters


ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
ADC_Channel : the ADC channel to configure for the analog
watchdog. This parameter can be one of the following values:

ADC_Channel_1 : ADC Channel1 selected

ADC_Channel_2 : ADC Channel2 selected

ADC_Channel_3 : ADC Channel3 selected

ADC_Channel_4 : ADC Channel4 selected

ADC_Channel_5 : ADC Channel5 selected

ADC_Channel_6 : ADC Channel6 selected

ADC_Channel_7 : ADC Channel7 selected

ADC_Channel_8 : ADC Channel8 selected

ADC_Channel_9 : ADC Channel9 selected

ADC_Channel_10 : ADC Channel10 selected

ADC_Channel_11 : ADC Channel11 selected

ADC_Channel_12 : ADC Channel12 selected

ADC_Channel_13 : ADC Channel13 selected

ADC_Channel_14 : ADC Channel14 selected

ADC_Channel_15 : ADC Channel15 selected

ADC_Channel_16 : ADC Channel16 selected

ADC_Channel_17 : ADC Channel17 selected

ADC_Channel_18 : ADC Channel18 selected
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
3.2.11
Temperature Sensor- Vrefint (Internal Reference Voltage) and VBAT
management function
3.2.11.1
ADC_TempSensorCmd
Function Name
void ADC_TempSensorCmd ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the temperature sensor channel.
Parameters


ADCx : where x can be 1 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral.
NewState : new state of the temperature sensor. This
DocID023800 Rev 1
69/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
3.2.11.2
3.2.11.3
70/584
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_VrefintCmd
Function Name
void ADC_VrefintCmd ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the Vrefint channel.
Parameters


ADCx : where x can be 1 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral.
NewState : new state of the Vrefint. This parameter can be:
ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_VbatCmd
Function Name
void ADC_VbatCmd ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx, FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the Vbat channel.
Parameters


ADCx : where x can be 1 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral.
NewState : new state of the Vbat. This parameter can be:
ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581
3.2.12
Regular Channels Configuration functions
3.2.12.1
ADC_RegularChannelConfig
Function Name
void ADC_RegularChannelConfig ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx,
uint8_t ADC_Channel, uint8_t Rank, uint8_t
ADC_SampleTime)
Function Description
Configures for the selected ADC regular channel its
corresponding rank in the sequencer and its sample time.
Parameters




ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
ADC_Channel : the ADC channel to configure. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

ADC_Channel_1 : ADC Channel1 selected

ADC_Channel_2 : ADC Channel2 selected

ADC_Channel_3 : ADC Channel3 selected

ADC_Channel_4 : ADC Channel4 selected

ADC_Channel_5 : ADC Channel5 selected

ADC_Channel_6 : ADC Channel6 selected

ADC_Channel_7 : ADC Channel7 selected

ADC_Channel_8 : ADC Channel8 selected

ADC_Channel_9 : ADC Channel9 selected

ADC_Channel_10 : ADC Channel10 selected

ADC_Channel_11 : ADC Channel11 selected

ADC_Channel_12 : ADC Channel12 selected

ADC_Channel_13 : ADC Channel13 selected

ADC_Channel_14 : ADC Channel14 selected

ADC_Channel_15 : ADC Channel15 selected

ADC_Channel_16 : ADC Channel16 selected

ADC_Channel_17 : ADC Channel17 selected

ADC_Channel_18 : ADC Channel18 selected
Rank : The rank in the regular group sequencer. This
parameter must be between 1 to 16.
ADC_SampleTime : The sample time value to be set for the
selected channel. This parameter can be one of the following
values:

ADC_SampleTime_1Cycles5 : Sample time equal to
1.5 cycles

ADC_SampleTime_2Cycles5 : Sample time equal to
2.5 cycles

ADC_SampleTime_4Cycles5 : Sample time equal to
4.5 cycles

ADC_SampleTime_7Cycles5 : Sample time equal to
7.5 cycles

ADC_SampleTime_19Cycles5 : Sample time equal to
19.5 cycles

ADC_SampleTime_61Cycles5 : Sample time equal to
61.5 cycles
DocID023800 Rev 1
71/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)


3.2.12.2
3.2.12.3
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_RegularChannelSequencerLengthConfig
Function Name
void ADC_RegularChannelSequencerLengthConfig (
ADC_TypeDef * ADCx, uint8_t SequencerLength)
Function Description
Sets the ADC regular channel sequence lenght.
Parameters


ADCx : where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC
peripheral.
SequenceLength : The Regular sequence length. This
parameter must be between 1 to 16. This parameter can be:
ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_ExternalTriggerConfig
Function Name
void ADC_ExternalTriggerConfig ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx,
uint16_t ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent, uint16_t
ADC_ExternalTrigEventEdge)
Function Description
External Trigger Enable and Polarity Selection for regular
channels.
Parameters


72/584
UM1581
ADC_SampleTime_181Cycles5 : Sample time equal to
181.5 cycles
ADC_SampleTime_601Cycles5 : Sample time equal to
601.5 cycles
ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent : ADC external Trigger
source. This parameter can be one of the following values:

ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event0 : External trigger event
0

ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event1 : External trigger event
1

ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event2 : External trigger event
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581

3.2.12.4
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
2

ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event3 : External trigger event
3

ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event4 : External trigger event
4

ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event5 : External trigger event
5

ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event6 : External trigger event
6

ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event7 : External trigger event
7

ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event8 : External trigger event
8

ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event9 : External trigger event
9

ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event10 : External trigger event
10

ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event11 : External trigger event
11

ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event12 : External trigger event
12

ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event13 : External trigger event
13

ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event14 : External trigger event
14

ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event15 : External trigger event
15
ADC_ExternalTrigEventEdge : ADC external Trigger
Polarity. This parameter can be one of the following values:

ADC_ExternalTrigEventEdge_OFF : Hardware trigger
detection disabled (conversions can be launched by
software)

ADC_ExternalTrigEventEdge_RisingEdge : Hardware
trigger detection on the rising edge

ADC_ExternalTrigEventEdge_FallingEdge :
Hardware trigger detection on the falling edge

ADC_ExternalTrigEventEdge_BothEdge : Hardware
trigger detection on both the rising and falling edges
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_StartConversion
Function Name
void ADC_StartConversion ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx)
Function Description
Enables or disables the selected ADC start conversion .
DocID023800 Rev 1
73/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
Parameters
3.2.12.5
3.2.12.6
3.2.12.7

UM1581
ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_GetStartConversionStatus
Function Name
FlagStatus ADC_GetStartConversionStatus ( ADC_TypeDef *
ADCx)
Function Description
Gets the selected ADC start conversion Status.
Parameters

ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
Return values

The new state of ADC start conversion (SET or RESET).
Notes

None.
ADC_StopConversion
Function Name
void ADC_StopConversion ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx)
Function Description
Stops the selected ADC ongoing conversion.
Parameters

ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_DiscModeChannelCountConfig
Function Name
74/584
void ADC_DiscModeChannelCountConfig ( ADC_TypeDef *
ADCx, uint8_t Number)
DocID023800 Rev 1
Function Description
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
Configures the discontinuous mode for the selected ADC regular
group channel.
Parameters

UM1581
3.2.12.8
3.2.12.9

ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
Number : specifies the discontinuous mode regular channel
count value. This number must be between 1 and 8.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_DiscModeCmd
Function Name
void ADC_DiscModeCmd ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the discontinuous mode on regular group
channel for the specified ADC.
Parameters


ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
NewState : new state of the selected ADC discontinuous
mode on regular group channel. This parameter can be:
ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_GetConversionValue
Function Name
uint16_t ADC_GetConversionValue ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx)
Function Description
Returns the last ADCx conversion result data for regular channel.
Parameters

ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
Return values

The Data conversion value.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
75/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581
3.2.12.10 ADC_GetDualModeConversionValue
Function Name
uint32_t ADC_GetDualModeConversionValue ( ADC_TypeDef
* ADCx)
Function Description
Returns the last ADC1, ADC2, ADC3 and ADC4 regular
conversions results data in the selected dual mode.
Parameters

ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
Return values

The Data conversion value.
Notes

In dual mode, the value returned by this function is as
following Data[15:0] : these bits contain the regular data of the
Master ADC. Data[31:16]: these bits contain the regular data
of the Slave ADC.
3.2.12.11 ADC_SetChannelOffset1
Function Name
void ADC_SetChannelOffset1 ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx, uint8_t
ADC_Channel, uint16_t Offset)
Function Description
Set the ADC channels conversion value offset1.
Parameters


76/584
ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
ADC_Channel : the ADC channel to configure. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

ADC_Channel_1 : ADC Channel1 selected

ADC_Channel_2 : ADC Channel2 selected

ADC_Channel_3 : ADC Channel3 selected

ADC_Channel_4 : ADC Channel4 selected

ADC_Channel_5 : ADC Channel5 selected

ADC_Channel_6 : ADC Channel6 selected

ADC_Channel_7 : ADC Channel7 selected

ADC_Channel_8 : ADC Channel8 selected

ADC_Channel_9 : ADC Channel9 selected

ADC_Channel_10 : ADC Channel10 selected

ADC_Channel_11 : ADC Channel11 selected

ADC_Channel_12 : ADC Channel12 selected

ADC_Channel_13 : ADC Channel13 selected

ADC_Channel_14 : ADC Channel14 selected

ADC_Channel_15 : ADC Channel15 selected

ADC_Channel_16 : ADC Channel16 selected
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

ADC_Channel_17 : ADC Channel17 selected

ADC_Channel_18 : ADC Channel18 selected
Offset : the offset value for the selected ADC Channel This
parameter must be a 12bit value.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
3.2.12.12 ADC_SetChannelOffset2
Function Name
void ADC_SetChannelOffset2 ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx, uint8_t
ADC_Channel, uint16_t Offset)
Function Description
Set the ADC channels conversion value offset2.
Parameters



ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
ADC_Channel : the ADC channel to configure. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

ADC_Channel_1 : ADC Channel1 selected

ADC_Channel_2 : ADC Channel2 selected

ADC_Channel_3 : ADC Channel3 selected

ADC_Channel_4 : ADC Channel4 selected

ADC_Channel_5 : ADC Channel5 selected

ADC_Channel_6 : ADC Channel6 selected

ADC_Channel_7 : ADC Channel7 selected

ADC_Channel_8 : ADC Channel8 selected

ADC_Channel_9 : ADC Channel9 selected

ADC_Channel_10 : ADC Channel10 selected

ADC_Channel_11 : ADC Channel11 selected

ADC_Channel_12 : ADC Channel12 selected

ADC_Channel_13 : ADC Channel13 selected

ADC_Channel_14 : ADC Channel14 selected

ADC_Channel_15 : ADC Channel15 selected

ADC_Channel_16 : ADC Channel16 selected

ADC_Channel_17 : ADC Channel17 selected

ADC_Channel_18 : ADC Channel18 selected
Offset : the offset value for the selected ADC Channel This
parameter must be a 12bit value.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
77/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581
3.2.12.13 ADC_SetChannelOffset3
Function Name
void ADC_SetChannelOffset3 ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx, uint8_t
ADC_Channel, uint16_t Offset)
Function Description
Set the ADC channels conversion value offset3.
Parameters



ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
ADC_Channel : the ADC channel to configure. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

ADC_Channel_1 : ADC Channel1 selected

ADC_Channel_2 : ADC Channel2 selected

ADC_Channel_3 : ADC Channel3 selected

ADC_Channel_4 : ADC Channel4 selected

ADC_Channel_5 : ADC Channel5 selected

ADC_Channel_6 : ADC Channel6 selected

ADC_Channel_7 : ADC Channel7 selected

ADC_Channel_8 : ADC Channel8 selected

ADC_Channel_9 : ADC Channel9 selected

ADC_Channel_10 : ADC Channel10 selected

ADC_Channel_11 : ADC Channel11 selected

ADC_Channel_12 : ADC Channel12 selected

ADC_Channel_13 : ADC Channel13 selected

ADC_Channel_14 : ADC Channel14 selected

ADC_Channel_15 : ADC Channel15 selected

ADC_Channel_16 : ADC Channel16 selected

ADC_Channel_17 : ADC Channel17 selected

ADC_Channel_18 : ADC Channel18 selected
Offset : the offset value for the selected ADC Channel This
parameter must be a 12bit value.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
3.2.12.14 ADC_SetChannelOffset4
Function Name
void ADC_SetChannelOffset4 ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx, uint8_t
ADC_Channel, uint16_t Offset)
Function Description
Set the ADC channels conversion value offset4.
Parameters


78/584
ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
ADC_Channel : the ADC channel to configure. This
parameter can be one of the following values:
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

ADC_Channel_1 : ADC Channel1 selected

ADC_Channel_2 : ADC Channel2 selected

ADC_Channel_3 : ADC Channel3 selected

ADC_Channel_4 : ADC Channel4 selected

ADC_Channel_5 : ADC Channel5 selected

ADC_Channel_6 : ADC Channel6 selected

ADC_Channel_7 : ADC Channel7 selected

ADC_Channel_8 : ADC Channel8 selected

ADC_Channel_9 : ADC Channel9 selected

ADC_Channel_10 : ADC Channel10 selected

ADC_Channel_11 : ADC Channel11 selected

ADC_Channel_12 : ADC Channel12 selected

ADC_Channel_13 : ADC Channel13 selected

ADC_Channel_14 : ADC Channel14 selected

ADC_Channel_15 : ADC Channel15 selected

ADC_Channel_16 : ADC Channel16 selected

ADC_Channel_17 : ADC Channel17 selected

ADC_Channel_18 : ADC Channel18 selected
Offset : the offset value for the selected ADC Channel This
parameter must be a 12bit value.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
3.2.12.15 ADC_ChannelOffset1Cmd
Function Name
void ADC_ChannelOffset1Cmd ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the Offset1.
Parameters


ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
NewState : new state of the ADCx offset1. This parameter
can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
79/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581
3.2.12.16 ADC_ChannelOffset2Cmd
Function Name
void ADC_ChannelOffset2Cmd ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the Offset2.
Parameters


ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
NewState : new state of the ADCx offset2. This parameter
can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
3.2.12.17 ADC_ChannelOffset3Cmd
Function Name
void ADC_ChannelOffset3Cmd ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the Offset3.
Parameters


ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
NewState : new state of the ADCx offset3. This parameter
can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
3.2.12.18 ADC_ChannelOffset4Cmd
Function Name
void ADC_ChannelOffset4Cmd ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the Offset4.
Parameters


80/584
ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
NewState : new state of the ADCx offset4. This parameter
DocID023800 Rev 1
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
UM1581
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
3.2.13
Regular Channels DMA Configuration functions
3.2.13.1
ADC_DMACmd
3.2.13.2
Function Name
void ADC_DMACmd ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx, FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the specified ADC DMA request.
Parameters


ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
NewState : new state of the selected ADC DMA transfer.
This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_DMAConfig
Function Name
void ADC_DMAConfig ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx, uint32_t
ADC_DMAMode)
Function Description
Enables or disables the specified ADC DMA request.
Parameters


ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
NewState : new state of the selected ADC DMA transfer.
This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
81/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581
3.2.14
Injected channels Configuration functions
3.2.14.1
ADC_StartInjectedConversion
3.2.14.2
3.2.14.3
82/584
Function Name
void ADC_StartInjectedConversion ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx)
Function Description
Enables or disables the selected ADC start of the injected
channels conversion.
Parameters


ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
NewState : new state of the selected ADC software start
injected conversion. This parameter can be: ENABLE or
DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_StopInjectedConversion
Function Name
void ADC_StopInjectedConversion ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx)
Function Description
Stops the selected ADC ongoing injected conversion.
Parameters

ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_GetStartInjectedConversionStatus
Function Name
FlagStatus ADC_GetStartInjectedConversionStatus (
ADC_TypeDef * ADCx)
Function Description
Gets the selected ADC Software start injected conversion Status.
Parameters

ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
Return values

The new state of ADC start injected conversion (SET or
DocID023800 Rev 1
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581
RESET).
Notes
3.2.14.4
3.2.14.5

None.
ADC_AutoInjectedConvCmd
Function Name
void ADC_AutoInjectedConvCmd ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the selected ADC automatic injected group
conversion after regular one.
Parameters


ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
NewState : new state of the selected ADC auto injected
conversion This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_InjectedDiscModeCmd
Function Name
void ADC_InjectedDiscModeCmd ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the discontinuous mode for injected group
channel for the specified ADC.
Parameters


ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
NewState : new state of the selected ADC discontinuous
mode on injected group channel. This parameter can be:
ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
83/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
3.2.14.6
UM1581
ADC_GetInjectedConversionValue
Function Name
uint16_t ADC_GetInjectedConversionValue ( ADC_TypeDef *
ADCx, uint8_t ADC_InjectedChannel)
Function Description
Returns the ADC injected channel conversion result.
Parameters


ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
ADC_InjectedChannel : the converted ADC injected
channel. This parameter can be one of the following values:

ADC_InjectedChannel_1 : Injected Channel1 selected

ADC_InjectedChannel_2 : Injected Channel2 selected

ADC_InjectedChannel_3 : Injected Channel3 selected

ADC_InjectedChannel_4 : Injected Channel4 selected
Return values

The Data conversion value.
Notes

None.
3.2.15
Interrupts and flags management functions
3.2.15.1
ADC_ITConfig
Function Name
void ADC_ITConfig ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx, uint32_t ADC_IT,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the specified ADC interrupts.
Parameters


84/584
ADCx : where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC
peripheral.
ADC_IT : specifies the ADC interrupt sources to be enabled
or disabled. This parameter can be any combination of the
following values:

ADC_IT_RDY : ADC Ready (ADRDY) interrupt source

ADC_IT_EOSMP : ADC End of Sampling interrupt
source

ADC_IT_EOC : ADC End of Regular Conversion
interrupt source

ADC_IT_EOS : ADC End of Regular sequence of
Conversions interrupt source

ADC_IT_OVR : ADC overrun interrupt source

ADC_IT_JEOC : ADC End of Injected Conversion
interrupt source

ADC_IT_JEOS : ADC End of Injected sequence of
Conversions interrupt source

ADC_IT_AWD1 : ADC Analog watchdog 1 interrupt
source
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
ADC_IT_AWD2 : ADC Analog watchdog 2 interrupt
source

ADC_IT_AWD3 : ADC Analog watchdog 3 interrupt
source

ADC_IT_JQOVF : ADC Injected Context Queue
Overflow interrupt source
NewState : new state of the specified ADC interrupts. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.


3.2.15.2
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_GetFlagStatus
Function Name
FlagStatus ADC_GetFlagStatus ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx,
uint32_t ADC_FLAG)
Function Description
Checks whether the specified ADC flag is set or not.
Parameters


ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
ADC_FLAG : specifies the flag to check. This parameter can
be one of the following values:

ADC_FLAG_RDY : ADC Ready (ADRDY) flag

ADC_FLAG_EOSMP : ADC End of Sampling flag

ADC_FLAG_EOC : ADC End of Regular Conversion
flag

ADC_FLAG_EOS : ADC End of Regular sequence of
Conversions flag

ADC_FLAG_OVR : ADC overrun flag

ADC_FLAG_JEOC : ADC End of Injected Conversion
flag

ADC_FLAG_JEOS : ADC End of Injected sequence of
Conversions flag

ADC_FLAG_AWD1 : ADC Analog watchdog 1 flag

ADC_FLAG_AWD2 : ADC Analog watchdog 2 flag

ADC_FLAG_AWD3 : ADC Analog watchdog 3 flag

ADC_FLAG_JQOVF : ADC Injected Context Queue
Overflow flag
Return values

The new state of ADC_FLAG (SET or RESET).
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
85/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
3.2.15.3
UM1581
ADC_ClearFlag
Function Name
void ADC_ClearFlag ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx, uint32_t
ADC_FLAG)
Function Description
Clears the ADCx's pending flags.
Parameters


3.2.15.4
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
ADC_GetCommonFlagStatus
Function Name
FlagStatus ADC_GetCommonFlagStatus ( ADC_TypeDef *
ADCx, uint32_t ADC_FLAG)
Function Description
Checks whether the specified ADC flag is set or not.
Parameters


86/584
ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
ADC_FLAG : specifies the flag to clear. This parameter can
be any combination of the following values:

ADC_FLAG_RDY : ADC Ready (ADRDY) flag

ADC_FLAG_EOSMP : ADC End of Sampling flag

ADC_FLAG_EOC : ADC End of Regular Conversion
flag

ADC_FLAG_EOS : ADC End of Regular sequence of
Conversions flag

ADC_FLAG_OVR : ADC overrun flag

ADC_FLAG_JEOC : ADC End of Injected Conversion
flag

ADC_FLAG_JEOS : ADC End of Injected sequence of
Conversions flag

ADC_FLAG_AWD1 : ADC Analog watchdog 1 flag

ADC_FLAG_AWD2 : ADC Analog watchdog 2 flag

ADC_FLAG_AWD3 : ADC Analog watchdog 3 flag

ADC_FLAG_JQOVF : ADC Injected Context Queue
Overflow flag
ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
ADC_FLAG : specifies the master or slave flag to check.
This parameter can be one of the following values:

ADC_FLAG_MSTRDY : ADC master Ready (ADRDY)
flag

ADC_FLAG_MSTEOSMP : ADC master End of
Sampling flag
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581




















3.2.15.5
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
ADC_FLAG_MSTEOC : ADC master End of Regular
Conversion flag
ADC_FLAG_MSTEOS : ADC master End of Regular
sequence of Conversions flag
ADC_FLAG_MSTOVR : ADC master overrun flag
ADC_FLAG_MSTJEOC : ADC master End of Injected
Conversion flag
ADC_FLAG_MSTJEOS : ADC master End of Injected
sequence of Conversions flag
ADC_FLAG_MSTAWD1 : ADC master Analog
watchdog 1 flag
ADC_FLAG_MSTAWD2 : ADC master Analog
watchdog 2 flag
ADC_FLAG_MSTAWD3 : ADC master Analog
watchdog 3 flag
ADC_FLAG_MSTJQOVF : ADC master Injected
Context Queue Overflow flag
ADC_FLAG_SLVRDY : ADC slave Ready (ADRDY)
flag
ADC_FLAG_SLVEOSMP : ADC slave End of Sampling
flag
ADC_FLAG_SLVEOC : ADC slave End of Regular
Conversion flag
ADC_FLAG_SLVEOS : ADC slave End of Regular
sequence of Conversions flag
ADC_FLAG_SLVOVR : ADC slave overrun flag
ADC_FLAG_SLVJEOC : ADC slave End of Injected
Conversion flag
ADC_FLAG_SLVJEOS : ADC slave End of Injected
sequence of Conversions flag
ADC_FLAG_SLVAWD1 : ADC slave Analog watchdog
1 flag
ADC_FLAG_SLVAWD2 : ADC slave Analog watchdog
2 flag
ADC_FLAG_SLVAWD3 : ADC slave Analog watchdog
3 flag
ADC_FLAG_SLVJQOVF : ADC slave Injected Context
Queue Overflow flag
Return values

The new state of ADC_FLAG (SET or RESET).
Notes

None.
ADC_ClearCommonFlag
Function Name
void ADC_ClearCommonFlag ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx,
uint32_t ADC_FLAG)
DocID023800 Rev 1
87/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
Function Description
Parameters
UM1581
Clears the ADCx's pending flags.


88/584
ADCx : where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC
peripheral.
ADC_FLAG : specifies the master or slave flag to clear. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

ADC_FLAG_MSTRDY : ADC master Ready (ADRDY)
flag

ADC_FLAG_MSTEOSMP : ADC master End of
Sampling flag

ADC_FLAG_MSTEOC : ADC master End of Regular
Conversion flag

ADC_FLAG_MSTEOS : ADC master End of Regular
sequence of Conversions flag

ADC_FLAG_MSTOVR : ADC master overrun flag

ADC_FLAG_MSTJEOC : ADC master End of Injected
Conversion flag

ADC_FLAG_MSTJEOS : ADC master End of Injected
sequence of Conversions flag

ADC_FLAG_MSTAWD1 : ADC master Analog
watchdog 1 flag

ADC_FLAG_MSTAWD2 : ADC master Analog
watchdog 2 flag

ADC_FLAG_MSTAWD3 : ADC master Analog
watchdog 3 flag

ADC_FLAG_MSTJQOVF : ADC master Injected
Context Queue Overflow flag

ADC_FLAG_SLVRDY : ADC slave Ready (ADRDY)
flag

ADC_FLAG_SLVEOSMP : ADC slave End of Sampling
flag

ADC_FLAG_SLVEOC : ADC slave End of Regular
Conversion flag

ADC_FLAG_SLVEOS : ADC slave End of Regular
sequence of Conversions flag

ADC_FLAG_SLVOVR : ADC slave overrun flag

ADC_FLAG_SLVJEOC : ADC slave End of Injected
Conversion flag

ADC_FLAG_SLVJEOS : ADC slave End of Injected
sequence of Conversions flag

ADC_FLAG_SLVAWD1 : ADC slave Analog watchdog
1 flag

ADC_FLAG_SLVAWD2 : ADC slave Analog watchdog
2 flag

ADC_FLAG_SLVAWD3 : ADC slave Analog watchdog
3 flag

ADC_FLAG_SLVJQOVF : ADC slave Injected Context
Queue Overflow flag
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581
3.2.15.6
ADC_GetITStatus
Function Name
ITStatus ADC_GetITStatus ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx, uint32_t
ADC_IT)
Function Description
Checks whether the specified ADC interrupt has occurred or not.
Parameters


3.2.15.7
ADCx : where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC
peripheral.
ADC_IT : specifies the ADC interrupt source to check. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

ADC_IT_RDY : ADC Ready (ADRDY) interrupt source

ADC_IT_EOSMP : ADC End of Sampling interrupt
source

ADC_IT_EOC : ADC End of Regular Conversion
interrupt source

ADC_IT_EOS : ADC End of Regular sequence of
Conversions interrupt source

ADC_IT_OVR : ADC overrun interrupt source

ADC_IT_JEOC : ADC End of Injected Conversion
interrupt source

ADC_IT_JEOS : ADC End of Injected sequence of
Conversions interrupt source

ADC_IT_AWD1 : ADC Analog watchdog 1 interrupt
source

ADC_IT_AWD2 : ADC Analog watchdog 2 interrupt
source

ADC_IT_AWD3 : ADC Analog watchdog 3 interrupt
source

ADC_IT_JQOVF : ADC Injected Context Queue
Overflow interrupt source
Return values

The new state of ADC_IT (SET or RESET).
Notes

None.
ADC_ClearITPendingBit
Function Name
void ADC_ClearITPendingBit ( ADC_TypeDef * ADCx, uint32_t
ADC_IT)
Function Description
Clears the ADCx's interrupt pending bits.
Parameters


ADCx : where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC
peripheral.
ADC_IT : specifies the ADC interrupt pending bit to clear.
DocID023800 Rev 1
89/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581
This parameter can be any combination of the following
values:

ADC_IT_RDY : ADC Ready (ADRDY) interrupt source

ADC_IT_EOSMP : ADC End of Sampling interrupt
source

ADC_IT_EOC : ADC End of Regular Conversion
interrupt source

ADC_IT_EOS : ADC End of Regular sequence of
Conversions interrupt source

ADC_IT_OVR : ADC overrun interrupt source

ADC_IT_JEOC : ADC End of Injected Conversion
interrupt source

ADC_IT_JEOS : ADC End of Injected sequence of
Conversions interrupt source

ADC_IT_AWD1 : ADC Analog watchdog 1 interrupt
source

ADC_IT_AWD2 : ADC Analog watchdog 2 interrupt
source

ADC_IT_AWD3 : ADC Analog watchdog 3 interrupt
source

ADC_IT_JQOVF : ADC Injected Context Queue
Overflow interrupt source
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
3.3
ADC Firmware driver defines
3.3.1
ADC
ADC
ADC_analog_watchdog_selection

#define: ADC_AnalogWatchdog_SingleRegEnable ((uint32_t)0x00C00000)
ADC Analog watchdog single regular mode

#define: ADC_AnalogWatchdog_SingleInjecEnable ((uint32_t)0x01400000)
ADC Analog watchdog single injected mode

#define: ADC_AnalogWatchdog_SingleRegOrInjecEnable
((uint32_t)0x01C00000)
ADC Analog watchdog single regular or injected mode

#define: ADC_AnalogWatchdog_AllRegEnable ((uint32_t)0x00800000)
ADC Analog watchdog all regular mode
90/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581

#define: ADC_AnalogWatchdog_AllInjecEnable ((uint32_t)0x01000000)
ADC Analog watchdog all injected mode

#define: ADC_AnalogWatchdog_AllRegAllInjecEnable ((uint32_t)0x01800000)
ADC Analog watchdog all regular and all injected mode

#define: ADC_AnalogWatchdog_None ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
ADC Analog watchdog off
ADC_AutoInjecMode

#define: ADC_AutoInjec_Enable ((uint32_t)0x02000000)
ADC Auto injected Mode enable

#define: ADC_AutoInjec_Disable ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
ADC Auto injected Mode disable
ADC_Calibration_Mode_definition

#define: ADC_CalibrationMode_Single ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
ADC Calibration for single ended channel

#define: ADC_CalibrationMode_Differential ((uint32_t)0x40000000)
ADC Calibration for differential channel
ADC_channels

#define: ADC_Channel_1 ((uint8_t)0x01)
ADC Channel 1

#define: ADC_Channel_2 ((uint8_t)0x02)
ADC Channel 2

#define: ADC_Channel_3 ((uint8_t)0x03)
ADC Channel 3

#define: ADC_Channel_4 ((uint8_t)0x04)
ADC Channel 4
DocID023800 Rev 1
91/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

UM1581
#define: ADC_Channel_5 ((uint8_t)0x05)
ADC Channel 5

#define: ADC_Channel_6 ((uint8_t)0x06)
ADC Channel 6

#define: ADC_Channel_7 ((uint8_t)0x07)
ADC Channel 7

#define: ADC_Channel_8 ((uint8_t)0x08)
ADC Channel 8

#define: ADC_Channel_9 ((uint8_t)0x09)
ADC Channel 9

#define: ADC_Channel_10 ((uint8_t)0x0A)
ADC Channel 10

#define: ADC_Channel_11 ((uint8_t)0x0B)
ADC Channel 11

#define: ADC_Channel_12 ((uint8_t)0x0C)
ADC Channel 12

#define: ADC_Channel_13 ((uint8_t)0x0D)
ADC Channel 13

#define: ADC_Channel_14 ((uint8_t)0x0E)
ADC Channel 14

#define: ADC_Channel_15 ((uint8_t)0x0F)
ADC Channel 15

#define: ADC_Channel_16 ((uint8_t)0x10)
ADC Channel 16
92/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581

#define: ADC_Channel_17 ((uint8_t)0x11)
ADC Channel 17

#define: ADC_Channel_18 ((uint8_t)0x12)
ADC Channel 18

#define: ADC_Channel_TempSensor ((uint8_t)ADC_Channel_16)

#define: ADC_Channel_Vrefint ((uint8_t)ADC_Channel_18)

#define: ADC_Channel_Vbat ((uint8_t)ADC_Channel_17)
ADC_Clock

#define: ADC_Clock_AsynClkMode ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
ADC Asynchronous clock mode

#define: ADC_Clock_SynClkModeDiv1 ((uint32_t)0x00010000)
Synchronous clock mode divided by 1

#define: ADC_Clock_SynClkModeDiv2 ((uint32_t)0x00020000)
Synchronous clock mode divided by 2

#define: ADC_Clock_SynClkModeDiv4 ((uint32_t)0x00030000)
Synchronous clock mode divided by 4
ADC_Common_flags_definition

#define: ADC_FLAG_MSTRDY ((uint32_t)0x00000001)
ADC Master Ready (ADRDY) flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_MSTEOSMP ((uint32_t)0x00000002)
ADC Master End of Sampling flag
DocID023800 Rev 1
93/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

#define: ADC_FLAG_MSTEOC ((uint32_t)0x00000004)
ADC Master End of Regular Conversion flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_MSTEOS ((uint32_t)0x00000008)
ADC Master End of Regular sequence of Conversions flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_MSTOVR ((uint32_t)0x00000010)
ADC Master overrun flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_MSTJEOC ((uint32_t)0x00000020)
ADC Master End of Injected Conversion flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_MSTJEOS ((uint32_t)0x00000040)
ADC Master End of Injected sequence of Conversions flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_MSTAWD1 ((uint32_t)0x00000080)
ADC Master Analog watchdog 1 flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_MSTAWD2 ((uint32_t)0x00000100)
ADC Master Analog watchdog 2 flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_MSTAWD3 ((uint32_t)0x00000200)
ADC Master Analog watchdog 3 flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_MSTJQOVF ((uint32_t)0x00000400)
ADC Master Injected Context Queue Overflow flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_SLVRDY ((uint32_t)0x00010000)
ADC Slave Ready (ADRDY) flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_SLVEOSMP ((uint32_t)0x00020000)
ADC Slave End of Sampling flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_SLVEOC ((uint32_t)0x00040000)
ADC Slave End of Regular Conversion flag
94/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
UM1581

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
#define: ADC_FLAG_SLVEOS ((uint32_t)0x00080000)
ADC Slave End of Regular sequence of Conversions flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_SLVOVR ((uint32_t)0x00100000)
ADC Slave overrun flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_SLVJEOC ((uint32_t)0x00200000)
ADC Slave End of Injected Conversion flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_SLVJEOS ((uint32_t)0x00400000)
ADC Slave End of Injected sequence of Conversions flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_SLVAWD1 ((uint32_t)0x00800000)
ADC Slave Analog watchdog 1 flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_SLVAWD2 ((uint32_t)0x01000000)
ADC Slave Analog watchdog 2 flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_SLVAWD3 ((uint32_t)0x02000000)
ADC Slave Analog watchdog 3 flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_SLVJQOVF ((uint32_t)0x04000000)
ADC Slave Injected Context Queue Overflow flag
ADC_ContinuousConvMode

#define: ADC_ContinuousConvMode_Enable ((uint32_t)0x00002000)
ADC continuous conversion mode enable

#define: ADC_ContinuousConvMode_Disable ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
ADC continuous conversion mode disable
ADC_data_align

#define: ADC_DataAlign_Right ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
ADC Data alignment right

#define: ADC_DataAlign_Left ((uint32_t)0x00000020)
DocID023800 Rev 1
95/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
ADC Data alignment left
UM1581
ADC_Direct_memory_access_mode_for_multi_mode

#define: ADC_DMAAccessMode_Disabled ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
DMA mode disabled

#define: ADC_DMAAccessMode_1 ((uint32_t)0x00008000)
DMA mode enabled for 12 and 10-bit resolution (6 bit)

#define: ADC_DMAAccessMode_2 ((uint32_t)0x0000C000)
DMA mode enabled for 8 and 6-bit resolution (8bit)
ADC_DMA_Mode_definition

#define: ADC_DMAMode_OneShot ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
ADC DMA Oneshot mode

#define: ADC_DMAMode_Circular ((uint32_t)0x00000002)
ADC DMA circular mode
ADC_external_trigger_edge_for_Injected_channels_conversion

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigInjecEventEdge_None ((uint16_t)0x0000)
ADC No external trigger for regular conversion

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigInjecEventEdge_RisingEdge ((uint16_t)0x0040)
ADC external trigger rising edge for injected conversion

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigInjecEventEdge_FallingEdge ((uint16_t)0x0080)
ADC external trigger falling edge for injected conversion

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigInjecEventEdge_BothEdge ((uint16_t)0x00C0)
ADC external trigger both edges for injected conversion
ADC_external_trigger_edge_for_regular_channels_conversion

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigEventEdge_None ((uint16_t)0x0000)
ADC No external trigger for regular conversion
96/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
#define: ADC_ExternalTrigEventEdge_RisingEdge ((uint16_t)0x0400)
ADC external trigger rising edge for regular conversion

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigEventEdge_FallingEdge ((uint16_t)0x0800)
ADC ADC external trigger falling edge for regular conversion

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigEventEdge_BothEdge ((uint16_t)0x0C00)
ADC ADC external trigger both edges for regular conversion
ADC_external_trigger_sources_for_Injected_channels_conversion

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConvEvent_0 ((uint16_t)0x0000)
ADC external trigger for injected conversion event 0

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConvEvent_1 ((uint16_t)0x0004)
ADC external trigger for injected conversion event 1

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConvEvent_2 ((uint16_t)0x0008)
ADC external trigger for injected conversion event 2

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConvEvent_3 ((uint16_t)0x000C)
ADC external trigger for injected conversion event 3

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConvEvent_4 ((uint16_t)0x0010)
ADC external trigger for injected conversion event 4

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConvEvent_5 ((uint16_t)0x0014)
ADC external trigger for injected conversion event 5

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConvEvent_6 ((uint16_t)0x0018)
ADC external trigger for injected conversion event 6

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConvEvent_7 ((uint16_t)0x001C)
ADC external trigger for injected conversion event 7

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConvEvent_8 ((uint16_t)0x0020)
ADC external trigger for injected conversion event 8
DocID023800 Rev 1
97/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

UM1581
#define: ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConvEvent_9 ((uint16_t)0x0024)
ADC external trigger for injected conversion event 9

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConvEvent_10 ((uint16_t)0x0028)
ADC external trigger for injected conversion event 10

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConvEvent_11 ((uint16_t)0x002C)
ADC external trigger for injected conversion event 11

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConvEvent_12 ((uint16_t)0x0030)
ADC external trigger for injected conversion event 12

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConvEvent_13 ((uint16_t)0x0034)
ADC external trigger for injected conversion event 13

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConvEvent_14 ((uint16_t)0x0038)
ADC external trigger for injected conversion event 14

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConvEvent_15 ((uint16_t)0x003C)
ADC external trigger for injected conversion event 15
ADC_external_trigger_sources_for_regular_channels_conversion

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent_0 ((uint16_t)0x0000)
ADC external trigger event 0

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent_1 ((uint16_t)0x0040)
ADC external trigger event 1

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent_2 ((uint16_t)0x0080)
ADC external trigger event 2

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent_3 ((uint16_t)0x00C0)
ADC external trigger event 3

98/584
#define: ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent_4 ((uint16_t)0x0100)
DocID023800 Rev 1
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581
ADC external trigger event 4

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent_5 ((uint16_t)0x0140)
ADC external trigger event 5

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent_6 ((uint16_t)0x0180)
ADC external trigger event 6

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent_7 ((uint16_t)0x01C0)
ADC external trigger event 7

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent_8 ((uint16_t)0x0200)
ADC external trigger event 8

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent_9 ((uint16_t)0x0240)
ADC external trigger event 9

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent_10 ((uint16_t)0x0280)
ADC external trigger event 10

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent_11 ((uint16_t)0x02C0)
ADC external trigger event 11

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent_12 ((uint16_t)0x0300)
ADC external trigger event 12

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent_13 ((uint16_t)0x0340)
ADC external trigger event 13

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent_14 ((uint16_t)0x0380)
ADC external trigger event 14

#define: ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent_15 ((uint16_t)0x03C0)
ADC external trigger event 15
ADC_flags_definition
DocID023800 Rev 1
99/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

#define: ADC_FLAG_RDY ((uint16_t)0x0001)
ADC Ready (ADRDY) flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_EOSMP ((uint16_t)0x0002)
ADC End of Sampling flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_EOC ((uint16_t)0x0004)
ADC End of Regular Conversion flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_EOS ((uint16_t)0x0008)
ADC End of Regular sequence of Conversions flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_OVR ((uint16_t)0x0010)
ADC overrun flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_JEOC ((uint16_t)0x0020)
ADC End of Injected Conversion flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_JEOS ((uint16_t)0x0040)
ADC End of Injected sequence of Conversions flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_AWD1 ((uint16_t)0x0080)
ADC Analog watchdog 1 flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_AWD2 ((uint16_t)0x0100)
ADC Analog watchdog 2 flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_AWD3 ((uint16_t)0x0200)
ADC Analog watchdog 3 flag

#define: ADC_FLAG_JQOVF ((uint16_t)0x0400)
ADC Injected Context Queue Overflow flag
ADC_injected_channel_selection

#define: ADC_InjectedChannel_1 ADC_Channel_1
ADC Injected channel 1
100/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581

#define: ADC_InjectedChannel_2 ADC_Channel_2
ADC Injected channel 2

#define: ADC_InjectedChannel_3 ADC_Channel_3
ADC Injected channel 3

#define: ADC_InjectedChannel_4 ADC_Channel_4
ADC Injected channel 4
ADC_interrupts_definition

#define: ADC_IT_RDY ((uint16_t)0x0001)
ADC Ready (ADRDY) interrupt source

#define: ADC_IT_EOSMP ((uint16_t)0x0002)
ADC End of Sampling interrupt source

#define: ADC_IT_EOC ((uint16_t)0x0004)
ADC End of Regular Conversion interrupt source

#define: ADC_IT_EOS ((uint16_t)0x0008)
ADC End of Regular sequence of Conversions interrupt source

#define: ADC_IT_OVR ((uint16_t)0x0010)
ADC overrun interrupt source

#define: ADC_IT_JEOC ((uint16_t)0x0020)
ADC End of Injected Conversion interrupt source

#define: ADC_IT_JEOS ((uint16_t)0x0040)
ADC End of Injected sequence of Conversions interrupt source

#define: ADC_IT_AWD1 ((uint16_t)0x0080)
ADC Analog watchdog 1 interrupt source

#define: ADC_IT_AWD2 ((uint16_t)0x0100)
DocID023800 Rev 1
101/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
ADC Analog watchdog 2 interrupt source

UM1581
#define: ADC_IT_AWD3 ((uint16_t)0x0200)
ADC Analog watchdog 3 interrupt source

#define: ADC_IT_JQOVF ((uint16_t)0x0400)
ADC Injected Context Queue Overflow interrupt source
ADC_mode

#define: ADC_Mode_Independent ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
ADC independent mode

#define: ADC_Mode_CombRegSimulInjSimul ((uint32_t)0x00000001)
ADC multi ADC mode: Combined Regular simultaneous injected simultaneous mode

#define: ADC_Mode_CombRegSimulAltTrig ((uint32_t)0x00000002)
ADC multi ADC mode: Combined Regular simultaneous Alternate trigger mode

#define: ADC_Mode_InjSimul ((uint32_t)0x00000005)
ADC multi ADC mode: Injected simultaneous mode

#define: ADC_Mode_RegSimul ((uint32_t)0x00000006)
ADC multi ADC mode: Regular simultaneous mode

#define: ADC_Mode_Interleave ((uint32_t)0x00000007)
ADC multi ADC mode: Interleave mode

#define: ADC_Mode_AltTrig ((uint32_t)0x00000009)
ADC multi ADC mode: Alternate Trigger mode
ADC_OverunMode

#define: ADC_OverrunMode_Enable ((uint32_t)0x00001000)
ADC Overrun Mode enable

#define: ADC_OverrunMode_Disable ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
ADC Overrun Mode disable
102/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
UM1581
ADC_resolution

#define: ADC_Resolution_12b ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
ADC 12-bit resolution

#define: ADC_Resolution_10b ((uint32_t)0x00000008)
ADC 10-bit resolution

#define: ADC_Resolution_8b ((uint32_t)0x00000010)
ADC 8-bit resolution

#define: ADC_Resolution_6b ((uint32_t)0x00000018)
ADC 6-bit resolution
ADC_sampling_time

#define: ADC_SampleTime_1Cycles5 ((uint8_t)0x00)
ADC sampling time 1.5 cycle

#define: ADC_SampleTime_2Cycles5 ((uint8_t)0x01)
ADC sampling time 2.5 cycles

#define: ADC_SampleTime_4Cycles5 ((uint8_t)0x02)
ADC sampling time 4.5 cycles

#define: ADC_SampleTime_7Cycles5 ((uint8_t)0x03)
ADC sampling time 7.5 cycles

#define: ADC_SampleTime_19Cycles5 ((uint8_t)0x04)
ADC sampling time 19.5 cycles

#define: ADC_SampleTime_61Cycles5 ((uint8_t)0x05)
ADC sampling time 61.5 cycles

#define: ADC_SampleTime_181Cycles5 ((uint8_t)0x06)
ADC sampling time 181.5 cycles
DocID023800 Rev 1
103/584
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

#define: ADC_SampleTime_601Cycles5 ((uint8_t)0x07)
ADC sampling time 601.5 cycles
104/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Controller area network (bxCAN)
UM1581
4
Controller area network (bxCAN)
4.1
CAN Firmware driver registers structures
4.1.1
CAN_TypeDef
CAN_TypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x.h
Data Fields






















__IO uint32_t MCR
__IO uint32_t MSR
__IO uint32_t TSR
__IO uint32_t RF0R
__IO uint32_t RF1R
__IO uint32_t IER
__IO uint32_t ESR
__IO uint32_t BTR
uint32_t RESERVED0
CAN_TxMailBox_TypeDef sTxMailBox
CAN_FIFOMailBox_TypeDef sFIFOMailBox
uint32_t RESERVED1
__IO uint32_t FMR
__IO uint32_t FM1R
uint32_t RESERVED2
__IO uint32_t FS1R
uint32_t RESERVED3
__IO uint32_t FFA1R
uint32_t RESERVED4
__IO uint32_t FA1R
uint32_t RESERVED5
CAN_FilterRegister_TypeDef sFilterRegister
Field Documentation







__IO uint32_t CAN_TypeDef::MCR

CAN master control register, Address offset: 0x00
__IO uint32_t CAN_TypeDef::MSR

CAN master status register, Address offset: 0x04
__IO uint32_t CAN_TypeDef::TSR

CAN transmit status register, Address offset: 0x08
__IO uint32_t CAN_TypeDef::RF0R

CAN receive FIFO 0 register, Address offset: 0x0C
__IO uint32_t CAN_TypeDef::RF1R

CAN receive FIFO 1 register, Address offset: 0x10
__IO uint32_t CAN_TypeDef::IER

CAN interrupt enable register, Address offset: 0x14
__IO uint32_t CAN_TypeDef::ESR

CAN error status register, Address offset: 0x18
DocID023800 Rev 1
105/584
Controller area network (bxCAN)















4.1.2
UM1581
__IO uint32_t CAN_TypeDef::BTR

CAN bit timing register, Address offset: 0x1C
uint32_t CAN_TypeDef::RESERVED0[88]

Reserved, 0x020 - 0x17F
CAN_TxMailBox_TypeDef CAN_TypeDef::sTxMailBox[3]

CAN Tx MailBox, Address offset: 0x180 - 0x1AC
CAN_FIFOMailBox_TypeDef CAN_TypeDef::sFIFOMailBox[2]

CAN FIFO MailBox, Address offset: 0x1B0 - 0x1CC
uint32_t CAN_TypeDef::RESERVED1[12]

Reserved, 0x1D0 - 0x1FF
__IO uint32_t CAN_TypeDef::FMR

CAN filter master register, Address offset: 0x200
__IO uint32_t CAN_TypeDef::FM1R

CAN filter mode register, Address offset: 0x204
uint32_t CAN_TypeDef::RESERVED2

Reserved, 0x208
__IO uint32_t CAN_TypeDef::FS1R

CAN filter scale register, Address offset: 0x20C
uint32_t CAN_TypeDef::RESERVED3

Reserved, 0x210
__IO uint32_t CAN_TypeDef::FFA1R

CAN filter FIFO assignment register, Address offset: 0x214
uint32_t CAN_TypeDef::RESERVED4

Reserved, 0x218
__IO uint32_t CAN_TypeDef::FA1R

CAN filter activation register, Address offset: 0x21C
uint32_t CAN_TypeDef::RESERVED5[8]

Reserved, 0x220-0x23F
CAN_FilterRegister_TypeDef CAN_TypeDef::sFilterRegister[28]

CAN Filter Register, Address offset: 0x240-0x31C
CAN_FIFOMailBox_TypeDef
CAN_FIFOMailBox_TypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x.h
Data Fields




__IO uint32_t RIR
__IO uint32_t RDTR
__IO uint32_t RDLR
__IO uint32_t RDHR
Field Documentation



106/584
__IO uint32_t CAN_FIFOMailBox_TypeDef::RIR

CAN receive FIFO mailbox identifier register
__IO uint32_t CAN_FIFOMailBox_TypeDef::RDTR

CAN receive FIFO mailbox data length control and time stamp register
__IO uint32_t CAN_FIFOMailBox_TypeDef::RDLR
DocID023800 Rev 1
Controller area network (bxCAN)
UM1581

4.1.3

CAN receive FIFO mailbox data low register
__IO uint32_t CAN_FIFOMailBox_TypeDef::RDHR

CAN receive FIFO mailbox data high register
CAN_TxMailBox_TypeDef
CAN_TxMailBox_TypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x.h
Data Fields




__IO uint32_t TIR
__IO uint32_t TDTR
__IO uint32_t TDLR
__IO uint32_t TDHR
Field Documentation




4.1.4
__IO uint32_t CAN_TxMailBox_TypeDef::TIR

CAN TX mailbox identifier register
__IO uint32_t CAN_TxMailBox_TypeDef::TDTR

CAN mailbox data length control and time stamp register
__IO uint32_t CAN_TxMailBox_TypeDef::TDLR

CAN mailbox data low register
__IO uint32_t CAN_TxMailBox_TypeDef::TDHR

CAN mailbox data high register
CAN_FilterRegister_TypeDef
CAN_FilterRegister_TypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x.h
Data Fields


__IO uint32_t FR1
__IO uint32_t FR2
Field Documentation


4.1.5
__IO uint32_t CAN_FilterRegister_TypeDef::FR1

CAN Filter bank register 1
__IO uint32_t CAN_FilterRegister_TypeDef::FR2

CAN Filter bank register 1
CAN_InitTypeDef
CAN_InitTypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x_can.h
DocID023800 Rev 1
107/584
Controller area network (bxCAN)
Data Fields











UM1581
uint16_t CAN_Prescaler
uint8_t CAN_Mode
uint8_t CAN_SJW
uint8_t CAN_BS1
uint8_t CAN_BS2
FunctionalState CAN_TTCM
FunctionalState CAN_ABOM
FunctionalState CAN_AWUM
FunctionalState CAN_NART
FunctionalState CAN_RFLM
FunctionalState CAN_TXFP
Field Documentation











108/584
uint16_t CAN_InitTypeDef::CAN_Prescaler

Specifies the length of a time quantum. It ranges from 1 to 1024.
uint8_t CAN_InitTypeDef::CAN_Mode

Specifies the CAN operating mode. This parameter can be a value of
CAN_operating_mode
uint8_t CAN_InitTypeDef::CAN_SJW

Specifies the maximum number of time quanta the CAN hardware is allowed to
lengthen or shorten a bit to perform resynchronization. This parameter can be a
value of CAN_synchronisation_jump_width
uint8_t CAN_InitTypeDef::CAN_BS1

Specifies the number of time quanta in Bit Segment 1. This parameter can be a
value of CAN_time_quantum_in_bit_segment_1
uint8_t CAN_InitTypeDef::CAN_BS2

Specifies the number of time quanta in Bit Segment 2. This parameter can be a
value of CAN_time_quantum_in_bit_segment_2
FunctionalState CAN_InitTypeDef::CAN_TTCM

Enable or disable the time triggered communication mode. This parameter can
be set either to ENABLE or DISABLE.
FunctionalState CAN_InitTypeDef::CAN_ABOM

Enable or disable the automatic bus-off management. This parameter can be set
either to ENABLE or DISABLE.
FunctionalState CAN_InitTypeDef::CAN_AWUM

Enable or disable the automatic wake-up mode. This parameter can be set either
to ENABLE or DISABLE.
FunctionalState CAN_InitTypeDef::CAN_NART

Enable or disable the non-automatic retransmission mode. This parameter can
be set either to ENABLE or DISABLE.
FunctionalState CAN_InitTypeDef::CAN_RFLM

Enable or disable the Receive FIFO Locked mode. This parameter can be set
either to ENABLE or DISABLE.
FunctionalState CAN_InitTypeDef::CAN_TXFP

Enable or disable the transmit FIFO priority. This parameter can be set either to
ENABLE or DISABLE.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Controller area network (bxCAN)
UM1581
4.1.6
CAN_FilterInitTypeDef
CAN_FilterInitTypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x_can.h
Data Fields









uint16_t CAN_FilterIdHigh
uint16_t CAN_FilterIdLow
uint16_t CAN_FilterMaskIdHigh
uint16_t CAN_FilterMaskIdLow
uint16_t CAN_FilterFIFOAssignment
uint8_t CAN_FilterNumber
uint8_t CAN_FilterMode
uint8_t CAN_FilterScale
FunctionalState CAN_FilterActivation
Field Documentation









uint16_t CAN_FilterInitTypeDef::CAN_FilterIdHigh

Specifies the filter identification number (MSBs for a 32-bit configuration, first
one for a 16-bit configuration). This parameter can be a value between 0x0000
and 0xFFFF
uint16_t CAN_FilterInitTypeDef::CAN_FilterIdLow

Specifies the filter identification number (LSBs for a 32-bit configuration, second
one for a 16-bit configuration). This parameter can be a value between 0x0000
and 0xFFFF
uint16_t CAN_FilterInitTypeDef::CAN_FilterMaskIdHigh

Specifies the filter mask number or identification number, according to the mode
(MSBs for a 32-bit configuration, first one for a 16-bit configuration). This
parameter can be a value between 0x0000 and 0xFFFF
uint16_t CAN_FilterInitTypeDef::CAN_FilterMaskIdLow

Specifies the filter mask number or identification number, according to the mode
(LSBs for a 32-bit configuration, second one for a 16-bit configuration). This
parameter can be a value between 0x0000 and 0xFFFF
uint16_t CAN_FilterInitTypeDef::CAN_FilterFIFOAssignment

Specifies the FIFO (0 or 1) which will be assigned to the filter. This parameter
can be a value of CAN_filter_FIFO
uint8_t CAN_FilterInitTypeDef::CAN_FilterNumber

Specifies the filter which will be initialized. It ranges from 0 to 13.
uint8_t CAN_FilterInitTypeDef::CAN_FilterMode

Specifies the filter mode to be initialized. This parameter can be a value of
CAN_filter_mode
uint8_t CAN_FilterInitTypeDef::CAN_FilterScale

Specifies the filter scale. This parameter can be a value of CAN_filter_scale
FunctionalState CAN_FilterInitTypeDef::CAN_FilterActivation

Enable or disable the filter. This parameter can be set either to ENABLE or
DISABLE.
DocID023800 Rev 1
109/584
Controller area network (bxCAN)
4.1.7
UM1581
CanRxMsg
CanRxMsg is defined in the stm32f30x_can.h
Data Fields







uint32_t StdId
uint32_t ExtId
uint8_t IDE
uint8_t RTR
uint8_t DLC
uint8_t Data
uint8_t FMI
Field Documentation







4.1.8
uint32_t CanRxMsg::StdId

Specifies the standard identifier. This parameter can be a value between 0 to
0x7FF.
uint32_t CanRxMsg::ExtId

Specifies the extended identifier. This parameter can be a value between 0 to
0x1FFFFFFF.
uint8_t CanRxMsg::IDE

Specifies the type of identifier for the message that will be received. This
parameter can be a value of CAN_identifier_type
uint8_t CanRxMsg::RTR

Specifies the type of frame for the received message. This parameter can be a
value of CAN_remote_transmission_request
uint8_t CanRxMsg::DLC

Specifies the length of the frame that will be received. This parameter can be a
value between 0 to 8
uint8_t CanRxMsg::Data[8]

Contains the data to be received. It ranges from 0 to 0xFF.
uint8_t CanRxMsg::FMI

Specifies the index of the filter the message stored in the mailbox passes
through. This parameter can be a value between 0 to 0xFF
CanTxMsg
CanTxMsg is defined in the stm32f30x_can.h
Data Fields






110/584
uint32_t StdId
uint32_t ExtId
uint8_t IDE
uint8_t RTR
uint8_t DLC
uint8_t Data
DocID023800 Rev 1
Controller area network (bxCAN)
UM1581
Field Documentation






4.2
uint32_t CanTxMsg::StdId

Specifies the standard identifier. This parameter can be a value between 0 to
0x7FF.
uint32_t CanTxMsg::ExtId

Specifies the extended identifier. This parameter can be a value between 0 to
0x1FFFFFFF.
uint8_t CanTxMsg::IDE

Specifies the type of identifier for the message that will be transmitted. This
parameter can be a value of CAN_identifier_type
uint8_t CanTxMsg::RTR

Specifies the type of frame for the message that will be transmitted. This
parameter can be a value of CAN_remote_transmission_request
uint8_t CanTxMsg::DLC

Specifies the length of the frame that will be transmitted. This parameter can be
a value between 0 to 8
uint8_t CanTxMsg::Data[8]

Contains the data to be transmitted. It ranges from 0 to 0xFF.
CAN Firmware driver API description
The following section lists the various functions of the CAN library.
4.2.1
How to use this driver
1.
Enable the CAN controller interface clock using
RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_CAN1, ENABLE);
2.
CAN pins configuration:

Enable the clock for the CAN GPIOs using the following function:
RCC_AHB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOx, ENABLE);

Connect the involved CAN pins to AF9 using the following function
GPIO_PinAFConfig(GPIOx, GPIO_PinSourcex, GPIO_AF_CANx);

Configure these CAN pins in alternate function mode by calling the function
GPIO_Init();
3.
Initialise and configure the CAN using CAN_Init() and CAN_FilterInit() functions.
4.
Transmit the desired CAN frame using CAN_Transmit() function.
5.
Check the transmission of a CAN frame using CAN_TransmitStatus() function.
6.
Cancel the transmission of a CAN frame using CAN_CancelTransmit() function.
7.
Receive a CAN frame using CAN_Recieve() function.
8.
Release the receive FIFOs using CAN_FIFORelease() function.
9.
Return the number of pending received frames using CAN_MessagePending()
function.
10. To control CAN events you can use one of the following two methods:

Check on CAN flags using the CAN_GetFlagStatus() function.

Use CAN interrupts through the function CAN_ITConfig() at initialization phase
and CAN_GetITStatus() function into interrupt routines to check if the event has
occurred or not. After checking on a flag you should clear it using
DocID023800 Rev 1
111/584
Controller area network (bxCAN)
UM1581
CAN_ClearFlag() function. And after checking on an interrupt event you should
clear it using CAN_ClearITPendingBit() function.
4.2.2
Initialization and Configuration functions
This section provides functions allowing to:












4.2.3
Initialize the CAN peripherals : Prescaler, operating mode, the maximum number of
time quanta to perform resynchronization, the number of time quanta in Bit Segment 1
and 2 and many other modes.
Configure the CAN reception filter.
Select the start bank filter for slave CAN.
Enable or disable the Debug Freeze mode for CAN.
Enable or disable the CAN Time Trigger Operation communication mode.
CAN_DeInit()
CAN_Init()
CAN_FilterInit()
CAN_StructInit()
CAN_SlaveStartBank()
CAN_DBGFreeze()
CAN_TTComModeCmd()
CAN Frames Transmission functions
This section provides functions allowing to






4.2.4
Initiate and transmit a CAN frame message (if there is an empty mailbox).
Check the transmission status of a CAN Frame.
Cancel a transmit request.
CAN_Transmit()
CAN_TransmitStatus()
CAN_CancelTransmit()
CAN Frames Reception functions
This section provides functions allowing to






4.2.5
Receive a correct CAN frame.
Release a specified receive FIFO (2 FIFOs are available).
Return the number of the pending received CAN frames.
CAN_Receive()
CAN_FIFORelease()
CAN_MessagePending()
CAN Operation modes functions
This section provides functions allowing to select the CAN Operation modes:



112/584
sleep mode.
normal mode.
initialization mode.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Controller area network (bxCAN)
UM1581



4.2.6
CAN_OperatingModeRequest()
CAN_Sleep()
CAN_WakeUp()
CAN Bus Error management functions
This section provides functions allowing to



Return the CANx's last error code (LEC).
Return the CANx Receive Error Counter (REC).
Return the LSB of the 9-bit CANx Transmit Error Counter(TEC).
If TEC is greater than 255, The CAN is in bus-off state.
If REC or TEC are greater than 96, an Error warning flag occurs.
If REC or TEC are greater than 127, an Error Passive Flag occurs.



4.2.7
CAN_GetLastErrorCode()
CAN_GetReceiveErrorCounter()
CAN_GetLSBTransmitErrorCounter()
Interrupts and flags management functions
This section provides functions allowing to configure the CAN Interrupts and to get the
status and clear flags and Interrupts pending bits.
The CAN provides 14 Interrupts sources and 15 Flags:
Flags
The 15 flags can be divided on 4 groups:


Transmit Flags:

CAN_FLAG_RQCP0.

CAN_FLAG_RQCP1.

CAN_FLAG_RQCP2: Request completed MailBoxes 0, 1 and 2 Flags Set when
when the last request (transmit or abort) has been performed.
Receive Flags:

CAN_FLAG_FMP0.

CAN_FLAG_FMP1: FIFO 0 and 1 Message Pending Flags; Set to signal that
messages are pending in the receive FIFO. These Flags are cleared only by
hardware.

CAN_FLAG_FF0.
DocID023800 Rev 1
113/584
Controller area network (bxCAN)
UM1581

CAN_FLAG_FF1: FIFO 0 and 1 Full Flags; Set when three messages are stored
in the selected FIFO.

CAN_FLAG_FOV0.

CAN_FLAG_FOV1: FIFO 0 and 1 Overrun Flags; Set when a new message has
been received and passed the filter while the FIFO was full.

Operating Mode Flags:

CAN_FLAG_WKU: Wake up Flag; Set to signal that a SOF bit has been
detected while the CAN hardware was in Sleep mode.

CAN_FLAG_SLAK: Sleep acknowledge Flag; Set to signal that the CAN has
entered Sleep Mode.

Error Flags:

CAN_FLAG_EWG: Error Warning Flag; Set when the warning limit has been
reached (Receive Error Counter or Transmit Error Counter greater than 96). This
Flag is cleared only by hardware.

CAN_FLAG_EPV: Error Passive Flag; Set when the Error Passive limit has been
reached (Receive Error Counter or Transmit Error Counter greater than 127).
This Flag is cleared only by hardware.

CAN_FLAG_BOF: Bus-Off Flag; Set when CAN enters the bus-off state. The
bus-off state is entered on TEC overflow, greater than 255. This Flag is cleared
only by hardware.

CAN_FLAG_LEC: Last error code Flag; Set If a message has been transferred
(reception or transmission) with error, and the error code is hold.
Interrupts
The 14 interrupts can be divided on 4 groups:




114/584
Transmit interrupt:

CAN_IT_TME: Transmit mailbox empty Interrupt; If enabled, this interrupt source
is pending when no transmit request are pending for Tx mailboxes.
Receive Interrupts:

CAN_IT_FMP0.

CAN_IT_FMP1: FIFO 0 and FIFO1 message pending Interrupts; If enabled,
these interrupt sources are pending when messages are pending in the receive
FIFO. The corresponding interrupt pending bits are cleared only by hardware.

CAN_IT_FF0.

CAN_IT_FF1: FIFO 0 and FIFO1 full Interrupts; If enabled, these interrupt
sources are pending when three messages are stored in the selected FIFO.

CAN_IT_FOV0.

CAN_IT_FOV1: FIFO 0 and FIFO1 overrun Interrupts; If enabled, these interrupt
sources are pending when a new message has been received and passed the
filter while the FIFO was full.
Operating Mode Interrupts:

CAN_IT_WKU: Wake-up Interrupt; If enabled, this interrupt source is pending
when a SOF bit has been detected while the CAN hardware was in Sleep mode.

CAN_IT_SLK: Sleep acknowledge Interrupt: If enabled, this interrupt source is
pending when the CAN has entered Sleep Mode.
Error Interrupts:

CAN_IT_EWG: Error warning Interrupt; If enabled, this interrupt source is
pending when the warning limit has been reached (Receive Error Counter or
Transmit Error Counter=96).

CAN_IT_EPV: Error passive Interrupt; If enabled, this interrupt source is pending
when the Error Passive limit has been reached (Receive Error Counter or
Transmit Error Counter>127).
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581



Controller area network (bxCAN)
CAN_IT_BOF: Bus-off Interrupt; If enabled, this interrupt source is pending when
CAN enters the bus-off state. The bus-off state is entered on TEC overflow,
greater than 255. This Flag is cleared only by hardware.
CAN_IT_LEC: Last error code Interrupt; If enabled, this interrupt source is
pending when a message has been transferred (reception or transmission) with
error and the error code is hold.
CAN_IT_ERR: Error Interrupt; If enabled, this interrupt source is pending when
an error condition is pending.
Managing the CAN controller events: The user should identify which mode will be used in
his application to manage the CAN controller events: Polling mode or Interrupt mode.







In the Polling Mode it is advised to use the following functions:

CAN_GetFlagStatus() : to check if flags events occur.

CAN_ClearFlag() : to clear the flags events.
In the Interrupt Mode it is advised to use the following functions:

CAN_ITConfig() : to enable or disable the interrupt source.

CAN_GetITStatus() : to check if Interrupt occurs.

CAN_ClearITPendingBit() : to clear the Interrupt pending Bit (corresponding
Flag). This function has no impact on CAN_IT_FMP0 and CAN_IT_FMP1
Interrupts pending bits since there are cleared only by hardware.
CAN_ITConfig()
CAN_GetFlagStatus()
CAN_ClearFlag()
CAN_GetITStatus()
CAN_ClearITPendingBit()
4.2.8
Initialization and Configuration functions
4.2.8.1
CAN_DeInit
4.2.8.2
Function Name
void CAN_DeInit ( CAN_TypeDef * CANx)
Function Description
Deinitializes the CAN peripheral registers to their default reset
values.
Parameters

CANx : where x can be 1 to select the CAN1 peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
CAN_Init
Function Name
uint8_t CAN_Init ( CAN_TypeDef * CANx, CAN_InitTypeDef *
CAN_InitStruct)
Function Description
Initializes the CAN peripheral according to the specified
DocID023800 Rev 1
115/584
Controller area network (bxCAN)
UM1581
parameters in the CAN_InitStruct.
4.2.8.3
4.2.8.4
116/584
Parameters


CANx : where x can be 1 to select the CAN1 peripheral.
CAN_InitStruct : pointer to a CAN_InitTypeDef structure that
contains the configuration information for the CAN peripheral.
Return values

Constant indicates initialization succeed which will be
CAN_InitStatus_Failed or CAN_InitStatus_Success.
Notes

None.
CAN_FilterInit
Function Name
void CAN_FilterInit ( CAN_FilterInitTypeDef *
CAN_FilterInitStruct)
Function Description
Configures the CAN reception filter according to the specified
parameters in the CAN_FilterInitStruct.
Parameters

CAN_FilterInitStruct : pointer to a CAN_FilterInitTypeDef
structure that contains the configuration information.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
CAN_StructInit
Function Name
void CAN_StructInit ( CAN_InitTypeDef * CAN_InitStruct)
Function Description
Fills each CAN_InitStruct member with its default value.
Parameters

CAN_InitStruct : pointer to a CAN_InitTypeDef structure
which ill be initialized.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Controller area network (bxCAN)
UM1581
4.2.8.5
4.2.8.6
CAN_SlaveStartBank
Function Name
void CAN_SlaveStartBank ( uint8_t CAN_BankNumber)
Function Description
Select the start bank filter for slave CAN.
Parameters

CAN_BankNumber : Select the start slave bank filter from
1..27.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
CAN_DBGFreeze
Function Name
void CAN_DBGFreeze ( CAN_TypeDef * CANx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the DBG Freeze for CAN.
Parameters


4.2.8.7
CANx : where x can be 1 or 2 to to select the CAN
peripheral.
NewState : new state of the CAN peripheral. This parameter
can be: ENABLE (CAN reception/transmission is frozen
during debug. Reception FIFOs can still be
accessed/controlled normally) or DISABLE (CAN is working
during debug).
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
CAN_TTComModeCmd
Function Name
void CAN_TTComModeCmd ( CAN_TypeDef * CANx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the CAN Time TriggerOperation
communication mode.
Parameters


CANx : where x can be 1 or 2 to to select the CAN
peripheral.
NewState : Mode new state. This parameter can be:
DocID023800 Rev 1
117/584
Controller area network (bxCAN)
UM1581
ENABLE or DISABLE. When enabled, Time stamp
(TIME[15:0]) value is sent in the last two data bytes of the 8byte message: TIME[7:0] in data byte 6 and TIME[15:8] in
data byte 7.
Return values

None.
Notes

DLC must be programmed as 8 in order Time Stamp (2 bytes)
to be sent over the CAN bus.
4.2.9
CAN Frames Transmission functions
4.2.9.1
CAN_Transmit
Function Name
uint8_t CAN_Transmit ( CAN_TypeDef * CANx, CanTxMsg *
TxMessage)
Function Description
Initiates and transmits a CAN frame message.
Parameters


4.2.9.2
118/584
CANx : where x can be 1 or 2 to to select the CAN
peripheral.
TxMessage : pointer to a structure which contains CAN Id,
CAN DLC and CAN data.
Return values

The number of the mailbox that is used for transmission
or CAN_TxStatus_NoMailBox if there is no empty
mailbox.
Notes

None.
CAN_TransmitStatus
Function Name
uint8_t CAN_TransmitStatus ( CAN_TypeDef * CANx, uint8_t
TransmitMailbox)
Function Description
Checks the transmission status of a CAN Frame.
Parameters


CANx : where x can be 1 to select the CAN1 peripheral.
TransmitMailbox : the number of the mailbox that is used
for transmission.
Return values

CAN_TxStatus_Ok if the CAN driver transmits the
message, CAN_TxStatus_Failed in an other case.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Controller area network (bxCAN)
UM1581
4.2.9.3
CAN_CancelTransmit
Function Name
void CAN_CancelTransmit ( CAN_TypeDef * CANx, uint8_t
Mailbox)
Function Description
Cancels a transmit request.
Parameters


CANx : where x can be 1 to select the CAN1 peripheral.
Mailbox : Mailbox number.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
4.2.10
CAN Frames Reception functions
4.2.10.1
CAN_Receive
Function Name
void CAN_Receive ( CAN_TypeDef * CANx, uint8_t
FIFONumber, CanRxMsg * RxMessage)
Function Description
Receives a correct CAN frame.
Parameters



4.2.10.2
CANx : where x can be 1 to select the CAN1 peripheral.
FIFONumber : Receive FIFO number, CAN_FIFO0 or
CAN_FIFO1.
RxMessage : pointer to a structure receive frame which
contains CAN Id, CAN DLC, CAN data and FMI number.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
CAN_FIFORelease
Function Name
void CAN_FIFORelease ( CAN_TypeDef * CANx, uint8_t
DocID023800 Rev 1
119/584
Controller area network (bxCAN)
UM1581
FIFONumber)
4.2.10.3
Function Description
Releases the specified receive FIFO.
Parameters


CANx : where x can be 1 to select the CAN1 peripheral.
FIFONumber : FIFO to release, CAN_FIFO0 or CAN_FIFO1.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
CAN_MessagePending
Function Name
uint8_t CAN_MessagePending ( CAN_TypeDef * CANx,
uint8_t FIFONumber)
Function Description
Returns the number of pending received messages.
Parameters


CANx : where x can be 1 to select the CAN1 peripheral.
FIFONumber : Receive FIFO number, CAN_FIFO0 or
CAN_FIFO1.
Return values

NbMessage : which is the number of pending message.
Notes

None.
4.2.11
CAN Operating mode functions
4.2.11.1
CAN_OperatingModeRequest
120/584
Function Name
uint8_t CAN_OperatingModeRequest ( CAN_TypeDef * CANx,
uint8_t CAN_OperatingMode)
Function Description
Selects the CAN Operation mode.
Parameters

CAN_OperatingMode : CAN Operating Mode. This
parameter can be one of CAN_OperatingMode_TypeDef
enumeration.
Return values

status of the requested mode which can be:

CAN_ModeStatus_Failed: CAN failed entering the
specific mode

CAN_ModeStatus_Success: CAN Succeed entering
the specific mode
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Controller area network (bxCAN)
UM1581
4.2.11.2
4.2.11.3
CAN_Sleep
Function Name
uint8_t CAN_Sleep ( CAN_TypeDef * CANx)
Function Description
Enters the Sleep (low power) mode.
Parameters

CANx : where x can be 1 to select the CAN1 peripheral.
Return values

CAN_Sleep_Ok if sleep entered, CAN_Sleep_Failed
otherwise.
Notes

None.
CAN_WakeUp
Function Name
uint8_t CAN_WakeUp ( CAN_TypeDef * CANx)
Function Description
Wakes up the CAN peripheral from sleep mode .
Parameters

CANx : where x can be 1 to select the CAN1 peripheral.
Return values

CAN_WakeUp_Ok if sleep mode left,
CAN_WakeUp_Failed otherwise.
Notes

None.
4.2.12
CAN Bus Error management functions
4.2.12.1
CAN_GetLastErrorCode
Function Name
uint8_t CAN_GetLastErrorCode ( CAN_TypeDef * CANx)
Function Description
Returns the CANx's last error code (LEC).
Parameters

CANx : where x can be 1 to select the CAN1 peripheral.
Return values

Error code:

CAN_ERRORCODE_NoErr: No Error
DocID023800 Rev 1
121/584
Controller area network (bxCAN)
UM1581







Notes
4.2.12.2
4.2.12.3
122/584

CAN_ERRORCODE_StuffErr: Stuff Error
CAN_ERRORCODE_FormErr: Form Error
CAN_ERRORCODE_ACKErr : Acknowledgment Error
CAN_ERRORCODE_BitRecessiveErr: Bit Recessive
Error
CAN_ERRORCODE_BitDominantErr: Bit Dominant
Error
CAN_ERRORCODE_CRCErr: CRC Error
CAN_ERRORCODE_SoftwareSetErr: Software Set
Error
None.
CAN_GetReceiveErrorCounter
Function Name
uint8_t CAN_GetReceiveErrorCounter ( CAN_TypeDef *
CANx)
Function Description
Returns the CANx Receive Error Counter (REC).
Parameters

CANx : where x can be 1 or 2 to to select the CAN
peripheral.
Return values

CAN Receive Error Counter.
Notes

In case of an error during reception, this counter is
incremented by 1 or by 8 depending on the error condition as
defined by the CAN standard. After every successful
reception, the counter is decremented by 1 or reset to 120 if
its value was higher than 128. When the counter value
exceeds 127, the CAN controller enters the error passive
state.
CAN_GetLSBTransmitErrorCounter
Function Name
uint8_t CAN_GetLSBTransmitErrorCounter ( CAN_TypeDef *
CANx)
Function Description
Returns the LSB of the 9-bit CANx Transmit Error Counter(TEC).
Parameters

CANx : where x can be 1 or 2 to to select the CAN
peripheral.
Return values

LSB of the 9-bit CAN Transmit Error Counter.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Controller area network (bxCAN)
UM1581
4.2.13
Interrupts and flags management functions
4.2.13.1
CAN_ITConfig
Function Name
void CAN_ITConfig ( CAN_TypeDef * CANx, uint32_t CAN_IT,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the specified CANx interrupts.
Parameters



4.2.13.2
CANx : where x can be 1 or 2 to to select the CAN
peripheral.
CAN_IT : specifies the CAN interrupt sources to be enabled
or disabled. This parameter can be:

CAN_IT_TME : Transmit mailbox empty Interrupt

CAN_IT_FMP0 : FIFO 0 message pending Interrupt

CAN_IT_FF0 : FIFO 0 full Interrupt

CAN_IT_FOV0 : FIFO 0 overrun Interrupt

CAN_IT_FMP1 : FIFO 1 message pending Interrupt

CAN_IT_FF1 : FIFO 1 full Interrupt

CAN_IT_FOV1 : FIFO 1 overrun Interrupt

CAN_IT_WKU : Wake-up Interrupt

CAN_IT_SLK : Sleep acknowledge Interrupt

CAN_IT_EWG : Error warning Interrupt

CAN_IT_EPV : Error passive Interrupt

CAN_IT_BOF : Bus-off Interrupt

CAN_IT_LEC : Last error code Interrupt

CAN_IT_ERR : Error Interrupt
NewState : new state of the CAN interrupts. This parameter
can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
CAN_GetFlagStatus
Function Name
FlagStatus CAN_GetFlagStatus ( CAN_TypeDef * CANx,
uint32_t CAN_FLAG)
Function Description
Checks whether the specified CAN flag is set or not.
Parameters


CANx : where x can be 1 or 2 to to select the CAN
peripheral.
CAN_FLAG : specifies the flag to check. This parameter can
be one of the following values:
DocID023800 Rev 1
123/584
Controller area network (bxCAN)















4.2.13.3
Return values

The new state of CAN_FLAG (SET or RESET).
Notes

None.
CAN_ClearFlag
Function Name
void CAN_ClearFlag ( CAN_TypeDef * CANx, uint32_t
CAN_FLAG)
Function Description
Clears the CAN's pending flags.
Parameters


124/584
UM1581
CAN_FLAG_RQCP0 : Request MailBox0 Flag
CAN_FLAG_RQCP1 : Request MailBox1 Flag
CAN_FLAG_RQCP2 : Request MailBox2 Flag
CAN_FLAG_FMP0 : FIFO 0 Message Pending Flag
CAN_FLAG_FF0 : FIFO 0 Full Flag
CAN_FLAG_FOV0 : FIFO 0 Overrun Flag
CAN_FLAG_FMP1 : FIFO 1 Message Pending Flag
CAN_FLAG_FF1 : FIFO 1 Full Flag
CAN_FLAG_FOV1 : FIFO 1 Overrun Flag
CAN_FLAG_WKU : Wake up Flag
CAN_FLAG_SLAK : Sleep acknowledge Flag
CAN_FLAG_EWG : Error Warning Flag
CAN_FLAG_EPV : Error Passive Flag
CAN_FLAG_BOF : Bus-Off Flag
CAN_FLAG_LEC : Last error code Flag
CANx : where x can be 1 or 2 to to select the CAN
peripheral.
CAN_FLAG : specifies the flag to clear. This parameter can
be one of the following values:

CAN_FLAG_RQCP0 : Request MailBox0 Flag

CAN_FLAG_RQCP1 : Request MailBox1 Flag

CAN_FLAG_RQCP2 : Request MailBox2 Flag

CAN_FLAG_FF0 : FIFO 0 Full Flag

CAN_FLAG_FOV0 : FIFO 0 Overrun Flag

CAN_FLAG_FF1 : FIFO 1 Full Flag

CAN_FLAG_FOV1 : FIFO 1 Overrun Flag

CAN_FLAG_WKU : Wake up Flag

CAN_FLAG_SLAK : Sleep acknowledge Flag

CAN_FLAG_LEC : Last error code Flag
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Controller area network (bxCAN)
UM1581
4.2.13.4
CAN_GetITStatus
Function Name
ITStatus CAN_GetITStatus ( CAN_TypeDef * CANx, uint32_t
CAN_IT)
Function Description
Checks whether the specified CANx interrupt has occurred or not.
Parameters


4.2.13.5
CANx : where x can be 1 or 2 to to select the CAN
peripheral.
CAN_IT : specifies the CAN interrupt source to check. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

CAN_IT_TME : Transmit mailbox empty Interrupt

CAN_IT_FMP0 : FIFO 0 message pending Interrupt

CAN_IT_FF0 : FIFO 0 full Interrupt

CAN_IT_FOV0 : FIFO 0 overrun Interrupt

CAN_IT_FMP1 : FIFO 1 message pending Interrupt

CAN_IT_FF1 : FIFO 1 full Interrupt

CAN_IT_FOV1 : FIFO 1 overrun Interrupt

CAN_IT_WKU : Wake-up Interrupt

CAN_IT_SLK : Sleep acknowledge Interrupt

CAN_IT_EWG : Error warning Interrupt

CAN_IT_EPV : Error passive Interrupt

CAN_IT_BOF : Bus-off Interrupt

CAN_IT_LEC : Last error code Interrupt

CAN_IT_ERR : Error Interrupt
Return values

The current state of CAN_IT (SET or RESET).
Notes

None.
CAN_ClearITPendingBit
Function Name
void CAN_ClearITPendingBit ( CAN_TypeDef * CANx, uint32_t
CAN_IT)
Function Description
Clears the CANx's interrupt pending bits.
Parameters


CANx : where x can be 1 or 2 to to select the CAN
peripheral.
CAN_IT : specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

CAN_IT_TME : Transmit mailbox empty Interrupt

CAN_IT_FF0 : FIFO 0 full Interrupt

CAN_IT_FOV0 : FIFO 0 overrun Interrupt

CAN_IT_FF1 : FIFO 1 full Interrupt

CAN_IT_FOV1 : FIFO 1 overrun Interrupt

CAN_IT_WKU : Wake-up Interrupt
DocID023800 Rev 1
125/584
Controller area network (bxCAN)
UM1581






CAN_IT_SLK : Sleep acknowledge Interrupt
CAN_IT_EWG : Error warning Interrupt
CAN_IT_EPV : Error passive Interrupt
CAN_IT_BOF : Bus-off Interrupt
CAN_IT_LEC : Last error code Interrupt
CAN_IT_ERR : Error Interrupt
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
4.3
CAN Firmware driver defines
4.3.1
CAN
CAN
CAN_Error_Code_constants

#define: CAN_ErrorCode_NoErr ((uint8_t)0x00)
No Error

#define: CAN_ErrorCode_StuffErr ((uint8_t)0x10)
Stuff Error

#define: CAN_ErrorCode_FormErr ((uint8_t)0x20)
Form Error

#define: CAN_ErrorCode_ACKErr ((uint8_t)0x30)
Acknowledgment Error

#define: CAN_ErrorCode_BitRecessiveErr ((uint8_t)0x40)
Bit Recessive Error

#define: CAN_ErrorCode_BitDominantErr ((uint8_t)0x50)
Bit Dominant Error

#define: CAN_ErrorCode_CRCErr ((uint8_t)0x60)
CRC Error

126/584
#define: CAN_ErrorCode_SoftwareSetErr ((uint8_t)0x70)
DocID023800 Rev 1
Controller area network (bxCAN)
UM1581
Software Set Error
CAN_filter_FIFO

#define: CAN_Filter_FIFO0 ((uint8_t)0x00)
Filter FIFO 0 assignment for filter x

#define: CAN_Filter_FIFO1 ((uint8_t)0x01)
Filter FIFO 1 assignment for filter x

#define: CAN_FilterFIFO0 CAN_Filter_FIFO0

#define: CAN_FilterFIFO1 CAN_Filter_FIFO1
CAN_filter_mode

#define: CAN_FilterMode_IdMask ((uint8_t)0x00)
identifier/mask mode

#define: CAN_FilterMode_IdList ((uint8_t)0x01)
identifier list mode
CAN_filter_scale

#define: CAN_FilterScale_16bit ((uint8_t)0x00)
Two 16-bit filters

#define: CAN_FilterScale_32bit ((uint8_t)0x01)
One 32-bit filter
CAN_flags

#define: CAN_FLAG_RQCP0 ((uint32_t)0x38000001)
Request MailBox0 Flag

#define: CAN_FLAG_RQCP1 ((uint32_t)0x38000100)
Request MailBox1 Flag
DocID023800 Rev 1
127/584
Controller area network (bxCAN)

#define: CAN_FLAG_RQCP2 ((uint32_t)0x38010000)
Request MailBox2 Flag

#define: CAN_FLAG_FMP0 ((uint32_t)0x12000003)
FIFO 0 Message Pending Flag

#define: CAN_FLAG_FF0 ((uint32_t)0x32000008)
FIFO 0 Full Flag

#define: CAN_FLAG_FOV0 ((uint32_t)0x32000010)
FIFO 0 Overrun Flag

#define: CAN_FLAG_FMP1 ((uint32_t)0x14000003)
FIFO 1 Message Pending Flag

#define: CAN_FLAG_FF1 ((uint32_t)0x34000008)
FIFO 1 Full Flag

#define: CAN_FLAG_FOV1 ((uint32_t)0x34000010)
FIFO 1 Overrun Flag

#define: CAN_FLAG_WKU ((uint32_t)0x31000008)
Wake up Flag

#define: CAN_FLAG_SLAK ((uint32_t)0x31000012)
Sleep acknowledge Flag

#define: CAN_FLAG_EWG ((uint32_t)0x10F00001)
Error Warning Flag

#define: CAN_FLAG_EPV ((uint32_t)0x10F00002)
Error Passive Flag

#define: CAN_FLAG_BOF ((uint32_t)0x10F00004)
Bus-Off Flag
128/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Controller area network (bxCAN)
UM1581

#define: CAN_FLAG_LEC ((uint32_t)0x30F00070)
Last error code Flag
CAN_identifier_type

#define: CAN_Id_Standard ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
Standard Id

#define: CAN_Id_Extended ((uint32_t)0x00000004)
Extended Id

#define: CAN_ID_STD CAN_Id_Standard

#define: CAN_ID_EXT CAN_Id_Extended
CAN_InitStatus

#define: CAN_InitStatus_Failed ((uint8_t)0x00)
CAN initialization failed

#define: CAN_InitStatus_Success ((uint8_t)0x01)
CAN initialization OK

#define: CANINITFAILED CAN_InitStatus_Failed

#define: CANINITOK CAN_InitStatus_Success
CAN_interrupts

#define: CAN_IT_TME ((uint32_t)0x00000001)
Transmit mailbox empty Interrupt

#define: CAN_IT_FMP0 ((uint32_t)0x00000002)
FIFO 0 message pending Interrupt
DocID023800 Rev 1
129/584
Controller area network (bxCAN)

#define: CAN_IT_FF0 ((uint32_t)0x00000004)
FIFO 0 full Interrupt

#define: CAN_IT_FOV0 ((uint32_t)0x00000008)
FIFO 0 overrun Interrupt

#define: CAN_IT_FMP1 ((uint32_t)0x00000010)
FIFO 1 message pending Interrupt

#define: CAN_IT_FF1 ((uint32_t)0x00000020)
FIFO 1 full Interrupt

#define: CAN_IT_FOV1 ((uint32_t)0x00000040)
FIFO 1 overrun Interrupt

#define: CAN_IT_WKU ((uint32_t)0x00010000)
Wake-up Interrupt

#define: CAN_IT_SLK ((uint32_t)0x00020000)
Sleep acknowledge Interrupt

#define: CAN_IT_EWG ((uint32_t)0x00000100)
Error warning Interrupt

#define: CAN_IT_EPV ((uint32_t)0x00000200)
Error passive Interrupt

#define: CAN_IT_BOF ((uint32_t)0x00000400)
Bus-off Interrupt

#define: CAN_IT_LEC ((uint32_t)0x00000800)
Last error code Interrupt

#define: CAN_IT_ERR ((uint32_t)0x00008000)
Error Interrupt
130/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Controller area network (bxCAN)
UM1581

#define: CAN_IT_RQCP0 CAN_IT_TME

#define: CAN_IT_RQCP1 CAN_IT_TME

#define: CAN_IT_RQCP2 CAN_IT_TME
CAN_operating_mode

#define: CAN_Mode_Normal ((uint8_t)0x00)
normal mode

#define: CAN_Mode_LoopBack ((uint8_t)0x01)
loopback mode

#define: CAN_Mode_Silent ((uint8_t)0x02)
silent mode

#define: CAN_Mode_Silent_LoopBack ((uint8_t)0x03)
loopback combined with silent mode

#define: CAN_OperatingMode_Initialization ((uint8_t)0x00)
Initialization mode

#define: CAN_OperatingMode_Normal ((uint8_t)0x01)
Normal mode

#define: CAN_OperatingMode_Sleep ((uint8_t)0x02)
sleep mode
CAN_operating_mode_status

#define: CAN_ModeStatus_Failed ((uint8_t)0x00)
CAN entering the specific mode failed

#define: CAN_ModeStatus_Success ((uint8_t)!CAN_ModeStatus_Failed)
DocID023800 Rev 1
131/584
Controller area network (bxCAN)
CAN entering the specific mode Succeed
CAN_receive_FIFO_number_constants

#define: CAN_FIFO0 ((uint8_t)0x00)
CAN FIFO 0 used to receive

#define: CAN_FIFO1 ((uint8_t)0x01)
CAN FIFO 1 used to receive
CAN_remote_transmission_request

#define: CAN_RTR_Data ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
Data frame

#define: CAN_RTR_Remote ((uint32_t)0x00000002)
Remote frame

#define: CAN_RTR_DATA CAN_RTR_Data

#define: CAN_RTR_REMOTE CAN_RTR_Remote
CAN_sleep_constants

#define: CAN_Sleep_Failed ((uint8_t)0x00)
CAN did not enter the sleep mode

#define: CAN_Sleep_Ok ((uint8_t)0x01)
CAN entered the sleep mode

#define: CANSLEEPFAILED CAN_Sleep_Failed

#define: CANSLEEPOK CAN_Sleep_Ok
CAN_synchronisation_jump_width
132/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Controller area network (bxCAN)
UM1581

#define: CAN_SJW_1tq ((uint8_t)0x00)
1 time quantum

#define: CAN_SJW_2tq ((uint8_t)0x01)
2 time quantum

#define: CAN_SJW_3tq ((uint8_t)0x02)
3 time quantum

#define: CAN_SJW_4tq ((uint8_t)0x03)
4 time quantum
CAN_time_quantum_in_bit_segment_1

#define: CAN_BS1_1tq ((uint8_t)0x00)
1 time quantum

#define: CAN_BS1_2tq ((uint8_t)0x01)
2 time quantum

#define: CAN_BS1_3tq ((uint8_t)0x02)
3 time quantum

#define: CAN_BS1_4tq ((uint8_t)0x03)
4 time quantum

#define: CAN_BS1_5tq ((uint8_t)0x04)
5 time quantum

#define: CAN_BS1_6tq ((uint8_t)0x05)
6 time quantum

#define: CAN_BS1_7tq ((uint8_t)0x06)
7 time quantum

#define: CAN_BS1_8tq ((uint8_t)0x07)
8 time quantum
DocID023800 Rev 1
133/584
Controller area network (bxCAN)

UM1581
#define: CAN_BS1_9tq ((uint8_t)0x08)
9 time quantum

#define: CAN_BS1_10tq ((uint8_t)0x09)
10 time quantum

#define: CAN_BS1_11tq ((uint8_t)0x0A)
11 time quantum

#define: CAN_BS1_12tq ((uint8_t)0x0B)
12 time quantum

#define: CAN_BS1_13tq ((uint8_t)0x0C)
13 time quantum

#define: CAN_BS1_14tq ((uint8_t)0x0D)
14 time quantum

#define: CAN_BS1_15tq ((uint8_t)0x0E)
15 time quantum

#define: CAN_BS1_16tq ((uint8_t)0x0F)
16 time quantum
CAN_time_quantum_in_bit_segment_2

#define: CAN_BS2_1tq ((uint8_t)0x00)
1 time quantum

#define: CAN_BS2_2tq ((uint8_t)0x01)
2 time quantum

#define: CAN_BS2_3tq ((uint8_t)0x02)
3 time quantum

134/584
#define: CAN_BS2_4tq ((uint8_t)0x03)
DocID023800 Rev 1
Controller area network (bxCAN)
UM1581
4 time quantum

#define: CAN_BS2_5tq ((uint8_t)0x04)
5 time quantum

#define: CAN_BS2_6tq ((uint8_t)0x05)
6 time quantum

#define: CAN_BS2_7tq ((uint8_t)0x06)
7 time quantum

#define: CAN_BS2_8tq ((uint8_t)0x07)
8 time quantum
CAN_transmit_constants

#define: CAN_TxStatus_Failed ((uint8_t)0x00)
CAN transmission failed

#define: CAN_TxStatus_Ok ((uint8_t)0x01)
CAN transmission succeeded

#define: CAN_TxStatus_Pending ((uint8_t)0x02)
CAN transmission pending

#define: CAN_TxStatus_NoMailBox ((uint8_t)0x04)
CAN cell did not provide an empty mailbox

#define: CANTXFAILED CAN_TxStatus_Failed

#define: CANTXOK CAN_TxStatus_Ok

#define: CANTXPENDING CAN_TxStatus_Pending
DocID023800 Rev 1
135/584
Controller area network (bxCAN)

#define: CAN_NO_MB CAN_TxStatus_NoMailBox
CAN_wake_up_constants

#define: CAN_WakeUp_Failed ((uint8_t)0x00)
CAN did not leave the sleep mode

#define: CAN_WakeUp_Ok ((uint8_t)0x01)
CAN leaved the sleep mode
136/584

#define: CANWAKEUPFAILED CAN_WakeUp_Failed

#define: CANWAKEUPOK CAN_WakeUp_Ok
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Comparators (COMP)
UM1581
5
Comparators (COMP)
5.1
COMP Firmware driver registers structures
5.1.1
COMP_TypeDef
COMP_TypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x.h
Data Fields

__IO uint32_t CSR
Field Documentation

5.1.2
__IO uint32_t COMP_TypeDef::CSR

Comparator control Status register, Address offset: 0x00
COMP_InitTypeDef
COMP_InitTypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x_comp.h
Data Fields







uint32_t COMP_InvertingInput
uint32_t COMP_NonInvertingInput
uint32_t COMP_Output
uint32_t COMP_BlankingSrce
uint32_t COMP_OutputPol
uint32_t COMP_Hysteresis
uint32_t COMP_Mode
Field Documentation





uint32_t COMP_InitTypeDef::COMP_InvertingInput

Selects the inverting input of the comparator. This parameter can be a value of
COMP_InvertingInput
uint32_t COMP_InitTypeDef::COMP_NonInvertingInput

Selects the non inverting input of the comparator. This parameter can be a value
of COMP_NonInvertingInput
uint32_t COMP_InitTypeDef::COMP_Output

Selects the output redirection of the comparator. This parameter can be a value
of COMP_Output
uint32_t COMP_InitTypeDef::COMP_BlankingSrce

Selects the output blanking source of the comparator. This parameter can be a
value of COMP_BlankingSrce
uint32_t COMP_InitTypeDef::COMP_OutputPol
DocID023800 Rev 1
137/584
Comparators (COMP)
UM1581

Selects the output polarity of the comparator. This parameter can be a value of
COMP_OutputPoloarity

uint32_t COMP_InitTypeDef::COMP_Hysteresis

Selects the hysteresis voltage of the comparator. This parameter can be a value
of COMP_Hysteresis

uint32_t COMP_InitTypeDef::COMP_Mode

Selects the operating mode of the comparator and allows to adjust the
speed/consumption. This parameter can be a value of COMP_Mode
5.2
COMP Firmware driver API description
The following section lists the various functions of the COMP library.
5.2.1
COMP Peripheral features
The device integrates 7 analog comparators COMP1, COMP2...COMP7:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The non inverting input and inverting input can be set to GPIO pins as shown in
table1. COMP Inputs below.
The COMP output is internally is available using COMP_GetOutputLevel() and can be
set on GPIO pins. Refer to table 2. COMP Outputs below.
The COMP output can be redirected to embedded timers (TIM1, TIM2, TIM3...) Refer
to table 3. COMP Outputs redirection to embedded timers below.
The comparators COMP1 and COMP2, COMP3 and COMP4, COMP5 and COMP6
can be combined in window mode and only COMP1, COMP3 and COMP5 non
inverting input can be used as non-inverting input.
The seven comparators have interrupt capability with wake-up from Sleep and Stop
modes (through the EXTI controller):

COMP1 is internally connected to EXTI Line 21

COMP2 is internally connected to EXTI Line 22

COMP3 is internally connected to EXTI Line 29

COMP4 is internally connected to EXTI Line 30

COMP5 is internally connected to EXTI Line 31

COMP6 is internally connected to EXTI Line 32

COMP7 is internally connected to EXTI Line 33
Table 10: COMP Inputs
Inverting
Input
138/584
COMP1
COMP2
COMP3
COMP4
COMP5
COMP6
COMP7
1/4
VREFINT
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
1/2
VREFINT
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
3/4
VREFINT
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
VREFINT
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
DAC1 OUT
(PA4)
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
DAC2 OUT
(PA5)
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
IO1
PA0
PA2
PD15
PE8
PD13
PD10
PC0
DocID023800 Rev 1
Comparators (COMP)
UM1581
COMP1
COMP2
COMP3
COMP4
COMP5
COMP6
COMP7
Non
Inverting
IO1
PA1
PA7
PB14
PB0
PD12
PD11
PA0
Input
IO2
---
PA3
PD14
PE7
PB13
PB11
PC1
Table 11: COMP Outputs
COMP1
COMP2
COMP3
COMP4
COMP5
COMP6
COMP7
PA0
PA2
PB1
PC8
PC7
PA10
PC2
PF4
PA7
---
PA8
PA9
PC6
---
PA6
PA12
---
---
---
---
---
PA11
PB9
---
---
---
---
---
PB8
---
---
---
---
---
---
Table 12: COMP Outputs redirection to embedded timers
COMP1
COMP2
COMP3
COMP4
COMP5
COMP6
COMP7
TIM1 BKIN
TIM1 BKIN
TIM1 BKIN
TIM1 BKIN
TIM1 BKIN
TIM1 BKIN
TIM1 BKIN
TIM1
BKIN2
TIM1
BKIN2
TIM1
BKIN2
TIM1
BKIN2
TIM1
BKIN2
TIM1
BKIN2
TIM1
BKIN2
TIM8 BKIN
TIM8 BKIN
TIM8 BKIN
TIM8 BKIN
TIM8 BKIN
TIM8 BKIN
TIM8 BKIN
TIM8
BKIN2
TIM8
BKIN2
TIM8
BKIN2
TIM8
BKIN2
TIM8
BKIN2
TIM8
BKIN2
TIM8
BKIN2
TIM1
BKIN2
TIM1
BKIN2
TIM1
BKIN2
TIM1
BKIN2
TIM1
BKIN2
TIM1
BKIN2
TIM1
BKIN2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
TIM8BKIN2
TIM8BKIN2
TIM8BKIN2
TIM8BKIN2
TIM8BKIN2
TIM8BKIN2
TIM8BKIN2
TIM1
OCREFCL
R
TIM1
OCREFCL
R
TIM1
OCREFCL
R
TIM1
OCREFCL
R
TIM1
OCREFCL
R
TIM1
OCREFCL
R
TIM1
OCREFCL
R
TIM1 IC1
TIM1 IC1
TIM2
OCREFCL
R
TIM3 IC3
TIM2 IC1
TIM2 IC2
TIM8
OCREFCL
R
TIM2 IC4
TIM2 IC4
TIM3 IC2
TIM3
OCREFCL
R
TIM3
OCREFCL
R
TIM2
OCREFCL
R
TIM2 IC3
TIM2
OCREFCL
R
TIM2
OCREFCL
R
TIM4 IC1
TIM4 IC2
TIM4 IC3
TIM16
OCREFCL
R
TIM1 IC2
TIM3 IC1
TIM3 IC1
TIM15 IC1
TIM15
OCREFCL
R
TIM16
BKIN
TIM16 IC1
TIM17
OCREFCL
R
TIM3
OCREFCL
R
TIM3
OCREFCL
R
TIM15
BKIN
TIM15 IC2
TIM17 IC1
TIM4 IC4
TIM17
BKIN
DocID023800 Rev 1
139/584
Comparators (COMP)
UM1581
Table 13: COMP Outputs blanking sources
5.2.2
COMP1
COMP2
COMP3
COMP4
COMP5
COMP6
COMP7
TIM1 OC5
TIM1 OC5
TIM1 OC5
TIM3 OC4
TIM3 OC3
TIM2 OC4
TIM1 OC5
TIM3 OC3
TIM3 OC3
TIM2 OC4
TIM15 OC1
TIM8 BKIN
TIM15 OC2
TIM15 OC2
TIM2 OC3
TIM2 OC3
--------
TIM8 OC5
TIM8 OC5
TIM8 OC5
TIM8 OC5
How to use this driver
This driver provides functions to configure and program the Comparators of all
STM32F30x devices. To use the comparator, perform the following steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
5.2.3
Initialization and Configuration functions






5.2.4
COMP_DeInit()
COMP_Init()
COMP_StructInit()
COMP_Cmd()
COMP_SwitchCmd()
COMP_GetOutputLevel()
Window mode control function

140/584
Enable the SYSCFG APB clock to get write access to comparator register using
RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SYSCFG, ENABLE);
Configure the comparator input in analog mode using GPIO_Init()
Configure the comparator output in alternate function mode using GPIO_Init() and
use GPIO_PinAFConfig() function to map the comparator output to the GPIO pin
Configure the comparator using COMP_Init() function:

Select the inverting input

Select the non-inverting input

Select the output polarity

Select the output redirection

Select the hysteresis level

Select the power mode
Enable the comparator using COMP_Cmd() function
If required enable the COMP interrupt by configuring and enabling EXTI line in
Interrupt mode and selecting the desired sensitivity level using EXTI_Init() function.
After that enable the comparator interrupt vector using NVIC_Init() function.
COMP_WindowCmd()
DocID023800 Rev 1
Comparators (COMP)
UM1581
5.2.5
Initialization and Configuration functions
5.2.5.1
COMP_DeInit
5.2.5.2
Function Name
void COMP_DeInit ( uint32_t COMP_Selection)
Function Description
Deinitializes COMP peripheral registers to their default reset
values.
Parameters

COMP_Selection.
Return values

None.
Notes

Deinitialization can't be performed if the COMP configuration
is locked. To unlock the configuration, perform a system
reset.
COMP_Init
Function Name
void COMP_Init ( uint32_t COMP_Selection,
COMP_InitTypeDef * COMP_InitStruct)
Function Description
Initializes the COMP peripheral according to the specified
parameters in COMP_InitStruct.
Parameters


COMP_Selection : the selected comparator. This parameter
can be COMP_Selection_COMPx where x can be 1 to 7 to
select the COMP peripheral.
COMP_InitStruct : pointer to an COMP_InitTypeDef
structure that contains the configuration information for the
specified COMP peripheral. COMP_InvertingInput specifies
the inverting input of COMPCOMP_NonInvertingInput
specifies the non inverting input of COMPCOMP_Output
connect COMP output to selected timer input (Input capture /
Output Compare Reference Clear / Break
Input)COMP_BlankingSrce specifies the blanking source of
COMPCOMP_OutputPol select output
polarityCOMP_Hysteresis configures COMP hysteresis
valueCOMP_Mode configures COMP power mode

COMP_InvertingInput :

COMP_NonInvertingInput :

COMP_Output :

COMP_BlankingSrce :

COMP_OutputPol :

COMP_Hysteresis :
DocID023800 Rev 1
141/584
Comparators (COMP)
UM1581

Return values

None.
Notes

If the selected comparator is locked, initialization can't be
performed. To unlock the configuration, perform a system
reset.
By default, PA1 is selected as COMP1 non inverting input. To
use PA4 as COMP1 non inverting input call
COMP_SwitchCmd() after COMP_Init()

5.2.5.3
5.2.5.4
COMP_StructInit
Function Name
void COMP_StructInit ( COMP_InitTypeDef *
COMP_InitStruct)
Function Description
Fills each COMP_InitStruct member with its default value.
Parameters

COMP_InitStruct : pointer to an COMP_InitTypeDef
structure which will be initialized.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
COMP_Cmd
Function Name
void COMP_Cmd ( uint32_t COMP_Selection, FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Enable or disable the COMP peripheral.
Parameters


142/584
COMP_Mode :
COMP_Selection : the selected comparator. This parameter
can be COMP_Selection_COMPx where x can be 1 to 7 to
select the COMP peripheral.
NewState : new state of the COMP peripheral. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. When enabled, the
comparator compares the non inverting input with the
inverting input and the comparison result is available on
comparator output. When disabled, the comparator doesn't
perform comparison and the output level is low.
Return values

None.
Notes

If the selected comparator is locked, enable/disable can't be
DocID023800 Rev 1
Comparators (COMP)
performed. To unlock the configuration, perform a system
reset.
UM1581
5.2.5.5
COMP_SwitchCmd
Function Name
void COMP_SwitchCmd ( uint32_t COMP_Selection,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Close or Open the SW1 switch.
Parameters

NewState : New state of the analog switch. This parameter
can be ENABLE so the SW1 is closed; PA1 is connected to
PA4 or DISABLE so the SW1 switch is open; PA1 is
disconnected from PA4
Return values

None.
Notes

If the COMP1 is locked, Close/Open the SW1 switch can't be
performed. To unlock the configuration, perform a system
reset.
This switch is solely intended to redirect signals onto high
impedance input, such as COMP1 non-inverting input (highly
resistive switch)

5.2.5.6
COMP_GetOutputLevel
Function Name
uint32_t COMP_GetOutputLevel ( uint32_t COMP_Selection)
Function Description
Return the output level (high or low) of the selected comparator.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
143/584
Comparators (COMP)
UM1581
5.2.6
Write mode control functions
5.2.6.1
COMP_WindowCmd
Function Name
void COMP_WindowCmd ( uint32_t COMP_Selection,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the window mode.
Parameters

COMP_Selection : the selected comparator. This parameter
can be COMP_Selection_COMPx where x can be 2, 4 or 6 to
select the COMP peripheral. param NewState: new state of
the window mode. This parameter can be ENABLE or
DISABLE. When enbaled, COMPx and COMPx-1 non
inverting inputs are connected together. When disabled,
COMPx and COMPx-1 non inverting inputs are disconnected.
Return values

None.
Notes

If the COMPx is locked, ENABLE/DISABLE the window mode
can't be performed. To unlock the configuration, perform a
system reset.
5.2.7
COMP configuration locking function
5.2.7.1
COMP_LockConfig
144/584
Function Name
void COMP_LockConfig ( uint32_t COMP_Selection)
Function Description
Lock the selected comparator (COMP1/COMP2) configuration.
Parameters

COMP_Selection : the selected comparator. This parameter
can be COMP_Selection_COMPx where x can be 1 to 7 to
select the COMP peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

Locking the configuration means that all control bits are readonly. To unlock the comparator configuration, perform a
system reset.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Comparators (COMP)
UM1581
5.3
COMP Firmware driver defines
5.3.1
COMP
COMP
COMP_BlankingSrce

#define: COMP_BlankingSrce_None ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
No blanking source

#define: COMP_BlankingSrce_TIM1OC5 COMP_CSR_COMPxBLANKING_0
TIM1 OC5 selected as blanking source for compartor

#define: COMP_BlankingSrce_TIM2OC3 COMP_CSR_COMPxBLANKING_1
TIM2 OC5 selected as blanking source for compartor

#define: COMP_BlankingSrce_TIM3OC3 ((uint32_t)0x000C0000)
TIM2 OC3 selected as blanking source for compartor

#define: COMP_BlankingSrce_TIM2OC4 ((uint32_t)0x000C0000)
TIM2 OC4 selected as blanking source for compartor

#define: COMP_BlankingSrce_TIM8OC5 COMP_CSR_COMPxBLANKING_1
TIM8 OC5 selected as blanking source for compartor

#define: COMP_BlankingSrce_TIM3OC4 COMP_CSR_COMPxBLANKING_0
TIM3 OC4 selected as blanking source for compartor

#define: COMP_BlankingSrce_TIM15OC1 ((uint32_t)0x000C0000)
TIM15 OC1 selected as blanking source for compartor

#define: COMP_BlankingSrce_TIM15OC2 COMP_CSR_COMPxBLANKING_2
TIM15 OC2 selected as blanking source for compartor
COMP_Hysteresis

#define: COMP_Hysteresis_No 0x00000000
No hysteresis

#define: COMP_Hysteresis_Low COMP_CSR_COMPxHYST_0
DocID023800 Rev 1
145/584
Comparators (COMP)
Hysteresis level low

UM1581
#define: COMP_Hysteresis_Medium COMP_CSR_COMPxHYST_1
Hysteresis level medium

#define: COMP_Hysteresis_High COMP_CSR_COMPxHYST
Hysteresis level high
COMP_InvertingInput

#define: COMP_InvertingInput_1_4VREFINT ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
1/4 VREFINT connected to comparator inverting input

#define: COMP_InvertingInput_1_2VREFINT COMP_CSR_COMPxINSEL_0
1/2 VREFINT connected to comparator inverting input

#define: COMP_InvertingInput_3_4VREFINT COMP_CSR_COMPxINSEL_1
3/4 VREFINT connected to comparator inverting input

#define: COMP_InvertingInput_VREFINT ((uint32_t)0x00000030)
VREFINT connected to comparator inverting input

#define: COMP_InvertingInput_DAC1 COMP_CSR_COMPxINSEL_2
DAC1_OUT (PA4) connected to comparator inverting input

#define: COMP_InvertingInput_DAC2 ((uint32_t)0x00000050)
DAC2_OUT (PA5) connected to comparator inverting input

#define: COMP_InvertingInput_IO1 ((uint32_t)0x00000060)
I/O1 (PA0 for COMP1, PA2 for COMP2, PD15 for COMP3, PE8 for COMP4, PD13 for
COMP5, PD10 for COMP6, PC0 for COMP7) connected to comparator inverting input

#define: COMP_InvertingInput_IO2 COMP_CSR_COMPxINSEL
I/O2 (PB12 for COMP3, PB2 for COMP4, PB10 for COMP5, PB15 for COMP6) connected
to comparator inverting input
COMP_Mode

146/584
#define: COMP_Mode_HighSpeed 0x00000000
DocID023800 Rev 1
Comparators (COMP)
UM1581
High Speed

#define: COMP_Mode_MediumSpeed COMP_CSR_COMPxMODE_0
Medium Speed

#define: COMP_Mode_LowPower COMP_CSR_COMPxMODE_1
Low power mode

#define: COMP_Mode_UltraLowPower COMP_CSR_COMPxMODE
Ultra-low power mode
COMP_NonInvertingInput

#define: COMP_NonInvertingInput_IO1 ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
I/O1 (PA1 for COMP1, PA7 for COMP2, PB14 for COMP3, PB0 for COMP4, PD12 for
COMP5, PD11 for COMP6, PA0 for COMP7) connected to comparator non inverting input

#define: COMP_NonInvertingInput_IO2 COMP_CSR_COMPxNONINSEL
I/O2 (PA3 for COMP2, PD14 for COMP3, PE7 for COMP4, PB13 for COMP5, PB11 for
COMP6, PC1 for COMP7) connected to comparator non inverting input
COMP_Output

#define: COMP_Output_None ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
COMP output isn't connected to other peripherals

#define: COMP_Output_TIM1BKIN COMP_CSR_COMPxOUTSEL_0
COMP output connected to TIM1 Break Input (BKIN)

#define: COMP_Output_TIM1BKIN2 ((uint32_t)0x00000800)
COMP output connected to TIM1 Break Input 2 (BKIN2)

#define: COMP_Output_TIM8BKIN ((uint32_t)0x00000C00)
COMP output connected to TIM8 Break Input (BKIN)

#define: COMP_Output_TIM8BKIN2 ((uint32_t)0x00001000)
COMP output connected to TIM8 Break Input 2 (BKIN2)

#define: COMP_Output_TIM1BKIN2_TIM8BKIN2 ((uint32_t)0x00001400)
DocID023800 Rev 1
147/584
Comparators (COMP)
COMP output connected to TIM1 Break Input 2 and TIM8 Break Input 2

#define: COMP_Output_TIM1OCREFCLR ((uint32_t)0x00001800)
COMP output connected to TIM1 OCREF Clear

#define: COMP_Output_TIM1IC1 ((uint32_t)0x00001C00)
COMP output connected to TIM1 Input Capture 1

#define: COMP_Output_TIM2IC4 ((uint32_t)0x00002000)
COMP output connected to TIM2 Input Capture 4

#define: COMP_Output_TIM2OCREFCLR ((uint32_t)0x00002400)
COMP output connected to TIM2 OCREF Clear

#define: COMP_Output_TIM3IC1 ((uint32_t)0x00002800)
COMP output connected to TIM3 Input Capture 1

#define: COMP_Output_TIM3OCREFCLR ((uint32_t)0x00002C00)
COMP output connected to TIM3 OCREF Clear

#define: COMP_Output_TIM4IC1 ((uint32_t)0x00001C00)
COMP output connected to TIM4 Input Capture 1

#define: COMP_Output_TIM3IC2 ((uint32_t)0x00002000)
COMP output connected to TIM3 Input Capture 2

#define: COMP_Output_TIM15IC1 ((uint32_t)0x00002800)
COMP output connected to TIM15 Input Capture 1

#define: COMP_Output_TIM15BKIN ((uint32_t)0x00002C00)
COMP output connected to TIM15 Break Input (BKIN)

#define: COMP_Output_TIM3IC3 ((uint32_t)0x00001800)
COMP output connected to TIM3 Input Capture 3

148/584
#define: COMP_Output_TIM8OCREFCLR ((uint32_t)0x00001C00)
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Comparators (COMP)
UM1581
COMP output connected to TIM8 OCREF Clear

#define: COMP_Output_TIM15IC2 ((uint32_t)0x00002000)
COMP output connected to TIM15 Input Capture 2

#define: COMP_Output_TIM4IC2 ((uint32_t)0x00002400)
COMP output connected to TIM4 Input Capture 2

#define: COMP_Output_TIM15OCREFCLR ((uint32_t)0x00002800)
COMP output connected to TIM15 OCREF Clear

#define: COMP_Output_TIM2IC1 ((uint32_t)0x00001800)
COMP output connected to TIM2 Input Capture 1

#define: COMP_Output_TIM17IC1 ((uint32_t)0x00002000)
COMP output connected to TIM17 Input Capture 1

#define: COMP_Output_TIM4IC3 ((uint32_t)0x00002400)
COMP output connected to TIM4 Input Capture 3

#define: COMP_Output_TIM16BKIN ((uint32_t)0x00002800)
COMP output connected to TIM16 Break Input (BKIN)

#define: COMP_Output_TIM2IC2 ((uint32_t)0x00001800)
COMP output connected to TIM2 Input Capture 2

#define: COMP_Output_COMP6TIM2OCREFCLR ((uint32_t)0x00002000)
COMP output connected to TIM2 OCREF Clear

#define: COMP_Output_TIM16OCREFCLR ((uint32_t)0x00002400)
COMP output connected to TIM16 OCREF Clear

#define: COMP_Output_TIM16IC1 ((uint32_t)0x00002800)
COMP output connected to TIM16 Input Capture 1

#define: COMP_Output_TIM4IC4 ((uint32_t)0x00002C00)
DocID023800 Rev 1
149/584
Comparators (COMP)
COMP output connected to TIM4 Input Capture 4

#define: COMP_Output_TIM2IC3 ((uint32_t)0x00002000)
COMP output connected to TIM2 Input Capture 3

#define: COMP_Output_TIM1IC2 ((uint32_t)0x00002400)
COMP output connected to TIM1 Input Capture 2

#define: COMP_Output_TIM17OCREFCLR ((uint32_t)0x00002800)
COMP output connected to TIM16 OCREF Clear

#define: COMP_Output_TIM17BKIN ((uint32_t)0x00002C00)
COMP output connected to TIM16 Break Input (BKIN)
COMP_OutputLevel

#define: COMP_OutputLevel_High COMP_CSR_COMPxOUT

#define: COMP_OutputLevel_Low ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
COMP_OutputPoloarity

#define: COMP_OutputPol_NonInverted ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
COMP output on GPIO isn't inverted

#define: COMP_OutputPol_Inverted COMP_CSR_COMPxPOL
COMP output on GPIO is inverted
COMP_Selection

#define: COMP_Selection_COMP1 ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
COMP1 Selection

#define: COMP_Selection_COMP2 ((uint32_t)0x00000004)
COMP2 Selection

150/584
#define: COMP_Selection_COMP3 ((uint32_t)0x00000008)
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Comparators (COMP)
UM1581
COMP3 Selection

#define: COMP_Selection_COMP4 ((uint32_t)0x0000000C)
COMP4 Selection

#define: COMP_Selection_COMP5 ((uint32_t)0x00000010)
COMP5 Selection

#define: COMP_Selection_COMP6 ((uint32_t)0x00000014)
COMP6 Selection

#define: COMP_Selection_COMP7 ((uint32_t)0x00000018)
COMP7 Selection
DocID023800 Rev 1
151/584
CRC calculation unit (CRC)
UM1581
6
CRC calculation unit (CRC)
6.1
CRC Firmware driver registers structures
6.1.1
CRC_TypeDef
CRC_TypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x.h
Data Fields








__IO uint32_t DR
__IO uint8_t IDR
uint8_t RESERVED0
uint16_t RESERVED1
__IO uint32_t CR
uint32_t RESERVED2
__IO uint32_t INIT
__IO uint32_t POL
Field Documentation








6.2
__IO uint32_t CRC_TypeDef::DR

CRC Data register, Address offset: 0x00
__IO uint8_t CRC_TypeDef::IDR

CRC Independent data register, Address offset: 0x04
uint8_t CRC_TypeDef::RESERVED0

Reserved, 0x05
uint16_t CRC_TypeDef::RESERVED1

Reserved, 0x06
__IO uint32_t CRC_TypeDef::CR

CRC Control register, Address offset: 0x08
uint32_t CRC_TypeDef::RESERVED2

Reserved, 0x0C
__IO uint32_t CRC_TypeDef::INIT

Initial CRC value register, Address offset: 0x10
__IO uint32_t CRC_TypeDef::POL

CRC polynomial register, Address offset: 0x14
CRC Firmware driver API description
The following section lists the various functions of the CRC library.
6.2.1
152/584
How to use this driver
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
6.2.2
CRC configuration functions







6.2.3
CRC_DeInit()
CRC_ResetDR()
CRC_PolynomialSizeSelect()
CRC_ReverseInputDataSelect()
CRC_ReverseOutputDataCmd()
CRC_SetInitRegister()
CRC_SetPolynomial()
CRC computation functions





6.2.4
CRC calculation unit (CRC)
Enable CRC AHB clock using RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_CRC,
ENABLE) function.
Select the polynomial size: 7-bit, 8-bit, 16-bit or 32-bit.
Set the polynomial coefficients using CRC_SetPolynomial();
If required, select the reverse operation on input data using
CRC_ReverseInputDataSelect();
If required, enable the reverse operation on output data using
CRC_ReverseOutputDataCmd(Enable);
If required, set the initialization remainder value using CRC_SetInitRegister();
use CRC_CalcCRC() function to compute the CRC of a 32-bit data or use
CRC_CalcBlockCRC() function to compute the CRC if a 32-bit data buffer.
CRC_CalcCRC()
CRC_CalcCRC16bits()
CRC_CalcCRC8bits()
CRC_CalcBlockCRC()
CRC_GetCRC()
CRC Independent Register (IDR) access functions


CRC_SetIDRegister()
CRC_GetIDRegister()
6.2.5
CRC Independent Register (IDR) access functions
6.2.5.1
CRC_DeInit
Function Name
void CRC_DeInit ( void )
Function Description
Deinitializes CRC peripheral registers to their default reset values.
Parameters

None.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
153/584
CRC calculation unit (CRC)
6.2.5.2
6.2.5.3
6.2.5.4
154/584
UM1581
CRC_ResetDR
Function Name
void CRC_ResetDR ( void )
Function Description
Resets the CRC calculation unit and sets INIT register content in
DR register.
Parameters

None.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
CRC_PolynomialSizeSelect
Function Name
void CRC_PolynomialSizeSelect ( uint32_t CRC_PolSize)
Function Description
Selects the polynomial size.
Parameters

CRC_PolSize : Specifies the polynomial size. This
parameter can be:

CRC_PolSize_7 : 7-bit polynomial for CRC calculation

CRC_PolSize_8 : 8-bit polynomial for CRC calculation

CRC_PolSize_16 : 16-bit polynomial for CRC
calculation

CRC_PolSize_32 : 32-bit polynomial for CRC
calculation
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
CRC_ReverseInputDataSelect
Function Name
void CRC_ReverseInputDataSelect ( uint32_t
CRC_ReverseInputData)
Function Description
Selects the reverse operation to be performed on input data.
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
6.2.5.5
6.2.5.6
CRC calculation unit (CRC)
CRC_ReverseInputData : Specifies the reverse operation
on input data. This parameter can be:

CRC_ReverseInputData_No : No reverse operation is
performed

CRC_ReverseInputData_8bits : reverse operation
performed on 8 bits

CRC_ReverseInputData_16bits : reverse operation
performed on 16 bits

CRC_ReverseInputData_32bits : reverse operation
performed on 32 bits
Parameters

Return values

None.
Notes

None.
CRC_ReverseOutputDataCmd
Function Name
void CRC_ReverseOutputDataCmd ( FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disable the reverse operation on output data.
Parameters

NewState : new state of the reverse operation on output
data. This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
CRC_SetInitRegister
Function Name
void CRC_SetInitRegister ( uint32_t CRC_InitValue)
Function Description
Initializes the INIT register.
Parameters

CRC_InitValue : Programmable initial CRC value
Return values

None.
Notes

After resetting CRC calculation unit, CRC_InitValue is stored
in DR register
DocID023800 Rev 1
155/584
CRC calculation unit (CRC)
6.2.5.7
UM1581
CRC_SetPolynomial
Function Name
void CRC_SetPolynomial ( uint32_t CRC_Pol)
Function Description
Initializes the polynomail coefficients.
Parameters

CRC_Pol : Polynomial to be used for CRC calculation.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
6.2.6
CRC computation of one/many 32-bit data functions
6.2.6.1
CRC_CalcCRC
6.2.6.2
156/584
Function Name
uint32_t CRC_CalcCRC ( uint32_t CRC_Data)
Function Description
Computes the 32-bit CRC of a given data word(32-bit).
Parameters

CRC_Data : data word(32-bit) to compute its CRC
Return values

32-bit CRC
Notes

None.
CRC_CalcCRC16bits
Function Name
uint32_t CRC_CalcCRC16bits ( uint16_t CRC_Data)
Function Description
Computes the 16-bit CRC of a given 16-bit data.
Parameters

CRC_Data : data half-word(16-bit) to compute its CRC
Return values

16-bit CRC
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
CRC calculation unit (CRC)
UM1581
6.2.6.3
6.2.6.4
6.2.6.5
CRC_CalcCRC8bits
Function Name
uint32_t CRC_CalcCRC8bits ( uint8_t CRC_Data)
Function Description
Computes the 8-bit CRC of a given 8-bit data.
Parameters

CRC_Data : 8-bit data to compute its CRC
Return values

8-bit CRC
Notes

None.
CRC_CalcBlockCRC
Function Name
uint32_t CRC_CalcBlockCRC ( uint32_t pBuffer, uint32_t
BufferLength)
Function Description
Computes the 32-bit CRC of a given buffer of data word(32-bit).
Parameters


pBuffer : pointer to the buffer containing the data to be
computed
BufferLength : length of the buffer to be computed
Return values

32-bit CRC
Notes

None.
CRC_GetCRC
Function Name
uint32_t CRC_GetCRC ( void )
Function Description
Returns the current CRC value.
Parameters

None.
Return values

32-bit CRC
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
157/584
CRC calculation unit (CRC)
UM1581
6.2.7
CRC Independent Register (IDR) access functions
6.2.7.1
CRC_SetIDRegister
6.2.7.2
Function Name
void CRC_SetIDRegister ( uint8_t CRC_IDValue)
Function Description
Stores an 8-bit data in the Independent Data(ID) register.
Parameters

CRC_IDValue : 8-bit value to be stored in the ID register
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
CRC_GetIDRegister
Function Name
uint8_t CRC_GetIDRegister ( void )
Function Description
Returns the 8-bit data stored in the Independent Data(ID) register.
Parameters

None.
Return values

8-bit value of the ID register
Notes

None.
6.3
CRC Firmware driver defines
6.3.1
CRC
CRC
CRC_PolynomialSize

#define: CRC_PolSize_7 CRC_CR_POLSIZE
7-bit polynomial for CRC calculation

#define: CRC_PolSize_8 CRC_CR_POLSIZE_1
8-bit polynomial for CRC calculation

#define: CRC_PolSize_16 CRC_CR_POLSIZE_0
16-bit polynomial for CRC calculation
158/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
CRC calculation unit (CRC)
UM1581

#define: CRC_PolSize_32 ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
32-bit polynomial for CRC calculation
CRC_ReverseInputData

#define: CRC_ReverseInputData_No ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
No reverse operation of Input Data

#define: CRC_ReverseInputData_8bits CRC_CR_REV_IN_0
Reverse operation of Input Data on 8 bits

#define: CRC_ReverseInputData_16bits CRC_CR_REV_IN_1
Reverse operation of Input Data on 16 bits

#define: CRC_ReverseInputData_32bits CRC_CR_REV_IN
Reverse operation of Input Data on 32 bits
DocID023800 Rev 1
159/584
Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)
UM1581
7
Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)
7.1
DAC Firmware driver registers structures
7.1.1
DAC_TypeDef
DAC_TypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x.h
Data Fields














__IO uint32_t CR
__IO uint32_t SWTRIGR
__IO uint32_t DHR12R1
__IO uint32_t DHR12L1
__IO uint32_t DHR8R1
__IO uint32_t DHR12R2
__IO uint32_t DHR12L2
__IO uint32_t DHR8R2
__IO uint32_t DHR12RD
__IO uint32_t DHR12LD
__IO uint32_t DHR8RD
__IO uint32_t DOR1
__IO uint32_t DOR2
__IO uint32_t SR
Field Documentation











160/584
__IO uint32_t DAC_TypeDef::CR

DAC control register, Address offset: 0x00
__IO uint32_t DAC_TypeDef::SWTRIGR

DAC software trigger register, Address offset: 0x04
__IO uint32_t DAC_TypeDef::DHR12R1

DAC channel1 12-bit right-aligned data holding register, Address offset: 0x08
__IO uint32_t DAC_TypeDef::DHR12L1

DAC channel1 12-bit left aligned data holding register, Address offset: 0x0C
__IO uint32_t DAC_TypeDef::DHR8R1

DAC channel1 8-bit right aligned data holding register, Address offset: 0x10
__IO uint32_t DAC_TypeDef::DHR12R2

DAC channel2 12-bit right aligned data holding register, Address offset: 0x14
__IO uint32_t DAC_TypeDef::DHR12L2

DAC channel2 12-bit left aligned data holding register, Address offset: 0x18
__IO uint32_t DAC_TypeDef::DHR8R2

DAC channel2 8-bit right-aligned data holding register, Address offset: 0x1C
__IO uint32_t DAC_TypeDef::DHR12RD

Dual DAC 12-bit right-aligned data holding register, Address offset: 0x20
__IO uint32_t DAC_TypeDef::DHR12LD

DUAL DAC 12-bit left aligned data holding register, Address offset: 0x24
__IO uint32_t DAC_TypeDef::DHR8RD

DUAL DAC 8-bit right aligned data holding register, Address offset: 0x28
DocID023800 Rev 1
Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)
UM1581



7.1.2
__IO uint32_t DAC_TypeDef::DOR1

DAC channel1 data output register, Address offset: 0x2C
__IO uint32_t DAC_TypeDef::DOR2

DAC channel2 data output register, Address offset: 0x30
__IO uint32_t DAC_TypeDef::SR

DAC status register, Address offset: 0x34
DAC_InitTypeDef
DAC_InitTypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x_dac.h
Data Fields




uint32_t DAC_Trigger
uint32_t DAC_WaveGeneration
uint32_t DAC_LFSRUnmask_TriangleAmplitude
uint32_t DAC_OutputBuffer
Field Documentation




7.2
uint32_t DAC_InitTypeDef::DAC_Trigger

Specifies the external trigger for the selected DAC channel. This parameter can
be a value of DAC_trigger_selection
uint32_t DAC_InitTypeDef::DAC_WaveGeneration

Specifies whether DAC channel noise waves or triangle waves are generated, or
whether no wave is generated. This parameter can be a value of
DAC_wave_generation
uint32_t DAC_InitTypeDef::DAC_LFSRUnmask_TriangleAmplitude

Specifies the LFSR mask for noise wave generation or the maximum amplitude
triangle generation for the DAC channel. This parameter can be a value of
DAC_lfsrunmask_triangleamplitude
uint32_t DAC_InitTypeDef::DAC_OutputBuffer

Specifies whether the DAC channel output buffer is enabled or disabled. This
parameter can be a value of DAC_output_buffer
DAC Firmware driver API description
The following section lists the various functions of the DAC library.
7.2.1
DAC Peripheral features
The device integrates two 12-bit Digital Analog Converters that can be used independently
or simultaneously (dual mode):
1.
2.
DAC channel1 with DAC_OUT1 as output
DAC channel2 with DAC_OUT2 as output
DocID023800 Rev 1
161/584
Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)
UM1581
Digital to Analog conversion can be non-triggered using DAC_Trigger_None and
DAC_OUT1/DAC_OUT2 is available once writing to DHRx register using
DAC_SetChannel1Data()/DAC_SetChannel2Data.
Digital to Analog conversion can be triggered by:
1.
2.
3.
External event: EXTI Line 9 (any GPIOx_Pin9) using DAC_Trigger_Ext_IT9. The
used pin (GPIOx_Pin9) must be configured in input mode.
Timers TRGO: TIM2, TIM8/TIM3, TIM4, TIM6, TIM7, and TIM15
(DAC_Trigger_T2_TRGO, DAC_Trigger_T4_TRGO...) The timer TRGO event should
be selected using TIM_SelectOutputTrigger()

To trigger DAC conversions by TIM3 instead of TIM8 follow this sequence:

Enable SYSCFG APB clock by calling
RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SYSCFG, ENABLE);

Select DAC_Trigger_T3_TRGO when calling DAC_Init()

Remap the DAC trigger from TIM8 to TIM3 by calling
SYSCFG_TriggerRemapConfig(SYSCFG_TriggerRemap_DACTIM3,
ENABLE)
Software using DAC_Trigger_Software
Each DAC channel integrates an output buffer that can be used to reduce the output
impedance, and to drive external loads directly without having to add an external
operational amplifier. To enable, the output buffer use
DAC_InitStructure.DAC_OutputBuffer = DAC_OutputBuffer_Enable;
Refer to the device datasheet for more details about output impedance value with and
without output buffer.
Both DAC channels can be used to generate:


Noise wave using DAC_WaveGeneration_Noise
Triangle wave using DAC_WaveGeneration_Triangle
Wave generation can be disabled using DAC_WaveGeneration_None
The DAC data format can be:



8-bit right alignment using DAC_Align_8b_R
12-bit left alignment using DAC_Align_12b_L
12-bit right alignment using DAC_Align_12b_R
The analog output voltage on each DAC channel pin is determined by the following
equation:

DAC_OUTx = VREF+ * DOR / 4095 with DOR is the Data Output Register. VREF+ is
the input voltage reference (refer to the device datasheet) e.g. To set DAC_OUT1 to
0.7V, use DAC_SetChannel1Data(DAC_Align_12b_R, 868); Assuming that VREF+ =
3.3, DAC_OUT1 = (3.3 * 868) / 4095 = 0.7V
A DMA request can be generated when an external trigger (but not a software trigger)
occurs if DMA2 requests are enabled using DAC_DMACmd(); DMA requests are mapped
as following:


7.2.2
162/584
DAC channel1 is mapped on DMA2 channel3 which must be already configured.
DAC channel2 is mapped on DMA2 channel4 which must be already configured.
How to use this driver
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581




7.2.3
DAC channels configuration: trigger, output buffer, data format











7.2.4
DAC_DeInit()
DAC_Init()
DAC_StructInit()
DAC_Cmd()
DAC_SoftwareTriggerCmd()
DAC_DualSoftwareTriggerCmd()
DAC_WaveGenerationCmd()
DAC_SetChannel1Data()
DAC_SetChannel2Data()
DAC_SetDualChannelData()
DAC_GetDataOutputValue()
DMA management functions

7.2.5
Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)
DAC APB clock must be enabled to get write access to DAC registers using
RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_DAC, ENABLE);
Configure DAC_OUTx (DAC_OUT1: PA4, DAC_OUT2: PA5) in analog mode.
Configure the DAC channel using DAC_Init();
Enable the DAC channel using DAC_Cmd();
DAC_DMACmd()
Interrupts and flags management functions





DAC_ITConfig()
DAC_GetFlagStatus()
DAC_ClearFlag()
DAC_GetITStatus()
DAC_ClearITPendingBit()
7.2.6
DAC channels configuration
7.2.6.1
DAC_DeInit
Function Name
void DAC_DeInit ( void )
Function Description
Deinitializes the DAC peripheral registers to their default reset
values.
Parameters

None.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
163/584
Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)
7.2.6.2
UM1581
DAC_Init
Function Name
void DAC_Init ( uint32_t DAC_Channel, DAC_InitTypeDef *
DAC_InitStruct)
Function Description
Initializes the DAC peripheral according to the specified
parameters in the DAC_InitStruct.
Parameters


7.2.6.3
7.2.6.4
164/584
DAC_Channel : the selected DAC channel. This parameter
can be:

DAC_Channel_1 : DAC Channel1 selected

DAC_Channel_2 : DAC Channel2 selected
DAC_InitStruct : pointer to a DAC_InitTypeDef structure that
contains the configuration information for the specified DAC
channel.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DAC_StructInit
Function Name
void DAC_StructInit ( DAC_InitTypeDef * DAC_InitStruct)
Function Description
Fills each DAC_InitStruct member with its default value.
Parameters

DAC_InitStruct : pointer to a DAC_InitTypeDef structure
which will be initialized.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DAC_Cmd
Function Name
void DAC_Cmd ( uint32_t DAC_Channel, FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the specified DAC channel.
Parameters

DAC_Channel : The selected DAC channel. This parameter
can be:

DAC_Channel_1 : DAC Channel1 selected
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581

7.2.6.5
Return values

None.
Notes

When the DAC channel is enabled the trigger source can no
more be modified.
DAC_SoftwareTriggerCmd
Function Name
void DAC_SoftwareTriggerCmd ( uint32_t DAC_Channel,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the selected DAC channel software trigger.
Parameters


7.2.6.6
Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)

DAC_Channel_2 : DAC Channel2 selected
NewState : new state of the DAC channel. This parameter
can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
DAC_Channel : The selected DAC channel. This parameter
can be:

DAC_Channel_1 : DAC Channel1 selected

DAC_Channel_2 : DAC Channel2 selected
NewState : new state of the selected DAC channel software
trigger. This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DAC_DualSoftwareTriggerCmd
Function Name
void DAC_DualSoftwareTriggerCmd ( FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables simultaneously the two DAC channels
software triggers.
Parameters

NewState : new state of the DAC channels software triggers.
This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
165/584
Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)
7.2.6.7
UM1581
DAC_WaveGenerationCmd
Function Name
void DAC_WaveGenerationCmd ( uint32_t DAC_Channel,
uint32_t DAC_Wave, FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the selected DAC channel wave generation.
Parameters



7.2.6.8
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DAC_SetChannel1Data
Function Name
void DAC_SetChannel1Data ( uint32_t DAC_Align, uint16_t
Data)
Function Description
Sets the specified data holding register value for DAC channel1.
Parameters


166/584
DAC_Channel : The selected DAC channel. This parameter
can be:

DAC_Channel_1 : DAC Channel1 selected

DAC_Channel_2 : DAC Channel2 selected
DAC_Wave : specifies the wave type to enable or disable.
This parameter can be:

DAC_Wave_Noise : noise wave generation

DAC_Wave_Triangle : triangle wave generation
NewState : new state of the selected DAC channel wave
generation. This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
DAC_Align : Specifies the data alignment for DAC channel1.
This parameter can be:

DAC_Align_8b_R : 8bit right data alignment selected

DAC_Align_12b_L : 12bit left data alignment selected

DAC_Align_12b_R : 12bit right data alignment selected
Data : Data to be loaded in the selected data holding
register.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)
UM1581
7.2.6.9
DAC_SetChannel2Data
Function Name
void DAC_SetChannel2Data ( uint32_t DAC_Align, uint16_t
Data)
Function Description
Sets the specified data holding register value for DAC channel2.
Parameters


7.2.6.10
DAC_Align : Specifies the data alignment for DAC channel2.
This parameter can be:

DAC_Align_8b_R : 8bit right data alignment selected

DAC_Align_12b_L : 12bit left data alignment selected

DAC_Align_12b_R : 12bit right data alignment selected
Data : Data to be loaded in the selected data holding
register.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DAC_SetDualChannelData
Function Name
void DAC_SetDualChannelData ( uint32_t DAC_Align, uint16_t
Data2, uint16_t Data1)
Function Description
Sets the specified data holding register value for dual channel
DAC.
Parameters



DAC_Align : Specifies the data alignment for dual channel
DAC. This parameter can be:

DAC_Align_8b_R : 8bit right data alignment selected

DAC_Align_12b_L : 12bit left data alignment selected

DAC_Align_12b_R : 12bit right data alignment selected
Data2 : Data for DAC Channel2 to be loaded in the selected
data holding register.
Data1 : Data for DAC Channel1 to be loaded in the selected
data holding register.
Return values

None.
Notes

In dual mode, a unique register access is required to write in
both DAC channels at the same time.
DocID023800 Rev 1
167/584
Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)
7.2.6.11
UM1581
DAC_GetDataOutputValue
Function Name
uint16_t DAC_GetDataOutputValue ( uint32_t DAC_Channel)
Function Description
Returns the last data output value of the selected DAC channel.
Parameters

DAC_Channel : The selected DAC channel. This parameter
can be:

DAC_Channel_1 : DAC Channel1 selected

DAC_Channel_2 : DAC Channel2 selected
Return values

The selected DAC channel data output value.
Notes

None.
7.2.7
DAC management functions
7.2.7.1
DAC_DMACmd
Function Name
void DAC_DMACmd ( uint32_t DAC_Channel, FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the specified DAC channel DMA request.
Parameters


Return values

None.
Notes

When enabled DMA1 is generated when an external trigger
(EXTI Line9, TIM2, TIM4, TIM5, TIM6, TIM7 or TIM8 but not a
software trigger) occurs.
The DAC channel1 is mapped on DMA1 Stream 5 channel7
which must be already configured.
The DAC channel2 is mapped on DMA1 Stream 6 channel7
which must be already configured.


168/584
DAC_Channel : The selected DAC channel. This parameter
can be:

DAC_Channel_1 : DAC Channel1 selected

DAC_Channel_2 : DAC Channel2 selected
NewState : new state of the selected DAC channel DMA
request. This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)
UM1581
7.2.8
Interrupts and flags management functions
7.2.8.1
DAC_ITConfig
Function Name
void DAC_ITConfig ( uint32_t DAC_Channel, uint32_t DAC_IT,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the specified DAC interrupts.
Parameters


7.2.8.2
DAC_Channel : The selected DAC channel. This parameter
can be:

DAC_Channel_1 : DAC Channel1 selected

DAC_Channel_2 : DAC Channel2 selected
DAC_IT : specifies the DAC interrupt sources to be enabled
or disabled. This parameter can be the following values:

DAC_IT_DMAUDR : DMA underrun interrupt mask
Parameters

NewState : new state of the specified DAC interrupts. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

The DMA underrun occurs when a second external trigger
arrives before the acknowledgement for the first external
trigger is received (first request).
DAC_GetFlagStatus
Function Name
FlagStatus DAC_GetFlagStatus ( uint32_t DAC_Channel,
uint32_t DAC_FLAG)
Function Description
Checks whether the specified DAC flag is set or not.
Parameters


DAC_Channel : The selected DAC channel. This parameter
can be:

DAC_Channel_1 : DAC Channel1 selected

DAC_Channel_2 : DAC Channel2 selected
DAC_FLAG : specifies the flag to check. This parameter can
be only of the following value:

DAC_FLAG_DMAUDR : DMA underrun flag
Return values

The new state of DAC_FLAG (SET or RESET).
Notes

The DMA underrun occurs when a second external trigger
arrives before the acknowledgement for the first external
trigger is received (first request).
DocID023800 Rev 1
169/584
Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)
7.2.8.3
UM1581
DAC_ClearFlag
Function Name
void DAC_ClearFlag ( uint32_t DAC_Channel, uint32_t
DAC_FLAG)
Function Description
Clears the DAC channel's pending flags.
Parameters


7.2.8.4
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DAC_GetITStatus
Function Name
ITStatus DAC_GetITStatus ( uint32_t DAC_Channel, uint32_t
DAC_IT)
Function Description
Checks whether the specified DAC interrupt has occurred or not.
Parameters


170/584
DAC_Channel : The selected DAC channel. This parameter
can be:

DAC_Channel_1 : DAC Channel1 selected

DAC_Channel_2 : DAC Channel2 selected
DAC_FLAG : specifies the flag to clear. This parameter can
be of the following value:

DAC_FLAG_DMAUDR : DMA underrun flag
DAC_Channel : The selected DAC channel. This parameter
can be:

DAC_Channel_1 : DAC Channel1 selected

DAC_Channel_2 : DAC Channel2 selected
DAC_IT : specifies the DAC interrupt source to check. This
parameter can be the following values:

DAC_IT_DMAUDR : DMA underrun interrupt mask
Return values

The new state of DAC_IT (SET or RESET).
Notes

The DMA underrun occurs when a second external trigger
arrives before the acknowledgement for the first external
trigger is received (first request).
DocID023800 Rev 1
Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)
UM1581
7.2.8.5
DAC_ClearITPendingBit
Function Name
void DAC_ClearITPendingBit ( uint32_t DAC_Channel,
uint32_t DAC_IT)
Function Description
Clears the DAC channel's interrupt pending bits.
Parameters


DAC_Channel : The selected DAC channel. This parameter
can be:

DAC_Channel_1 : DAC Channel1 selected

DAC_Channel_2 : DAC Channel2 selected
DAC_IT : specifies the DAC interrupt pending bit to clear.
This parameter can be the following values:

DAC_IT_DMAUDR : DMA underrun interrupt mask
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
7.3
DAC Firmware driver defines
7.3.1
DAC
DAC
DAC_Channel_selection

#define: DAC_Channel_1 ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: DAC_Channel_2 ((uint32_t)0x00000010)
DAC_data_alignement

#define: DAC_Align_12b_R ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: DAC_Align_12b_L ((uint32_t)0x00000004)

#define: DAC_Align_8b_R ((uint32_t)0x00000008)
DocID023800 Rev 1
171/584
Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)
DAC_flags_definition

UM1581
#define: DAC_FLAG_DMAUDR ((uint32_t)0x00002000)
DAC_interrupts_definition

#define: DAC_IT_DMAUDR ((uint32_t)0x00002000)
DAC_lfsrunmask_triangleamplitude

#define: DAC_LFSRUnmask_Bit0 ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
Unmask DAC channel LFSR bit0 for noise wave generation

#define: DAC_LFSRUnmask_Bits1_0 ((uint32_t)0x00000100)
Unmask DAC channel LFSR bit[1:0] for noise wave generation

#define: DAC_LFSRUnmask_Bits2_0 ((uint32_t)0x00000200)
Unmask DAC channel LFSR bit[2:0] for noise wave generation

#define: DAC_LFSRUnmask_Bits3_0 ((uint32_t)0x00000300)
Unmask DAC channel LFSR bit[3:0] for noise wave generation

#define: DAC_LFSRUnmask_Bits4_0 ((uint32_t)0x00000400)
Unmask DAC channel LFSR bit[4:0] for noise wave generation

#define: DAC_LFSRUnmask_Bits5_0 ((uint32_t)0x00000500)
Unmask DAC channel LFSR bit[5:0] for noise wave generation

#define: DAC_LFSRUnmask_Bits6_0 ((uint32_t)0x00000600)
Unmask DAC channel LFSR bit[6:0] for noise wave generation

#define: DAC_LFSRUnmask_Bits7_0 ((uint32_t)0x00000700)
Unmask DAC channel LFSR bit[7:0] for noise wave generation

#define: DAC_LFSRUnmask_Bits8_0 ((uint32_t)0x00000800)
Unmask DAC channel LFSR bit[8:0] for noise wave generation
172/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581

Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)
#define: DAC_LFSRUnmask_Bits9_0 ((uint32_t)0x00000900)
Unmask DAC channel LFSR bit[9:0] for noise wave generation

#define: DAC_LFSRUnmask_Bits10_0 ((uint32_t)0x00000A00)
Unmask DAC channel LFSR bit[10:0] for noise wave generation

#define: DAC_LFSRUnmask_Bits11_0 ((uint32_t)0x00000B00)
Unmask DAC channel LFSR bit[11:0] for noise wave generation

#define: DAC_TriangleAmplitude_1 ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
Select max triangle amplitude of 1

#define: DAC_TriangleAmplitude_3 ((uint32_t)0x00000100)
Select max triangle amplitude of 3

#define: DAC_TriangleAmplitude_7 ((uint32_t)0x00000200)
Select max triangle amplitude of 7

#define: DAC_TriangleAmplitude_15 ((uint32_t)0x00000300)
Select max triangle amplitude of 15

#define: DAC_TriangleAmplitude_31 ((uint32_t)0x00000400)
Select max triangle amplitude of 31

#define: DAC_TriangleAmplitude_63 ((uint32_t)0x00000500)
Select max triangle amplitude of 63

#define: DAC_TriangleAmplitude_127 ((uint32_t)0x00000600)
Select max triangle amplitude of 127

#define: DAC_TriangleAmplitude_255 ((uint32_t)0x00000700)
Select max triangle amplitude of 255

#define: DAC_TriangleAmplitude_511 ((uint32_t)0x00000800)
Select max triangle amplitude of 511
DocID023800 Rev 1
173/584
Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)

#define: DAC_TriangleAmplitude_1023 ((uint32_t)0x00000900)
UM1581
Select max triangle amplitude of 1023

#define: DAC_TriangleAmplitude_2047 ((uint32_t)0x00000A00)
Select max triangle amplitude of 2047

#define: DAC_TriangleAmplitude_4095 ((uint32_t)0x00000B00)
Select max triangle amplitude of 4095
DAC_output_buffer

#define: DAC_OutputBuffer_Enable ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: DAC_OutputBuffer_Disable ((uint32_t)0x00000002)
DAC_trigger_selection

#define: DAC_Trigger_None ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
Conversion is automatic once the DAC1_DHRxxxx register has been loaded, and not by
external trigger

#define: DAC_Trigger_T2_TRGO ((uint32_t)0x00000024)
TIM2 TRGO selected as external conversion trigger for DAC channel

#define: DAC_Trigger_T3_TRGO ((uint32_t)0x0000000C)
TIM8 TRGO selected as external conversion trigger for DAC channel

#define: DAC_Trigger_T4_TRGO ((uint32_t)0x0000002C)
TIM4 TRGO selected as external conversion trigger for DAC channel

#define: DAC_Trigger_T6_TRGO ((uint32_t)0x00000004)
TIM6 TRGO selected as external conversion trigger for DAC channel

#define: DAC_Trigger_T7_TRGO ((uint32_t)0x00000014)
TIM7 TRGO selected as external conversion trigger for DAC channel

174/584
#define: DAC_Trigger_T8_TRGO ((uint32_t)0x0000000C)
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)
TIM8 TRGO selected as external conversion trigger for DAC channel

#define: DAC_Trigger_T15_TRGO ((uint32_t)0x0000001C)
TIM15 TRGO selected as external conversion trigger for DAC channel

#define: DAC_Trigger_Ext_IT9 ((uint32_t)0x00000034)
EXTI Line9 event selected as external conversion trigger for DAC channel

#define: DAC_Trigger_Software ((uint32_t)0x0000003C)
Conversion started by software trigger for DAC channel
DAC_wave_generation

#define: DAC_WaveGeneration_None ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: DAC_WaveGeneration_Noise ((uint32_t)0x00000040)

#define: DAC_WaveGeneration_Triangle ((uint32_t)0x00000080)

#define: DAC_Wave_Noise ((uint32_t)0x00000040)

#define: DAC_Wave_Triangle ((uint32_t)0x00000080)
DocID023800 Rev 1
175/584
Debug support (DBGMCU)
UM1581
8
Debug support (DBGMCU)
8.1
DBGMCU Firmware driver registers structures
8.1.1
DBGMCU_TypeDef
DBGMCU_TypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x.h
Data Fields




__IO uint32_t IDCODE
__IO uint32_t CR
__IO uint32_t APB1FZ
__IO uint32_t APB2FZ
Field Documentation




8.2
__IO uint32_t DBGMCU_TypeDef::IDCODE

MCU device ID code, Address offset: 0x00
__IO uint32_t DBGMCU_TypeDef::CR

Debug MCU configuration register, Address offset: 0x04
__IO uint32_t DBGMCU_TypeDef::APB1FZ

Debug MCU APB1 freeze register, Address offset: 0x08
__IO uint32_t DBGMCU_TypeDef::APB2FZ

Debug MCU APB2 freeze register, Address offset: 0x0C
DBGMCU Firmware driver API description
The following section lists the various functions of the DBGMCU library.
8.2.1
Device and Revision ID management functions


8.2.2
Peripherals Configuration functions



176/584
DBGMCU_GetREVID()
DBGMCU_GetDEVID()
DBGMCU_Config()
DBGMCU_APB1PeriphConfig()
DBGMCU_APB2PeriphConfig()
DocID023800 Rev 1
Debug support (DBGMCU)
UM1581
8.2.3
Device and Revision ID management functions
8.2.3.1
DBGMCU_GetREVID
8.2.3.2
Function Name
uint32_t DBGMCU_GetREVID ( void )
Function Description
Returns the device revision identifier.
Parameters

None.
Return values

Device revision identifier
Notes

None.
DBGMCU_GetDEVID
Function Name
uint32_t DBGMCU_GetDEVID ( void )
Function Description
Returns the device identifier.
Parameters

None.
Return values

Device identifier
Notes

None.
8.2.4
Peripherals Configuration functions
8.2.4.1
DBGMCU_Config
Function Name
void DBGMCU_Config ( uint32_t DBGMCU_Periph,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Configures low power mode behavior when the MCU is in Debug
mode.
Parameters

DBGMCU_Periph : specifies the low power mode. This
parameter can be any combination of the following values:

DBGMCU_SLEEP : Keep debugger connection during
SLEEP mode.

DBGMCU_STOP : Keep debugger connection during
STOP mode.

DBGMCU_STANDBY : Keep debugger connection
DocID023800 Rev 1
177/584
Debug support (DBGMCU)

8.2.4.2
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DBGMCU_APB1PeriphConfig
Function Name
void DBGMCU_APB1PeriphConfig ( uint32_t
DBGMCU_Periph, FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Configures APB1 peripheral behavior when the MCU is in Debug
mode.
Parameters


178/584
UM1581
during STANDBY mode.
NewState : new state of the specified low power mode in
Debug mode. This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
DBGMCU_Periph : specifies the APB1 peripheral. This
parameter can be any combination of the following values:

DBGMCU_TIM2_STOP : TIM2 counter stopped when
Core is halted.

DBGMCU_TIM3_STOP : TIM3 counter stopped when
Core is halted.

DBGMCU_TIM4_STOP : TIM4 counter stopped when
Core is halted.

DBGMCU_TIM6_STOP : TIM6 counter stopped when
Core is halted.

DBGMCU_TIM7_STOP : TIM7 counter stopped when
Core is halted.

DBGMCU_RTC_STOP : RTC Calendar and Wakeup
counter are stopped when Core is halted.

DBGMCU_WWDG_STOP : Debug WWDG stopped
when Core is halted.

DBGMCU_IWDG_STOP : Debug IWDG stopped when
Core is halted.

DBGMCU_I2C1_SMBUS_TIMEOUT : I2C1 SMBUS
timeout mode stopped when Core is halted.

DBGMCU_I2C2_SMBUS_TIMEOUT : I2C2 SMBUS
timeout mode stopped when Core is halted.

DBGMCU_CAN1_STOP : Debug CAN2 stopped when
Core is halted.
NewState : new state of the specified APB1 peripheral in
Debug mode. This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Debug support (DBGMCU)
UM1581
8.2.4.3
DBGMCU_APB2PeriphConfig
Function Name
void DBGMCU_APB2PeriphConfig ( uint32_t
DBGMCU_Periph, FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Configures APB2 peripheral behavior when the MCU is in Debug
mode.
Parameters


DBGMCU_Periph : specifies the APB2 peripheral. This
parameter can be any combination of the following values:

DBGMCU_TIM1_STOP : TIM1 counter stopped when
Core is halted.

DBGMCU_TIM8_STOP : TIM8 counter stopped when
Core is halted.

DBGMCU_TIM15_STOP : TIM15 counter stopped when
Core is halted.

DBGMCU_TIM16_STOP : TIM16 counter stopped when
Core is halted.

DBGMCU_TIM17_STOP : TIM17 counter stopped when
Core is halted.
NewState : new state of the specified APB2 peripheral in
Debug mode. This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
8.3
DBGMCU Firmware driver defines
8.3.1
DBGMCU
DBGMCU
DBGMCU_Exported_Constants

#define: DBGMCU_SLEEP ((uint32_t)0x00000001)

#define: DBGMCU_STOP ((uint32_t)0x00000002)

#define: DBGMCU_STANDBY ((uint32_t)0x00000004)

#define: DBGMCU_TIM2_STOP ((uint32_t)0x00000001)
DocID023800 Rev 1
179/584
Debug support (DBGMCU)
180/584
UM1581

#define: DBGMCU_TIM3_STOP ((uint32_t)0x00000002)

#define: DBGMCU_TIM4_STOP ((uint32_t)0x00000004)

#define: DBGMCU_TIM6_STOP ((uint32_t)0x00000010)

#define: DBGMCU_TIM7_STOP ((uint32_t)0x00000020)

#define: DBGMCU_RTC_STOP ((uint32_t)0x00000400)

#define: DBGMCU_WWDG_STOP ((uint32_t)0x00000800)

#define: DBGMCU_IWDG_STOP ((uint32_t)0x00001000)

#define: DBGMCU_I2C1_SMBUS_TIMEOUT ((uint32_t)0x00200000)

#define: DBGMCU_I2C2_SMBUS_TIMEOUT ((uint32_t)0x00400000)

#define: DBGMCU_CAN1_STOP ((uint32_t)0x02000000)

#define: DBGMCU_TIM1_STOP ((uint32_t)0x00000001)

#define: DBGMCU_TIM8_STOP ((uint32_t)0x00000002)
DocID023800 Rev 1
Debug support (DBGMCU)
UM1581

#define: DBGMCU_TIM15_STOP ((uint32_t)0x00000004)

#define: DBGMCU_TIM16_STOP ((uint32_t)0x00000008)

#define: DBGMCU_TIM17_STOP ((uint32_t)0x00000010)
DocID023800 Rev 1
181/584
DMA controller (DMA)
UM1581
9
DMA controller (DMA)
9.1
DMA Firmware driver registers structures
9.1.1
DMA_Channel_TypeDef
DMA_Channel_TypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x.h
Data Fields




__IO uint32_t CCR
__IO uint32_t CNDTR
__IO uint32_t CPAR
__IO uint32_t CMAR
Field Documentation




9.1.2
__IO uint32_t DMA_Channel_TypeDef::CCR

DMA channel x configuration register
__IO uint32_t DMA_Channel_TypeDef::CNDTR

DMA channel x number of data register
__IO uint32_t DMA_Channel_TypeDef::CPAR

DMA channel x peripheral address register
__IO uint32_t DMA_Channel_TypeDef::CMAR

DMA channel x memory address register
DMA_TypeDef
DMA_TypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x.h
Data Fields


__IO uint32_t ISR
__IO uint32_t IFCR
Field Documentation


9.1.3
__IO uint32_t DMA_TypeDef::ISR

DMA interrupt status register, Address offset: 0x00
__IO uint32_t DMA_TypeDef::IFCR

DMA interrupt clear flag register, Address offset: 0x04
DMA_InitTypeDef
DMA_InitTypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x_dma.h
182/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
DMA controller (DMA)
UM1581
Data Fields











uint32_t DMA_PeripheralBaseAddr
uint32_t DMA_MemoryBaseAddr
uint32_t DMA_DIR
uint16_t DMA_BufferSize
uint32_t DMA_PeripheralInc
uint32_t DMA_MemoryInc
uint32_t DMA_PeripheralDataSize
uint32_t DMA_MemoryDataSize
uint32_t DMA_Mode
uint32_t DMA_Priority
uint32_t DMA_M2M
Field Documentation











uint32_t DMA_InitTypeDef::DMA_PeripheralBaseAddr

Specifies the peripheral base address for DMAy Channelx.
uint32_t DMA_InitTypeDef::DMA_MemoryBaseAddr

Specifies the memory base address for DMAy Channelx.
uint32_t DMA_InitTypeDef::DMA_DIR

Specifies if the peripheral is the source or destination. This parameter can be a
value of DMA_data_transfer_direction
uint16_t DMA_InitTypeDef::DMA_BufferSize

Specifies the buffer size, in data unit, of the specified Channel. The data unit is
equal to the configuration set in DMA_PeripheralDataSize or
DMA_MemoryDataSize members depending in the transfer direction.
uint32_t DMA_InitTypeDef::DMA_PeripheralInc

Specifies whether the Peripheral address register is incremented or not. This
parameter can be a value of DMA_peripheral_incremented_mode
uint32_t DMA_InitTypeDef::DMA_MemoryInc

Specifies whether the memory address register is incremented or not. This
parameter can be a value of DMA_memory_incremented_mode
uint32_t DMA_InitTypeDef::DMA_PeripheralDataSize

Specifies the Peripheral data width. This parameter can be a value of
DMA_peripheral_data_size
uint32_t DMA_InitTypeDef::DMA_MemoryDataSize

Specifies the Memory data width. This parameter can be a value of
DMA_memory_data_size
uint32_t DMA_InitTypeDef::DMA_Mode

Specifies the operation mode of the DMAy Channelx. This parameter can be a
value of DMA_circular_normal_mode
uint32_t DMA_InitTypeDef::DMA_Priority

Specifies the software priority for the DMAy Channelx. This parameter can be a
value of DMA_priority_level
uint32_t DMA_InitTypeDef::DMA_M2M

Specifies if the DMAy Channelx will be used in memory-to-memory transfer. This
parameter can be a value of DMA_memory_to_memory
DocID023800 Rev 1
183/584
DMA controller (DMA)
9.2
UM1581
DMA Firmware driver API description
The following section lists the various functions of the DMA library.
9.2.1
How to use this driver
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.2.2
Enable The DMA controller clock using
RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_DMA1, ENABLE) function for DMA1 or
using RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_DMA2, ENABLE) function for
DMA2.
Enable and configure the peripheral to be connected to the DMA channel (except for
internal SRAM / FLASH memories: no initialization is necessary).
For a given Channel, program the Source and Destination addresses, the transfer
Direction, the Buffer Size, the Peripheral and Memory Incrementation mode and Data
Size, the Circular or Normal mode, the channel transfer Priority and the Memory-toMemory transfer mode (if needed) using the DMA_Init() function.
Enable the NVIC and the corresponding interrupt(s) using the function
DMA_ITConfig() if you need to use DMA interrupts.
Enable the DMA channel using the DMA_Cmd() function.
Activate the needed channel Request using PPP_DMACmd() function for any PPP
peripheral except internal SRAM and FLASH (ie. SPI, USART ...) The function
allowing this operation is provided in each PPP peripheral driver (ie. SPI_DMACmd for
SPI peripheral).
Optionally, you can configure the number of data to be transferred when the channel
is disabled (ie. after each Transfer Complete event or when a Transfer Error occurs)
using the function DMA_SetCurrDataCounter(). And you can get the number of
remaining data to be transferred using the function DMA_GetCurrDataCounter() at run
time (when the DMA channel is enabled and running).
To control DMA events you can use one of the following two methods:
a.
Check on DMA channel flags using the function DMA_GetFlagStatus().
b.
Use DMA interrupts through the function DMA_ITConfig() at initialization phase
and DMA_GetITStatus() function into interrupt routines in communication phase.
After checking on a flag you should clear it using DMA_ClearFlag() function. And
after checking on an interrupt event you should clear it using
DMA_ClearITPendingBit() function.
Initialization and Configuration functions
This subsection provides functions allowing to initialize the DMA channel source and
destination addresses, incrementation and data sizes, transfer direction, buffer size,
circular/normal mode selection, memory-to-memory mode selection and channel priority
value.
The DMA_Init() function follows the DMA configuration procedures as described in
reference manual (RM00316).




184/584
DMA_DeInit()
DMA_Init()
DMA_StructInit()
DMA_Cmd()
DocID023800 Rev 1
DMA controller (DMA)
UM1581
9.2.3
Data Counter functions
This subsection provides function allowing to configure and read the buffer size (number of
data to be transferred).The DMA data counter can be written only when the DMA channel
is disabled (ie. after transfer complete event).
The following function can be used to write the Channel data counter value:

void DMA_SetCurrDataCounter(DMA_Channel_TypeDef* DMAy_Channelx, uint16_t
DataNumber).
It is advised to use this function rather than DMA_Init() in situations where only
the Data buffer needs to be reloaded.
The DMA data counter can be read to indicate the number of remaining transfers for the
relative DMA channel. This counter is decremented at the end of each data transfer and
when the transfer is complete:


If Normal mode is selected: the counter is set to 0.
If Circular mode is selected: the counter is reloaded with the initial value(configured
before enabling the DMA channel).
The following function can be used to read the Channel data counter value:



9.2.4
uint16_t DMA_GetCurrDataCounter(DMA_Channel_TypeDef* DMAy_Channelx).
DMA_SetCurrDataCounter()
DMA_GetCurrDataCounter()
Interrupts and flags management functions
This subsection provides functions allowing to configure the DMA Interrupt sources and
check or clear the flags or pending bits status. The user should identify which mode will be
used in his application to manage the DMA controller events: Polling mode or Interrupt
mode.
Polling Mode
Each DMA channel can be managed through 4 event Flags (y : DMA Controller number, x
: DMA channel number):
1.
2.
3.
4.
DMAy_FLAG_TCx : to indicate that a Transfer Complete event occurred.
DMAy_FLAG_HTx : to indicate that a Half-Transfer Complete event occurred.
DMAy_FLAG_TEx : to indicate that a Transfer Error occurred.
DMAy_FLAG_GLx : to indicate that at least one of the events described above
occurred.
Clearing DMAy_FLAG_GLx results in clearing all other pending flags of the same
channel (DMAy_FLAG_TCx, DMAy_FLAG_HTx and DMAy_FLAG_TEx).
In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:

FlagStatus DMA_GetFlagStatus(uint32_t DMA_FLAG);
DocID023800 Rev 1
185/584
DMA controller (DMA)

void DMA_ClearFlag(uint32_t DMA_FLAG);
UM1581
Interrupt Mode
Each DMA channel can be managed through 4 Interrupts:

Interrupt Source
a.
DMA_IT_TC: specifies the interrupt source for the Transfer Complete event.
b.
DMA_IT_HT: specifies the interrupt source for the Half-transfer Complete event.
c.
DMA_IT_TE: specifies the interrupt source for the transfer errors event.
d.
DMA_IT_GL: to indicate that at least one of the interrupts described above
occurred. Clearing DMA_IT_GL interrupt results in clearing all other interrupts of
the same channel (DMA_IT_TCx, DMA_IT_HT and DMA_IT_TE).
In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:








void DMA_ITConfig(DMA_Channel_TypeDef* DMAy_Channelx, uint32_t DMA_IT,
FunctionalState NewState);
ITStatus DMA_GetITStatus(uint32_t DMA_IT);
void DMA_ClearITPendingBit(uint32_t DMA_IT);
DMA_ITConfig()
DMA_GetFlagStatus()
DMA_ClearFlag()
DMA_GetITStatus()
DMA_ClearITPendingBit()
9.2.5
Initialization and Configuration functions
9.2.5.1
DMA_DeInit
9.2.5.2
186/584
Function Name
void DMA_DeInit ( DMA_Channel_TypeDef * DMAy_Channelx)
Function Description
Deinitializes the DMAy Channelx registers to their default reset
values.
Parameters

DMAy_Channelx : where y can be 1 or 2 to select the DMA
and x can be 1 to 7 for DMA1 and 1 to 5 for DMA2 to select
the DMA Channel.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DMA_Init
Function Name
void DMA_Init ( DMA_Channel_TypeDef * DMAy_Channelx,
DMA_InitTypeDef * DMA_InitStruct)
Function Description
Initializes the DMAy Channelx according to the specified
DocID023800 Rev 1
DMA controller (DMA)
UM1581
parameters in the DMA_InitStruct.
Parameters
9.2.5.3
9.2.5.4


DMAy_Channelx : where y can be 1 or 2 to select the DMA
and x can be 1 to 7 for DMA1 and 1 to 5 for DMA2 to select
the DMA Channel.
DMA_InitStruct : pointer to a DMA_InitTypeDef structure
that contains the configuration information for the specified
DMA Channel.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DMA_StructInit
Function Name
void DMA_StructInit ( DMA_InitTypeDef * DMA_InitStruct)
Function Description
Fills each DMA_InitStruct member with its default value.
Parameters

DMA_InitStruct : pointer to a DMA_InitTypeDef structure
which will be initialized.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DMA_Cmd
Function Name
void DMA_Cmd ( DMA_Channel_TypeDef * DMAy_Channelx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the specified DMAy Channelx.
Parameters


DMAy_Channelx : where y can be 1 or 2 to select the DMA
and x can be 1 to 7 for DMA1 and 1 to 5 for DMA2 to select
the DMA Channel.
NewState : new state of the DMAy Channelx. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
187/584
DMA controller (DMA)
UM1581
9.2.6
Data counter functions
9.2.6.1
DMA_SetCurrDataCounter
Function Name
void DMA_SetCurrDataCounter ( DMA_Channel_TypeDef *
DMAy_Channelx, uint16_t DataNumber)
Function Description
Sets the number of data units in the current DMAy Channelx
transfer.
Parameters


9.2.6.2
188/584
DMAy_Channelx : where y can be 1 or 2 to select the DMA
and x can be 1 to 7 for DMA1 and 1 to 5 for DMA2 to select
the DMA Channel.
DataNumber : The number of data units in the current DMAy
Channelx transfer.
Return values

None.
Notes

This function can only be used when the DMAy_Channelx is
disabled.
DMA_GetCurrDataCounter
Function Name
uint16_t DMA_GetCurrDataCounter ( DMA_Channel_TypeDef *
DMAy_Channelx)
Function Description
Returns the number of remaining data units in the current DMAy
Channelx transfer.
Parameters

DMAy_Channelx : where y can be 1 or 2 to select the DMA
and x can be 1 to 7 for DMA1 and 1 to 5 for DMA2 to select
the DMA Channel.
Return values

The number of remaining data units in the current DMAy
Channelx transfer.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
DMA controller (DMA)
UM1581
9.2.7
Interrupts and flags management functions
9.2.7.1
DMA_ITConfig
Function Name
void DMA_ITConfig ( DMA_Channel_TypeDef *
DMAy_Channelx, uint32_t DMA_IT, FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the specified DMAy Channelx interrupts.
Parameters



9.2.7.2
DMAy_Channelx : where y can be 1 or 2 to select the DMA
and x can be 1 to 7 for DMA1 and 1 to 5 for DMA2 to select
the DMA Channel.
DMA_IT : specifies the DMA interrupts sources to be
enabled or disabled. This parameter can be any combination
of the following values:

DMA_IT_TC : Transfer complete interrupt mask

DMA_IT_HT : Half transfer interrupt mask

DMA_IT_TE : Transfer error interrupt mask
NewState : new state of the specified DMA interrupts. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DMA_GetFlagStatus
Function Name
FlagStatus DMA_GetFlagStatus ( uint32_t DMAy_FLAG)
Function Description
Checks whether the specified DMAy Channelx flag is set or not.
Parameters

DMAy_FLAG : specifies the flag to check. This parameter
can be one of the following values:

DMA1_FLAG_GL1 : DMA1 Channel1 global flag.

DMA1_FLAG_TC1 : DMA1 Channel1 transfer complete
flag.

DMA1_FLAG_HT1 : DMA1 Channel1 half transfer flag.

DMA1_FLAG_TE1 : DMA1 Channel1 transfer error flag.

DMA1_FLAG_GL2 : DMA1 Channel2 global flag.

DMA1_FLAG_TC2 : DMA1 Channel2 transfer complete
flag.

DMA1_FLAG_HT2 : DMA1 Channel2 half transfer flag.

DMA1_FLAG_TE2 : DMA1 Channel2 transfer error flag.

DMA1_FLAG_GL3 : DMA1 Channel3 global flag.

DMA1_FLAG_TC3 : DMA1 Channel3 transfer complete
flag.
DocID023800 Rev 1
189/584
DMA controller (DMA)






































190/584
DMA1_FLAG_HT3 :
DMA1_FLAG_TE3 :
DMA1_FLAG_GL4 :
DMA1_FLAG_TC4 :
flag.
DMA1_FLAG_HT4 :
DMA1_FLAG_TE4 :
DMA1_FLAG_GL5 :
DMA1_FLAG_TC5 :
flag.
DMA1_FLAG_HT5 :
DMA1_FLAG_TE5 :
DMA1_FLAG_GL6 :
DMA1_FLAG_TC6 :
flag.
DMA1_FLAG_HT6 :
DMA1_FLAG_TE6 :
DMA1_FLAG_GL7 :
DMA1_FLAG_TC7 :
flag.
DMA1_FLAG_HT7 :
DMA1_FLAG_TE7 :
DMA2_FLAG_GL1 :
DMA2_FLAG_TC1 :
flag.
DMA2_FLAG_HT1 :
DMA2_FLAG_TE1 :
DMA2_FLAG_GL2 :
DMA2_FLAG_TC2 :
flag.
DMA2_FLAG_HT2 :
DMA2_FLAG_TE2 :
DMA2_FLAG_GL3 :
DMA2_FLAG_TC3 :
flag.
DMA2_FLAG_HT3 :
DMA2_FLAG_TE3 :
DMA2_FLAG_GL4 :
DMA2_FLAG_TC4 :
flag.
DMA2_FLAG_HT4 :
DMA2_FLAG_TE4 :
DMA2_FLAG_GL5 :
DMA2_FLAG_TC5 :
flag.
DMA2_FLAG_HT5 :
DMA2_FLAG_TE5 :
UM1581
DMA1 Channel3 half transfer flag.
DMA1 Channel3 transfer error flag.
DMA1 Channel4 global flag.
DMA1 Channel4 transfer complete
DMA1 Channel4 half transfer flag.
DMA1 Channel4 transfer error flag.
DMA1 Channel5 global flag.
DMA1 Channel5 transfer complete
DMA1 Channel5 half transfer flag.
DMA1 Channel5 transfer error flag.
DMA1 Channel6 global flag.
DMA1 Channel6 transfer complete
DMA1 Channel6 half transfer flag.
DMA1 Channel6 transfer error flag.
DMA1 Channel7 global flag.
DMA1 Channel7 transfer complete
DMA1 Channel7 half transfer flag.
DMA1 Channel7 transfer error flag.
DMA2 Channel1 global flag.
DMA2 Channel1 transfer complete
DMA2 Channel1 half transfer flag.
DMA2 Channel1 transfer error flag.
DMA2 Channel2 global flag.
DMA2 Channel2 transfer complete
DMA2 Channel2 half transfer flag.
DMA2 Channel2 transfer error flag.
DMA2 Channel3 global flag.
DMA2 Channel3 transfer complete
DMA2 Channel3 half transfer flag.
DMA2 Channel3 transfer error flag.
DMA2 Channel4 global flag.
DMA2 Channel4 transfer complete
DMA2 Channel4 half transfer flag.
DMA2 Channel4 transfer error flag.
DMA2 Channel5 global flag.
DMA2 Channel5 transfer complete
DMA2 Channel5 half transfer flag.
DMA2 Channel5 transfer error flag.
Return values

The new state of DMAy_FLAG (SET or RESET).
Notes

The Global flag (DMAy_FLAG_GLx) is set whenever any of
the other flags relative to the same channel is set (Transfer
Complete, Half-transfer Complete or Transfer Error flags:
DMAy_FLAG_TCx, DMAy_FLAG_HTx or DMAy_FLAG_TEx).
DocID023800 Rev 1
DMA controller (DMA)
UM1581
9.2.7.3
DMA_ClearFlag
Function Name
void DMA_ClearFlag ( uint32_t DMAy_FLAG)
Function Description
Clears the DMAy Channelx's pending flags.
Parameters

DMAy_FLAG : specifies the flag to clear. This parameter can
be any combination (for the same DMA) of the following
values:

DMA1_FLAG_GL1 : DMA1 Channel1 global flag.

DMA1_FLAG_TC1 : DMA1 Channel1 transfer complete
flag.

DMA1_FLAG_HT1 : DMA1 Channel1 half transfer flag.

DMA1_FLAG_TE1 : DMA1 Channel1 transfer error flag.

DMA1_FLAG_GL2 : DMA1 Channel2 global flag.

DMA1_FLAG_TC2 : DMA1 Channel2 transfer complete
flag.

DMA1_FLAG_HT2 : DMA1 Channel2 half transfer flag.

DMA1_FLAG_TE2 : DMA1 Channel2 transfer error flag.

DMA1_FLAG_GL3 : DMA1 Channel3 global flag.

DMA1_FLAG_TC3 : DMA1 Channel3 transfer complete
flag.

DMA1_FLAG_HT3 : DMA1 Channel3 half transfer flag.

DMA1_FLAG_TE3 : DMA1 Channel3 transfer error flag.

DMA1_FLAG_GL4 : DMA1 Channel4 global flag.

DMA1_FLAG_TC4 : DMA1 Channel4 transfer complete
flag.

DMA1_FLAG_HT4 : DMA1 Channel4 half transfer flag.

DMA1_FLAG_TE4 : DMA1 Channel4 transfer error flag.

DMA1_FLAG_GL5 : DMA1 Channel5 global flag.

DMA1_FLAG_TC5 : DMA1 Channel5 transfer complete
flag.

DMA1_FLAG_HT5 : DMA1 Channel5 half transfer flag.

DMA1_FLAG_TE5 : DMA1 Channel5 transfer error flag.

DMA1_FLAG_GL6 : DMA1 Channel6 global flag.

DMA1_FLAG_TC6 : DMA1 Channel6 transfer complete
flag.

DMA1_FLAG_HT6 : DMA1 Channel6 half transfer flag.

DMA1_FLAG_TE6 : DMA1 Channel6 transfer error flag.

DMA1_FLAG_GL7 : DMA1 Channel7 global flag.

DMA1_FLAG_TC7 : DMA1 Channel7 transfer complete
flag.

DMA1_FLAG_HT7 : DMA1 Channel7 half transfer flag.

DMA1_FLAG_TE7 : DMA1 Channel7 transfer error flag.

DMA2_FLAG_GL1 : DMA2 Channel1 global flag.

DMA2_FLAG_TC1 : DMA2 Channel1 transfer complete
flag.
DocID023800 Rev 1
191/584
DMA controller (DMA)


















9.2.7.4
192/584
DMA2_FLAG_HT1 :
DMA2_FLAG_TE1 :
DMA2_FLAG_GL2 :
DMA2_FLAG_TC2 :
flag.
DMA2_FLAG_HT2 :
DMA2_FLAG_TE2 :
DMA2_FLAG_GL3 :
DMA2_FLAG_TC3 :
flag.
DMA2_FLAG_HT3 :
DMA2_FLAG_TE3 :
DMA2_FLAG_GL4 :
DMA2_FLAG_TC4 :
flag.
DMA2_FLAG_HT4 :
DMA2_FLAG_TE4 :
DMA2_FLAG_GL5 :
DMA2_FLAG_TC5 :
flag.
DMA2_FLAG_HT5 :
DMA2_FLAG_TE5 :
UM1581
DMA2 Channel1 half transfer flag.
DMA2 Channel1 transfer error flag.
DMA2 Channel2 global flag.
DMA2 Channel2 transfer complete
DMA2 Channel2 half transfer flag.
DMA2 Channel2 transfer error flag.
DMA2 Channel3 global flag.
DMA2 Channel3 transfer complete
DMA2 Channel3 half transfer flag.
DMA2 Channel3 transfer error flag.
DMA2 Channel4 global flag.
DMA2 Channel4 transfer complete
DMA2 Channel4 half transfer flag.
DMA2 Channel4 transfer error flag.
DMA2 Channel5 global flag.
DMA2 Channel5 transfer complete
DMA2 Channel5 half transfer flag.
DMA2 Channel5 transfer error flag.
Return values

None.
Notes

Clearing the Global flag (DMAy_FLAG_GLx) results in
clearing all other flags relative to the same channel (Transfer
Complete, Half-transfer Complete and Transfer Error flags:
DMAy_FLAG_TCx, DMAy_FLAG_HTx and
DMAy_FLAG_TEx).
DMA_GetITStatus
Function Name
ITStatus DMA_GetITStatus ( uint32_t DMAy_IT)
Function Description
Checks whether the specified DMAy Channelx interrupt has
occurred or not.
Parameters

DMAy_IT : specifies the DMAy interrupt source to check.
This parameter can be one of the following values:

DMA1_IT_GL1 : DMA1 Channel1 global interrupt.

DMA1_IT_TC1 : DMA1 Channel1 transfer complete
interrupt.

DMA1_IT_HT1 : DMA1 Channel1 half transfer interrupt.

DMA1_IT_TE1 : DMA1 Channel1 transfer error
interrupt.

DMA1_IT_GL2 : DMA1 Channel2 global interrupt.

DMA1_IT_TC2 : DMA1 Channel2 transfer complete
interrupt.
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581




































DMA1_IT_HT2 :
DMA1_IT_TE2 :
interrupt.
DMA1_IT_GL3 :
DMA1_IT_TC3 :
interrupt.
DMA1_IT_HT3 :
DMA1_IT_TE3 :
interrupt.
DMA1_IT_GL4 :
DMA1_IT_TC4 :
interrupt.
DMA1_IT_HT4 :
DMA1_IT_TE4 :
interrupt.
DMA1_IT_GL5 :
DMA1_IT_TC5 :
interrupt.
DMA1_IT_HT5 :
DMA1_IT_TE5 :
interrupt.
DMA1_IT_GL6 :
DMA1_IT_TC6 :
interrupt.
DMA1_IT_HT6 :
DMA1_IT_TE6 :
interrupt.
DMA1_IT_GL7 :
DMA1_IT_TC7 :
interrupt.
DMA1_IT_HT7 :
DMA1_IT_TE7 :
interrupt.
DMA2_IT_GL1 :
DMA2_IT_TC1 :
interrupt.
DMA2_IT_HT1 :
DMA2_IT_TE1 :
interrupt.
DMA2_IT_GL2 :
DMA2_IT_TC2 :
interrupt.
DMA2_IT_HT2 :
DMA2_IT_TE2 :
interrupt.
DMA2_IT_GL3 :
DMA2_IT_TC3 :
interrupt.
DMA2_IT_HT3 :
DMA2_IT_TE3 :
interrupt.
DMA2_IT_GL4 :
DMA2_IT_TC4 :
DocID023800 Rev 1
DMA controller (DMA)
DMA1 Channel2 half transfer interrupt.
DMA1 Channel2 transfer error
DMA1 Channel3 global interrupt.
DMA1 Channel3 transfer complete
DMA1 Channel3 half transfer interrupt.
DMA1 Channel3 transfer error
DMA1 Channel4 global interrupt.
DMA1 Channel4 transfer complete
DMA1 Channel4 half transfer interrupt.
DMA1 Channel4 transfer error
DMA1 Channel5 global interrupt.
DMA1 Channel5 transfer complete
DMA1 Channel5 half transfer interrupt.
DMA1 Channel5 transfer error
DMA1 Channel6 global interrupt.
DMA1 Channel6 transfer complete
DMA1 Channel6 half transfer interrupt.
DMA1 Channel6 transfer error
DMA1 Channel7 global interrupt.
DMA1 Channel7 transfer complete
DMA1 Channel7 half transfer interrupt.
DMA1 Channel7 transfer error
DMA2 Channel1 global interrupt.
DMA2 Channel1 transfer complete
DMA2 Channel1 half transfer interrupt.
DMA2 Channel1 transfer error
DMA2 Channel2 global interrupt.
DMA2 Channel2 transfer complete
DMA2 Channel2 half transfer interrupt.
DMA2 Channel2 transfer error
DMA2 Channel3 global interrupt.
DMA2 Channel3 transfer complete
DMA2 Channel3 half transfer interrupt.
DMA2 Channel3 transfer error
DMA2 Channel4 global interrupt.
DMA2 Channel4 transfer complete
193/584
DMA controller (DMA)
UM1581






9.2.7.5
194/584
interrupt.
DMA2_IT_HT4 :
DMA2_IT_TE4 :
interrupt.
DMA2_IT_GL5 :
DMA2_IT_TC5 :
interrupt.
DMA2_IT_HT5 :
DMA2_IT_TE5 :
interrupt.
DMA2 Channel4 half transfer interrupt.
DMA2 Channel4 transfer error
DMA2 Channel5 global interrupt.
DMA2 Channel5 transfer complete
DMA2 Channel5 half transfer interrupt.
DMA2 Channel5 transfer error
Return values

The new state of DMAy_IT (SET or RESET).
Notes

The Global interrupt (DMAy_FLAG_GLx) is set whenever any
of the other interrupts relative to the same channel is set
(Transfer Complete, Half-transfer Complete or Transfer Error
interrupts: DMAy_IT_TCx, DMAy_IT_HTx or DMAy_IT_TEx).
DMA_ClearITPendingBit
Function Name
void DMA_ClearITPendingBit ( uint32_t DMAy_IT)
Function Description
Clears the DMAy Channelx's interrupt pending bits.
Parameters

DMAy_IT : specifies the DMAy interrupt pending bit to clear.
This parameter can be any combination (for the same DMA)
of the following values:

DMA1_IT_GL1 : DMA1 Channel1 global interrupt.

DMA1_IT_TC1 : DMA1 Channel1 transfer complete
interrupt.

DMA1_IT_HT1 : DMA1 Channel1 half transfer interrupt.

DMA1_IT_TE1 : DMA1 Channel1 transfer error
interrupt.

DMA1_IT_GL2 : DMA1 Channel2 global interrupt.

DMA1_IT_TC2 : DMA1 Channel2 transfer complete
interrupt.

DMA1_IT_HT2 : DMA1 Channel2 half transfer interrupt.

DMA1_IT_TE2 : DMA1 Channel2 transfer error
interrupt.

DMA1_IT_GL3 : DMA1 Channel3 global interrupt.

DMA1_IT_TC3 : DMA1 Channel3 transfer complete
interrupt.

DMA1_IT_HT3 : DMA1 Channel3 half transfer interrupt.

DMA1_IT_TE3 : DMA1 Channel3 transfer error
interrupt.

DMA1_IT_GL4 : DMA1 Channel4 global interrupt.

DMA1_IT_TC4 : DMA1 Channel4 transfer complete
interrupt.

DMA1_IT_HT4 : DMA1 Channel4 half transfer interrupt.
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581

































DMA1_IT_TE4 :
interrupt.
DMA1_IT_GL5 :
DMA1_IT_TC5 :
interrupt.
DMA1_IT_HT5 :
DMA1_IT_TE5 :
interrupt.
DMA1_IT_GL6 :
DMA1_IT_TC6 :
interrupt.
DMA1_IT_HT6 :
DMA1_IT_TE6 :
interrupt.
DMA1_IT_GL7 :
DMA1_IT_TC7 :
interrupt.
DMA1_IT_HT7 :
DMA1_IT_TE7 :
interrupt.
DMA2_IT_GL1 :
DMA2_IT_TC1 :
interrupt.
DMA2_IT_HT1 :
DMA2_IT_TE1 :
interrupt.
DMA2_IT_GL2 :
DMA2_IT_TC2 :
interrupt.
DMA2_IT_HT2 :
DMA2_IT_TE2 :
interrupt.
DMA2_IT_GL3 :
DMA2_IT_TC3 :
interrupt.
DMA2_IT_HT3 :
DMA2_IT_TE3 :
interrupt.
DMA2_IT_GL4 :
DMA2_IT_TC4 :
interrupt.
DMA2_IT_HT4 :
DMA2_IT_TE4 :
interrupt.
DMA2_IT_GL5 :
DMA2_IT_TC5 :
interrupt.
DMA2_IT_HT5 :
DMA2_IT_TE5 :
interrupt.
DMA controller (DMA)
DMA1 Channel4 transfer error
DMA1 Channel5 global interrupt.
DMA1 Channel5 transfer complete
DMA1 Channel5 half transfer interrupt.
DMA1 Channel5 transfer error
DMA1 Channel6 global interrupt.
DMA1 Channel6 transfer complete
DMA1 Channel6 half transfer interrupt.
DMA1 Channel6 transfer error
DMA1 Channel7 global interrupt.
DMA1 Channel7 transfer complete
DMA1 Channel7 half transfer interrupt.
DMA1 Channel7 transfer error
DMA2 Channel1 global interrupt.
DMA2 Channel1 transfer complete
DMA2 Channel1 half transfer interrupt.
DMA2 Channel1 transfer error
DMA2 Channel2 global interrupt.
DMA2 Channel2 transfer complete
DMA2 Channel2 half transfer interrupt.
DMA2 Channel2 transfer error
DMA2 Channel3 global interrupt.
DMA2 Channel3 transfer complete
DMA2 Channel3 half transfer interrupt.
DMA2 Channel3 transfer error
DMA2 Channel4 global interrupt.
DMA2 Channel4 transfer complete
DMA2 Channel4 half transfer interrupt.
DMA2 Channel4 transfer error
DMA2 Channel5 global interrupt.
DMA2 Channel5 transfer complete
DMA2 Channel5 half transfer interrupt.
DMA2 Channel5 transfer error
Return values

None.
Notes

Clearing the Global interrupt (DMAy_IT_GLx) results in
DocID023800 Rev 1
195/584
DMA controller (DMA)
UM1581
clearing all other interrupts relative to the same channel
(Transfer Complete, Half-transfer Complete and Transfer
Error interrupts: DMAy_IT_TCx, DMAy_IT_HTx and
DMAy_IT_TEx).
9.3
DMA Firmware driver defines
9.3.1
DMA
DMA
DMA_circular_normal_mode

#define: DMA_Mode_Normal ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: DMA_Mode_Circular DMA_CCR_CIRC
DMA_data_transfer_direction

#define: DMA_DIR_PeripheralSRC ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: DMA_DIR_PeripheralDST DMA_CCR_DIR
DMA_flags_definition
196/584

#define: DMA1_FLAG_GL1 ((uint32_t)0x00000001)

#define: DMA1_FLAG_TC1 ((uint32_t)0x00000002)

#define: DMA1_FLAG_HT1 ((uint32_t)0x00000004)

#define: DMA1_FLAG_TE1 ((uint32_t)0x00000008)
DocID023800 Rev 1
DMA controller (DMA)
UM1581

#define: DMA1_FLAG_GL2 ((uint32_t)0x00000010)

#define: DMA1_FLAG_TC2 ((uint32_t)0x00000020)

#define: DMA1_FLAG_HT2 ((uint32_t)0x00000040)

#define: DMA1_FLAG_TE2 ((uint32_t)0x00000080)

#define: DMA1_FLAG_GL3 ((uint32_t)0x00000100)

#define: DMA1_FLAG_TC3 ((uint32_t)0x00000200)

#define: DMA1_FLAG_HT3 ((uint32_t)0x00000400)

#define: DMA1_FLAG_TE3 ((uint32_t)0x00000800)

#define: DMA1_FLAG_GL4 ((uint32_t)0x00001000)

#define: DMA1_FLAG_TC4 ((uint32_t)0x00002000)

#define: DMA1_FLAG_HT4 ((uint32_t)0x00004000)

#define: DMA1_FLAG_TE4 ((uint32_t)0x00008000)
DocID023800 Rev 1
197/584
DMA controller (DMA)
198/584
UM1581

#define: DMA1_FLAG_GL5 ((uint32_t)0x00010000)

#define: DMA1_FLAG_TC5 ((uint32_t)0x00020000)

#define: DMA1_FLAG_HT5 ((uint32_t)0x00040000)

#define: DMA1_FLAG_TE5 ((uint32_t)0x00080000)

#define: DMA1_FLAG_GL6 ((uint32_t)0x00100000)

#define: DMA1_FLAG_TC6 ((uint32_t)0x00200000)

#define: DMA1_FLAG_HT6 ((uint32_t)0x00400000)

#define: DMA1_FLAG_TE6 ((uint32_t)0x00800000)

#define: DMA1_FLAG_GL7 ((uint32_t)0x01000000)

#define: DMA1_FLAG_TC7 ((uint32_t)0x02000000)

#define: DMA1_FLAG_HT7 ((uint32_t)0x04000000)

#define: DMA1_FLAG_TE7 ((uint32_t)0x08000000)
DocID023800 Rev 1
DMA controller (DMA)
UM1581

#define: DMA2_FLAG_GL1 ((uint32_t)0x10000001)

#define: DMA2_FLAG_TC1 ((uint32_t)0x10000002)

#define: DMA2_FLAG_HT1 ((uint32_t)0x10000004)

#define: DMA2_FLAG_TE1 ((uint32_t)0x10000008)

#define: DMA2_FLAG_GL2 ((uint32_t)0x10000010)

#define: DMA2_FLAG_TC2 ((uint32_t)0x10000020)

#define: DMA2_FLAG_HT2 ((uint32_t)0x10000040)

#define: DMA2_FLAG_TE2 ((uint32_t)0x10000080)

#define: DMA2_FLAG_GL3 ((uint32_t)0x10000100)

#define: DMA2_FLAG_TC3 ((uint32_t)0x10000200)

#define: DMA2_FLAG_HT3 ((uint32_t)0x10000400)

#define: DMA2_FLAG_TE3 ((uint32_t)0x10000800)
DocID023800 Rev 1
199/584
DMA controller (DMA)
UM1581

#define: DMA2_FLAG_GL4 ((uint32_t)0x10001000)

#define: DMA2_FLAG_TC4 ((uint32_t)0x10002000)

#define: DMA2_FLAG_HT4 ((uint32_t)0x10004000)

#define: DMA2_FLAG_TE4 ((uint32_t)0x10008000)

#define: DMA2_FLAG_GL5 ((uint32_t)0x10010000)

#define: DMA2_FLAG_TC5 ((uint32_t)0x10020000)

#define: DMA2_FLAG_HT5 ((uint32_t)0x10040000)

#define: DMA2_FLAG_TE5 ((uint32_t)0x10080000)
DMA_interrupts_definition
200/584

#define: DMA_IT_TC ((uint32_t)0x00000002)

#define: DMA_IT_HT ((uint32_t)0x00000004)

#define: DMA_IT_TE ((uint32_t)0x00000008)

#define: DMA1_IT_GL1 ((uint32_t)0x00000001)
DocID023800 Rev 1
DMA controller (DMA)
UM1581

#define: DMA1_IT_TC1 ((uint32_t)0x00000002)

#define: DMA1_IT_HT1 ((uint32_t)0x00000004)

#define: DMA1_IT_TE1 ((uint32_t)0x00000008)

#define: DMA1_IT_GL2 ((uint32_t)0x00000010)

#define: DMA1_IT_TC2 ((uint32_t)0x00000020)

#define: DMA1_IT_HT2 ((uint32_t)0x00000040)

#define: DMA1_IT_TE2 ((uint32_t)0x00000080)

#define: DMA1_IT_GL3 ((uint32_t)0x00000100)

#define: DMA1_IT_TC3 ((uint32_t)0x00000200)

#define: DMA1_IT_HT3 ((uint32_t)0x00000400)

#define: DMA1_IT_TE3 ((uint32_t)0x00000800)

#define: DMA1_IT_GL4 ((uint32_t)0x00001000)
DocID023800 Rev 1
201/584
DMA controller (DMA)
202/584
UM1581

#define: DMA1_IT_TC4 ((uint32_t)0x00002000)

#define: DMA1_IT_HT4 ((uint32_t)0x00004000)

#define: DMA1_IT_TE4 ((uint32_t)0x00008000)

#define: DMA1_IT_GL5 ((uint32_t)0x00010000)

#define: DMA1_IT_TC5 ((uint32_t)0x00020000)

#define: DMA1_IT_HT5 ((uint32_t)0x00040000)

#define: DMA1_IT_TE5 ((uint32_t)0x00080000)

#define: DMA1_IT_GL6 ((uint32_t)0x00100000)

#define: DMA1_IT_TC6 ((uint32_t)0x00200000)

#define: DMA1_IT_HT6 ((uint32_t)0x00400000)

#define: DMA1_IT_TE6 ((uint32_t)0x00800000)

#define: DMA1_IT_GL7 ((uint32_t)0x01000000)
DocID023800 Rev 1
DMA controller (DMA)
UM1581

#define: DMA1_IT_TC7 ((uint32_t)0x02000000)

#define: DMA1_IT_HT7 ((uint32_t)0x04000000)

#define: DMA1_IT_TE7 ((uint32_t)0x08000000)

#define: DMA2_IT_GL1 ((uint32_t)0x10000001)

#define: DMA2_IT_TC1 ((uint32_t)0x10000002)

#define: DMA2_IT_HT1 ((uint32_t)0x10000004)

#define: DMA2_IT_TE1 ((uint32_t)0x10000008)

#define: DMA2_IT_GL2 ((uint32_t)0x10000010)

#define: DMA2_IT_TC2 ((uint32_t)0x10000020)

#define: DMA2_IT_HT2 ((uint32_t)0x10000040)

#define: DMA2_IT_TE2 ((uint32_t)0x10000080)

#define: DMA2_IT_GL3 ((uint32_t)0x10000100)
DocID023800 Rev 1
203/584
DMA controller (DMA)
UM1581

#define: DMA2_IT_TC3 ((uint32_t)0x10000200)

#define: DMA2_IT_HT3 ((uint32_t)0x10000400)

#define: DMA2_IT_TE3 ((uint32_t)0x10000800)

#define: DMA2_IT_GL4 ((uint32_t)0x10001000)

#define: DMA2_IT_TC4 ((uint32_t)0x10002000)

#define: DMA2_IT_HT4 ((uint32_t)0x10004000)

#define: DMA2_IT_TE4 ((uint32_t)0x10008000)

#define: DMA2_IT_GL5 ((uint32_t)0x10010000)

#define: DMA2_IT_TC5 ((uint32_t)0x10020000)

#define: DMA2_IT_HT5 ((uint32_t)0x10040000)

#define: DMA2_IT_TE5 ((uint32_t)0x10080000)
DMA_memory_data_size
204/584
DocID023800 Rev 1

DMA controller (DMA)
#define: DMA_MemoryDataSize_Byte ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: DMA_MemoryDataSize_HalfWord DMA_CCR_MSIZE_0

#define: DMA_MemoryDataSize_Word DMA_CCR_MSIZE_1
UM1581
DMA_memory_incremented_mode

#define: DMA_MemoryInc_Disable ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: DMA_MemoryInc_Enable DMA_CCR_MINC
DMA_memory_to_memory

#define: DMA_M2M_Disable ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: DMA_M2M_Enable DMA_CCR_MEM2MEM
DMA_peripheral_data_size

#define: DMA_PeripheralDataSize_Byte ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: DMA_PeripheralDataSize_HalfWord DMA_CCR_PSIZE_0

#define: DMA_PeripheralDataSize_Word DMA_CCR_PSIZE_1
DMA_peripheral_incremented_mode

#define: DMA_PeripheralInc_Disable ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
DocID023800 Rev 1
205/584
DMA controller (DMA)

UM1581
#define: DMA_PeripheralInc_Enable DMA_CCR_PINC
DMA_priority_level
206/584

#define: DMA_Priority_VeryHigh DMA_CCR_PL

#define: DMA_Priority_High DMA_CCR_PL_1

#define: DMA_Priority_Medium DMA_CCR_PL_0

#define: DMA_Priority_Low ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
DocID023800 Rev 1
External interrupt/event controller (EXTI)
UM1581
10
External interrupt/event controller (EXTI)
10.1
EXTI Firmware driver registers structures
10.1.1
EXTI_TypeDef
EXTI_TypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x.h
Data Fields














__IO uint32_t IMR
__IO uint32_t EMR
__IO uint32_t RTSR
__IO uint32_t FTSR
__IO uint32_t SWIER
__IO uint32_t PR
uint32_t RESERVED1
uint32_t RESERVED2
__IO uint32_t IMR2
__IO uint32_t EMR2
__IO uint32_t RTSR2
__IO uint32_t FTSR2
__IO uint32_t SWIER2
__IO uint32_t PR2
Field Documentation











__IO uint32_t EXTI_TypeDef::IMR

EXTI Interrupt mask register, Address offset: 0x00
__IO uint32_t EXTI_TypeDef::EMR

EXTI Event mask register, Address offset: 0x04
__IO uint32_t EXTI_TypeDef::RTSR

EXTI Rising trigger selection register, Address offset: 0x08
__IO uint32_t EXTI_TypeDef::FTSR

EXTI Falling trigger selection register, Address offset: 0x0C
__IO uint32_t EXTI_TypeDef::SWIER

EXTI Software interrupt event register, Address offset: 0x10
__IO uint32_t EXTI_TypeDef::PR

EXTI Pending register, Address offset: 0x14
uint32_t EXTI_TypeDef::RESERVED1

Reserved, 0x18
uint32_t EXTI_TypeDef::RESERVED2

Reserved, 0x1C
__IO uint32_t EXTI_TypeDef::IMR2

EXTI Interrupt mask register, Address offset: 0x20
__IO uint32_t EXTI_TypeDef::EMR2

EXTI Event mask register, Address offset: 0x24
__IO uint32_t EXTI_TypeDef::RTSR2

EXTI Rising trigger selection register, Address offset: 0x28
DocID023800 Rev 1
207/584
External interrupt/event controller (EXTI)



10.1.2
UM1581
__IO uint32_t EXTI_TypeDef::FTSR2

EXTI Falling trigger selection register, Address offset: 0x2C
__IO uint32_t EXTI_TypeDef::SWIER2

EXTI Software interrupt event register, Address offset: 0x30
__IO uint32_t EXTI_TypeDef::PR2

EXTI Pending register, Address offset: 0x34
EXTI_InitTypeDef
EXTI_InitTypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x_exti.h
Data Fields




uint32_t EXTI_Line
EXTIMode_TypeDef EXTI_Mode
EXTITrigger_TypeDef EXTI_Trigger
FunctionalState EXTI_LineCmd
Field Documentation




10.2
uint32_t EXTI_InitTypeDef::EXTI_Line

Specifies the EXTI lines to be enabled or disabled. This parameter can be any
combination of EXTI_Lines
EXTIMode_TypeDef EXTI_InitTypeDef::EXTI_Mode

Specifies the mode for the EXTI lines. This parameter can be a value of
EXTIMode_TypeDef
EXTITrigger_TypeDef EXTI_InitTypeDef::EXTI_Trigger

Specifies the trigger signal active edge for the EXTI lines. This parameter can be
a value of EXTITrigger_TypeDef
FunctionalState EXTI_InitTypeDef::EXTI_LineCmd

Specifies the new state of the selected EXTI lines. This parameter can be set
either to ENABLE or DISABLE
EXTI Firmware driver API description
The following section lists the various functions of the EXTI library.
10.2.1
EXTI features
External interrupt/event lines are mapped as following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
208/584
All available GPIO pins are connected to the 16 external interrupt/event lines from
EXTI0 to EXTI15.
EXTI line 16 is connected to the PVD output
EXTI line 17 is connected to the RTC Alarm event
EXTI line 18 is connected to USB Device wakeup event
EXTI line 19 is connected to the RTC Tamper and TimeStamp events
EXTI line 20 is connected to the RTC wakeup event
EXTI line 21 is connected to the Comparator 1 wakeup event
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
10.2.2
External interrupt/event controller (EXTI)
EXTI line 22 is connected to the Comparator 2 wakeup event
EXTI line 23 is connected to the I2C1 wakeup event
EXTI line 24 is connected to the I2C2 wakeup event
EXTI line 25 is connected to the USART1 wakeup event
EXTI line 26 is connected to the USART2 wakeup event
EXTI line 27 is reserved
EXTI line 28 is connected to the USART3 wakeup event
EXTI line 29 is connected to the Comparator 3 event
EXTI line 30 is connected to the Comparator 4 event
EXTI line 31 is connected to the Comparator 5 event
EXTI line 32 is connected to the Comparator 6 event
EXTI line 33 is connected to the Comparator 7 event
EXTI line 34 is connected for thr UART4 wakeup event
EXTI line 35 is connected for the UART5 wakeup event
How to use this driver
In order to use an I/O pin as an external interrupt source, follow steps below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Configure the I/O in input mode using GPIO_Init().
Select the input source pin for the EXTI line using SYSCFG_EXTILineConfig().
Select the mode(interrupt, event) and configure the trigger selection (Rising, falling or
both) using EXTI_Init(). For the internal interrupt, the trigger selection is not needed
(the active edge is always the rising one).
Configure NVIC IRQ channel mapped to the EXTI line using NVIC_Init().
Optionally, you can generate a software interrupt using the function
EXTI_GenerateSWInterrupt().
SYSCFG APB clock must be enabled to get write access to SYSCFG_EXTICRx
registers using RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SYSCFG,
ENABLE);
10.2.3
Initialization and Configuration functions




10.2.4
EXTI_DeInit()
EXTI_Init()
EXTI_StructInit()
EXTI_GenerateSWInterrupt()
Interrupts and flags management functions
This section provides functions allowing to configure the EXTI Interrupts sources and
check or clear the flags or pending bits status.




EXTI_GetFlagStatus()
EXTI_ClearFlag()
EXTI_GetITStatus()
EXTI_ClearITPendingBit()
DocID023800 Rev 1
209/584
External interrupt/event controller (EXTI)
UM1581
10.2.5
Initialization and Configuration functions
10.2.5.1
EXTI_DeInit
10.2.5.2
10.2.5.3
210/584
Function Name
void EXTI_DeInit ( void )
Function Description
Deinitializes the EXTI peripheral registers to their default reset
values.
Parameters

None.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
EXTI_Init
Function Name
void EXTI_Init ( EXTI_InitTypeDef * EXTI_InitStruct)
Function Description
Initializes the EXTI peripheral according to the specified
parameters in the EXTI_InitStruct.
Parameters

EXTI_InitStruct : pointer to a EXTI_InitTypeDef structure
that contains the configuration information for the EXTI
peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
EXTI_StructInit
Function Name
void EXTI_StructInit ( EXTI_InitTypeDef * EXTI_InitStruct)
Function Description
Fills each EXTI_InitStruct member with its reset value.
Parameters

EXTI_InitStruct : pointer to a EXTI_InitTypeDef structure
which will be initialized.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
External interrupt/event controller (EXTI)
UM1581
10.2.5.4
EXTI_GenerateSWInterrupt
Function Name
void EXTI_GenerateSWInterrupt ( uint32_t EXTI_Line)
Function Description
Generates a Software interrupt on selected EXTI line.
Parameters

EXTI_Line : specifies the EXTI line on which the software
interrupt will be generated. This parameter can be any
combination of EXTI_Linex where x can be (0..20).
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
10.2.6
Interrupts and flags management functions
10.2.6.1
EXTI_GetFlagStatus
10.2.6.2
Function Name
FlagStatus EXTI_GetFlagStatus ( uint32_t EXTI_Line)
Function Description
Checks whether the specified EXTI line flag is set or not.
Parameters

EXTI_Line : specifies the EXTI line flag to check. This
parameter can be any combination of EXTI_Linex where x
can be (0..20).
Return values

The new state of EXTI_Line (SET or RESET).
Notes

None.
EXTI_ClearFlag
Function Name
void EXTI_ClearFlag ( uint32_t EXTI_Line)
Function Description
Clears the EXTI's line pending flags.
Parameters

EXTI_Line : specifies the EXTI lines flags to clear. This
parameter can be any combination of EXTI_Linex where x
can be (0..20).
DocID023800 Rev 1
211/584
External interrupt/event controller (EXTI)
Return values

None.
Notes
10.2.6.3
10.2.6.4

None.
EXTI_GetITStatus
Function Name
ITStatus EXTI_GetITStatus ( uint32_t EXTI_Line)
Function Description
Checks whether the specified EXTI line is asserted or not.
Parameters

EXTI_Line : specifies the EXTI line to check. This parameter
can be any combination of EXTI_Linex where x can be
(0..20).
Return values

The new state of EXTI_Line (SET or RESET).
Notes

None.
EXTI_ClearITPendingBit
Function Name
void EXTI_ClearITPendingBit ( uint32_t EXTI_Line)
Function Description
Clears the EXTI's line pending bits.
Parameters

EXTI_Line : specifies the EXTI lines to clear. This parameter
can be any combination of EXTI_Linex where x can be
(0..20).
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
10.3
EXTI Firmware driver defines
10.3.1
EXTI
EXTI
EXTI_Lines

212/584
UM1581
#define: EXTI_Line0 ((uint32_t)0x00)
DocID023800 Rev 1
External interrupt/event controller (EXTI)
UM1581
External interrupt line 0

#define: EXTI_Line1 ((uint32_t)0x01)
External interrupt line 1

#define: EXTI_Line2 ((uint32_t)0x02)
External interrupt line 2

#define: EXTI_Line3 ((uint32_t)0x03)
External interrupt line 3

#define: EXTI_Line4 ((uint32_t)0x04)
External interrupt line 4

#define: EXTI_Line5 ((uint32_t)0x05)
External interrupt line 5

#define: EXTI_Line6 ((uint32_t)0x06)
External interrupt line 6

#define: EXTI_Line7 ((uint32_t)0x07)
External interrupt line 7

#define: EXTI_Line8 ((uint32_t)0x08)
External interrupt line 8

#define: EXTI_Line9 ((uint32_t)0x09)
External interrupt line 9

#define: EXTI_Line10 ((uint32_t)0x0A)
External interrupt line 10

#define: EXTI_Line11 ((uint32_t)0x0B)
External interrupt line 11

#define: EXTI_Line12 ((uint32_t)0x0C)
DocID023800 Rev 1
213/584
External interrupt/event controller (EXTI)
External interrupt line 12

UM1581
#define: EXTI_Line13 ((uint32_t)0x0D)
External interrupt line 13

#define: EXTI_Line14 ((uint32_t)0x0E)
External interrupt line 14

#define: EXTI_Line15 ((uint32_t)0x0F)
External interrupt line 15

#define: EXTI_Line16 ((uint32_t)0x10)
External interrupt line 16 Connected to the PVD Output

#define: EXTI_Line17 ((uint32_t)0x11)
Internal interrupt line 17 Connected to the RTC Alarm event

#define: EXTI_Line18 ((uint32_t)0x12)
Internal interrupt line 18 Connected to the USB Device Wakeup from suspend event

#define: EXTI_Line19 ((uint32_t)0x13)
Internal interrupt line 19 Connected to the RTC Tamper and Time Stamp events

#define: EXTI_Line20 ((uint32_t)0x14)
Internal interrupt line 20 Connected to the RTC wakeup event

#define: EXTI_Line21 ((uint32_t)0x15)
Internal interrupt line 21 Connected to the Comparator 1 event

#define: EXTI_Line22 ((uint32_t)0x16)
Internal interrupt line 22 Connected to the Comparator 2 event

#define: EXTI_Line23 ((uint32_t)0x17)
Internal interrupt line 23 Connected to the I2C1 wakeup event

214/584
#define: EXTI_Line24 ((uint32_t)0x18)
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
External interrupt/event controller (EXTI)
Internal interrupt line 24 Connected to the I2C2 wakeup event

#define: EXTI_Line25 ((uint32_t)0x19)
Internal interrupt line 25 Connected to the USART1 wakeup event

#define: EXTI_Line26 ((uint32_t)0x1A)
Internal interrupt line 26 Connected to the USART2 wakeup event

#define: EXTI_Line27 ((uint32_t)0x1B)
Internal interrupt line 27 reserved

#define: EXTI_Line28 ((uint32_t)0x1C)
Internal interrupt line 28 Connected to the USART3 wakeup event

#define: EXTI_Line29 ((uint32_t)0x1D)
Internal interrupt line 29 Connected to the Comparator 3 event

#define: EXTI_Line30 ((uint32_t)0x1E)
Internal interrupt line 30 Connected to the Comparator 4 event

#define: EXTI_Line31 ((uint32_t)0x1F)
Internal interrupt line 31 Connected to the Comparator 5 event

#define: EXTI_Line32 ((uint32_t)0x20)
Internal interrupt line 32 Connected to the Comparator 6 event

#define: EXTI_Line33 ((uint32_t)0x21)
Internal interrupt line 33 Connected to the Comparator 7 event

#define: EXTI_Line34 ((uint32_t)0x22)
Internal interrupt line 34 Connected to the USART4 wakeup event

#define: EXTI_Line35 ((uint32_t)0x23)
Internal interrupt line 35 Connected to the USART5 wakeup event
DocID023800 Rev 1
215/584
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
UM1581
11
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
11.1
FLASH Firmware driver registers structures
11.1.1
FLASH_TypeDef
FLASH_TypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x.h
Data Fields









__IO uint32_t ACR
__IO uint32_t KEYR
__IO uint32_t OPTKEYR
__IO uint32_t SR
__IO uint32_t CR
__IO uint32_t AR
uint32_t RESERVED
__IO uint32_t OBR
__IO uint32_t WRPR
Field Documentation









11.1.2
__IO uint32_t FLASH_TypeDef::ACR

FLASH access control register, Address offset: 0x00
__IO uint32_t FLASH_TypeDef::KEYR

FLASH key register, Address offset: 0x04
__IO uint32_t FLASH_TypeDef::OPTKEYR

FLASH option key register, Address offset: 0x08
__IO uint32_t FLASH_TypeDef::SR

FLASH status register, Address offset: 0x0C
__IO uint32_t FLASH_TypeDef::CR

FLASH control register, Address offset: 0x10
__IO uint32_t FLASH_TypeDef::AR

FLASH address register, Address offset: 0x14
uint32_t FLASH_TypeDef::RESERVED

Reserved, 0x18
__IO uint32_t FLASH_TypeDef::OBR

FLASH Option byte register, Address offset: 0x1C
__IO uint32_t FLASH_TypeDef::WRPR

FLASH Write register, Address offset: 0x20
OB_TypeDef
OB_TypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x.h
Data Fields
216/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
UM1581








__IO uint16_t RDP
__IO uint16_t USER
uint16_t RESERVED0
uint16_t RESERVED1
__IO uint16_t WRP0
__IO uint16_t WRP1
__IO uint16_t WRP2
__IO uint16_t WRP3
Field Documentation








11.2
__IO uint16_t OB_TypeDef::RDP

FLASH option byte Read protection, Address offset: 0x00
__IO uint16_t OB_TypeDef::USER

FLASH option byte user options, Address offset: 0x02
uint16_t OB_TypeDef::RESERVED0

Reserved, 0x04
uint16_t OB_TypeDef::RESERVED1

Reserved, 0x06
__IO uint16_t OB_TypeDef::WRP0

FLASH option byte write protection 0, Address offset: 0x08
__IO uint16_t OB_TypeDef::WRP1

FLASH option byte write protection 1, Address offset: 0x0C
__IO uint16_t OB_TypeDef::WRP2

FLASH option byte write protection 2, Address offset: 0x10
__IO uint16_t OB_TypeDef::WRP3

FLASH option byte write protection 3, Address offset: 0x12
FLASH Firmware driver API description
The following section lists the various functions of the FLASH library.
11.2.1
How to use this driver
This driver provides functions to configure and program the FLASH memory of all
STM32F30x devices. These functions are split in 4 groups:
1.
2.
3.
FLASH Interface configuration functions: this group includes the management of
following features:

Set the latency.

Enable/Disable the Half Cycle Access.

Enable/Disable the prefetch buffer.
FLASH Memory Programming functions: this group includes all needed functions to
erase and program the main memory:

Lock and Unlock the FLASH interface.

Erase function: Erase page, erase all pages.

Program functions: Half Word and Word write.
FLASH Option Bytes Programming functions: this group includes all needed functions
to manage the Option Bytes:

Lock and Unlock the Flash Option bytes.
DocID023800 Rev 1
217/584
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
UM1581

Launch the Option Bytes loader

Erase the Option Bytes

Set/Reset the write protection

Set the Read protection Level

Program the user option Bytes

Set/Reset the BOOT1 bit

Enable/Disable the VDDA Analog Monitoring

Enable/Disable the SRAM parity

Get the user option bytes

Get the Write protection

Get the read protection status
4.
FLASH Interrupts and flags management functions: this group includes all needed
functions to:

Enable/Disable the FLASH interrupt sources.

Get flags status.

Clear flags.

Get FLASH operation status.

Wait for last FLASH operation.
11.2.2
FLASH Interface configuration functions
This group includes the following functions:



void FLASH_SetLatency(uint32_t FLASH_Latency);
void FLASH_HalfCycleAccessCmd(uint32_t FLASH_HalfCycleAccess);
void FLASH_PrefetchBufferCmd(FunctionalState NewState);
The unlock sequence is not needed for these functions.



11.2.3
FLASH_SetLatency()
FLASH_HalfCycleAccessCmd()
FLASH_PrefetchBufferCmd()
FLASH Memory Programming functions
This group includes the following functions:






void FLASH_Unlock(void);
void FLASH_Lock(void);
FLASH_Status FLASH_ErasePage(uint32_t Page_Address);
FLASH_Status FLASH_EraseAllPages(void);
FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramWord(uint32_t Address, uint32_t Data);
FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramHalfWord(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Data);
Any operation of erase or program should follow these steps:
1.
2.
3.



218/584
Call the FLASH_Unlock() function to enable the FLASH control register program
memory access.
Call the desired function to erase page or program data.
Call the FLASH_Lock() function to disable the FLASH control register access
(recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation).
FLASH_Unlock()
FLASH_Lock()
FLASH_ErasePage()
DocID023800 Rev 1
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
UM1581



11.2.4
FLASH_EraseAllPages()
FLASH_ProgramWord()
FLASH_ProgramHalfWord()
Option Bytes Programming functions
This group includes the following functions:














void FLASH_OB_Unlock(void);
void FLASH_OB_Lock(void);
void FLASH_OB_Erase(void);
FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_WRPConfig(uint32_t OB_WRP, FunctionalState
NewState);
FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_RDPConfig(uint8_t OB_RDP);
FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_UserConfig(uint8_t OB_IWDG, uint8_t OB_STOP,
uint8_t OB_STDBY);
FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_BOOTConfig(uint8_t OB_BOOT1);
FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_VDDAConfig(uint8_t OB_VDDA_ANALOG);
FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_SRMParityConfig(uint8_t OB_SRAM_Parity);
FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_WriteUser(uint8_t OB_USER);
FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_Launch(void);
uint32_t FLASH_OB_GetUser(void);
uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetWRP(void);
uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetRDP(void);
Any operation of erase or program should follow these steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.


Call the FLASH_OB_Unlock() function to enable the FLASH option control register
access.
Call one or several functions to program the desired Option Bytes:

void FLASH_OB_WRPConfig(uint32_t OB_WRP, FunctionalState NewState); =>
to Enable/Disable the desired sector write protection.

FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_RDPConfig(uint8_t OB_RDP) => to set the desired
read Protection Level.

FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_UserConfig(uint8_t OB_IWDG, uint8_t OB_STOP,
uint8_t OB_STDBY); => to configure the user Option Bytes.

FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_BOOTConfig(uint8_t OB_BOOT1); => to set the
boot1 mode

FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_VDDAConfig(uint8_t OB_VDDA_ANALOG); => to
Enable/Disable the VDDA monotoring.

FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_SRMParityConfig(uint8_t OB_SRAM_Parity); => to
Enable/Disable the SRAM Parity check.

FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_WriteUser(uint8_t OB_USER); => to write all user
option bytes: OB_IWDG, OB_STOP, OB_STDBY, OB_BOOT1,
OB_VDDA_ANALOG and OB_VDD_SD12.
Once all needed Option Bytes to be programmed are correctly written, call the
FLASH_OB_Launch() function to launch the Option Bytes programming process. (#@)
When changing the IWDG mode from HW to SW or from SW to HW, a system reset is
needed to make the change effective.
Call the FLASH_OB_Lock() function to disable the FLASH option control register
access (recommended to protect the Option Bytes against possible unwanted
operations).
FLASH_OB_Unlock()
FLASH_OB_Lock()
DocID023800 Rev 1
219/584
FLASH Memory (FLASH)













11.2.5
UM1581
FLASH_OB_Launch()
FLASH_OB_Erase()
FLASH_OB_EnableWRP()
FLASH_OB_RDPConfig()
FLASH_OB_UserConfig()
FLASH_OB_BOOTConfig()
FLASH_OB_VDDAConfig()
FLASH_OB_SRAMParityConfig()
FLASH_OB_WriteUser()
FLASH_ProgramOptionByteData()
FLASH_OB_GetUser()
FLASH_OB_GetWRP()
FLASH_OB_GetRDP()
Interrupts and flags management functions





FLASH_ITConfig()
FLASH_GetFlagStatus()
FLASH_ClearFlag()
FLASH_GetStatus()
FLASH_WaitForLastOperation()
11.2.6
FLASH Interface configuration functions
11.2.6.1
FLASH_SetLatency
11.2.6.2
Function Name
void FLASH_SetLatency ( uint32_t FLASH_Latency)
Function Description
Sets the code latency value.
Parameters

FLASH_Latency : specifies the FLASH Latency value. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

FLASH_Latency_0 : FLASH Zero Latency cycle

FLASH_Latency_1 : FLASH One Latency cycle

FLASH_Latency_2 : FLASH Two Latency cycles
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
FLASH_HalfCycleAccessCmd
Function Name
220/584
void FLASH_HalfCycleAccessCmd ( FunctionalState
NewState)
DocID023800 Rev 1
Function Description
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
Enables or disables the Half cycle flash access.
Parameters

FLASH_HalfCycleAccess : specifies the FLASH Half cycle
Access mode. This parameter can be one of the following
values:

FLASH_HalfCycleAccess_Enable : FLASH Half Cycle
Enable

FLASH_HalfCycleAccess_Disable : FLASH Half Cycle
Disable
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
UM1581
11.2.6.3
FLASH_PrefetchBufferCmd
Function Name
void FLASH_PrefetchBufferCmd ( FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the Prefetch Buffer.
Parameters

NewState : new state of the Prefetch Buffer. This parameter
can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
11.2.7
FLASH Memory Programming functions
11.2.7.1
FLASH_Unlock
Function Name
void FLASH_Unlock ( void )
Function Description
Unlocks the FLASH control register access.
Parameters

None.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
221/584
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
11.2.7.2
11.2.7.3
UM1581
FLASH_Lock
Function Name
void FLASH_Lock ( void )
Function Description
Locks the FLASH control register access.
Parameters

None.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
FLASH_ErasePage
Function Name
FLASH_Status FLASH_ErasePage ( uint32_t Page_Address)
Function Description
Erases a specified page in program memory.
Parameters

Page_Address : The page address in program memory to
be erased.
Return values

FLASH Status: The returned value can be:
FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP,
FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT.
Notes

To correctly run this function, the FLASH_Unlock() function
must be called before.
Call the FLASH_Lock() to disable the flash memory access
(recommended to protect the FLASH memory against
possible unwanted operation)
A Page is erased in the Program memory only if the address
to load is the start address of a page (multiple of 1024 bytes).


11.2.7.4
222/584
FLASH_EraseAllPages
Function Name
FLASH_Status FLASH_EraseAllPages ( void )
Function Description
Erases all FLASH pages.
Parameters

None.
Return values

FLASH Status: The returned value can be:
FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP,
DocID023800 Rev 1
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT.
UM1581
Notes
11.2.7.5
11.2.7.6

To correctly run this function, the FLASH_Unlock() function
must be called before. all the FLASH_Lock() to disable the
flash memory access (recommended to protect the FLASH
memory against possible unwanted operation)
FLASH_ProgramWord
Function Name
FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramWord ( uint32_t Address,
uint32_t Data)
Function Description
Programs a word at a specified address.
Parameters


Address : specifies the address to be programmed.
Data : specifies the data to be programmed.
Return values

FLASH Status: The returned value can be:
FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP,
FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT.
Notes

To correctly run this function, the FLASH_Unlock() function
must be called before. Call the FLASH_Lock() to disable the
flash memory access (recommended to protect the FLASH
memory against possible unwanted operation)
FLASH_ProgramHalfWord
Function Name
FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramHalfWord ( uint32_t Address,
uint16_t Data)
Function Description
Programs a half word at a specified address.
Parameters


Address : specifies the address to be programmed.
Data : specifies the data to be programmed.
Return values

FLASH Status: The returned value can be:
FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP,
FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT.
Notes

To correctly run this function, the FLASH_Unlock() function
must be called before. Call the FLASH_Lock() to disable the
flash memory access (recommended to protect the FLASH
memory against possible unwanted operation)
DocID023800 Rev 1
223/584
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
UM1581
11.2.8
Option Bytes Programming functions
11.2.8.1
FLASH_OB_Unlock
11.2.8.2
11.2.8.3
224/584
Function Name
void FLASH_OB_Unlock ( void )
Function Description
Unlocks the option bytes block access.
Parameters

None.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
FLASH_OB_Lock
Function Name
void FLASH_OB_Lock ( void )
Function Description
Locks the option bytes block access.
Parameters

None.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
FLASH_OB_Launch
Function Name
void FLASH_OB_Launch ( void )
Function Description
Launch the option byte loading.
Parameters

None.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
UM1581
11.2.8.4
11.2.8.5
FLASH_OB_Erase
Function Name
FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_Erase ( void )
Function Description
Erases the FLASH option bytes.
Parameters

None.
Return values

FLASH Status: The returned value can be:
FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP,
FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT.
Notes

This functions erases all option bytes except the Read
protection (RDP).
FLASH_OB_EnableWRP
Function Name
FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_EnableWRP ( uint32_t OB_WRP)
Function Description
Write protects the desired pages.
Parameters

OB_WRP : specifies the address of the pages to be write
protected. This parameter can be:

value :

OB_WRP_AllPages :
Return values

FLASH Status: The returned value can be:
FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP,
FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT.
Notes

To correctly run this function, the FLASH_OB_Unlock()
function must be called before.
Call the FLASH_OB_Lock() to disable the flash control
register access and the option bytes (recommended to protect
the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation)

11.2.8.6
FLASH_OB_RDPConfig
Function Name
FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_RDPConfig ( uint8_t OB_RDP)
DocID023800 Rev 1
225/584
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
Function Description
UM1581
Enables or disables the read out protection.
Parameters

FLASH_ReadProtection_Level : specifies the read
protection level. This parameter can be:

OB_RDP_Level_0 : No protection

OB_RDP_Level_1 : Read protection of the memory

OB_RDP_Level_2 : Chip protection
Return values

FLASH Status: The returned value can be:
FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP,
FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT.
Notes

To correctly run this function, the FLASH_OB_Unlock()
function must be called before.
Call the FLASH_OB_Lock() to disable the flash control
register access and the option bytes (recommended to protect
the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation)

11.2.8.7
FLASH_OB_UserConfig
Function Name
FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_UserConfig ( uint8_t OB_IWDG,
uint8_t OB_STOP, uint8_t OB_STDBY)
Function Description
Programs the FLASH User Option Byte: IWDG_SW / RST_STOP
/ RST_STDBY.
Parameters



226/584
OB_IWDG : Selects the IWDG mode This parameter can be
one of the following values:

OB_IWDG_SW : Software IWDG selected

OB_IWDG_HW : Hardware IWDG selected
OB_STOP : Reset event when entering STOP mode. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

OB_STOP_NoRST : No reset generated when entering
in STOP

OB_STOP_RST : Reset generated when entering in
STOP
OB_STDBY : Reset event when entering Standby mode.
This parameter can be one of the following values:

OB_STDBY_NoRST : No reset generated when
entering in STANDBY

OB_STDBY_RST : Reset generated when entering in
STANDBY
Return values

FLASH Status: The returned value can be:
FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP,
FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
UM1581
11.2.8.8
11.2.8.9
FLASH_OB_BOOTConfig
Function Name
FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_BOOTConfig ( uint8_t OB_BOOT1)
Function Description
Sets or resets the BOOT1.
Parameters

OB_BOOT1 : Set or Reset the BOOT1. This parameter can
be one of the following values:

OB_BOOT1_RESET : BOOT1 Reset

OB_BOOT1_SET : BOOT1 Set
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
FLASH_OB_VDDAConfig
Function Name
FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_VDDAConfig ( uint8_t
OB_VDDA_ANALOG)
Function Description
Sets or resets the analogue monitoring on VDDA Power source.
Parameters

OB_VDDA_ANALOG : Selects the analog monitoring on
VDDA Power source. This parameter can be one of the
following values:

OB_VDDA_ANALOG_ON : Analog monitoring on
VDDA Power source ON

OB_VDDA_ANALOG_OFF : Analog monitoring on
VDDA Power source OFF
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
11.2.8.10 FLASH_OB_SRAMParityConfig
Function Name
FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_SRAMParityConfig ( uint8_t
OB_SRAM_Parity)
Function Description
Sets or resets the SRAM partiy.
DocID023800 Rev 1
227/584
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
Parameters

UM1581
OB_SRAM_Parity : Set or Reset the SRAM partiy enable
bit. This parameter can be one of the following values:

OB_SRAM_PARITY_SET : Set SRAM partiy.

OB_SRAM_PARITY_RESET : Reset SRAM partiy.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
11.2.8.11 FLASH_OB_WriteUser
Function Name
FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_WriteUser ( uint8_t OB_USER)
Function Description
Programs the FLASH User Option Byte: IWDG_SW / RST_STOP
/ RST_STDBY/ BOOT1 and OB_VDDA_ANALOG.
Parameters

OB_USER : Selects all user option bytes This parameter is a
combination of the following values:

OB_IWDG_SW / OB_IWDG_HW : Software / Hardware
WDG selected

OB_STOP_NoRST / OB_STOP_RST : No reset / Reset
generated when entering in STOP

OB_STDBY_NoRST / OB_STDBY_RST : No reset /
Reset generated when entering in STANDBY

OB_BOOT1_RESET / OB_BOOT1_SET : BOOT1
Reset / Set

OB_VDDA_ANALOG_ON / OB_VDDA_ANALOG_OFF
: Analog monitoring on VDDA Power source ON / OFF
Return values

FLASH Status: The returned value can be:
FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP,
FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT.
Notes

To correctly run this function, the FLASH_OB_Unlock()
function must be called before.
Call the FLASH_OB_Lock() to disable the flash control
register access and the option bytes (recommended to protect
the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation)

11.2.8.12 FLASH_ProgramOptionByteData
Function Name
228/584
FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramOptionByteData ( uint32_t
Address, uint8_t Data)
DocID023800 Rev 1
Function Description
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
Programs a half word at a specified Option Byte Data address.
Parameters

UM1581

Address : specifies the address to be programmed. This
parameter can be 0x1FFFF804 or 0x1FFFF806.
Data : specifies the data to be programmed.
Return values

FLASH Status: The returned value can be:
FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP,
FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT.
Notes

To correctly run this function, the FLASH_OB_Unlock()
function must be called before. Call the FLASH_OB_Lock() to
disable the flash control register access and the option bytes
(recommended to protect the FLASH memory against
possible unwanted operation)
11.2.8.13 FLASH_OB_GetUser
Function Name
uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetUser ( void )
Function Description
Returns the FLASH User Option Bytes values.
Parameters

None.
Return values

The FLASH User Option Bytes .
Notes

None.
11.2.8.14 FLASH_OB_GetWRP
Function Name
uint32_t FLASH_OB_GetWRP ( void )
Function Description
Returns the FLASH Write Protection Option Bytes value.
Parameters

None.
Return values

The FLASH Write Protection Option Bytes value
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
229/584
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
UM1581
11.2.8.15 FLASH_OB_GetRDP
Function Name
FlagStatus FLASH_OB_GetRDP ( void )
Function Description
Checks whether the FLASH Read out Protection Status is set or
not.
Parameters

None.
Return values

FLASH ReadOut Protection Status(SET or RESET)
Notes

None.
11.2.9
Interrupts and flags management functions
11.2.9.1
FLASH_ITConfig
11.2.9.2
230/584
Function Name
void FLASH_ITConfig ( uint32_t FLASH_IT, FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the specified FLASH interrupts.
Parameters

FLASH_IT : specifies the FLASH interrupt sources to be
enabled or disabled. This parameter can be any combination
of the following values:

FLASH_IT_EOP : FLASH end of programming Interrupt

FLASH_IT_ERR : FLASH Error Interrupt
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
FLASH_GetFlagStatus
Function Name
FlagStatus FLASH_GetFlagStatus ( uint32_t FLASH_FLAG)
Function Description
Checks whether the specified FLASH flag is set or not.
Parameters

FLASH_FLAG : specifies the FLASH flag to check. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

FLASH_FLAG_BSY : FLASH write/erase operations in
progress flag

FLASH_FLAG_PGERR : FLASH Programming error
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581


11.2.9.3
11.2.9.4
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
flag flag
FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR : FLASH Write protected
error flag
FLASH_FLAG_EOP : FLASH End of Programming flag
Return values

The new state of FLASH_FLAG (SET or RESET).
Notes

None.
FLASH_ClearFlag
Function Name
void FLASH_ClearFlag ( uint32_t FLASH_FLAG)
Function Description
Clears the FLASH's pending flags.
Parameters

FLASH_FLAG : specifies the FLASH flags to clear. This
parameter can be any combination of the following values:

FLASH_FLAG_PGERR : FLASH Programming error
flag flag

FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR : FLASH Write protected
error flag

FLASH_FLAG_EOP : FLASH End of Programming flag
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
FLASH_GetStatus
Function Name
FLASH_Status FLASH_GetStatus ( void )
Function Description
Returns the FLASH Status.
Parameters

None.
Return values

FLASH Status: The returned value can be:
FLASH_BUSY, FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM,
FLASH_ERROR_WRP or FLASH_COMPLETE.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
231/584
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
11.2.9.5
UM1581
FLASH_WaitForLastOperation
Function Name
FLASH_Status FLASH_WaitForLastOperation ( uint32_t
Timeout)
Function Description
Waits for a FLASH operation to complete or a TIMEOUT to occur.
Parameters

Timeout : FLASH programming Timeout
Return values

FLASH Status: The returned value can be:
FLASH_BUSY, FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM,
FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or
FLASH_TIMEOUT.
Notes

None.
11.3
FLASH Firmware driver defines
11.3.1
FLASH
FLASH
FLASH_Flags

#define: FLASH_FLAG_BSY FLASH_SR_BSY
FLASH Busy flag

#define: FLASH_FLAG_PGERR FLASH_SR_PGERR
FLASH Programming error flag

#define: FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR FLASH_SR_WRPERR
FLASH Write protected error flag

#define: FLASH_FLAG_EOP FLASH_SR_EOP
FLASH End of Programming flag
FLASH_Interrupts

#define: FLASH_IT_EOP FLASH_CR_EOPIE
End of programming interrupt source

#define: FLASH_IT_ERR FLASH_CR_ERRIE
Error interrupt source
232/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
FLASH Memory (FLASH)
UM1581
Flash_Latency

#define: FLASH_Latency_0 ((uint8_t)0x0000)
FLASH Zero Latency cycle

#define: FLASH_Latency_1 FLASH_ACR_LATENCY_0
FLASH One Latency cycle

#define: FLASH_Latency_2 FLASH_ACR_LATENCY_1
FLASH Two Latency cycles
FLASH_Option_Bytes_SRAM_Parity_Enable

#define: OB_SRAM_PARITY_SET ((uint8_t)0x00)
SRAM parity enable Set

#define: OB_SRAM_PARITY_RESET ((uint8_t)0x40)
SRAM parity enable reset
DocID023800 Rev 1
233/584
General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)
UM1581
12
General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)
12.1
GPIO Firmware driver registers structures
12.1.1
GPIO_TypeDef
GPIO_TypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x.h
Data Fields














__IO uint32_t MODER
__IO uint16_t OTYPER
uint16_t RESERVED0
__IO uint32_t OSPEEDR
__IO uint32_t PUPDR
__IO uint16_t IDR
uint16_t RESERVED1
__IO uint16_t ODR
uint16_t RESERVED2
__IO uint32_t BSRR
__IO uint32_t LCKR
__IO uint32_t AFR
__IO uint16_t BRR
uint16_t RESERVED3
Field Documentation











234/584
__IO uint32_t GPIO_TypeDef::MODER

GPIO port mode register, Address offset: 0x00
__IO uint16_t GPIO_TypeDef::OTYPER

GPIO port output type register, Address offset: 0x04
uint16_t GPIO_TypeDef::RESERVED0

Reserved, 0x06
__IO uint32_t GPIO_TypeDef::OSPEEDR

GPIO port output speed register, Address offset: 0x08
__IO uint32_t GPIO_TypeDef::PUPDR

GPIO port pull-up/pull-down register, Address offset: 0x0C
__IO uint16_t GPIO_TypeDef::IDR

GPIO port input data register, Address offset: 0x10
uint16_t GPIO_TypeDef::RESERVED1

Reserved, 0x12
__IO uint16_t GPIO_TypeDef::ODR

GPIO port output data register, Address offset: 0x14
uint16_t GPIO_TypeDef::RESERVED2

Reserved, 0x16
__IO uint32_t GPIO_TypeDef::BSRR

GPIO port bit set/reset registerBSRR, Address offset: 0x18
__IO uint32_t GPIO_TypeDef::LCKR

GPIO port configuration lock register, Address offset: 0x1C
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)
UM1581



12.1.2
__IO uint32_t GPIO_TypeDef::AFR[2]

GPIO alternate function low register, Address offset: 0x20-0x24
__IO uint16_t GPIO_TypeDef::BRR

GPIO bit reset register, Address offset: 0x28
uint16_t GPIO_TypeDef::RESERVED3

Reserved, 0x2A
GPIO_InitTypeDef
GPIO_InitTypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x_gpio.h
Data Fields





uint32_t GPIO_Pin
GPIOMode_TypeDef GPIO_Mode
GPIOSpeed_TypeDef GPIO_Speed
GPIOOType_TypeDef GPIO_OType
GPIOPuPd_TypeDef GPIO_PuPd
Field Documentation





12.2
uint32_t GPIO_InitTypeDef::GPIO_Pin

Specifies the GPIO pins to be configured. This parameter can be any value of
GPIO_pins_define
GPIOMode_TypeDef GPIO_InitTypeDef::GPIO_Mode

Specifies the operating mode for the selected pins. This parameter can be a
value of GPIOMode_TypeDef
GPIOSpeed_TypeDef GPIO_InitTypeDef::GPIO_Speed

Specifies the speed for the selected pins. This parameter can be a value of
GPIOSpeed_TypeDef
GPIOOType_TypeDef GPIO_InitTypeDef::GPIO_OType

Specifies the operating output type for the selected pins. This parameter can be
a value of GPIOOType_TypeDef
GPIOPuPd_TypeDef GPIO_InitTypeDef::GPIO_PuPd

Specifies the operating Pull-up/Pull down for the selected pins. This parameter
can be a value of GPIOPuPd_TypeDef
GPIO Firmware driver API description
The following section lists the various functions of the GPIO library.
12.2.1
How to use this driver
1.
2.
Enable the GPIO AHB clock using RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd()
Configure the GPIO pin(s) using GPIO_Init() Four possible configuration are available
for each pin:
DocID023800 Rev 1
235/584
General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)
UM1581

Input: Floating, Pull-up, Pull-down.

Output: Push-Pull (Pull-up, Pull-down or no Pull), Open Drain (Pull-up, Pull-down
or no Pull). In output mode, the speed is configurable: Low, Medium, Fast or
High.

Alternate Function: Push-Pull (Pull-up, Pull-down or no Pull), Open Drain (Pullup, Pull-down or no Pull).

Analog: required mode when a pin is to be used as ADC channel, DAC output or
comparator input.
3.
Peripherals alternate function:

For ADC, DAC and comparators, configure the desired pin in analog mode using
GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AN

For other peripherals (TIM, USART...):

Connect the pin to the desired peripherals' Alternate Function (AF) using
GPIO_PinAFConfig() function.

Configure the desired pin in alternate function mode using GPIO_InitStruct>GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AF

Select the type, pull-up/pull-down and output speed via GPIO_PuPd,
GPIO_OType and GPIO_Speed members.

Call GPIO_Init() function.
4.
To get the level of a pin configured in input mode use GPIO_ReadInputDataBit()
5.
To set/reset the level of a pin configured in output mode use
GPIO_SetBits()/GPIO_ResetBits()
6.
During and just after reset, the alternate functions are not active and the GPIO pins
are configured in input floating mode (except JTAG pins).
7.
The LSE oscillator pins OSC32_IN and OSC32_OUT can be used as generalpurpose (PC14 and PC15, respectively) when the LSE oscillator is off. The LSE has
priority over the GPIO function.
8.
The HSE oscillator pins OSC_IN/OSC_OUT can be used as general-purpose (PF0
and PF1 respectively) when the HSE oscillator is off. The HSE has the priority over
the GPIO function.
12.2.2
Initialization and Configuration




12.2.3
GPIO Read and Write








12.2.4
236/584
GPIO_DeInit()
GPIO_Init()
GPIO_StructInit()
GPIO_PinLockConfig()
GPIO_ReadInputDataBit()
GPIO_ReadInputData()
GPIO_ReadOutputDataBit()
GPIO_ReadOutputData()
GPIO_SetBits()
GPIO_ResetBits()
GPIO_WriteBit()
GPIO_Write()
GPIO Alternate functions configuration functions
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)
UM1581

GPIO_PinAFConfig()
12.2.5
Initialization and Configuration
12.2.5.1
GPIO_DeInit
12.2.5.2
12.2.5.3
Function Name
void GPIO_DeInit ( GPIO_TypeDef * GPIOx)
Function Description
Deinitializes the GPIOx peripheral registers to their default reset
values.
Parameters

GPIOx : where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the
GPIO peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
GPIO_Init
Function Name
void GPIO_Init ( GPIO_TypeDef * GPIOx, GPIO_InitTypeDef *
GPIO_InitStruct)
Function Description
Initializes the GPIOx peripheral according to the specified
parameters in the GPIO_InitStruct.
Parameters


GPIOx : where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the
GPIO peripheral.
GPIO_InitStruct : pointer to a GPIO_InitTypeDef structure
that contains the configuration information for the specified
GPIO peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

GPIO_Pin: selects the pin to be configured: GPIO_Pin_0>GPIO_Pin_15 for GPIOA, GPIOB, GPIOC, GPIOD and
GPIOE; GPIO_Pin_0->GPIO_Pin_2, GPIO_Pin_4,
GPIO_Pin_6, GPIO_Pin_9 and GPIO_Pin_10 for GPIOF.
GPIO_StructInit
Function Name
void GPIO_StructInit ( GPIO_InitTypeDef * GPIO_InitStruct)
DocID023800 Rev 1
237/584
General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)
Function Description
12.2.5.4
UM1581
Fills each GPIO_InitStruct member with its default value.
Parameters

GPIO_InitStruct : pointer to a GPIO_InitTypeDef structure
which will be initialized.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
GPIO_PinLockConfig
Function Name
void GPIO_PinLockConfig ( GPIO_TypeDef * GPIOx, uint16_t
GPIO_Pin)
Function Description
Locks GPIO Pins configuration registers.
Parameters


GPIOx : where x can be (A or B or D) to select the GPIO
peripheral.
GPIO_Pin : specifies the port bit to be written. This
parameter can be any combination of GPIO_Pin_x where x
can be (0..15).
Return values

None.
Notes

The configuration of the locked GPIO pins can no longer be
modified until the next reset.
12.2.6
GPIO Read and Write functions
12.2.6.1
GPIO_ReadInputDataBit
238/584
Function Name
uint8_t GPIO_ReadInputDataBit ( GPIO_TypeDef * GPIOx,
uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
Function Description
Reads the specified input port pin.
Parameters


GPIOx : where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the
GPIO peripheral.
GPIO_Pin : specifies the port bit to read.
Return values

The input port pin value.
Notes

This parameter can be GPIO_Pin_x where x can be : (0..15)
for GPIOA, GPIOB, GPIOC, GPIOD or GPIOE; (0..2, 4, 6,
9..10) for GPIOF.
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)
UM1581
12.2.6.2
12.2.6.3
12.2.6.4
GPIO_ReadInputData
Function Name
uint16_t GPIO_ReadInputData ( GPIO_TypeDef * GPIOx)
Function Description
Reads the specified input port pin.
Parameters

GPIOx : where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the
GPIO peripheral.
Return values

The input port pin value.
Notes

None.
GPIO_ReadOutputDataBit
Function Name
uint8_t GPIO_ReadOutputDataBit ( GPIO_TypeDef * GPIOx,
uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
Function Description
Reads the specified output data port bit.
Parameters


GPIOx : where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the
GPIO peripheral.
GPIO_Pin : Specifies the port bit to read.
Return values

The output port pin value.
Notes

This parameter can be GPIO_Pin_x where x can be : (0..15)
for GPIOA, GPIOB, GPIOC, GPIOD or GPIOE; (0..2, 4, 6,
9..10) for GPIOF.
GPIO_ReadOutputData
Function Name
uint16_t GPIO_ReadOutputData ( GPIO_TypeDef * GPIOx)
Function Description
Reads the specified GPIO output data port.
Parameters

GPIOx : where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the
GPIO peripheral.
DocID023800 Rev 1
239/584
General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)
Return values
Notes
12.2.6.5
12.2.6.6
12.2.6.7
240/584
UM1581

GPIO output data port value.

None.
GPIO_SetBits
Function Name
void GPIO_SetBits ( GPIO_TypeDef * GPIOx, uint16_t
GPIO_Pin)
Function Description
Sets the selected data port bits.
Parameters


GPIOx : where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the
GPIO peripheral.
GPIO_Pin : specifies the port bits to be written.
Return values

None.
Notes

This parameter can be GPIO_Pin_x where x can be : (0..15)
for GPIOA, GPIOB, GPIOC, GPIOD or GPIOE; (0..2, 4, 6,
9..10) for GPIOF.
GPIO_ResetBits
Function Name
void GPIO_ResetBits ( GPIO_TypeDef * GPIOx, uint16_t
GPIO_Pin)
Function Description
Clears the selected data port bits.
Parameters


GPIOx : where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the
GPIO peripheral.
GPIO_Pin : specifies the port bits to be written.
Return values

None.
Notes

This parameter can be GPIO_Pin_x where x can be : (0..15)
for GPIOA, GPIOB, GPIOC, GPIOD or GPIOE; (0..2, 4, 6,
9..10) for GPIOF.
GPIO_WriteBit
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)
UM1581
Function Name
void GPIO_WriteBit ( GPIO_TypeDef * GPIOx, uint16_t
GPIO_Pin, BitAction BitVal)
Function Description
Sets or clears the selected data port bit.
Parameters


12.2.6.8
GPIOx : where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the
GPIO peripheral.
GPIO_Pin : specifies the port bit to be written.
Parameters

BitVal : specifies the value to be written to the selected bit.
This parameter can be one of the BitAction enumeration
values:

Bit_RESET : to clear the port pin

Bit_SET : to set the port pin
Return values

None.
Notes

This parameter can be GPIO_Pin_x where x can be : (0..15)
for GPIOA, GPIOB, GPIOC, GPIOD or GPIOE; (0..2, 4, 6,
9..10) for GPIOF.
GPIO_Write
Function Name
void GPIO_Write ( GPIO_TypeDef * GPIOx, uint16_t PortVal)
Function Description
Writes data to the specified GPIO data port.
Parameters


GPIOx : where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the
GPIO peripheral.
PortVal : specifies the value to be written to the port output
data register.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
12.2.7
GPIO Alternate functions configuration functions
12.2.7.1
GPIO_PinAFConfig
Function Name
void GPIO_PinAFConfig ( GPIO_TypeDef * GPIOx, uint16_t
GPIO_PinSource, uint8_t GPIO_AF)
DocID023800 Rev 1
241/584
General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)
Function Description
Parameters
UM1581
Writes data to the specified GPIO data port.



GPIOx : where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the
GPIO peripheral.
GPIO_PinSource : specifies the pin for the Alternate
function. This parameter can be GPIO_PinSourcex where x
can be (0..15).
GPIO_AF : selects the pin to be used as Alternate function.
This parameter can be one of the following value:

GPIO_AF_0 : JTCK-SWCLK, JTDI, JTDO/TRACESW0,
JTMS-SWDAT, MCO, NJTRST, TRACED, TRACECK.

GPIO_AF_1 : OUT, TIM2, TIM15, TIM16, TIM17.

GPIO_AF_2 : COMP1_OUT, TIM1, TIM2, TIM3, TIM4,
TIM8, TIM15.

GPIO_AF_3 : COMP7_OUT, TIM8, TIM15, Touch.

GPIO_AF_4 : I2C1, I2C2, TIM1, TIM8, TIM16, TIM17.

GPIO_AF_5 : IR_OUT, I2S2, I2S3, SPI1, SPI2, TIM8,
USART4, USART5

GPIO_AF_6 : IR_OUT, I2S2, I2S3, SPI2, SPI3, TIM1,
TIM8

GPIO_AF_7 : AOP2_OUT, CAN, COMP3_OUT,
COMP5_OUT, COMP6_OUT, USART1, USART2,
USART3.

GPIO_AF_8 : COMP1_OUT, COMP2_OUT,
COMP3_OUT, COMP4_OUT, COMP5_OUT,
COMP6_OUT.

GPIO_AF_9 : AOP4_OUT, CAN, TIM1, TIM8, TIM15.

GPIO_AF_10 : AOP1_OUT, AOP3_OUT, TIM2, TIM3,
TIM4, TIM8, TIM17.

GPIO_AF_11 : TIM1, TIM8.

GPIO_AF_12 : TIM1.

GPIO_AF_14 : USBDM, USBDP.

GPIO_AF_15 : OUT.
Return values

None.
Notes

The pin should already been configured in Alternate Function
mode(AF) using GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode =
GPIO_Mode_AF
Refer to the Alternate function mapping table in the device
datasheet for the detailed mapping of the system and
peripherals alternate function I/O pins.

12.3
GPIO Firmware driver defines
12.3.1
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO_Alternate_function_selection_define

242/584
#define: GPIO_AF_0 ((uint8_t)0x00)
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)
UM1581

#define: GPIO_AF_1 ((uint8_t)0x01)

#define: GPIO_AF_2 ((uint8_t)0x02)

#define: GPIO_AF_3 ((uint8_t)0x03)

#define: GPIO_AF_4 ((uint8_t)0x04)

#define: GPIO_AF_5 ((uint8_t)0x05)

#define: GPIO_AF_6 ((uint8_t)0x06)

#define: GPIO_AF_7 ((uint8_t)0x07)

#define: GPIO_AF_8 ((uint8_t)0x08)

#define: GPIO_AF_9 ((uint8_t)0x09)

#define: GPIO_AF_10 ((uint8_t)0x0A)

#define: GPIO_AF_11 ((uint8_t)0x0B)

#define: GPIO_AF_12 ((uint8_t)0x0E)
DocID023800 Rev 1
243/584
General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)
UM1581

#define: GPIO_AF_14 ((uint8_t)0x0E)

#define: GPIO_AF_15 ((uint8_t)0x0F)
GPIO_pins_define

#define: GPIO_Pin_0 ((uint16_t)0x0001)
Pin 0 selected

#define: GPIO_Pin_1 ((uint16_t)0x0002)
Pin 1 selected

#define: GPIO_Pin_2 ((uint16_t)0x0004)
Pin 2 selected

#define: GPIO_Pin_3 ((uint16_t)0x0008)
Pin 3 selected

#define: GPIO_Pin_4 ((uint16_t)0x0010)
Pin 4 selected

#define: GPIO_Pin_5 ((uint16_t)0x0020)
Pin 5 selected

#define: GPIO_Pin_6 ((uint16_t)0x0040)
Pin 6 selected

#define: GPIO_Pin_7 ((uint16_t)0x0080)
Pin 7 selected

#define: GPIO_Pin_8 ((uint16_t)0x0100)
Pin 8 selected
244/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)
UM1581

#define: GPIO_Pin_9 ((uint16_t)0x0200)
Pin 9 selected

#define: GPIO_Pin_10 ((uint16_t)0x0400)
Pin 10 selected

#define: GPIO_Pin_11 ((uint16_t)0x0800)
Pin 11 selected

#define: GPIO_Pin_12 ((uint16_t)0x1000)
Pin 12 selected

#define: GPIO_Pin_13 ((uint16_t)0x2000)
Pin 13 selected

#define: GPIO_Pin_14 ((uint16_t)0x4000)
Pin 14 selected

#define: GPIO_Pin_15 ((uint16_t)0x8000)
Pin 15 selected

#define: GPIO_Pin_All ((uint16_t)0xFFFF)
All pins selected
GPIO_Pin_sources

#define: GPIO_PinSource0 ((uint8_t)0x00)

#define: GPIO_PinSource1 ((uint8_t)0x01)

#define: GPIO_PinSource2 ((uint8_t)0x02)

#define: GPIO_PinSource3 ((uint8_t)0x03)
DocID023800 Rev 1
245/584
General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)
246/584
UM1581

#define: GPIO_PinSource4 ((uint8_t)0x04)

#define: GPIO_PinSource5 ((uint8_t)0x05)

#define: GPIO_PinSource6 ((uint8_t)0x06)

#define: GPIO_PinSource7 ((uint8_t)0x07)

#define: GPIO_PinSource8 ((uint8_t)0x08)

#define: GPIO_PinSource9 ((uint8_t)0x09)

#define: GPIO_PinSource10 ((uint8_t)0x0A)

#define: GPIO_PinSource11 ((uint8_t)0x0B)

#define: GPIO_PinSource12 ((uint8_t)0x0C)

#define: GPIO_PinSource13 ((uint8_t)0x0D)

#define: GPIO_PinSource14 ((uint8_t)0x0E)

#define: GPIO_PinSource15 ((uint8_t)0x0F)
DocID023800 Rev 1
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
UM1581
13
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
13.1
I2C Firmware driver registers structures
13.1.1
I2C_TypeDef
I2C_TypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x.h
Data Fields











__IO uint32_t CR1
__IO uint32_t CR2
__IO uint32_t OAR1
__IO uint32_t OAR2
__IO uint32_t TIMINGR
__IO uint32_t TIMEOUTR
__IO uint32_t ISR
__IO uint32_t ICR
__IO uint32_t PECR
__IO uint32_t RXDR
__IO uint32_t TXDR
Field Documentation











__IO uint32_t I2C_TypeDef::CR1

I2C Control register 1, Address offset: 0x00
__IO uint32_t I2C_TypeDef::CR2

I2C Control register 2, Address offset: 0x04
__IO uint32_t I2C_TypeDef::OAR1

I2C Own address 1 register, Address offset: 0x08
__IO uint32_t I2C_TypeDef::OAR2

I2C Own address 2 register, Address offset: 0x0C
__IO uint32_t I2C_TypeDef::TIMINGR

I2C Timing register, Address offset: 0x10
__IO uint32_t I2C_TypeDef::TIMEOUTR

I2C Timeout register, Address offset: 0x14
__IO uint32_t I2C_TypeDef::ISR

I2C Interrupt and status register, Address offset: 0x18
__IO uint32_t I2C_TypeDef::ICR

I2C Interrupt clear register, Address offset: 0x1C
__IO uint32_t I2C_TypeDef::PECR

I2C PEC register, Address offset: 0x20
__IO uint32_t I2C_TypeDef::RXDR

I2C Receive data register, Address offset: 0x24
__IO uint32_t I2C_TypeDef::TXDR

I2C Transmit data register, Address offset: 0x28
DocID023800 Rev 1
247/584
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
13.1.2
UM1581
I2C_InitTypeDef
I2C_InitTypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x_i2c.h
Data Fields







uint32_t I2C_Timing
uint32_t I2C_AnalogFilter
uint32_t I2C_DigitalFilter
uint32_t I2C_Mode
uint32_t I2C_OwnAddress1
uint32_t I2C_Ack
uint32_t I2C_AcknowledgedAddress
Field Documentation







13.2
uint32_t I2C_InitTypeDef::I2C_Timing

Specifies the I2C_TIMINGR_register value. This parameter calculated by
referring to I2C initialization section in Reference manual
uint32_t I2C_InitTypeDef::I2C_AnalogFilter

Enables or disables analog noise filter. This parameter can be a value of
I2C_Analog_Filter
uint32_t I2C_InitTypeDef::I2C_DigitalFilter

Configures the digital noise filter. This parameter can be a number between 0x00
and 0x0F
uint32_t I2C_InitTypeDef::I2C_Mode

Specifies the I2C mode. This parameter can be a value of I2C_mode
uint32_t I2C_InitTypeDef::I2C_OwnAddress1

Specifies the device own address 1. This parameter can be a 7-bit or 10-bit
address
uint32_t I2C_InitTypeDef::I2C_Ack

Enables or disables the acknowledgement. This parameter can be a value of
I2C_acknowledgement
uint32_t I2C_InitTypeDef::I2C_AcknowledgedAddress

Specifies if 7-bit or 10-bit address is acknowledged. This parameter can be a
value of I2C_acknowledged_address
I2C Firmware driver API description
The following section lists the various functions of the I2C library.
13.2.1
How to use this driver
1.
2.
3.
248/584
Enable peripheral clock using RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_I2Cx,
ENABLE) function for I2C1 or I2C2.
Enable SDA, SCL and SMBA (when used) GPIO clocks using
RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd() function.
Peripherals alternate function:
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
Connect the pin to the desired peripherals' Alternate Function (AF) using
GPIO_PinAFConfig() function.

Configure the desired pin in alternate function by: GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode
= GPIO_Mode_AF

Select the type, OpenDrain and speed via GPIO_PuPd, GPIO_OType and
GPIO_Speed members

Call GPIO_Init() function.
Program the Mode, Timing , Own address, Ack and Acknowledged Address using the
I2C_Init() function.
Optionally you can enable/configure the following parameters without re-initialization
(i.e there is no need to call again I2C_Init() function):

Enable the acknowledge feature using I2C_AcknowledgeConfig() function.

Enable the dual addressing mode using I2C_DualAddressCmd() function.

Enable the general call using the I2C_GeneralCallCmd() function.

Enable the clock stretching using I2C_StretchClockCmd() function.

Enable the PEC Calculation using I2C_CalculatePEC() function.

For SMBus Mode:

Enable the SMBusAlert pin using I2C_SMBusAlertCmd() function.
Enable the NVIC and the corresponding interrupt using the function I2C_ITConfig() if
you need to use interrupt mode.
When using the DMA mode

Configure the DMA using DMA_Init() function.

Active the needed channel Request using I2C_DMACmd() function.
Enable the I2C using the I2C_Cmd() function.
Enable the DMA using the DMA_Cmd() function when using DMA mode in the
transfers.

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
When using I2C in Fast Mode Plus, SCL and SDA pin 20mA current drive
capability must be enabled by setting the driving capability control bit in SYSCFG.
13.2.2
Initialization and Configuration functions
This section provides a set of functions allowing to initialize the I2C Mode, I2C Timing, I2C
filters, I2C Addressing mode, I2C OwnAddress1.
The I2C_Init() function follows the I2C configuration procedures (these procedures are
available in reference manual).
When the Software Reset is performed using I2C_SoftwareResetCmd() function, the
internal states machines are reset and communication control bits, as well as status bits
come back to their reset value.
Before enabling Stop mode using I2C_StopModeCmd() I2C Clock source must be set to
HSI and Digital filters must be disabled.
Before enabling Own Address 2 via I2C_DualAddressCmd() function, OA2 and mask
should be configured using I2C_OwnAddress2Config() function.
I2C_SlaveByteControlCmd() enable Slave byte control that allow user to get control of
each byte in slave mode when NBYTES is set to 0x01.



I2C_DeInit()
I2C_Init()
I2C_StructInit()
DocID023800 Rev 1
249/584
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)











13.2.3
UM1581
I2C_Cmd()
I2C_SoftwareResetCmd()
I2C_ITConfig()
I2C_StretchClockCmd()
I2C_StopModeCmd()
I2C_DualAddressCmd()
I2C_OwnAddress2Config()
I2C_GeneralCallCmd()
I2C_SlaveByteControlCmd()
I2C_SlaveAddressConfig()
I2C_10BitAddressingModeCmd()
Communications handling functions
This section provides a set of functions that handles I2C communication.
Automatic End mode is enabled using I2C_AutoEndCmd() function. When Reload mode is
enabled via I2C_ReloadCmd() AutoEnd bit has no effect.
I2C_NumberOfBytesConfig() function set the number of bytes to be transferred, this
configuration should be done before generating start condition in master mode.
When switching from master write operation to read operation in 10Bit addressing mode,
master can only sends the 1st 7 bits of the 10 bit address, followed by Read direction by
enabling HEADR bit using I2C_10BitAddressHeader() function.
In master mode, when transferring more than 255 bytes Reload mode should be used to
handle communication. In the first phase of transfer, Nbytes should be set to 255. After
transferring these bytes TCR flag is set and I2C_TransferHandling() function should be
called to handle remaining communication.
In master mode, when software end mode is selected when all data is transferred TC flag
is set I2C_TransferHandling() function should be called to generate STOP or generate
ReStart.











13.2.4
I2C_AutoEndCmd()
I2C_ReloadCmd()
I2C_NumberOfBytesConfig()
I2C_MasterRequestConfig()
I2C_GenerateSTART()
I2C_GenerateSTOP()
I2C_10BitAddressHeaderCmd()
I2C_AcknowledgeConfig()
I2C_GetAddressMatched()
I2C_GetTransferDirection()
I2C_TransferHandling()
SMBUS management functions
This section provides a set of functions that handles SMBus communication and timeouts
detection.
The SMBus Device default address (0b1100 001) is enabled by calling I2C_Init() function
and setting I2C_Mode member of I2C_InitTypeDef() structure to I2C_Mode_SMBusDevice.
250/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
The SMBus Host address (0b0001 000) is enabled by calling I2C_Init() function and
setting I2C_Mode member of I2C_InitTypeDef() structure to I2C_Mode_SMBusHost.
The Alert Response Address (0b0001 100) is enabled using I2C_SMBusAlertCmd()
function.
To detect cumulative SCL stretch in master and slave mode, TIMEOUTB should be
configured (in accordance to SMBus specification) using I2C_TimeoutBConfig() function
then I2C_ExtendedClockTimeoutCmd() function should be called to enable the detection.
SCL low timeout is detected by configuring TIMEOUTB using I2C_TimeoutBConfig()
function followed by the call of I2C_ClockTimeoutCmd(). When adding to this procedure
the call of I2C_IdleClockTimeoutCmd() function, Bus Idle condition (both SCL and SDA
high) is detected also.









13.2.5
I2C_SMBusAlertCmd()
I2C_ClockTimeoutCmd()
I2C_ExtendedClockTimeoutCmd()
I2C_IdleClockTimeoutCmd()
I2C_TimeoutAConfig()
I2C_TimeoutBConfig()
I2C_CalculatePEC()
I2C_PECRequestCmd()
I2C_GetPEC()
I2C registers management functions
This section provides a functions that allow user the management of I2C registers.

13.2.6
I2C_ReadRegister()
Data transfers management functions
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the I2C data transfers.
The read access of the I2C_RXDR register can be done using the I2C_ReceiveData()
function and returns the received value. Whereas a write access to the I2C_TXDR can be
done using I2C_SendData() function and stores the written data into TXDR.


13.2.7
I2C_SendData()
I2C_ReceiveData()
DMA transfers management functions
This section provides two functions that can be used only in DMA mode.
In DMA Mode, the I2C communication can be managed by 2 DMA Channel requests:
1.
2.
I2C_DMAReq_Tx: specifies the Tx buffer DMA transfer request.
I2C_DMAReq_Rx: specifies the Rx buffer DMA transfer request.
In this Mode it is advised to use the following function:


I2C_DMACmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint32_t I2C_DMAReq, FunctionalState
NewState);
I2C_DMACmd()
DocID023800 Rev 1
251/584
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
13.2.8
UM1581
Interrupts and flags management functions
This section provides functions allowing to configure the I2C Interrupts sources and check
or clear the flags or pending bits status. The user should identify which mode will be used
in his application to manage the communication: Polling mode, Interrupt mode or DMA
mode(refer I2C_Group6) .
Polling Mode
In Polling Mode, the I2C communication can be managed by 15 flags:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
I2C_FLAG_TXE: to indicate the status of Transmit data register empty flag.
I2C_FLAG_TXIS: to indicate the status of Transmit interrupt status flag .
I2C_FLAG_RXNE: to indicate the status of Receive data register not empty flag.
I2C_FLAG_ADDR: to indicate the status of Address matched flag (slave mode).
I2C_FLAG_NACKF: to indicate the status of NACK received flag.
I2C_FLAG_STOPF: to indicate the status of STOP detection flag.
I2C_FLAG_TC: to indicate the status of Transfer complete flag(master mode).
I2C_FLAG_TCR: to indicate the status of Transfer complete reload flag.
I2C_FLAG_BERR: to indicate the status of Bus error flag.
I2C_FLAG_ARLO: to indicate the status of Arbitration lost flag.
I2C_FLAG_OVR: to indicate the status of Overrun/Underrun flag.
I2C_FLAG_PECERR: to indicate the status of PEC error in reception flag.
I2C_FLAG_TIMEOUT: to indicate the status of Timeout or Tlow detection flag.
I2C_FLAG_ALERT: to indicate the status of SMBus Alert flag.
I2C_FLAG_BUSY: to indicate the status of Bus busy flag.
In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:


FlagStatus I2C_GetFlagStatus(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint32_t I2C_FLAG);
void I2C_ClearFlag(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint32_t I2C_FLAG);
Do not use the BUSY flag to handle each data transmission or reception.It is
better to use the TXIS and RXNE flags instead.
Interrupt Mode
In Interrupt Mode, the I2C communication can be managed by 7 interrupt sources and 15
pending bits:
Interrupt Source:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
I2C_IT_ERRI: specifies the interrupt source for the Error interrupt.
I2C_IT_TCI: specifies the interrupt source for the Transfer Complete interrupt.
I2C_IT_STOPI: specifies the interrupt source for the Stop Detection interrupt.
I2C_IT_NACKI: specifies the interrupt source for the Not Acknowledge received
interrupt.
I2C_IT_ADDRI: specifies the interrupt source for the Address Match interrupt.
I2C_IT_RXI: specifies the interrupt source for the RX interrupt.
I2C_IT_TXI: specifies the interrupt source for the TX interrupt.
Pending Bits:
1.
2.
3.
252/584
I2C_IT_TXIS: to indicate the status of Transmit interrupt status flag.
I2C_IT_RXNE: to indicate the status of Receive data register not empty flag.
I2C_IT_ADDR: to indicate the status of Address matched flag (slave mode).
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
I2C_IT_NACKF: to indicate the status of NACK received flag.
I2C_IT_STOPF: to indicate the status of STOP detection flag.
I2C_IT_TC: to indicate the status of Transfer complete flag (master mode).
I2C_IT_TCR: to indicate the status of Transfer complete reload flag.
I2C_IT_BERR: to indicate the status of Bus error flag.
I2C_IT_ARLO: to indicate the status of Arbitration lost flag.
I2C_IT_OVR: to indicate the status of Overrun/Underrun flag.
I2C_IT_PECERR: to indicate the status of PEC error in reception flag.
I2C_IT_TIMEOUT: to indicate the status of Timeout or Tlow detection flag.
I2C_IT_ALERT: to indicate the status of SMBus Alert flag.
In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:






void I2C_ClearITPendingBit(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint32_t I2C_IT);
ITStatus I2C_GetITStatus(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint32_t I2C_IT);
I2C_GetFlagStatus()
I2C_ClearFlag()
I2C_GetITStatus()
I2C_ClearITPendingBit()
13.2.9
Initialization and Configuration functions
13.2.9.1
I2C_DeInit
13.2.9.2
Function Name
void I2C_DeInit ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx)
Function Description
Deinitializes the I2Cx peripheral registers to their default reset
values.
Parameters

I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
I2C_Init
Function Name
void I2C_Init ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx, I2C_InitTypeDef *
I2C_InitStruct)
Function Description
Initializes the I2Cx peripheral according to the specified
parameters in the I2C_InitStruct.
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
I2C_InitStruct : pointer to a I2C_InitTypeDef structure that
contains the configuration information for the specified I2C
peripheral.
Return values

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
253/584
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
Notes

13.2.9.3
13.2.9.4
13.2.9.5
254/584
UM1581
None.
I2C_StructInit
Function Name
void I2C_StructInit ( I2C_InitTypeDef * I2C_InitStruct)
Function Description
Fills each I2C_InitStruct member with its default value.
Parameters

I2C_InitStruct : pointer to an I2C_InitTypeDef structure
which will be initialized.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
I2C_Cmd
Function Name
void I2C_Cmd ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx, FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the specified I2C peripheral.
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
NewState : new state of the I2Cx peripheral. This parameter
can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
I2C_SoftwareResetCmd
Function Name
void I2C_SoftwareResetCmd ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx)
Function Description
Enables or disables the specified I2C software reset.
Parameters

I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
UM1581
13.2.9.6
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
I2C_ITConfig
Function Name
void I2C_ITConfig ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx, uint32_t I2C_IT,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the specified I2C interrupts.
Parameters



13.2.9.7
I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
I2C_IT : specifies the I2C interrupts sources to be enabled or
disabled. This parameter can be any combination of the
following values:

I2C_IT_ERRI : Error interrupt mask

I2C_IT_TCI : Transfer Complete interrupt mask

I2C_IT_STOPI : Stop Detection interrupt mask

I2C_IT_NACKI : Not Acknowledge received interrupt
mask

I2C_IT_ADDRI : Address Match interrupt mask

I2C_IT_RXI : RX interrupt mask

I2C_IT_TXI : TX interrupt mask
NewState : new state of the specified I2C interrupts. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
I2C_StretchClockCmd
Function Name
void I2C_StretchClockCmd ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the I2C Clock stretching.
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
NewState : new state of the I2Cx Clock stretching. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
255/584
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
13.2.9.8
13.2.9.9
UM1581
I2C_StopModeCmd
Function Name
void I2C_StopModeCmd ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables I2C wakeup from stop mode.
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
NewState : new state of the I2Cx stop mode. This parameter
can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
I2C_DualAddressCmd
Function Name
void I2C_DualAddressCmd ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the I2C own address 2.
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
NewState : new state of the I2C own address 2. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
13.2.9.10 I2C_OwnAddress2Config
256/584
Function Name
void I2C_OwnAddress2Config ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx, uint16_t
Address, uint8_t Mask)
Function Description
Configures the I2C slave own address 2 and mask.
Parameters

I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581


Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
Address : specifies the slave address to be programmed.
Mask : specifies own address 2 mask to be programmed.
This parameter can be one of the following values:

I2C_OA2_NoMask : no mask.

I2C_OA2_Mask01 : OA2[1] is masked and don't care.

I2C_OA2_Mask02 : OA2[2:1] are masked and don't
care.

I2C_OA2_Mask03 : OA2[3:1] are masked and don't
care.

I2C_OA2_Mask04 : OA2[4:1] are masked and don't
care.

I2C_OA2_Mask05 : OA2[5:1] are masked and don't
care.

I2C_OA2_Mask06 : OA2[6:1] are masked and don't
care.

I2C_OA2_Mask07 : OA2[7:1] are masked and don't
care.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
13.2.9.11 I2C_GeneralCallCmd
Function Name
void I2C_GeneralCallCmd ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the I2C general call mode.
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
NewState : new state of the I2C general call mode. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
13.2.9.12 I2C_SlaveByteControlCmd
Function Name
void I2C_SlaveByteControlCmd ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the I2C slave byte control.
DocID023800 Rev 1
257/584
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
Parameters


UM1581
I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
NewState : new state of the I2C slave byte control. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
13.2.9.13 I2C_SlaveAddressConfig
Function Name
void I2C_SlaveAddressConfig ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx, uint16_t
Address)
Function Description
Configures the slave address to be transmitted after start
generation.
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
Address : specifies the slave address to be programmed.
Return values

None.
Notes

This function should be called before generating start
condition.
13.2.9.14 I2C_10BitAddressingModeCmd
258/584
Function Name
void I2C_10BitAddressingModeCmd ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the I2C 10-bit addressing mode for the
master.
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
NewState : new state of the I2C 10-bit addressing mode.
This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

This function should be called before generating start
condition.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
UM1581
13.2.10
Communications handling functions
13.2.10.1 I2C_AutoEndCmd
Function Name
void I2C_AutoEndCmd ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx, FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the I2C automatic end mode (stop condition
is automatically sent when nbytes data are transferred).
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
NewState : new state of the I2C automatic end mode. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

This function has effect if Reload mode is disabled.
13.2.10.2 I2C_ReloadCmd
Function Name
void I2C_ReloadCmd ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx, FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the I2C nbytes reload mode.
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
NewState : new state of the nbytes reload mode. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
13.2.10.3 I2C_NumberOfBytesConfig
Function Name
void I2C_NumberOfBytesConfig ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx, uint8_t
Number_Bytes)
Function Description
Configures the number of bytes to be transmitted/received.
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
Number_Bytes : specifies the number of bytes to be
DocID023800 Rev 1
259/584
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
UM1581
programmed.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
13.2.10.4 I2C_MasterRequestConfig
Function Name
void I2C_MasterRequestConfig ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx, uint16_t
I2C_Direction)
Function Description
Configures the type of transfer request for the master.
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
I2C_Direction : specifies the transfer request direction to be
programmed. This parameter can be one of the following
values:

I2C_Direction_Transmitter : Master request a write
transfer

I2C_Direction_Receiver : Master request a read
transfer
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
13.2.10.5 I2C_GenerateSTART
260/584
Function Name
void I2C_GenerateSTART ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Generates I2Cx communication START condition.
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
NewState : new state of the I2C START condition
generation. This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
UM1581
13.2.10.6 I2C_GenerateSTOP
Function Name
void I2C_GenerateSTOP ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Generates I2Cx communication STOP condition.
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
NewState : new state of the I2C STOP condition generation.
This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
13.2.10.7 I2C_10BitAddressHeaderCmd
Function Name
void I2C_10BitAddressHeaderCmd ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the I2C 10-bit header only mode with read
direction.
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
NewState : new state of the I2C 10-bit header only mode.
This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

This mode can be used only when switching from master
transmitter mode to master receiver mode.
13.2.10.8 I2C_AcknowledgeConfig
Function Name
void I2C_AcknowledgeConfig ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Generates I2C communication Acknowledge.
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
NewState : new state of the Acknowledge. This parameter
can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
DocID023800 Rev 1
261/584
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
Return values

None.

None.
Notes
UM1581
13.2.10.9 I2C_GetAddressMatched
Function Name
uint8_t I2C_GetAddressMatched ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx)
Function Description
Returns the I2C slave matched address .
Parameters

I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
Return values

The value of the slave matched address .
Notes

None.
13.2.10.10 I2C_GetTransferDirection
Function Name
uint16_t I2C_GetTransferDirection ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx)
Function Description
Returns the I2C slave received request.
Parameters

I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
Return values

The value of the received request.
Notes

None.
13.2.10.11 I2C_TransferHandling
262/584
Function Name
void I2C_TransferHandling ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx, uint16_t
Address, uint8_t Number_Bytes, uint32_t ReloadEndMode,
uint32_t StartStopMode)
Function Description
Handles I2Cx communication when starting transfer or during
transfer (TC or TCR flag are set).
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
Address : specifies the slave address to be programmed.
DocID023800 Rev 1

Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
Number_Bytes : specifies the number of bytes to be
programmed. This parameter must be a value between 0 and
255.
ReloadEndMode : new state of the I2C START condition
generation. This parameter can be one of the following
values:

I2C_Reload_Mode : Enable Reload mode .

I2C_AutoEnd_Mode : Enable Automatic end mode.

I2C_SoftEnd_Mode : Enable Software end mode.
StartStopMode : new state of the I2C START condition
generation. This parameter can be one of the following
values:

I2C_No_StartStop : Don't Generate stop and start
condition.

I2C_Generate_Stop : Generate stop condition
(Number_Bytes should be set to 0).

I2C_Generate_Start_Read : Generate Restart for read
request.

I2C_Generate_Start_Write : Generate Restart for write
request.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
UM1581


13.2.11
SMBUS management functions
13.2.11.1 I2C_SMBusAlertCmd
Function Name
void I2C_SMBusAlertCmd ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables I2C SMBus alert.
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
NewState : new state of the I2Cx SMBus alert. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
263/584
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
UM1581
13.2.11.2 I2C_ClockTimeoutCmd
Function Name
void I2C_ClockTimeoutCmd ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables I2C Clock Timeout (SCL Timeout detection).
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
NewState : new state of the I2Cx clock Timeout. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
13.2.11.3 I2C_ExtendedClockTimeoutCmd
Function Name
void I2C_ExtendedClockTimeoutCmd ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables I2C Extended Clock Timeout (SCL cumulative
Timeout detection).
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
NewState : new state of the I2Cx Extended clock Timeout.
This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
13.2.11.4 I2C_IdleClockTimeoutCmd
264/584
Function Name
void I2C_IdleClockTimeoutCmd ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables I2C Idle Clock Timeout (Bus idle SCL and
SDA high detection).
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
NewState : new state of the I2Cx Idle clock Timeout. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
UM1581
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
13.2.11.5 I2C_TimeoutAConfig
Function Name
void I2C_TimeoutAConfig ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx, uint16_t
Timeout)
Function Description
Configures the I2C Bus Timeout A (SCL Timeout when TIDLE = 0
or Bus idle SCL and SDA high when TIDLE = 1).
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
Timeout : specifies the TimeoutA to be programmed.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
13.2.11.6 I2C_TimeoutBConfig
Function Name
void I2C_TimeoutBConfig ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx, uint16_t
Timeout)
Function Description
Configures the I2C Bus Timeout B (SCL cumulative Timeout).
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
Timeout : specifies the TimeoutB to be programmed.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
265/584
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
UM1581
13.2.11.7 I2C_CalculatePEC
Function Name
void I2C_CalculatePEC ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx, FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables I2C PEC calculation.
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
NewState : new state of the I2Cx PEC calculation. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
13.2.11.8 I2C_PECRequestCmd
Function Name
void I2C_PECRequestCmd ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables I2C PEC transmission/reception request.
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
NewState : new state of the I2Cx PEC request. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
13.2.11.9 I2C_GetPEC
266/584
Function Name
uint8_t I2C_GetPEC ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx)
Function Description
Returns the I2C PEC.
Parameters

I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
Return values

The value of the PEC .
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
UM1581
13.2.12
I2C registers management functions
13.2.12.1 I2C_ReadRegister
13.2.13
Function Name
uint32_t I2C_ReadRegister ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx, uint8_t
I2C_Register)
Function Description
Reads the specified I2C register and returns its value.
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
I2C_Register : specifies the register to read. This parameter
can be one of the following values:

I2C_Register_CR1 : CR1 register.

I2C_Register_CR2 : CR2 register.

I2C_Register_OAR1 : OAR1 register.

I2C_Register_OAR2 : OAR2 register.

I2C_Register_TIMINGR : TIMING register.

I2C_Register_TIMEOUTR : TIMEOUTR register.

I2C_Register_ISR : ISR register.

I2C_Register_ICR : ICR register.

I2C_Register_PECR : PECR register.

I2C_Register_RXDR : RXDR register.

I2C_Register_TXDR : TXDR register.
Return values

The value of the read register.
Notes

None.
Data transfers management functions
13.2.13.1 I2C_SendData
Function Name
void I2C_SendData ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx, uint8_t Data)
Function Description
Sends a data byte through the I2Cx peripheral.
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
Data : Byte to be transmitted..
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
267/584
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
UM1581
13.2.13.2 I2C_ReceiveData
13.2.14
Function Name
uint8_t I2C_ReceiveData ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx)
Function Description
Returns the most recent received data by the I2Cx peripheral.
Parameters

I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
Return values

The value of the received data.
Notes

None.
DMA transfers management functions
13.2.14.1 I2C_DMACmd
Function Name
void I2C_DMACmd ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx, uint32_t
I2C_DMAReq, FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the I2C DMA interface.
Parameters



13.2.15
I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
I2C_DMAReq : specifies the I2C DMA transfer request to be
enabled or disabled. This parameter can be any combination
of the following values:

I2C_DMAReq_Tx : Tx DMA transfer request

I2C_DMAReq_Rx : Rx DMA transfer request
NewState : new state of the selected I2C DMA transfer
request. This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
Interrupts and flags management functions
13.2.15.1 I2C_GetFlagStatus
268/584
Function Name
FlagStatus I2C_GetFlagStatus ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx, uint32_t
I2C_FLAG)
Function Description
Checks whether the specified I2C flag is set or not.
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
I2C_FLAG : specifies the flag to check. This parameter can
be one of the following values:

I2C_FLAG_TXE : Transmit data register empty

I2C_FLAG_TXIS : Transmit interrupt status

I2C_FLAG_RXNE : Receive data register not empty

I2C_FLAG_ADDR : Address matched (slave mode)

I2C_FLAG_NACKF : NACK received flag

I2C_FLAG_STOPF : STOP detection flag

I2C_FLAG_TC : Transfer complete (master mode)

I2C_FLAG_TCR : Transfer complete reload

I2C_FLAG_BERR : Bus error

I2C_FLAG_ARLO : Arbitration lost

I2C_FLAG_OVR : Overrun/Underrun

I2C_FLAG_PECERR : PEC error in reception

I2C_FLAG_TIMEOUT : Timeout or Tlow detection flag

I2C_FLAG_ALERT : SMBus Alert

I2C_FLAG_BUSY : Bus busy
Parameters


Return values

The new state of I2C_FLAG (SET or RESET).
Notes

None.
13.2.15.2 I2C_ClearFlag
Function Name
void I2C_ClearFlag ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx, uint32_t I2C_FLAG)
Function Description
Clears the I2Cx's pending flags.
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
I2C_FLAG : specifies the flag to clear. This parameter can
be any combination of the following values:

I2C_FLAG_ADDR : Address matched (slave mode)

I2C_FLAG_NACKF : NACK received flag

I2C_FLAG_STOPF : STOP detection flag

I2C_FLAG_BERR : Bus error

I2C_FLAG_ARLO : Arbitration lost

I2C_FLAG_OVR : Overrun/Underrun

I2C_FLAG_PECERR : PEC error in reception

I2C_FLAG_TIMEOUT : Timeout or Tlow detection flag

I2C_FLAG_ALERT : SMBus Alert
Return values

The new state of I2C_FLAG (SET or RESET).
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
269/584
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
UM1581
13.2.15.3 I2C_GetITStatus
Function Name
ITStatus I2C_GetITStatus ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx, uint32_t
I2C_IT)
Function Description
Checks whether the specified I2C interrupt has occurred or not.
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
I2C_IT : specifies the interrupt source to check. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

I2C_IT_TXIS : Transmit interrupt status

I2C_IT_RXNE : Receive data register not empty

I2C_IT_ADDR : Address matched (slave mode)

I2C_IT_NACKF : NACK received flag

I2C_IT_STOPF : STOP detection flag

I2C_IT_TC : Transfer complete (master mode)

I2C_IT_TCR : Transfer complete reload

I2C_IT_BERR : Bus error

I2C_IT_ARLO : Arbitration lost

I2C_IT_OVR : Overrun/Underrun

I2C_IT_PECERR : PEC error in reception

I2C_IT_TIMEOUT : Timeout or Tlow detection flag

I2C_IT_ALERT : SMBus Alert
Return values

The new state of I2C_IT (SET or RESET).
Notes

None.
13.2.15.4 I2C_ClearITPendingBit
270/584
Function Name
void I2C_ClearITPendingBit ( I2C_TypeDef * I2Cx, uint32_t
I2C_IT)
Function Description
Clears the I2Cx's interrupt pending bits.
Parameters


I2Cx : where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
I2C_IT : specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear. This
parameter can be any combination of the following values:

I2C_IT_ADDR : Address matched (slave mode)

I2C_IT_NACKF : NACK received flag

I2C_IT_STOPF : STOP detection flag

I2C_IT_BERR : Bus error

I2C_IT_ARLO : Arbitration lost

I2C_IT_OVR : Overrun/Underrun

I2C_IT_PECERR : PEC error in reception

I2C_IT_TIMEOUT : Timeout or Tlow detection flag
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581

Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
I2C_IT_ALERT : SMBus Alert
Return values

The new state of I2C_IT (SET or RESET).
Notes

None.
13.3
I2C Firmware driver defines
13.3.1
I2C
I2C
I2C_acknowledged_address

#define: I2C_AcknowledgedAddress_7bit ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: I2C_AcknowledgedAddress_10bit I2C_OAR1_OA1MODE
I2C_acknowledgement

#define: I2C_Ack_Enable ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: I2C_Ack_Disable I2C_CR2_NACK
I2C_Analog_Filter

#define: I2C_AnalogFilter_Enable ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: I2C_AnalogFilter_Disable I2C_CR1_ANFOFF
I2C_DMA_transfer_requests

#define: I2C_DMAReq_Tx I2C_CR1_TXDMAEN

#define: I2C_DMAReq_Rx I2C_CR1_RXDMAEN
DocID023800 Rev 1
271/584
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
UM1581
I2C_flags_definition
272/584

#define: I2C_FLAG_TXE I2C_ISR_TXE

#define: I2C_FLAG_TXIS I2C_ISR_TXIS

#define: I2C_FLAG_RXNE I2C_ISR_RXNE

#define: I2C_FLAG_ADDR I2C_ISR_ADDR

#define: I2C_FLAG_NACKF I2C_ISR_NACKF

#define: I2C_FLAG_STOPF I2C_ISR_STOPF

#define: I2C_FLAG_TC I2C_ISR_TC

#define: I2C_FLAG_TCR I2C_ISR_TCR

#define: I2C_FLAG_BERR I2C_ISR_BERR

#define: I2C_FLAG_ARLO I2C_ISR_ARLO

#define: I2C_FLAG_OVR I2C_ISR_OVR
DocID023800 Rev 1

Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
#define: I2C_FLAG_PECERR I2C_ISR_PECERR

#define: I2C_FLAG_TIMEOUT I2C_ISR_TIMEOUT

#define: I2C_FLAG_ALERT I2C_ISR_ALERT

#define: I2C_FLAG_BUSY I2C_ISR_BUSY
UM1581
I2C_interrupts_definition

#define: I2C_IT_ERRI I2C_CR1_ERRIE

#define: I2C_IT_TCI I2C_CR1_TCIE

#define: I2C_IT_STOPI I2C_CR1_STOPIE

#define: I2C_IT_NACKI I2C_CR1_NACKIE

#define: I2C_IT_ADDRI I2C_CR1_ADDRIE

#define: I2C_IT_RXI I2C_CR1_RXIE

#define: I2C_IT_TXI I2C_CR1_TXIE

#define: I2C_IT_TXIS I2C_ISR_TXIS
DocID023800 Rev 1
273/584
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
274/584
UM1581

#define: I2C_IT_RXNE I2C_ISR_RXNE

#define: I2C_IT_ADDR I2C_ISR_ADDR

#define: I2C_IT_NACKF I2C_ISR_NACKF

#define: I2C_IT_STOPF I2C_ISR_STOPF

#define: I2C_IT_TC I2C_ISR_TC

#define: I2C_IT_TCR I2C_ISR_TCR

#define: I2C_IT_BERR I2C_ISR_BERR

#define: I2C_IT_ARLO I2C_ISR_ARLO

#define: I2C_IT_OVR I2C_ISR_OVR

#define: I2C_IT_PECERR I2C_ISR_PECERR

#define: I2C_IT_TIMEOUT I2C_ISR_TIMEOUT

#define: I2C_IT_ALERT I2C_ISR_ALERT
DocID023800 Rev 1
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
UM1581
I2C_mode

#define: I2C_Mode_I2C ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: I2C_Mode_SMBusDevice I2C_CR1_SMBDEN

#define: I2C_Mode_SMBusHost I2C_CR1_SMBHEN
I2C_own_address2_mask

#define: I2C_OA2_NoMask ((uint8_t)0x00)

#define: I2C_OA2_Mask01 ((uint8_t)0x01)

#define: I2C_OA2_Mask02 ((uint8_t)0x02)

#define: I2C_OA2_Mask03 ((uint8_t)0x03)

#define: I2C_OA2_Mask04 ((uint8_t)0x04)

#define: I2C_OA2_Mask05 ((uint8_t)0x05)

#define: I2C_OA2_Mask06 ((uint8_t)0x06)

#define: I2C_OA2_Mask07 ((uint8_t)0x07)
DocID023800 Rev 1
275/584
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
I2C_registers
UM1581

#define: I2C_Register_CR1 ((uint8_t)0x00)

#define: I2C_Register_CR2 ((uint8_t)0x04)

#define: I2C_Register_OAR1 ((uint8_t)0x08)

#define: I2C_Register_OAR2 ((uint8_t)0x0C)

#define: I2C_Register_TIMINGR ((uint8_t)0x10)

#define: I2C_Register_TIMEOUTR ((uint8_t)0x14)

#define: I2C_Register_ISR ((uint8_t)0x18)

#define: I2C_Register_ICR ((uint8_t)0x1C)

#define: I2C_Register_PECR ((uint8_t)0x20)

#define: I2C_Register_RXDR ((uint8_t)0x24)

#define: I2C_Register_TXDR ((uint8_t)0x28)
I2C_ReloadEndMode_definition

276/584
#define: I2C_Reload_Mode I2C_CR2_RELOAD
DocID023800 Rev 1
Inter-integrated circuit interface (I2C)
UM1581

#define: I2C_AutoEnd_Mode I2C_CR2_AUTOEND

#define: I2C_SoftEnd_Mode ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
I2C_StartStopMode_definition

#define: I2C_No_StartStop ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: I2C_Generate_Stop I2C_CR2_STOP

#define: I2C_Generate_Start_Read (uint32_t)(I2C_CR2_START |
I2C_CR2_RD_WRN)

#define: I2C_Generate_Start_Write I2C_CR2_START
I2C_transfer_direction

#define: I2C_Direction_Transmitter ((uint16_t)0x0000)

#define: I2C_Direction_Receiver ((uint16_t)0x0400)
DocID023800 Rev 1
277/584
Independent watchdog (IWDG)
UM1581
14
Independent watchdog (IWDG)
14.1
IWDG Firmware driver registers structures
14.1.1
IWDG_TypeDef
IWDG_TypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x.h
Data Fields





__IO uint32_t KR
__IO uint32_t PR
__IO uint32_t RLR
__IO uint32_t SR
__IO uint32_t WINR
Field Documentation





14.2
__IO uint32_t IWDG_TypeDef::KR

IWDG Key register, Address offset: 0x00
__IO uint32_t IWDG_TypeDef::PR

IWDG Prescaler register, Address offset: 0x04
__IO uint32_t IWDG_TypeDef::RLR

IWDG Reload register, Address offset: 0x08
__IO uint32_t IWDG_TypeDef::SR

IWDG Status register, Address offset: 0x0C
__IO uint32_t IWDG_TypeDef::WINR

IWDG Window register, Address offset: 0x10
IWDG Firmware driver API description
The following section lists the various functions of the IWDG library.
14.2.1
IWDG features
The IWDG can be started by either software or hardware (configurable through option
byte).
The IWDG is clocked by its own dedicated low-speed clock (LSI) and thus stays active
even if the main clock fails. Once the IWDG is started, the LSI is forced ON and cannot be
disabled (LSI cannot be disabled too), and the counter starts counting down from the reset
value of 0xFFF. When it reaches the end of count value (0x000) a system reset is
generated. The IWDG counter should be reloaded at regular intervals to prevent an MCU
reset.
The IWDG is implemented in the VDD voltage domain that is still functional in STOP and
STANDBY mode (IWDG reset can wake-up from STANDBY).
IWDGRST flag in RCC_CSR register can be used to inform when a IWDG reset occurs.
278/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Independent watchdog (IWDG)
Min-max timeout value @41KHz (LSI): ~0.1ms / ~25.5s The IWDG timeout may vary due
to LSI frequency dispersion. STM32F30x devices provide the capability to measure the LSI
frequency (LSI clock connected internally to TIM16 CH1 input capture). The measured
value can be used to have an IWDG timeout with an acceptable accuracy. For more
information, please refer to the STM32F30x Reference manual.
14.2.2
How to use this driver
This driver allows to use IWDG peripheral with either window option enabled or disabled.
To do so follow one of the two procedures below.
1.
2.
14.2.3
Prescaler and Counter configuration functions





14.2.4
IWDG_WriteAccessCmd()
IWDG_SetPrescaler()
IWDG_SetReload()
IWDG_ReloadCounter()
IWDG_SetWindowValue()
IWDG activation function

14.2.5
Window option is enabled:

Start the IWDG using IWDG_Enable() function, when the IWDG is used in
software mode (no need to enable the LSI, it will be enabled by hardware).

Enable write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers using
IWDG_WriteAccessCmd(IWDG_WriteAccess_Enable) function.

Configure the IWDG prescaler using IWDG_SetPrescaler() function.

Configure the IWDG counter value using IWDG_SetReload() function. This value
will be loaded in the IWDG counter each time the counter is reloaded, then the
IWDG will start counting down from this value.

Wait for the IWDG registers to be updated using IWDG_GetFlagStatus()
function.

Configure the IWDG refresh window using IWDG_SetWindowValue() function.
Window option is disabled:

Enable write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers using
IWDG_WriteAccessCmd(IWDG_WriteAccess_Enable) function.

Configure the IWDG prescaler using IWDG_SetPrescaler() function.

Configure the IWDG counter value using IWDG_SetReload() function. This value
will be loaded in the IWDG counter each time the counter is reloaded, then the
IWDG will start counting down from this value.

Wait for the IWDG registers to be updated using IWDG_GetFlagStatus()
function.

reload the IWDG counter at regular intervals during normal operation to prevent
an MCU reset, using IWDG_ReloadCounter() function.

Start the IWDG using IWDG_Enable() function, when the IWDG is used in
software mode (no need to enable the LSI, it will be enabled by hardware).
IWDG_Enable()
Flag management function
DocID023800 Rev 1
279/584
Independent watchdog (IWDG)

UM1581
IWDG_GetFlagStatus()
14.2.6
Prescaler and counter configuration functions
14.2.6.1
IWDG_WriteAccessCmd
14.2.6.2
280/584
Function Name
void IWDG_WriteAccessCmd ( uint16_t IWDG_WriteAccess)
Function Description
Enables or disables write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR
registers.
Parameters

IWDG_WriteAccess : new state of write access to
IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers. This parameter can be
one of the following values:

IWDG_WriteAccess_Enable : Enable write access to
IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers

IWDG_WriteAccess_Disable : Disable write access to
IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
IWDG_SetPrescaler
Function Name
void IWDG_SetPrescaler ( uint8_t IWDG_Prescaler)
Function Description
Sets IWDG Prescaler value.
Parameters

IWDG_Prescaler : specifies the IWDG Prescaler value. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

IWDG_Prescaler_4 : IWDG prescaler set to 4

IWDG_Prescaler_8 : IWDG prescaler set to 8

IWDG_Prescaler_16 : IWDG prescaler set to 16

IWDG_Prescaler_32 : IWDG prescaler set to 32

IWDG_Prescaler_64 : IWDG prescaler set to 64

IWDG_Prescaler_128 : IWDG prescaler set to 128

IWDG_Prescaler_256 : IWDG prescaler set to 256
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Independent watchdog (IWDG)
UM1581
14.2.6.3
14.2.6.4
14.2.6.5
IWDG_SetReload
Function Name
void IWDG_SetReload ( uint16_t Reload)
Function Description
Sets IWDG Reload value.
Parameters

Reload : specifies the IWDG Reload value. This parameter
must be a number between 0 and 0x0FFF.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
IWDG_ReloadCounter
Function Name
void IWDG_ReloadCounter ( void )
Function Description
Reloads IWDG counter with value defined in the reload register
(write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers disabled).
Parameters

None.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
IWDG_SetWindowValue
Function Name
void IWDG_SetWindowValue ( uint16_t WindowValue)
Function Description
Sets the IWDG window value.
Parameters

WindowValue : specifies the window value to be compared
to the downcounter.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
281/584
Independent watchdog (IWDG)
UM1581
14.2.7
IWDG activation function
14.2.7.1
IWDG_Enable
Function Name
void IWDG_Enable ( void )
Function Description
Enables IWDG (write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR
registers disabled).
Parameters

None.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
14.2.8
Flag management function
14.2.8.1
IWDG_GetFlagStatus
Function Name
FlagStatus IWDG_GetFlagStatus ( uint16_t IWDG_FLAG)
Function Description
Checks whether the specified IWDG flag is set or not.
Parameters

IWDG_FLAG : specifies the flag to check. This parameter
can be one of the following values:

IWDG_FLAG_PVU : Prescaler Value Update on going

IWDG_FLAG_RVU : Reload Value Update on going

IWDG_FLAG_WVU : Counter Window Value Update on
going
Return values

The new state of IWDG_FLAG (SET or RESET).
Notes

None.
14.3
IWDG Firmware driver defines
14.3.1
IWDG
IWDG
IWDG_Flag

282/584
#define: IWDG_FLAG_PVU ((uint16_t)0x0001)
DocID023800 Rev 1
Independent watchdog (IWDG)
UM1581

#define: IWDG_FLAG_RVU ((uint16_t)0x0002)

#define: IWDG_FLAG_WVU ((uint16_t)0x0002)
IWDG_prescaler

#define: IWDG_Prescaler_4 ((uint8_t)0x00)

#define: IWDG_Prescaler_8 ((uint8_t)0x01)

#define: IWDG_Prescaler_16 ((uint8_t)0x02)

#define: IWDG_Prescaler_32 ((uint8_t)0x03)

#define: IWDG_Prescaler_64 ((uint8_t)0x04)

#define: IWDG_Prescaler_128 ((uint8_t)0x05)

#define: IWDG_Prescaler_256 ((uint8_t)0x06)
IWDG_WriteAccess

#define: IWDG_WriteAccess_Enable ((uint16_t)0x5555)

#define: IWDG_WriteAccess_Disable ((uint16_t)0x0000)
DocID023800 Rev 1
283/584
Miscellaneous add-on to CMSIS functions(misc)
15
Miscellaneous add-on to CMSIS functions(misc)
15.1
MISC Firmware driver registers structures
15.1.1
NVIC_InitTypeDef
UM1581
NVIC_InitTypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x_misc.h
Data Fields




uint8_t NVIC_IRQChannel
uint8_t NVIC_IRQChannelPreemptionPriority
uint8_t NVIC_IRQChannelSubPriority
FunctionalState NVIC_IRQChannelCmd
Field Documentation




15.2
uint8_t NVIC_InitTypeDef::NVIC_IRQChannel

Specifies the IRQ channel to be enabled or disabled. This parameter can be a
value of IRQn_Type
uint8_t NVIC_InitTypeDef::NVIC_IRQChannelPreemptionPriority

Specifies the pre-emption priority for the IRQ channel specified in
NVIC_IRQChannel. This parameter can be a value between 0 and 15. A lower
priority value indicates a higher priority
uint8_t NVIC_InitTypeDef::NVIC_IRQChannelSubPriority

Specifies the subpriority level for the IRQ channel specified in
NVIC_IRQChannel. This parameter can be a value between 0 and 15. A lower
priority value indicates a higher priority
FunctionalState NVIC_InitTypeDef::NVIC_IRQChannelCmd

Specifies whether the IRQ channel defined in NVIC_IRQChannel will be enabled
or disabled. This parameter can be set either to ENABLE or DISABLE
MISC Firmware driver API description
The following section lists the various functions of the MISC library.
15.2.1
How to configure Interrupts using driver
This section provide functions allowing to configure the NVIC interrupts (IRQ). The CortexM4 exceptions are managed by CMSIS functions.
1.
2.
284/584
Configure the NVIC Priority Grouping using NVIC_PriorityGroupConfig() function
according to the following table. The table below gives the allowed values of the preemption priority and subpriority according to the Priority Grouping configuration
performed by NVIC_PriorityGroupConfig function.
Enable and Configure the priority of the selected IRQ Channels.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Miscellaneous add-on to CMSIS functions(misc)
UM1581
When the NVIC_PriorityGroup_0 is selected, it will no any nested interrupt, the
IRQ priority will be managed only by subpriority. The sub-priority is only used to
sort pending exception priorities, and does not affect active exceptions.
Lower priority values gives higher priority.
Priority Order:
1.
2.
3.
Lowest Preemption priority.
Lowest Subpriority.
Lowest hardware priority (IRQn position).
15.2.2
MISC functions
15.2.2.1
NVIC_PriorityGroupConfig
Function Name
void NVIC_PriorityGroupConfig ( uint32_t
NVIC_PriorityGroup)
Function Description
Configures the priority grouping: pre-emption priority and
subpriority.
Parameters

NVIC_PriorityGroup : specifies the priority grouping bits
length. This parameter can be one of the following values:

NVIC_PriorityGroup_0 : 0 bits for pre-emption priority.
4 bits for subpriority.

NVIC_PriorityGroup_1 : 1 bits for pre-emption priority.
3 bits for subpriority.

NVIC_PriorityGroup_2 : 2 bits for pre-emption priority.
2 bits for subpriority.

NVIC_PriorityGroup_3 : 3 bits for pre-emption priority.
1 bits for subpriority.

NVIC_PriorityGroup_4 : 4 bits for pre-emption priority.
0 bits for subpriority.
Return values

None.
Notes

When NVIC_PriorityGroup_0 is selected, it will no be any
nested interrupt. This interrupts priority is managed only with
subpriority.
DocID023800 Rev 1
285/584
Miscellaneous add-on to CMSIS functions(misc)
15.2.2.2
15.2.2.3
Function Name
void NVIC_Init ( NVIC_InitTypeDef * NVIC_InitStruct)
Function Description
Initializes the NVIC peripheral according to the specified
parameters in the NVIC_InitStruct.
Parameters

NVIC_InitStruct : pointer to a NVIC_InitTypeDef structure
that contains the configuration information for the specified
NVIC peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

To configure interrupts priority correctly, the
NVIC_PriorityGroupConfig() function should be called before.
NVIC_SetVectorTable
Function Name
void NVIC_SetVectorTable ( uint32_t NVIC_VectTab, uint32_t
Offset)
Function Description
Sets the vector table location and Offset.
Parameters


15.2.2.4
286/584
UM1581
NVIC_Init
NVIC_VectTab : specifies if the vector table is in RAM or
FLASH memory. This parameter can be one of the following
values:

NVIC_VectTab_RAM :

NVIC_VectTab_FLASH :
Offset : Vector Table base offset field. This value must be a
multiple of 0x200.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
NVIC_SystemLPConfig
Function Name
void NVIC_SystemLPConfig ( uint8_t LowPowerMode,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Selects the condition for the system to enter low power mode.
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Parameters


15.2.2.5
Miscellaneous add-on to CMSIS functions(misc)
LowPowerMode : Specifies the new mode for the system to
enter low power mode. This parameter can be one of the
following values:

NVIC_LP_SEVONPEND :

NVIC_LP_SLEEPDEEP :

NVIC_LP_SLEEPONEXIT :
NewState : new state of LP condition. This parameter can
be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
SysTick_CLKSourceConfig
Function Name
void SysTick_CLKSourceConfig ( uint32_t
SysTick_CLKSource)
Function Description
Configures the SysTick clock source.
Parameters

SysTick_CLKSource : specifies the SysTick clock source.
This parameter can be one of the following values:

SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK_Div8 : AHB clock divided
by 8 selected as SysTick clock source.

SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK : AHB clock selected as
SysTick clock source.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
15.3
MISC Firmware driver defines
15.3.1
MISC
MISC
MISC_Exported_Constants

#define: SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK_Div8 ((uint32_t)0xFFFFFFFB)

#define: SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK ((uint32_t)0x00000004)
DocID023800 Rev 1
287/584
Miscellaneous add-on to CMSIS functions(misc)
MISC_Preemption_Priority_Group

#define: NVIC_PriorityGroup_0 ((uint32_t)0x700)
0 bits for pre-emption priority 4 bits for subpriority

#define: NVIC_PriorityGroup_1 ((uint32_t)0x600)
1 bits for pre-emption priority 3 bits for subpriority

#define: NVIC_PriorityGroup_2 ((uint32_t)0x500)
2 bits for pre-emption priority 2 bits for subpriority

#define: NVIC_PriorityGroup_3 ((uint32_t)0x400)
3 bits for pre-emption priority 1 bits for subpriority

#define: NVIC_PriorityGroup_4 ((uint32_t)0x300)
4 bits for pre-emption priority 0 bits for subpriority
MISC_System_Low_Power

#define: NVIC_LP_SEVONPEND ((uint8_t)0x10)

#define: NVIC_LP_SLEEPDEEP ((uint8_t)0x04)

#define: NVIC_LP_SLEEPONEXIT ((uint8_t)0x02)
MISC_Vector_Table_Base
288/584

#define: NVIC_VectTab_RAM ((uint32_t)0x20000000)

#define: NVIC_VectTab_FLASH ((uint32_t)0x08000000)
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Operational amplifier (OPAMP)
UM1581
16
Operational amplifier (OPAMP)
16.1
OPAMP Firmware driver registers structures
16.1.1
OPAMP_TypeDef
OPAMP_TypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x.h
Data Fields

__IO uint32_t CSR
Field Documentation

16.1.2
__IO uint32_t OPAMP_TypeDef::CSR

OPAMP control and status register, Address offset: 0x00
OPAMP_InitTypeDef
OPAMP_InitTypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x_opamp.h
Data Fields


uint32_t OPAMP_InvertingInput
uint32_t OPAMP_NonInvertingInput
Field Documentation


16.2
uint32_t OPAMP_InitTypeDef::OPAMP_InvertingInput

Selects the inverting input of the operational amplifier. This parameter can be a
value of OPAMP_InvertingInput
uint32_t OPAMP_InitTypeDef::OPAMP_NonInvertingInput

Selects the non inverting input of the operational amplifier. This parameter can
be a value of OPAMP_NonInvertingInput
OPAMP Firmware driver API description
The following section lists the various functions of the OPAMP library.
16.2.1
OPAMP Peripheral Features
The device integrates 4 operational amplifiers OPAMP1, OPAMP2, OPAMP3 and
OPAMP4:
DocID023800 Rev 1
289/584
Operational amplifier (OPAMP)
UM1581

The OPAMPs non inverting input can be selected among the list shown by table
below.

The OPAMPs inverting input can be selected among the list shown by table below.

The OPAMPs outputs can be internally connected to the inverting input (follower
mode)

The OPAMPs outputs can be internally connected to resistor feedback output
(Programmable Gain Amplifier mode)

The OPAMPs outputs can be internally connected to ADC

The OPAMPs can be calibrated to compensate the offset compensation

Timer-controlled Mux for automatic switch of inverting and non-inverting input
Table 14: OPAMPs inverting/non-inverting inputs
OPAMP1
Inverting input
Non-inverting inputs
16.2.2
OPAMP2
OPAMP3
OPAMP4
PGA
OK
OK
OK
OK
VOUT
OK
OK
OK
OK
IO1
PC5
PC5
PB10
PB10
IO2
PA3
PA5
PB2
PD8
IO1
PA7
PD14
PB13
PD11
IO2
PA5
PB14
PA5
PB11
IO3
PA3
PB0
PA1
PA4
IO4
PA1
PA7
PB0
PB13
How to use this driver
This driver provides functions to configure and program the OPAMP of all STM32F30x
devices. To use the OPAMP, perform the following steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
16.2.3
Initialization and Configuration functions









290/584
Enable the SYSCFG APB clock to get write access to OPAMP register using
RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SYSCFG, ENABLE);
Configure the OPAMP input in analog mode using GPIO_Init()
Configure the OPAMP using OPAMP_Init() function:

Select the inverting input

Select the non-inverting inverting input
Enable the OPAMP using OPAMP_Cmd() function
OPAMP_DeInit()
OPAMP_Init()
OPAMP_StructInit()
OPAMP_PGAConfig()
OPAMP_VrefConfig()
OPAMP_VrefConnectNonInvertingInput()
OPAMP_VrefConnectADCCmd()
OPAMP_TimerControlledMuxConfig()
OPAMP_TimerControlledMuxCmd()
DocID023800 Rev 1
Operational amplifier (OPAMP)
UM1581





OPAMP_Cmd()
OPAMP_GetOutputLevel()
OPAMP_OffsetTrimModeSelect()
OPAMP_OffsetTrimConfig()
OPAMP_StartCalibration()
16.2.4
Initialization and Configuration
16.2.4.1
OPAMP_DeInit
16.2.4.2
Function Name
void OPAMP_DeInit ( uint32_t OPAMP_Selection)
Function Description
Deinitializes OPAMP peripheral registers to their default reset
values.
Parameters

OPAMP_Selection.
Return values

None.
Notes

Deinitialization can't be performed if the OPAMP configuration
is locked. To unlock the configuration, perform a system
reset.
OPAMP_Init
Function Name
void OPAMP_Init ( uint32_t OPAMP_Selection,
OPAMP_InitTypeDef * OPAMP_InitStruct)
Function Description
Initializes the OPAMP peripheral according to the specified
parameters in OPAMP_InitStruct.
Parameters


OPAMP_Selection : the selected OPAMP. This parameter
can be OPAMP_Selection_OPAMPx where x can be 1 to 4 to
select the OPAMP peripheral.
OPAMP_InitStruct : pointer to an OPAMP_InitTypeDef
structure that contains the configuration information for the
specified OPAMP peripheral. OPAMP_InvertingInput
specifies the inverting input of
OPAMPOPAMP_NonInvertingInput specifies the non
inverting input of OPAMP

OPAMP_InvertingInput :

OPAMP_NonInvertingInput :
Return values

None.
Notes

If the selected OPAMP is locked, initialization can't be
performed. To unlock the configuration, perform a system
reset.
DocID023800 Rev 1
291/584
Operational amplifier (OPAMP)
16.2.4.3
16.2.4.4
UM1581
OPAMP_StructInit
Function Name
void OPAMP_StructInit ( OPAMP_InitTypeDef *
OPAMP_InitStruct)
Function Description
Fills each OPAMP_InitStruct member with its default value.
Parameters

OPAMP_InitStruct : pointer to an OPAMP_InitTypeDef
structure which will be initialized.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
OPAMP_PGAConfig
Function Name
void OPAMP_PGAConfig ( uint32_t OPAMP_Selection,
uint32_t OPAMP_PGAGain, uint32_t OPAMP_PGAConnect)
Function Description
Configure the feedback resistor gain.
Parameters


16.2.4.5
Return values

None.
Notes

If the selected OPAMP is locked, gain configuration can't be
performed. To unlock the configuration, perform a system
reset.
OPAMP_VrefConfig
Function Name
292/584
OPAMP_Selection : the selected OPAMP. This parameter
can be OPAMP_Selection_OPAMPx where x can be 1 to 4 to
select the OPAMP peripheral.
NewState : new state of the OPAMP peripheral. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
void OPAMP_VrefConfig ( uint32_t OPAMP_Selection,
uint32_t OPAMP_Vref)
DocID023800 Rev 1
Function Description
Operational amplifier (OPAMP)
Configure the OPAMP's internal reference.
Parameters

UM1581

Return values

None.
Notes

This feature is used when calibration enabled or OPAMP's
reference connected to the non inverting input.
If the selected OPAMP is locked, Vref configuration can't be
performed. To unlock the configuration, perform a system
reset.

16.2.4.6
OPAMP_VrefConnectNonInvertingInput
Function Name
void OPAMP_VrefConnectNonInvertingInput ( uint32_t
OPAMP_Selection, FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Connnect the internal reference to the OPAMP's non inverting
input.
Parameters


16.2.4.7
OPAMP_Selection : the selected OPAMP. This parameter
can be OPAMP_Selection_OPAMPx where x can be 1 to 4 to
select the OPAMP peripheral.
OPAMP_Vref : This parameter can be:
OPAMP_Vref_3VDDA: OPMAP Vref = 3.3% VDDA
OPAMP_Vref_10VDDA: OPMAP Vref = 10% VDDA
OPAMP_Vref_50VDDA: OPMAP Vref = 50% VDDA
OPAMP_Vref_90VDDA: OPMAP Vref = 90% VDDA
OPAMP_Selection : the selected OPAMP. This parameter
can be OPAMP_Selection_OPAMPx where x can be 1 to 4 to
select the OPAMP peripheral.
NewState : new state of the OPAMP peripheral. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

If the selected OPAMP is locked, Vref configuration can't be
performed. To unlock the configuration, perform a system
reset.
OPAMP_VrefConnectADCCmd
Function Name
void OPAMP_VrefConnectADCCmd ( uint32_t
OPAMP_Selection, FunctionalState NewState)
DocID023800 Rev 1
293/584
Operational amplifier (OPAMP)
Function Description
16.2.4.8
UM1581
Enables or disables connecting the OPAMP's internal reference to
ADC.
Parameters

NewState : new state of the Vrefint output. This parameter
can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

If the selected OPAMP is locked, Vref connection can't be
performed. To unlock the configuration, perform a system
reset.
OPAMP_TimerControlledMuxConfig
Function Name
void OPAMP_TimerControlledMuxConfig ( uint32_t
OPAMP_Selection, OPAMP_InitTypeDef * OPAMP_InitStruct)
Function Description
Configure the OPAMP peripheral (secondary inputs) for timercontrolled mux mode according to the specified parameters in
OPAMP_InitStruct.
Parameters


Return values

None.
Notes

If the selected OPAMP is locked, timer-controlled mux
configuration can't be performed. To unlock the configuration,
perform a system reset.
PGA and Vout can't be selected as seconadry inverting input.

16.2.4.9
OPAMP_TimerControlledMuxCmd
Function Name
294/584
OPAMP_Selection : the selected OPAMP. This parameter
can be OPAMP_Selection_OPAMPx where x can be 1 to 4 to
select the OPAMP peripheral.
OPAMP_InitStruct : pointer to an OPAMP_InitTypeDef
structure that contains the configuration information for the
specified OPAMP peripheral. OPAMP_InvertingInput
specifies the inverting input of
OPAMPOPAMP_NonInvertingInput specifies the non
inverting input of OPAMP

OPAMP_InvertingInput :

OPAMP_NonInvertingInput :
void OPAMP_TimerControlledMuxCmd ( uint32_t
OPAMP_Selection, FunctionalState NewState)
DocID023800 Rev 1
Function Description
Operational amplifier (OPAMP)
Enable or disable the timer-controlled mux mode.
Parameters

UM1581
OPAMP_Selection : the selected OPAMP. This parameter
can be OPAMP_Selection_OPAMPx where x can be 1 to 4 to
select the OPAMP peripheral.
NewState : new state of the OPAMP peripheral. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.

Return values

None.
Notes

If the selected OPAMP is locked, enable/disable can't be
performed. To unlock the configuration, perform a system
reset.
16.2.4.10 OPAMP_Cmd
Function Name
void OPAMP_Cmd ( uint32_t OPAMP_Selection,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enable or disable the OPAMP peripheral.
Parameters

OPAMP_Selection : the selected OPAMP. This parameter
can be OPAMP_Selection_OPAMPx where x can be 1 to 4 to
select the OPAMP peripheral.
NewState : new state of the OPAMP peripheral. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.

Return values

None.
Notes

If the selected OPAMP is locked, enable/disable can't be
performed. To unlock the configuration, perform a system
reset.
16.2.4.11 OPAMP_GetOutputLevel
Function Name
uint32_t OPAMP_GetOutputLevel ( uint32_t
OPAMP_Selection)
Function Description
Return the output level (high or low) during calibration of the
selected OPAMP.
Parameters

OPAMP_Selection : the selected OPAMP. This parameter
can be OPAMP_Selection_OPAMPx where x can be 1 to 4 to
select the OPAMP peripheral.

OPAMP :
DocID023800 Rev 1
295/584
Operational amplifier (OPAMP)
UM1581

OPAMP :
Return values

Returns the selected OPAMP output level: low or high.
Notes

OPAMP ouput level is provided only during calibration phase.
16.2.4.12 OPAMP_OffsetTrimModeSelect
Function Name
void OPAMP_OffsetTrimModeSelect ( uint32_t
OPAMP_Selection, uint32_t OPAMP_Trimming)
Function Description
Select the trimming mode.
Parameters

OffsetTrimming : the selected offset trimming mode. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

OPAMP_Trimming_Factory : factory trimming values
are used for offset calibration

OPAMP_Trimming_User : user trimming values are
used for offset calibration
Return values

None.
Notes

When OffsetTrimming_User is selected, use
OPAMP_OffsetTrimConfig() function or
OPAMP_OffsetTrimLowPowerConfig() function to adjust
trimming value.
16.2.4.13 OPAMP_OffsetTrimConfig
Function Name
void OPAMP_OffsetTrimConfig ( uint32_t OPAMP_Selection,
uint32_t OPAMP_Input, uint32_t OPAMP_TrimValue)
Function Description
Configure the trimming value of the OPAMP.
Parameters



296/584
OPAMP_Selection : the selected OPAMP. This parameter
can be OPAMP_Selection_OPAMPx where x can be 1 to 4 to
select the OPAMP peripheral.
OPAMP_Input : the selected OPAMP input. This parameter
can be one of the following values:

OPAMP_Input_Inverting : Inverting input is selected to
configure the trimming value

OPAMP_Input_NonInverting : Non inverting input is
selected to configure the trimming value
OPAMP_TrimValue : the trimming value. This parameter
DocID023800 Rev 1
Operational amplifier (OPAMP)
can be any value lower or equal to 0x0000001F.
UM1581
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
16.2.4.14 OPAMP_StartCalibration
Function Name
void OPAMP_StartCalibration ( uint32_t OPAMP_Selection,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Start or stop the calibration of selected OPAMP peripheral.
Parameters


OPAMP_Selection : the selected OPAMP. This parameter
can be OPAMP_Selection_OPAMPx where x can be 1 to 4 to
select the OPAMP peripheral.
NewState : new state of the OPAMP peripheral. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

If the selected OPAMP is locked, start/stop can't be
performed. To unlock the configuration, perform a system
reset.
16.2.5
OPAMP configuration locking function
16.2.5.1
OPAMP_LockConfig
Function Name
void OPAMP_LockConfig ( uint32_t OPAMP_Selection)
Function Description
Lock the selected OPAMP configuration.
Parameters

OPAMP_Selection : the selected OPAMP. This parameter
can be OPAMP_Selection_OPAMPx where x can be 1 to 4 to
select the OPAMP peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

Locking the configuration means that all control bits are readonly. To unlock the OPAMP configuration, perform a system
reset.
DocID023800 Rev 1
297/584
Operational amplifier (OPAMP)
UM1581
16.3
OPAMP Firmware driver defines
16.3.1
OPAMP
OPAMP
OPAMP_Exported_Constants

#define: OPAMP_Trimming_Factory ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
Factory trimming

#define: OPAMP_Trimming_User OPAMP_CSR_USERTRIM
User trimming
OPAMP_Input

#define: OPAMP_Input_Inverting ((uint32_t)0x00000018)
Inverting input

#define: OPAMP_Input_NonInverting ((uint32_t)0x00000013)
Non inverting input
OPAMP_InvertingInput

#define: OPAMP_InvertingInput_IO1 ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
IO1 (PC5 for OPAMP1 and OPAMP2, PB10 for OPAMP3 and OPAMP4) connected to
OPAMPx inverting input

#define: OPAMP_InvertingInput_IO2 OPAMP_CSR_VMSEL_0
IO2 (PA3 for OPAMP1, PA5 for OPAMP2, PB2 for OPAMP3, PD8 for OPAMP4) connected
to OPAMPx inverting input

#define: OPAMP_InvertingInput_PGA OPAMP_CSR_VMSEL_1
Resistor feedback output connected to OPAMPx inverting input (PGA mode)

#define: OPAMP_InvertingInput_Vout OPAMP_CSR_VMSEL
Vout connected to OPAMPx inverting input (follower mode)
OPAMP_NonInvertingInput
298/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581

Operational amplifier (OPAMP)
#define: OPAMP_NonInvertingInput_IO1 ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
IO1 (PA7 for OPAMP1, PD14 for OPAMP2, PB13 for OPAMP3, PD11 for OPAMP4)
connected to OPAMPx non inverting input

#define: OPAMP_NonInvertingInput_IO2 OPAMP_CSR_VPSEL_0
IO2 (PA5 for OPAMP1, PB14 for OPAMP2, PA5 for OPAMP3, PB11 for OPAMP4)
connected to OPAMPx non inverting input

#define: OPAMP_NonInvertingInput_IO3 OPAMP_CSR_VPSEL_1
IO3 (PA3 for OPAMP1, PB0 for OPAMP2, PA1 for OPAMP3, PA4 for OPAMP4) connected
to OPAMPx non inverting input

#define: OPAMP_NonInvertingInput_IO4 OPAMP_CSR_VPSEL
IO4 (PA1 for OPAMP1, PA7 for OPAMP2, PB0 for OPAMP3, PB13 for OPAMP4)
connected to OPAMPx non inverting input
OPAMP_OutputLevel

#define: OPAMP_OutputLevel_High OPAMP_CSR_OUTCAL

#define: OPAMP_OutputLevel_Low ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
OPAMP_PGAConnect_Config

#define: OPAMP_PGAConnect_No ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: OPAMP_PGAConnect_IO1 OPAMP_CSR_PGGAIN_3

#define: OPAMP_PGAConnect_IO2 ((uint32_t)0x00030000)
OPAMP_PGAGain_Config

#define: OPAMP_OPAMP_PGAGain_2 ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: OPAMP_OPAMP_PGAGain_4 OPAMP_CSR_PGGAIN_0
DocID023800 Rev 1
299/584
Operational amplifier (OPAMP)
UM1581

#define: OPAMP_OPAMP_PGAGain_8 OPAMP_CSR_PGGAIN_1

#define: OPAMP_OPAMP_PGAGain_16 ((uint32_t)0x0000C000)
OPAMP_Selection

#define: OPAMP_Selection_OPAMP1 ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
OPAMP1 Selection

#define: OPAMP_Selection_OPAMP2 ((uint32_t)0x00000004)
OPAMP2 Selection

#define: OPAMP_Selection_OPAMP3 ((uint32_t)0x00000008)
OPAMP3 Selection

#define: OPAMP_Selection_OPAMP4 ((uint32_t)0x0000000C)
OPAMP4 Selection
OPAMP_Vref

#define: OPAMP_Vref_3VDDA ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
OPMAP Vref = 3.3% VDDA

#define: OPAMP_Vref_10VDDA OPAMP_CSR_CALSEL_0
OPMAP Vref = 10% VDDA

#define: OPAMP_Vref_50VDDA OPAMP_CSR_CALSEL_1
OPMAP Vref = 50% VDDA

#define: OPAMP_Vref_90VDDA OPAMP_CSR_CALSEL
OPMAP Vref = 90% VDDA
300/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
Power control (PWR)
UM1581
17
Power control (PWR)
17.1
PWR Firmware driver registers structures
17.1.1
PWR_TypeDef
PWR_TypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x.h
Data Fields


__IO uint32_t CR
__IO uint32_t CSR
Field Documentation


17.2
__IO uint32_t PWR_TypeDef::CR

PWR power control register, Address offset: 0x00
__IO uint32_t PWR_TypeDef::CSR

PWR power control/status register, Address offset: 0x04
PWR Firmware driver API description
The following section lists the various functions of the PWR library.
17.2.1
Backup Domain Access function
After reset, the Backup Domain Registers (RCC BDCR Register, RTC registers and RTC
backup registers) are protected against possible stray write accesses.
To enable access to Backup domain use the PWR_BackupAccessCmd(ENABLE)
function.


17.2.2
PWR_DeInit()
PWR_BackupAccessCmd()
PVD configuration functions





The PVD is used to monitor the VDD power supply by comparing it to a threshold
selected by the PVD Level (PLS[2:0] bits in the PWR_CR).
A PVDO flag is available to indicate if VDD/VDDA is higher or lower than the PVD
threshold. This event is internally connected to the EXTI line16 and can generate an
interrupt if enabled through the EXTI registers.
The PVD is stopped in Standby mode.
PWR_PVDLevelConfig()
PWR_PVDCmd()
DocID023800 Rev 1
301/584
Power control (PWR)
17.2.3
WakeUp pins configuration functions



17.2.4
UM1581
WakeUp pins are used to wakeup the system from Standby mode. These pins are
forced in input pull down configuration and are active on rising edges.
There are three WakeUp pins: WakeUp Pin 1 on PA.00, WakeUp Pin 2 on PC.13 and
WakeUp Pin 3 on PE.06.
PWR_WakeUpPinCmd()
Low Power modes configuration functions
The devices feature three low-power modes:



Sleep mode: Cortex-M4 core stopped, peripherals kept running.
Stop mode: all clocks are stopped, regulator running, regulator in low power mode
Standby mode: VCORE domain powered off
Sleep mode


Entry:

The Sleep mode is entered by executing the WFE() or WFI() instructions.
Exit:

Any peripheral interrupt acknowledged by the nested vectored interrupt controller
(NVIC) can wake up the device from Sleep mode.
Stop mode
In Stop mode, all clocks in the VCORE domain are stopped, the PLL, the HSI, and the
HSE RC oscillators are disabled. Internal SRAM and register contents are preserved. The
voltage regulator can be configured either in normal or low-power mode.


Entry:

The Stop mode is entered using the
PWR_EnterSTOPMode(PWR_Regulator_LowPower,) function with regulator in
LowPower or with Regulator ON.
Exit:

Any EXTI Line (Internal or External) configured in Interrupt/Event mode or any
internal IPs (I2C or UASRT) wakeup event.
Standby mode
The Standby mode allows to achieve the lowest power consumption. It is based on the
Cortex-M4 deepsleep mode, with the voltage regulator disabled. The VCORE domain is
consequently powered off. The PLL, the HSI, and the HSE oscillator are also switched off.
SRAM and register contents are lost except for the Backup domain (RTC registers, RTC
backup registers and Standby circuitry).
The voltage regulator is OFF.


302/584
Entry:

The Standby mode is entered using the PWR_EnterSTANDBYMode() function.
Exit:
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581

Power control (PWR)
WKUP pin rising edge, RTC alarm (Alarm A and Alarm B), RTC wakeup, tamper
event, time-stamp event, external reset in NRST pin, IWDG reset.
Auto-wakeup (AWU) from low-power mode
The MCU can be woken up from low-power mode by an RTC Alarm event, a tamper
event, a time-stamp event, or a comparator event, without depending on an external
interrupt (Auto-wakeup mode).






17.2.5
RTC auto-wakeup (AWU) from the Stop mode

To wake up from the Stop mode with an RTC alarm event, it is necessary to:

Configure the EXTI Line 17 to be sensitive to rising edges (Interrupt or
Event modes) using the EXTI_Init() function.

Enable the RTC Alarm Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig() function

Configure the RTC to generate the RTC alarm using the RTC_SetAlarm()
and RTC_AlarmCmd() functions.

To wake up from the Stop mode with an RTC Tamper or time stamp event, it is
necessary to:

Configure the EXTI Line 19 to be sensitive to rising edges (Interrupt or
Event modes) using the EXTI_Init() function.

Enable the RTC Tamper or time stamp Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig()
function.

Configure the RTC to detect the tamper or time stamp event using the
RTC_TimeStampConfig(), RTC_TamperTriggerConfig() and
RTC_TamperCmd() functions.
RTC auto-wakeup (AWU) from the Standby mode

To wake up from the Standby mode with an RTC alarm event, it is necessary to:

Enable the RTC Alarm Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig() function.

Configure the RTC to generate the RTC alarm using the RTC_SetAlarm()
and RTC_AlarmCmd() functions.

To wake up from the Standby mode with an RTC Tamper or time stamp event, it
is necessary to:

Enable the RTC Tamper or time stamp Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig()
function.

Configure the RTC to detect the tamper or time stamp event using the
RTC_TimeStampConfig(), RTC_TamperTriggerConfig() and
RTC_TamperCmd() functions.
Comparator auto-wakeup (AWU) from the Stop mode

To wake up from the Stop mode with a comparator wakeup event, it is necessary
to:

Configure the correspondant comparator EXTI Line to be sensitive to the
selected edges (falling, rising or falling and rising) (Interrupt or Event modes)
using the EXTI_Init() function.

Configure the comparator to generate the event.
PWR_EnterSleepMode()
PWR_EnterSTOPMode()
PWR_EnterSTANDBYMode()
Flags management functions


PWR_GetFlagStatus()
PWR_ClearFlag()
DocID023800 Rev 1
303/584
Power control (PWR)
UM1581
17.2.6
Backup domain access function
17.2.6.1
PWR_DeInit
17.2.6.2
Function Name
void PWR_DeInit ( void )
Function Description
Deinitializes the PWR peripheral registers to their default reset
values.
Parameters

None.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
PWR_BackupAccessCmd
Function Name
void PWR_BackupAccessCmd ( FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables access to the RTC and backup registers.
Parameters

NewState : new state of the access to the RTC and backup
registers. This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

If the HSE divided by 32 is used as the RTC clock, the
Backup Domain Access should be kept enabled.
17.2.7
PVD configuration function
17.2.7.1
PWR_PVDLevelConfig
304/584
Function Name
void PWR_PVDLevelConfig ( uint32_t PWR_PVDLevel)
Function Description
Configures the voltage threshold detected by the Power Voltage
Detector(PVD).
Parameters

PWR_PVDLevel : specifies the PVD detection level This
parameter can be one of the following values:

PWR_PVDLevel_0 : PVD detection level set to 2.18V

PWR_PVDLevel_1 : PVD detection level set to 2.28V

PWR_PVDLevel_2 : PVD detection level set to 2.38V
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581





17.2.7.2
PWR_PVDLevel_3 :
PWR_PVDLevel_4 :
PWR_PVDLevel_5 :
PWR_PVDLevel_6 :
PWR_PVDLevel_7 :
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
Power control (PWR)
PVD detection level set to 2.48V
PVD detection level set to 2.58V
PVD detection level set to 2.68V
PVD detection level set to 2.78V
PVD detection level set to 2.88V
PWR_PVDCmd
Function Name
void PWR_PVDCmd ( FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the Power Voltage Detector(PVD).
Parameters

NewState : new state of the PVD. This parameter can be:
ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
17.2.8
WakeUp pins configuration functions
17.2.8.1
PWR_WakeUpPinCmd
Function Name
void PWR_WakeUpPinCmd ( uint32_t PWR_WakeUpPin,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the WakeUp Pin functionality.
Parameters


PWR_WakeUpPin : specifies the WakeUpPin. This
parameter can be: PWR_WakeUpPin_1,
PWR_WakeUpPin_2 or PWR_WakeUpPin_3.
NewState : new state of the WakeUp Pin functionality. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
305/584
Power control (PWR)
UM1581
17.2.9
Low power mode configuration functions
17.2.9.1
PWR_EnterSleepMode
17.2.9.2
Function Name
void PWR_EnterSleepMode ( uint8_t PWR_SLEEPEntry)
Function Description
Enters Sleep mode.
Parameters

PWR_SLEEPEntry : specifies if SLEEP mode in entered
with WFI or WFE instruction. This parameter can be one of
the following values:

PWR_SLEEPEntry_WFI : enter SLEEP mode with WFI
instruction

PWR_SLEEPEntry_WFE : enter SLEEP mode with
WFE instruction
Return values

None.
Notes

In Sleep mode, all I/O pins keep the same state as in Run
mode.
PWR_EnterSTOPMode
Function Name
void PWR_EnterSTOPMode ( uint32_t PWR_Regulator, uint8_t
PWR_STOPEntry)
Function Description
Enters STOP mode.
Parameters


Return values

None.
Notes

In Stop mode, all I/O pins keep the same state as in Run
mode.
When exiting Stop mode by issuing an interrupt or a wakeup
event, the MSI RC oscillator is selected as system clock.
When the voltage regulator operates in low power mode, an
additional startup delay is incurred when waking up from Stop


306/584
PWR_Regulator : specifies the regulator state in STOP
mode. This parameter can be one of the following values:

PWR_Regulator_ON : STOP mode with regulator ON

PWR_Regulator_LowPower : STOP mode with
regulator in low power mode
PWR_STOPEntry : specifies if STOP mode in entered with
WFI or WFE instruction. This parameter can be one of the
following values:

PWR_STOPEntry_WFI : enter STOP mode with WFI
instruction

PWR_STOPEntry_WFE : enter STOP mode with WFE
instruction
DocID023800 Rev 1
Power control (PWR)
mode. By keeping the internal regulator ON during Stop
mode, the consumption is higher although the startup time is
reduced.
UM1581
17.2.9.3
PWR_EnterSTANDBYMode
Function Name
void PWR_EnterSTANDBYMode ( void )
Function Description
Enters STANDBY mode.
Parameters

None.
Return values

None.
Notes



In Standby mode, all I/O pins are high impedance except for:
Reset pad (still available)
RTC_AF1 pin (PC13) if configured for Wakeup pin 2
(WKUP2), tamper, time-stamp, RTC Alarm out, or RTC clock
calibration out.
WKUP pin 1 (PA0) and WKUP pin 3 (PE6), if enabled.

17.2.10
Flag management functions
17.2.10.1 PWR_GetFlagStatus
Function Name
FlagStatus PWR_GetFlagStatus ( uint32_t PWR_FLAG)
Function Description
Checks whether the specified PWR flag is set or not.
Parameters

PWR_FLAG : specifies the flag to check. This parameter can
be one of the following values: PWR_FLAG_WU: Wake Up
flag. This flag indicates that a wakeup event was received
from the WKUP pin or from the RTC alarm (Alarm A or Alarm
B), RTC Tamper event, RTC TimeStamp event or RTC
Wakeup. PWR_FLAG_SB: StandBy flag. This flag indicates
that the system was resumed from StandBy mode.
PWR_FLAG_PVDO: PVD Output. This flag is valid only if
PVD is enabled by the PWR_PVDCmd() function.
PWR_FLAG_VREFINTRDY: Internal Voltage Reference
Ready flag. This flag indicates the state of the internal voltage
reference, VREFINT.

PWR_FLAG_WU : Wake Up flag. This flag indicates
that a wakeup event was received from the WKUP pin or
from the RTC alarm (Alarm A or Alarm B), RTC Tamper
DocID023800 Rev 1
307/584
Power control (PWR)



UM1581
event, RTC TimeStamp event or RTC Wakeup.
PWR_FLAG_SB : StandBy flag. This flag indicates that
the system was resumed from StandBy mode.
PWR_FLAG_PVDO : PVD Output. This flag is valid only
if PVD is enabled by the PWR_PVDCmd() function.
PWR_FLAG_VREFINTRDY : Internal Voltage
Reference Ready flag. This flag indicates the state of the
internal voltage reference, VREFINT.
Return values

The new state of PWR_FLAG (SET or RESET).
Notes

None.
17.2.10.2 PWR_ClearFlag
Function Name
void PWR_ClearFlag ( uint32_t PWR_FLAG)
Function Description
Clears the PWR's pending flags.
Parameters

PWR_FLAG : specifies the flag to clear. This parameter can
be one of the following values:

PWR_FLAG_WU : Wake Up flag

PWR_FLAG_SB : StandBy flag
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
17.3
PWR Firmware driver defines
17.3.1
PWR
PWR
PWR_Flag
308/584

#define: PWR_FLAG_WU PWR_CSR_WUF

#define: PWR_FLAG_SB PWR_CSR_SBF

#define: PWR_FLAG_PVDO PWR_CSR_PVDO
DocID023800 Rev 1
Power control (PWR)
UM1581

#define: PWR_FLAG_VREFINTRDY PWR_CSR_VREFINTRDYF
PWR_PVD_detection_level

#define: PWR_PVDLevel_0 PWR_CR_PLS_LEV0

#define: PWR_PVDLevel_1 PWR_CR_PLS_LEV1

#define: PWR_PVDLevel_2 PWR_CR_PLS_LEV2

#define: PWR_PVDLevel_3 PWR_CR_PLS_LEV3

#define: PWR_PVDLevel_4 PWR_CR_PLS_LEV4

#define: PWR_PVDLevel_5 PWR_CR_PLS_LEV5

#define: PWR_PVDLevel_6 PWR_CR_PLS_LEV6

#define: PWR_PVDLevel_7 PWR_CR_PLS_LEV7
PWR_Regulator_state_is_Sleep_STOP_mode

#define: PWR_Regulator_ON ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: PWR_Regulator_LowPower PWR_CR_LPSDSR
DocID023800 Rev 1
309/584
Power control (PWR)
UM1581
PWR_SLEEP_mode_entry

#define: PWR_SLEEPEntry_WFI ((uint8_t)0x01)

#define: PWR_SLEEPEntry_WFE ((uint8_t)0x02)
PWR_STOP_mode_entry

#define: PWR_STOPEntry_WFI ((uint8_t)0x01)

#define: PWR_STOPEntry_WFE ((uint8_t)0x02)
PWR_WakeUp_Pins
310/584

#define: PWR_WakeUpPin_1 PWR_CSR_EWUP1

#define: PWR_WakeUpPin_2 PWR_CSR_EWUP2

#define: PWR_WakeUpPin_3 PWR_CSR_EWUP3
DocID023800 Rev 1
Reset and clock control (RCC)
UM1581
18
Reset and clock control (RCC)
18.1
RCC Firmware driver registers structures
18.1.1
RCC_TypeDef
RCC_TypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x.h
Data Fields













__IO uint32_t CR
__IO uint32_t CFGR
__IO uint32_t CIR
__IO uint32_t APB2RSTR
__IO uint32_t APB1RSTR
__IO uint32_t AHBENR
__IO uint32_t APB2ENR
__IO uint32_t APB1ENR
__IO uint32_t BDCR
__IO uint32_t CSR
__IO uint32_t AHBRSTR
__IO uint32_t CFGR2
__IO uint32_t CFGR3
Field Documentation












__IO uint32_t RCC_TypeDef::CR

RCC clock control register, Address offset: 0x00
__IO uint32_t RCC_TypeDef::CFGR

RCC clock configuration register, Address offset: 0x04
__IO uint32_t RCC_TypeDef::CIR

RCC clock interrupt register, Address offset: 0x08
__IO uint32_t RCC_TypeDef::APB2RSTR

RCC APB2 peripheral reset register, Address offset: 0x0C
__IO uint32_t RCC_TypeDef::APB1RSTR

RCC APB1 peripheral reset register, Address offset: 0x10
__IO uint32_t RCC_TypeDef::AHBENR

RCC AHB peripheral clock register, Address offset: 0x14
__IO uint32_t RCC_TypeDef::APB2ENR

RCC APB2 peripheral clock enable register, Address offset: 0x18
__IO uint32_t RCC_TypeDef::APB1ENR

RCC APB1 peripheral clock enable register, Address offset: 0x1C
__IO uint32_t RCC_TypeDef::BDCR

RCC Backup domain control register, Address offset: 0x20
__IO uint32_t RCC_TypeDef::CSR

RCC clock control & status register, Address offset: 0x24
__IO uint32_t RCC_TypeDef::AHBRSTR

RCC AHB peripheral reset register, Address offset: 0x28
__IO uint32_t RCC_TypeDef::CFGR2
DocID023800 Rev 1
311/584
Reset and clock control (RCC)

RCC clock configuration register 2, Address offset: 0x2C

__IO uint32_t RCC_TypeDef::CFGR3

RCC clock configuration register 3, Address offset: 0x30
18.1.2
RCC_ClocksTypeDef
RCC_ClocksTypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x_rcc.h
Data Fields















uint32_t SYSCLK_Frequency
uint32_t HCLK_Frequency
uint32_t PCLK1_Frequency
uint32_t PCLK2_Frequency
uint32_t ADC12CLK_Frequency
uint32_t ADC34CLK_Frequency
uint32_t I2C1CLK_Frequency
uint32_t I2C2CLK_Frequency
uint32_t TIM1CLK_Frequency
uint32_t TIM8CLK_Frequency
uint32_t USART1CLK_Frequency
uint32_t USART2CLK_Frequency
uint32_t USART3CLK_Frequency
uint32_t UART4CLK_Frequency
uint32_t UART5CLK_Frequency
Field Documentation















312/584
uint32_t RCC_ClocksTypeDef::SYSCLK_Frequency
uint32_t RCC_ClocksTypeDef::HCLK_Frequency
uint32_t RCC_ClocksTypeDef::PCLK1_Frequency
uint32_t RCC_ClocksTypeDef::PCLK2_Frequency
uint32_t RCC_ClocksTypeDef::ADC12CLK_Frequency
uint32_t RCC_ClocksTypeDef::ADC34CLK_Frequency
uint32_t RCC_ClocksTypeDef::I2C1CLK_Frequency
uint32_t RCC_ClocksTypeDef::I2C2CLK_Frequency
uint32_t RCC_ClocksTypeDef::TIM1CLK_Frequency
uint32_t RCC_ClocksTypeDef::TIM8CLK_Frequency
uint32_t RCC_ClocksTypeDef::USART1CLK_Frequency
uint32_t RCC_ClocksTypeDef::USART2CLK_Frequency
uint32_t RCC_ClocksTypeDef::USART3CLK_Frequency
uint32_t RCC_ClocksTypeDef::UART4CLK_Frequency
uint32_t RCC_ClocksTypeDef::UART5CLK_Frequency
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Reset and clock control (RCC)
UM1581
18.2
RCC Firmware driver API description
The following section lists the various functions of the RCC library.
18.2.1
RCC specific features
After reset the device is running from HSI (8 MHz) with Flash 0 WS, all peripherals are off
except internal SRAM, Flash and SWD.



There is no prescaler on High speed (AHB) and Low speed (APB) busses; all
peripherals mapped on these busses are running at HSI speed.
The clock for all peripherals is switched off, except the SRAM and FLASH.
All GPIOs are in input floating state, except the SWD pins which are assigned to be
used for debug purpose.
Once the device starts from reset, the user application has to:





18.2.2
Configure the clock source to be used to drive the System clock (if the application
needs higher frequency/performance).
Configure the System clock frequency and Flash settings.
Configure the AHB and APB busses prescalers.
Enable the clock for the peripheral(s) to be used.
Configure the clock source(s) for peripherals which clocks are not derived from the
System clock (ADC, TIM, I2C, USART, RTC and IWDG).
Internal-external clocks, PLL, CSS and MCO configuration functions
This section provides functions allowing to configure the internal/external clocks, PLL, CSS
and MCO.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.








HSI (high-speed internal), 8 MHz factory-trimmed RC used directly or through the PLL
as System clock source. The HSI clock can be used also to clock the USART and I2C
peripherals.
LSI (low-speed internal), 40 KHz low consumption RC used as IWDG and/or RTC
clock source.
HSE (high-speed external), 4 to 32 MHz crystal oscillator used directly or through the
PLL as System clock source. Can be used also as RTC clock source.
LSE (low-speed external), 32 KHz oscillator used as RTC clock source. LSE can be
used also to clock the USART peripherals.
PLL (clocked by HSI or HSE), for System clock.
CSS (Clock security system), once enabled and if a HSE clock failure occurs (HSE
used directly or through PLL as System clock source), the System clock is
automatically switched to HSI and an interrupt is generated if enabled. The interrupt is
linked to the Cortex-M4 NMI (Non-Maskable Interrupt) exception vector.
MCO (microcontroller clock output), used to output SYSCLK, HSI, HSE, LSI, LSE,
PLL clock on PA8 pin.
RCC_DeInit()
RCC_HSEConfig()
RCC_WaitForHSEStartUp()
RCC_AdjustHSICalibrationValue()
RCC_HSICmd()
RCC_LSEConfig()
RCC_LSEDriveConfig()
RCC_LSICmd()
DocID023800 Rev 1
313/584
Reset and clock control (RCC)





18.2.3
UM1581
RCC_PLLConfig()
RCC_PLLCmd()
RCC_PREDIV1Config()
RCC_ClockSecuritySystemCmd()
RCC_MCOConfig()
System, AHB, APB1 and APB2 busses clocks configuration functions
This section provide functions allowing to configure the System, AHB, APB1 and APB2
busses clocks.
1.
2.
3.
Several clock sources can be used to drive the System clock (SYSCLK): HSI, HSE
and PLL. The AHB clock (HCLK) is derived from System clock through configurable
prescaler and used to clock the CPU, memory and peripherals mapped on AHB bus
(DMA and GPIO). APB1 (PCLK1) and APB2 (PCLK2) clocks are derived from AHB
clock through configurable prescalers and used to clock the peripherals mapped on
these busses. You can use "RCC_GetClocksFreq()" function to retrieve the
frequencies of these clocks.
The maximum frequency of the SYSCLK, HCLK, PCLK1 and PCLK2 is 72 MHz.
Depending on the maximum frequency, the FLASH wait states (WS) should be
adapted accordingly:
Wait states
HCLK clock frequency (MHz)
0WS(1CPU cycle)
0 < HCLK <= 24
1WS(2CPU cycles)
24 < HCLK <= 48
2WS(3CPU cycles)
48 < HCLK <= 72
After reset, the System clock source is the HSI (8 MHz) with 0 WS and prefetch is
disabled.
All the peripheral clocks are derived from the System clock (SYSCLK) except:







The FLASH program/erase clock which is always HSI 8MHz clock.
The USB 48 MHz clock which is derived from the PLL VCO clock.
The USART clock which can be derived as well from HSI 8MHz, LSI or LSE.
The I2C clock which can be derived as well from HSI 8MHz clock.
The ADC clock which is derived from PLL output.
The RTC clock which is derived from the LSE, LSI or 1 MHz HSE_RTC (HSE
divided by a programmable prescaler). The System clock (SYSCLK)
frequency must be higher or equal to the RTC clock frequency.
IWDG clock which is always the LSI clock.
It is recommended to use the following software sequences to tune the number of wait
states needed to access the Flash memory with the CPU frequency (HCLK).

314/584
Increasing the CPU frequency

Program the Flash Prefetch buffer, using "FLASH_PrefetchBufferCmd(ENABLE)"
function

Check that Flash Prefetch buffer activation is taken into account by reading
FLASH_ACR using the FLASH_GetPrefetchBufferStatus() function

Program Flash WS to 1 or 2, using "FLASH_SetLatency()" function
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Reset and clock control (RCC)
Check that the new number of WS is taken into account by reading FLASH_ACR
Modify the CPU clock source, using "RCC_SYSCLKConfig()" function
If needed, modify the CPU clock prescaler by using "RCC_HCLKConfig()"
function

Check that the new CPU clock source is taken into account by reading the clock
source status, using "RCC_GetSYSCLKSource()" function
Decreasing the CPU frequency

Modify the CPU clock source, using "RCC_SYSCLKConfig()" function

If needed, modify the CPU clock prescaler by using "RCC_HCLKConfig()"
function

Check that the new CPU clock source is taken into account by reading the clock
source status, using "RCC_GetSYSCLKSource()" function

Program the new number of WS, using "FLASH_SetLatency()" function

Check that the new number of WS is taken into account by reading FLASH_ACR

Disable the Flash Prefetch buffer using "FLASH_PrefetchBufferCmd(DISABLE)"
function

Check that Flash Prefetch buffer deactivation is taken into account by reading
FLASH_ACR using the FLASH_GetPrefetchBufferStatus() function.
RCC_SYSCLKConfig()
RCC_GetSYSCLKSource()
RCC_HCLKConfig()
RCC_PCLK1Config()
RCC_PCLK2Config()
RCC_GetClocksFreq()










18.2.4
Peripheral clocks configuration functions
This section provide functions allowing to configure the Peripheral clocks.
1.
2.
3.















The RTC clock which is derived from the LSE, LSI or HSE_Div32 (HSE divided by
32).
After restart from Reset or wakeup from STANDBY, all peripherals are off except
internal SRAM, Flash and SWD. Before to start using a peripheral you have to enable
its interface clock. You can do this using RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd(),
RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd() and RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd() functions.
To reset the peripherals configuration (to the default state after device reset) you can
use RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(), RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd() and
RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd() functions.
RCC_ADCCLKConfig()
RCC_I2CCLKConfig()
RCC_TIMCLKConfig()
RCC_USARTCLKConfig()
RCC_USBCLKConfig()
RCC_RTCCLKConfig()
RCC_I2SCLKConfig()
RCC_RTCCLKCmd()
RCC_BackupResetCmd()
RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd()
RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd()
RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd()
RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd()
RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd()
RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd()
DocID023800 Rev 1
315/584
Reset and clock control (RCC)
18.2.5
UM1581
Interrupts and flags management functions





RCC_ITConfig()
RCC_GetFlagStatus()
RCC_ClearFlag()
RCC_GetITStatus()
RCC_ClearITPendingBit()
18.2.6
Internal and external clocks, PLL, CSS and MCO configuration
functions
18.2.6.1
RCC_DeInit
Function Name
void RCC_DeInit ( void )
Function Description
Resets the RCC clock configuration to the default reset state.
Parameters

None.
Return values

None.
Notes

The default reset state of the clock configuration is given
below:
HSI ON and used as system clock source
HSE and PLL OFF
AHB, APB1 and APB2 prescalers set to 1.
CSS and MCO OFF
All interrupts disabled
However, this function doesn't modify the configuration of the
Peripheral clocks
LSI, LSE and RTC clocks








18.2.6.2
316/584
RCC_HSEConfig
Function Name
void RCC_HSEConfig ( uint8_t RCC_HSE)
Function Description
Configures the External High Speed oscillator (HSE).
Parameters

RCC_HSE : specifies the new state of the HSE. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

RCC_HSE_OFF : turn OFF the HSE oscillator,
HSERDY flag goes low after 6 HSE oscillator clock
cycles.

RCC_HSE_ON : turn ON the HSE oscillator

RCC_HSE_Bypass : HSE oscillator bypassed with
external clock
DocID023800 Rev 1
Reset and clock control (RCC)
UM1581
Return values

None.
Notes

After enabling the HSE (RCC_HSE_ON or
RCC_HSE_Bypass), the application software should wait on
HSERDY flag to be set indicating that HSE clock is stable and
can be used to clock the PLL and/or system clock.
HSE state can not be changed if it is used directly or through
the PLL as system clock. In this case, you have to select
another source of the system clock then change the HSE
state (ex. disable it).
The HSE is stopped by hardware when entering STOP and
STANDBY modes.
This function resets the CSSON bit, so if the Clock security
system(CSS) was previously enabled you have to enable it
again after calling this function.



18.2.6.3
18.2.6.4
RCC_WaitForHSEStartUp
Function Name
ErrorStatus RCC_WaitForHSEStartUp ( void )
Function Description
Waits for HSE start-up.
Parameters

None.
Return values

An ErrorStatus enumeration value:

SUCCESS: HSE oscillator is stable and ready to use

ERROR: HSE oscillator not yet ready
Notes

This function waits on HSERDY flag to be set and return
SUCCESS if this flag is set, otherwise returns ERROR if the
timeout is reached and this flag is not set. The timeout value
is defined by the constant HSE_STARTUP_TIMEOUT in
stm32f30x.h file. You can tailor it depending on the HSE
crystal used in your application.
RCC_AdjustHSICalibrationValue
Function Name
void RCC_AdjustHSICalibrationValue ( uint8_t
HSICalibrationValue)
Function Description
Adjusts the Internal High Speed oscillator (HSI) calibration value.
Parameters

HSICalibrationValue : specifies the HSI calibration trimming
value. This parameter must be a number between 0 and
DocID023800 Rev 1
317/584
Reset and clock control (RCC)
UM1581
0x1F.
18.2.6.5
Return values

None.
Notes

The calibration is used to compensate for the variations in
voltage and temperature that influence the frequency of the
internal HSI RC. Refer to the Application Note AN3300 for
more details on how to calibrate the HSI.
RCC_HSICmd
Function Name
void RCC_HSICmd ( FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the Internal High Speed oscillator (HSI).
Parameters

NewState : new state of the HSI. This parameter can be:
ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

After enabling the HSI, the application software should wait
on HSIRDY flag to be set indicating that HSI clock is stable
and can be used to clock the PLL and/or system clock.
HSI can not be stopped if it is used directly or through the PLL
as system clock. In this case, you have to select another
source of the system clock then stop the HSI.
The HSI is stopped by hardware when entering STOP and
STANDBY modes.
When the HSI is stopped, HSIRDY flag goes low after 6 HSI
oscillator clock cycles.



18.2.6.6
318/584
RCC_LSEConfig
Function Name
void RCC_LSEConfig ( uint32_t RCC_LSE)
Function Description
Configures the External Low Speed oscillator (LSE).
Parameters

RCC_LSE : specifies the new state of the LSE. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

RCC_LSE_OFF : turn OFF the LSE oscillator, LSERDY
flag goes low after 6 LSE oscillator clock cycles.

RCC_LSE_ON : turn ON the LSE oscillator

RCC_LSE_Bypass : LSE oscillator bypassed with
external clock
DocID023800 Rev 1
Reset and clock control (RCC)
UM1581
Return values

None.
Notes

As the LSE is in the Backup domain and write access is
denied to this domain after reset, you have to enable write
access using PWR_BackupAccessCmd(ENABLE) function
before to configure the LSE (to be done once after reset).
After enabling the LSE (RCC_LSE_ON or
RCC_LSE_Bypass), the application software should wait on
LSERDY flag to be set indicating that LSE clock is stable and
can be used to clock the RTC.

18.2.6.7
18.2.6.8
RCC_LSEDriveConfig
Function Name
void RCC_LSEDriveConfig ( uint32_t RCC_LSEDrive)
Function Description
Configures the External Low Speed oscillator (LSE) drive
capability.
Parameters

RCC_LSEDrive : specifies the new state of the LSE drive
capability. This parameter can be one of the following values:

RCC_LSEDrive_Low : LSE oscillator low drive
capability.

RCC_LSEDrive_MediumLow : LSE oscillator medium
low drive capability.

RCC_LSEDrive_MediumHigh : LSE oscillator medium
high drive capability.

RCC_LSEDrive_High : LSE oscillator high drive
capability.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
RCC_LSICmd
Function Name
void RCC_LSICmd ( FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the Internal Low Speed oscillator (LSI).
Parameters

NewState : new state of the LSI. This parameter can be:
ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
319/584
Reset and clock control (RCC)
Notes



18.2.6.9
UM1581
After enabling the LSI, the application software should wait on
LSIRDY flag to be set indicating that LSI clock is stable and
can be used to clock the IWDG and/or the RTC.
LSI can not be disabled if the IWDG is running.
When the LSI is stopped, LSIRDY flag goes low after 6 LSI
oscillator clock cycles.
RCC_PLLConfig
Function Name
void RCC_PLLConfig ( uint32_t RCC_PLLSource, uint32_t
RCC_PLLMul)
Function Description
Configures the PLL clock source and multiplication factor.
Parameters


RCC_PLLSource : specifies the PLL entry clock source.
This parameter can be one of the following values:

RCC_PLLSource_HSI_Div2 : HSI oscillator clock
divided by 2 selected as PLL clock entry

RCC_PLLSource_PREDIV1 : PREDIV1 clock selected
as PLL clock source
RCC_PLLMul : specifies the PLL multiplication factor, which
drive the PLLVCO clock This parameter can be
RCC_PLLMul_x where x:[2,16]
Return values

None.
Notes


This function must be used only when the PLL is disabled.
The minimum input clock frequency for PLL is 2 MHz (when
using HSE as PLL source).
18.2.6.10 RCC_PLLCmd
320/584
Function Name
void RCC_PLLCmd ( FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the PLL.
Parameters

NewState : new state of the PLL. This parameter can be:
ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

After enabling the PLL, the application software should wait
on PLLRDY flag to be set indicating that PLL clock is stable
and can be used as system clock source.
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581


Reset and clock control (RCC)
The PLL can not be disabled if it is used as system clock
source
The PLL is disabled by hardware when entering STOP and
STANDBY modes.
18.2.6.11 RCC_PREDIV1Config
Function Name
void RCC_PREDIV1Config ( uint32_t RCC_PREDIV1_Div)
Function Description
Configures the PREDIV1 division factor.
Parameters

RCC_PREDIV1_Div : specifies the PREDIV1 clock division
factor. This parameter can be RCC_PREDIV1_Divx where
x:[1,16]
Return values

None.
Notes

This function must be used only when the PLL is disabled.
18.2.6.12 RCC_ClockSecuritySystemCmd
Function Name
void RCC_ClockSecuritySystemCmd ( FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the Clock Security System.
Parameters

NewState : new state of the Clock Security System. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

If a failure is detected on the HSE oscillator clock, this
oscillator is automatically disabled and an interrupt is
generated to inform the software about the failure (Clock
Security System Interrupt, CSSI), allowing the MCU to
perform rescue operations. The CSSI is linked to the CortexM4 NMI (Non-Maskable Interrupt) exception vector.
18.2.6.13 RCC_MCOConfig
DocID023800 Rev 1
321/584
Reset and clock control (RCC)
UM1581
Function Name
void RCC_MCOConfig ( uint8_t RCC_MCOSource)
Function Description
Selects the clock source to output on MCO pin (PA8).
Parameters

RCC_MCOSource : specifies the clock source to output.
This parameter can be one of the following values:

RCC_MCOSource_NoClock : No clock selected.

RCC_MCOSource_LSI : LSI oscillator clock selected.

RCC_MCOSource_LSE : LSE oscillator clock selected.

RCC_MCOSource_SYSCLK : System clock selected.

RCC_MCOSource_HSI : HSI oscillator clock selected.

RCC_MCOSource_HSE : HSE oscillator clock
selected.

RCC_MCOSource_PLLCLK_Div2 : PLL clock
selected.
Return values

None.
Notes


PA8 should be configured in alternate function mode.
The MCOF flag is set once the MCO clock source switch is
effective.
18.2.7
System AHB, APB1 and APB2 busses clocks configuration functions
18.2.7.1
RCC_SYSCLKConfig
Function Name
void RCC_SYSCLKConfig ( uint32_t RCC_SYSCLKSource)
Function Description
Configures the system clock (SYSCLK).
Parameters

RCC_SYSCLKSource : specifies the clock source used as
system clock source This parameter can be one of the
following values:

RCC_SYSCLKSource_HSI : HSI selected as system
clock source

RCC_SYSCLKSource_HSE : HSE selected as system
clock source

RCC_SYSCLKSource_PLLCLK : PLL selected as
system clock source
Return values

None.
Notes

The HSI is used (enabled by hardware) as system clock
source after startup from Reset, wake-up from STOP and
STANDBY mode, or in case of failure of the HSE used
directly or indirectly as system clock (if the Clock Security
System CSS is enabled).
A switch from one clock source to another occurs only if the
target clock source is ready (clock stable after startup delay or
PLL locked). If a clock source which is not yet ready is

322/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
Reset and clock control (RCC)
selected, the switch will occur when the clock source will be
ready. You can use RCC_GetSYSCLKSource() function to
know which clock is currently used as system clock source.
UM1581
18.2.7.2
18.2.7.3
RCC_GetSYSCLKSource
Function Name
uint8_t RCC_GetSYSCLKSource ( void )
Function Description
Returns the clock source used as system clock.
Parameters

None.
Return values

The clock source used as system clock. The returned
value can be one of the following values:

0x00: HSI used as system clock

0x04: HSE used as system clock

0x08: PLL used as system clock
Notes

None.
RCC_HCLKConfig
Function Name
void RCC_HCLKConfig ( uint32_t RCC_SYSCLK)
Function Description
Configures the AHB clock (HCLK).
Parameters

RCC_SYSCLK : defines the AHB clock divider. This clock is
derived from the system clock (SYSCLK). This parameter can
be one of the following values:

RCC_SYSCLK_Div1 : AHB clock = SYSCLK

RCC_SYSCLK_Div2 : AHB clock = SYSCLK/2

RCC_SYSCLK_Div4 : AHB clock = SYSCLK/4

RCC_SYSCLK_Div8 : AHB clock = SYSCLK/8

RCC_SYSCLK_Div16 : AHB clock = SYSCLK/16

RCC_SYSCLK_Div64 : AHB clock = SYSCLK/64

RCC_SYSCLK_Div128 : AHB clock = SYSCLK/128

RCC_SYSCLK_Div256 : AHB clock = SYSCLK/256

RCC_SYSCLK_Div512 : AHB clock = SYSCLK/512
Return values

None.
Notes

Depending on the device voltage range, the software has to
set correctly these bits to ensure that the system frequency
does not exceed the maximum allowed frequency (for more
DocID023800 Rev 1
323/584
Reset and clock control (RCC)
18.2.7.4
18.2.7.5
324/584
UM1581
details refer to section above "CPU, AHB and APB busses
clocks configuration functions").
RCC_PCLK1Config
Function Name
void RCC_PCLK1Config ( uint32_t RCC_HCLK)
Function Description
Configures the Low Speed APB clock (PCLK1).
Parameters

RCC_HCLK : defines the APB1 clock divider. This clock is
derived from the AHB clock (HCLK). This parameter can be
one of the following values:

RCC_HCLK_Div1 : APB1 clock = HCLK

RCC_HCLK_Div2 : APB1 clock = HCLK/2

RCC_HCLK_Div4 : APB1 clock = HCLK/4

RCC_HCLK_Div8 : APB1 clock = HCLK/8

RCC_HCLK_Div16 : APB1 clock = HCLK/16
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
RCC_PCLK2Config
Function Name
void RCC_PCLK2Config ( uint32_t RCC_HCLK)
Function Description
Configures the High Speed APB clock (PCLK2).
Parameters

RCC_HCLK : defines the APB2 clock divider. This clock is
derived from the AHB clock (HCLK). This parameter can be
one of the following values:

RCC_HCLK_Div1 : APB2 clock = HCLK

RCC_HCLK_Div2 : APB2 clock = HCLK/2

RCC_HCLK_Div4 : APB2 clock = HCLK/4

RCC_HCLK_Div8 : APB2 clock = HCLK/8

RCC_HCLK_Div16 : APB2 clock = HCLK/16
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Reset and clock control (RCC)
UM1581
18.2.7.6
RCC_GetClocksFreq
Function Name
void RCC_GetClocksFreq ( RCC_ClocksTypeDef *
RCC_Clocks)
Function Description
Returns the frequencies of the System, AHB, APB2 and APB1
busses clocks.
Parameters

RCC_Clocks : pointer to a RCC_ClocksTypeDef structure
which will hold the clocks frequencies.
Return values

None.
Notes

This function returns the frequencies of : System, AHB, APB2
and APB1 busses clocks, ADC1/2/3/4 clocks,
USART1/2/3/4/5 clocks, I2C1/2 clocks and TIM1/8 Clocks.
The frequency returned by this function is not the real
frequency in the chip. It is calculated based on the predefined
constant and the source selected by RCC_SYSCLKConfig().
If SYSCLK source is HSI, function returns constant
HSI_VALUE(*)
If SYSCLK source is HSE, function returns constant
HSE_VALUE(**)
If SYSCLK source is PLL, function returns constant
HSE_VALUE(**) or HSI_VALUE(*) multiplied by the PLL
factors.
(*) HSI_VALUE is a constant defined in stm32f30x.h file
(default value 8 MHz) but the real value may vary depending
on the variations in voltage and temperature, refer to
RCC_AdjustHSICalibrationValue().
(**) HSE_VALUE is a constant defined in stm32f30x.h file
(default value 8 MHz), user has to ensure that HSE_VALUE is
same as the real frequency of the crystal used. Otherwise,
this function may return wrong result.
The result of this function could be not correct when using
fractional value for HSE crystal.
This function can be used by the user application to compute
the baudrate for the communication peripherals or configure
other parameters.
Each time SYSCLK, HCLK, PCLK1 and/or PCLK2 clock
changes, this function must be called to update the structure's
field. Otherwise, any configuration based on this function will
be incorrect.









18.2.8
Peripheral clocks configuration functions
18.2.8.1
RCC_ADCCLKConfig
DocID023800 Rev 1
325/584
Reset and clock control (RCC)
326/584
UM1581
Function Name
void RCC_ADCCLKConfig ( uint32_t RCC_PLLCLK)
Function Description
Configures the ADC clock (ADCCLK).
Parameters

RCC_PLLCLK : defines the ADC clock divider. This clock is
derived from the PLL Clock. This parameter can be one of the
following values:

RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_OFF : ADC12 clock disabled

RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div1 : ADC12 clock = PLLCLK/1

RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div2 : ADC12 clock = PLLCLK/2

RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div4 : ADC12 clock = PLLCLK/4

RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div6 : ADC12 clock = PLLCLK/6

RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div8 : ADC12 clock = PLLCLK/8

RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div10 : ADC12 clock =
PLLCLK/10

RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div12 : ADC12 clock =
PLLCLK/12

RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div16 : ADC12 clock =
PLLCLK/16

RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div32 : ADC12 clock =
PLLCLK/32

RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div64 : ADC12 clock =
PLLCLK/64

RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div128 : ADC12 clock =
PLLCLK/128

RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div256 : ADC12 clock =
PLLCLK/256

RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_OFF : ADC34 clock disabled

RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div1 : ADC34 clock = PLLCLK/1

RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div2 : ADC34 clock = PLLCLK/2

RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div4 : ADC34 clock = PLLCLK/4

RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div6 : ADC34 clock = PLLCLK/6

RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div8 : ADC34 clock = PLLCLK/8

RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div10 : ADC34 clock =
PLLCLK/10

RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div12 : ADC34 clock =
PLLCLK/12

RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div16 : ADC34 clock =
PLLCLK/16

RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div32 : ADC34 clock =
PLLCLK/32

RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div64 : ADC34 clock =
PLLCLK/64

RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div128 : ADC34 clock =
PLLCLK/128

RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div256 : ADC34 clock =
PLLCLK/256
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Reset and clock control (RCC)
UM1581
18.2.8.2
18.2.8.3
RCC_I2CCLKConfig
Function Name
void RCC_I2CCLKConfig ( uint32_t RCC_I2CCLK)
Function Description
Configures the I2C clock (I2CCLK).
Parameters

RCC_I2CCLK : defines the I2C clock source. This clock is
derived from the HSI or System clock. This parameter can be
one of the following values:

RCC_I2CxCLK_HSI : I2Cx clock = HSI

RCC_I2CxCLK_SYSCLK : I2Cx clock = System Clock
(x can be 1 or 2).
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
RCC_TIMCLKConfig
Function Name
void RCC_TIMCLKConfig ( uint32_t RCC_TIMCLK)
Function Description
Configures the TIM1 and TIM8 clock sources(TIMCLK).
Parameters

RCC_TIMCLK : defines the TIMx clock source. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

RCC_TIMxCLK_HCLK : TIMx clock = APB high speed
clock (doubled frequency when prescaled)

RCC_TIMxCLK_PLLCLK : TIMx clock = PLL output
(running up to 144 MHz) (x can be 1 or 8).
Return values

None.
Notes

The configuration of the TIMx clock source is only possible
when the SYSCLK = PLL and HCLK and PCLK2 clocks are
not divided in respect to SYSCLK
If one of the previous conditions is missed, the TIM clock
source configuration is lost and calling again this function
becomes mandatory.

DocID023800 Rev 1
327/584
Reset and clock control (RCC)
18.2.8.4
18.2.8.5
328/584
UM1581
RCC_USARTCLKConfig
Function Name
void RCC_USARTCLKConfig ( uint32_t RCC_USARTCLK)
Function Description
Configures the USART clock (USARTCLK).
Parameters

RCC_USARTCLK : defines the USART clock source. This
clock is derived from the HSI or System clock. This parameter
can be one of the following values:

RCC_USARTxCLK_PCLK : USART clock = APB Clock
(PCLK)

RCC_USARTxCLK_SYSCLK : USART clock = System
Clock

RCC_USARTxCLK_LSE : USART clock = LSE Clock

RCC_USARTxCLK_HSI : USART clock = HSI Clock (x
can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5).
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
RCC_USBCLKConfig
Function Name
void RCC_USBCLKConfig ( uint32_t RCC_USBCLKSource)
Function Description
Configures the USB clock (USBCLK).
Parameters

RCC_USBCLKSource : specifies the USB clock source.
This clock is derived from the PLL output. This parameter can
be one of the following values:

RCC_USBCLKSource_PLLCLK_1Div5 : PLL clock
divided by 1,5 selected as USB clock source

RCC_USBCLKSource_PLLCLK_Div1 : PLL clock
selected as USB clock source
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Reset and clock control (RCC)
UM1581
18.2.8.6
RCC_RTCCLKConfig
Function Name
void RCC_RTCCLKConfig ( uint32_t RCC_RTCCLKSource)
Function Description
Configures the RTC clock (RTCCLK).
Parameters

RCC_RTCCLKSource : specifies the RTC clock source.
This parameter can be one of the following values:

RCC_RTCCLKSource_LSE : LSE selected as RTC
clock

RCC_RTCCLKSource_LSI : LSI selected as RTC clock

RCC_RTCCLKSource_HSE_Div32 : HSE divided by
32 selected as RTC clock
Return values

None.
Notes

As the RTC clock configuration bits are in the Backup domain
and write access is denied to this domain after reset, you
have to enable write access using
PWR_BackupAccessCmd(ENABLE) function before to
configure the RTC clock source (to be done once after reset).
Once the RTC clock is configured it can't be changed unless
the RTC is reset using RCC_BackupResetCmd function, or
by a Power On Reset (POR)
If the LSE or LSI is used as RTC clock source, the RTC
continues to work in STOP and STANDBY modes, and can
be used as wakeup source. However, when the HSE clock is
used as RTC clock source, the RTC cannot be used in STOP
and STANDBY modes.
The maximum input clock frequency for RTC is 2MHz (when
using HSE as RTC clock source).



18.2.8.7
RCC_I2SCLKConfig
Function Name
void RCC_I2SCLKConfig ( uint32_t RCC_I2SCLKSource)
Function Description
Configures the I2S clock source (I2SCLK).
Parameters

RCC_I2SCLKSource : specifies the I2S clock source. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

RCC_I2S2CLKSource_SYSCLK : SYSCLK clock used
as I2S clock source

RCC_I2S2CLKSource_Ext : External clock mapped on
the I2S_CKIN pin used as I2S clock source
Return values

None.
Notes

This function must be called before enabling the SPI2 and
SPI3 clocks.
DocID023800 Rev 1
329/584
Reset and clock control (RCC)
18.2.8.8
18.2.8.9
UM1581
RCC_RTCCLKCmd
Function Name
void RCC_RTCCLKCmd ( FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the RTC clock.
Parameters

NewState : new state of the RTC clock. This parameter can
be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

This function must be used only after the RTC clock source
was selected using the RCC_RTCCLKConfig function.
RCC_BackupResetCmd
Function Name
void RCC_BackupResetCmd ( FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Forces or releases the Backup domain reset.
Parameters

NewState : new state of the Backup domain reset. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

This function resets the RTC peripheral (including the backup
registers) and the RTC clock source selection in RCC_BDCR
register.
18.2.8.10 RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd
330/584
Function Name
void RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd ( uint32_t RCC_AHBPeriph,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the AHB peripheral clock.
Parameters

RCC_AHBPeriph : specifies the AHB peripheral to gates its
clock. This parameter can be any combination of the following
values:

RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOA :
DocID023800 Rev 1
Reset and clock control (RCC)
UM1581


RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOB :

RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOC :

RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOD :

RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOE :

RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOF :

RCC_AHBPeriph_TS :

RCC_AHBPeriph_CRC :

RCC_AHBPeriph_FLITF :

RCC_AHBPeriph_SRAM :

RCC_AHBPeriph_DMA2 :

RCC_AHBPeriph_DMA1 :

RCC_AHBPeriph_ADC34 :

RCC_AHBPeriph_ADC12 :
NewState : new state of the specified peripheral clock. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

After reset, the peripheral clock (used for registers read/write
access) is disabled and the application software has to enable
this clock before using it.
18.2.8.11 RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd
Function Name
void RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd ( uint32_t RCC_APB2Periph,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the High Speed APB (APB2) peripheral clock.
Parameters


RCC_APB2Periph : specifies the APB2 peripheral to gates
its clock. This parameter can be any combination of the
following values:

RCC_APB2Periph_SYSCFG :

RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1 :

RCC_APB2Periph_USART1 :

RCC_APB2Periph_TIM15 :

RCC_APB2Periph_TIM16 :

RCC_APB2Periph_TIM17 :

RCC_APB2Periph_TIM1 :

RCC_APB2Periph_TIM8 :
NewState : new state of the specified peripheral clock. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

After reset, the peripheral clock (used for registers read/write
access) is disabled and the application software has to enable
this clock before using it.
DocID023800 Rev 1
331/584
Reset and clock control (RCC)
UM1581
18.2.8.12 RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd
Function Name
void RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd ( uint32_t RCC_APB1Periph,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the Low Speed APB (APB1) peripheral clock.
Parameters


RCC_APB1Periph : specifies the APB1 peripheral to gates
its clock. This parameter can be any combination of the
following values:

RCC_APB1Periph_TIM2 :

RCC_APB1Periph_TIM3 :

RCC_APB1Periph_TIM4 :

RCC_APB1Periph_TIM6 :

RCC_APB1Periph_TIM7 :

RCC_APB1Periph_WWDG :

RCC_APB1Periph_SPI2 :

RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3 :

RCC_APB1Periph_USART2 :

RCC_APB1Periph_USART3 :

RCC_APB1Periph_UART4 :

RCC_APB1Periph_UART5 :

RCC_APB1Periph_I2C1 :

RCC_APB1Periph_I2C2 :

RCC_APB1Periph_USB :

RCC_APB1Periph_CAN1 :

RCC_APB1Periph_PWR :

RCC_APB1Periph_DAC :
NewState : new state of the specified peripheral clock. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

After reset, the peripheral clock (used for registers read/write
access) is disabled and the application software has to enable
this clock before using it.
18.2.8.13 RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd
332/584
Function Name
void RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd ( uint32_t RCC_AHBPeriph,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Forces or releases AHB peripheral reset.
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Parameters


Reset and clock control (RCC)
RCC_AHBPeriph : specifies the AHB peripheral to reset.
This parameter can be any combination of the following
values:

RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOA :

RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOB :

RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOC :

RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOD :

RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOE :

RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOF :

RCC_AHBPeriph_TS :

RCC_AHBPeriph_ADC34 :

RCC_AHBPeriph_ADC12 :
NewState : new state of the specified peripheral reset. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
18.2.8.14 RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd
Function Name
void RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd ( uint32_t RCC_APB2Periph,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Forces or releases High Speed APB (APB2) peripheral reset.
Parameters


RCC_APB2Periph : specifies the APB2 peripheral to reset.
This parameter can be any combination of the following
values:

RCC_APB2Periph_SYSCFG :

RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1 :

RCC_APB2Periph_USART1 :

RCC_APB2Periph_TIM15 :

RCC_APB2Periph_TIM16 :

RCC_APB2Periph_TIM17 :

RCC_APB2Periph_TIM1 :

RCC_APB2Periph_TIM8 :
NewState : new state of the specified peripheral reset. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
333/584
Reset and clock control (RCC)
UM1581
18.2.8.15 RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd
Function Name
void RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd ( uint32_t RCC_APB1Periph,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Forces or releases Low Speed APB (APB1) peripheral reset.
Parameters


RCC_APB1Periph : specifies the APB1 peripheral to reset.
This parameter can be any combination of the following
values:

RCC_APB1Periph_TIM2 :

RCC_APB1Periph_TIM3 :

RCC_APB1Periph_TIM4 :

RCC_APB1Periph_TIM6 :

RCC_APB1Periph_TIM7 :

RCC_APB1Periph_WWDG :

RCC_APB1Periph_SPI2 :

RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3 :

RCC_APB1Periph_USART2 :

RCC_APB1Periph_USART3 :

RCC_APB1Periph_UART4 :

RCC_APB1Periph_UART5 :

RCC_APB1Periph_I2C1 :

RCC_APB1Periph_I2C2 :

RCC_APB1Periph_USB :

RCC_APB1Periph_CAN1 :

RCC_APB1Periph_PWR :

RCC_APB1Periph_DAC :
NewState : new state of the specified peripheral clock. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
18.2.9
Interrupts and flags management functions
18.2.9.1
RCC_ITConfig
334/584
Function Name
void RCC_ITConfig ( uint8_t RCC_IT, FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the specified RCC interrupts.
Parameters

RCC_IT : specifies the RCC interrupt sources to be enabled
or disabled. This parameter can be any combination of the
following values:
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581

18.2.9.2
Reset and clock control (RCC)

RCC_IT_LSIRDY : LSI ready interrupt

RCC_IT_LSERDY : LSE ready interrupt

RCC_IT_HSIRDY : HSI ready interrupt

RCC_IT_HSERDY : HSE ready interrupt

RCC_IT_PLLRDY : PLL ready interrupt
NewState : new state of the specified RCC interrupts. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

The CSS interrupt doesn't have an enable bit; once the CSS
is enabled and if the HSE clock fails, the CSS interrupt occurs
and an NMI is automatically generated. The NMI will be
executed indefinitely, and since NMI has higher priority than
any other IRQ (and main program) the application will be
stacked in the NMI ISR unless the CSS interrupt pending bit
is cleared.
RCC_GetFlagStatus
Function Name
FlagStatus RCC_GetFlagStatus ( uint8_t RCC_FLAG)
Function Description
Checks whether the specified RCC flag is set or not.
Parameters

RCC_FLAG : specifies the flag to check. This parameter can
be one of the following values:

RCC_FLAG_HSIRDY : HSI oscillator clock ready

RCC_FLAG_HSERDY : HSE oscillator clock ready

RCC_FLAG_PLLRDY : PLL clock ready

RCC_FLAG_MCOF : MCO Flag

RCC_FLAG_LSERDY : LSE oscillator clock ready

RCC_FLAG_LSIRDY : LSI oscillator clock ready

RCC_FLAG_OBLRST : Option Byte Loader (OBL)
reset

RCC_FLAG_PINRST : Pin reset

RCC_FLAG_PORRST : POR/PDR reset

RCC_FLAG_SFTRST : Software reset

RCC_FLAG_IWDGRST : Independent Watchdog reset

RCC_FLAG_WWDGRST : Window Watchdog reset

RCC_FLAG_LPWRRST : Low Power reset
Return values

The new state of RCC_FLAG (SET or RESET).
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
335/584
Reset and clock control (RCC)
18.2.9.3
18.2.9.4
18.2.9.5
336/584
UM1581
RCC_ClearFlag
Function Name
void RCC_ClearFlag ( void )
Function Description
Clears the RCC reset flags.
Parameters

None.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
RCC_GetITStatus
Function Name
ITStatus RCC_GetITStatus ( uint8_t RCC_IT)
Function Description
Checks whether the specified RCC interrupt has occurred or not.
Parameters

RCC_IT : specifies the RCC interrupt source to check. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

RCC_IT_LSIRDY : LSI ready interrupt

RCC_IT_LSERDY : LSE ready interrupt

RCC_IT_HSIRDY : HSI ready interrupt

RCC_IT_HSERDY : HSE ready interrupt

RCC_IT_PLLRDY : PLL ready interrupt

RCC_IT_CSS : Clock Security System interrupt
Return values

The new state of RCC_IT (SET or RESET).
Notes

None.
RCC_ClearITPendingBit
Function Name
void RCC_ClearITPendingBit ( uint8_t RCC_IT)
Function Description
Clears the RCC's interrupt pending bits.
Parameters

RCC_IT : specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear. This
parameter can be any combination of the following values:

RCC_IT_LSIRDY : LSI ready interrupt

RCC_IT_LSERDY : LSE ready interrupt

RCC_IT_HSIRDY : HSI ready interrupt
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581



Reset and clock control (RCC)
RCC_IT_HSERDY : HSE ready interrupt
RCC_IT_PLLRDY : PLL ready interrupt
RCC_IT_CSS : Clock Security System interrupt
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
18.3
RCC Firmware driver defines
18.3.1
RCC
RCC
RCC_ADC_clock_source

#define: RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_OFF ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div1 ((uint32_t)0x00000100)

#define: RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div2 ((uint32_t)0x00000110)

#define: RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div4 ((uint32_t)0x00000120)

#define: RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div6 ((uint32_t)0x00000130)

#define: RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div8 ((uint32_t)0x00000140)

#define: RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div10 ((uint32_t)0x00000150)

#define: RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div12 ((uint32_t)0x00000160)
DocID023800 Rev 1
337/584
Reset and clock control (RCC)

#define: RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div16 ((uint32_t)0x00000170)
338/584

#define: RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div32 ((uint32_t)0x00000180)

#define: RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div64 ((uint32_t)0x00000190)

#define: RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div128 ((uint32_t)0x000001A0)

#define: RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div256 ((uint32_t)0x000001B0)

#define: RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_OFF ((uint32_t)0x10000000)

#define: RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div1 ((uint32_t)0x10002000)

#define: RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div2 ((uint32_t)0x10002200)

#define: RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div4 ((uint32_t)0x10002400)

#define: RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div6 ((uint32_t)0x10002600)

#define: RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div8 ((uint32_t)0x10002800)

#define: RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div10 ((uint32_t)0x10002A00)
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581

Reset and clock control (RCC)
#define: RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div12 ((uint32_t)0x10002C00)

#define: RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div16 ((uint32_t)0x10002E00)

#define: RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div32 ((uint32_t)0x10003000)

#define: RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div64 ((uint32_t)0x10003200)

#define: RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div128 ((uint32_t)0x10003400)

#define: RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div256 ((uint32_t)0x10003600)
UM1581
RCC_AHB_Clock_Source

#define: RCC_SYSCLK_Div1 RCC_CFGR_HPRE_DIV1

#define: RCC_SYSCLK_Div2 RCC_CFGR_HPRE_DIV2

#define: RCC_SYSCLK_Div4 RCC_CFGR_HPRE_DIV4

#define: RCC_SYSCLK_Div8 RCC_CFGR_HPRE_DIV8

#define: RCC_SYSCLK_Div16 RCC_CFGR_HPRE_DIV16

#define: RCC_SYSCLK_Div64 RCC_CFGR_HPRE_DIV64
DocID023800 Rev 1
339/584
Reset and clock control (RCC)
UM1581

#define: RCC_SYSCLK_Div128 RCC_CFGR_HPRE_DIV128

#define: RCC_SYSCLK_Div256 RCC_CFGR_HPRE_DIV256

#define: RCC_SYSCLK_Div512 RCC_CFGR_HPRE_DIV512
RCC_AHB_Peripherals
340/584

#define: RCC_AHBPeriph_ADC34 RCC_AHBENR_ADC34EN

#define: RCC_AHBPeriph_ADC12 RCC_AHBENR_ADC12EN

#define: RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOA RCC_AHBENR_GPIOAEN

#define: RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOB RCC_AHBENR_GPIOBEN

#define: RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOC RCC_AHBENR_GPIOCEN

#define: RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOD RCC_AHBENR_GPIODEN

#define: RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOE RCC_AHBENR_GPIOEEN

#define: RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOF RCC_AHBENR_GPIOFEN

#define: RCC_AHBPeriph_TS RCC_AHBENR_TSEN
DocID023800 Rev 1
Reset and clock control (RCC)
UM1581

#define: RCC_AHBPeriph_CRC RCC_AHBENR_CRCEN

#define: RCC_AHBPeriph_FLITF RCC_AHBENR_FLITFEN

#define: RCC_AHBPeriph_SRAM RCC_AHBENR_SRAMEN

#define: RCC_AHBPeriph_DMA2 RCC_AHBENR_DMA2EN

#define: RCC_AHBPeriph_DMA1 RCC_AHBENR_DMA1EN
RCC_APB1_APB2_clock_source

#define: RCC_HCLK_Div1 ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: RCC_HCLK_Div2 ((uint32_t)0x00000400)

#define: RCC_HCLK_Div4 ((uint32_t)0x00000500)

#define: RCC_HCLK_Div8 ((uint32_t)0x00000600)

#define: RCC_HCLK_Div16 ((uint32_t)0x00000700)
RCC_APB1_Peripherals

#define: RCC_APB1Periph_TIM2 ((uint32_t)0x00000001)
DocID023800 Rev 1
341/584
Reset and clock control (RCC)
342/584
UM1581

#define: RCC_APB1Periph_TIM3 ((uint32_t)0x00000002)

#define: RCC_APB1Periph_TIM4 ((uint32_t)0x00000004)

#define: RCC_APB1Periph_TIM6 ((uint32_t)0x00000010)

#define: RCC_APB1Periph_TIM7 ((uint32_t)0x00000020)

#define: RCC_APB1Periph_WWDG ((uint32_t)0x00000800)

#define: RCC_APB1Periph_SPI2 ((uint32_t)0x00004000)

#define: RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3 ((uint32_t)0x00008000)

#define: RCC_APB1Periph_USART2 ((uint32_t)0x00020000)

#define: RCC_APB1Periph_USART3 ((uint32_t)0x00040000)

#define: RCC_APB1Periph_UART4 ((uint32_t)0x00080000)

#define: RCC_APB1Periph_UART5 ((uint32_t)0x00100000)

#define: RCC_APB1Periph_I2C1 ((uint32_t)0x00200000)
DocID023800 Rev 1
Reset and clock control (RCC)
UM1581

#define: RCC_APB1Periph_I2C2 ((uint32_t)0x00400000)

#define: RCC_APB1Periph_USB ((uint32_t)0x00800000)

#define: RCC_APB1Periph_CAN1 ((uint32_t)0x02000000)

#define: RCC_APB1Periph_PWR ((uint32_t)0x10000000)

#define: RCC_APB1Periph_DAC ((uint32_t)0x20000000)
RCC_APB2_Peripherals

#define: RCC_APB2Periph_SYSCFG ((uint32_t)0x00000001)

#define: RCC_APB2Periph_TIM1 ((uint32_t)0x00000800)

#define: RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1 ((uint32_t)0x00001000)

#define: RCC_APB2Periph_TIM8 ((uint32_t)0x00002000)

#define: RCC_APB2Periph_USART1 ((uint32_t)0x00004000)

#define: RCC_APB2Periph_TIM15 ((uint32_t)0x00010000)

#define: RCC_APB2Periph_TIM16 ((uint32_t)0x00020000)
DocID023800 Rev 1
343/584
Reset and clock control (RCC)

UM1581
#define: RCC_APB2Periph_TIM17 ((uint32_t)0x00040000)
RCC_Flag
344/584

#define: RCC_FLAG_HSIRDY ((uint8_t)0x01)

#define: RCC_FLAG_HSERDY ((uint8_t)0x11)

#define: RCC_FLAG_PLLRDY ((uint8_t)0x19)

#define: RCC_FLAG_MCOF ((uint8_t)0x9C)

#define: RCC_FLAG_LSERDY ((uint8_t)0x21)

#define: RCC_FLAG_LSIRDY ((uint8_t)0x41)

#define: RCC_FLAG_OBLRST ((uint8_t)0x59)

#define: RCC_FLAG_PINRST ((uint8_t)0x5A)

#define: RCC_FLAG_PORRST ((uint8_t)0x5B)

#define: RCC_FLAG_SFTRST ((uint8_t)0x5C)
DocID023800 Rev 1
Reset and clock control (RCC)
UM1581

#define: RCC_FLAG_IWDGRST ((uint8_t)0x5D)

#define: RCC_FLAG_WWDGRST ((uint8_t)0x5E)

#define: RCC_FLAG_LPWRRST ((uint8_t)0x5F)
RCC_HSE_configuration

#define: RCC_HSE_OFF ((uint8_t)0x00)

#define: RCC_HSE_ON ((uint8_t)0x01)

#define: RCC_HSE_Bypass ((uint8_t)0x05)
RCC_I2C_clock_source

#define: RCC_I2C1CLK_HSI ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: RCC_I2C1CLK_SYSCLK RCC_CFGR3_I2C1SW

#define: RCC_I2C2CLK_HSI ((uint32_t)0x10000000)

#define: RCC_I2C2CLK_SYSCLK ((uint32_t)0x10000020)
RCC_I2S_Clock_Source

#define: RCC_I2S2CLKSource_SYSCLK ((uint8_t)0x00)
DocID023800 Rev 1
345/584
Reset and clock control (RCC)

#define: RCC_I2S2CLKSource_Ext ((uint8_t)0x01)
RCC_Interrupt_Source

#define: RCC_IT_LSIRDY ((uint8_t)0x01)

#define: RCC_IT_LSERDY ((uint8_t)0x02)

#define: RCC_IT_HSIRDY ((uint8_t)0x04)

#define: RCC_IT_HSERDY ((uint8_t)0x08)

#define: RCC_IT_PLLRDY ((uint8_t)0x10)

#define: RCC_IT_CSS ((uint8_t)0x80)
RCC_LSE_configuration

#define: RCC_LSE_OFF ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: RCC_LSE_ON RCC_BDCR_LSEON

#define: RCC_LSE_Bypass ((uint32_t)(RCC_BDCR_LSEON |
RCC_BDCR_LSEBYP))
RCC_LSE_Drive_Configuration

346/584
#define: RCC_LSEDrive_Low ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581

Reset and clock control (RCC)
#define: RCC_LSEDrive_MediumLow RCC_BDCR_LSEDRV_0

#define: RCC_LSEDrive_MediumHigh RCC_BDCR_LSEDRV_1

#define: RCC_LSEDrive_High RCC_BDCR_LSEDRV
UM1581
RCC_MCO_Clock_Source

#define: RCC_MCOSource_NoClock ((uint8_t)0x00)

#define: RCC_MCOSource_LSI ((uint8_t)0x02)

#define: RCC_MCOSource_LSE ((uint8_t)0x03)

#define: RCC_MCOSource_SYSCLK ((uint8_t)0x04)

#define: RCC_MCOSource_HSI ((uint8_t)0x05)

#define: RCC_MCOSource_HSE ((uint8_t)0x06)

#define: RCC_MCOSource_PLLCLK_Div2 ((uint8_t)0x07)
RCC_PLL_Clock_Source

#define: RCC_PLLSource_HSI_Div2 RCC_CFGR_PLLSRC_HSI_Div2

#define: RCC_PLLSource_PREDIV1 RCC_CFGR_PLLSRC_PREDIV1
DocID023800 Rev 1
347/584
Reset and clock control (RCC)
UM1581
RCC_PLL_Multiplication_Factor
348/584

#define: RCC_PLLMul_2 RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL2

#define: RCC_PLLMul_3 RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL3

#define: RCC_PLLMul_4 RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL4

#define: RCC_PLLMul_5 RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL5

#define: RCC_PLLMul_6 RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL6

#define: RCC_PLLMul_7 RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL7

#define: RCC_PLLMul_8 RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL8

#define: RCC_PLLMul_9 RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL9

#define: RCC_PLLMul_10 RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL10

#define: RCC_PLLMul_11 RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL11

#define: RCC_PLLMul_12 RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL12
DocID023800 Rev 1
Reset and clock control (RCC)
UM1581

#define: RCC_PLLMul_13 RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL13

#define: RCC_PLLMul_14 RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL14

#define: RCC_PLLMul_15 RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL15

#define: RCC_PLLMul_16 RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL16
RCC_PREDIV1_division_factor

#define: RCC_PREDIV1_Div1 RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1_DIV1

#define: RCC_PREDIV1_Div2 RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1_DIV2

#define: RCC_PREDIV1_Div3 RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1_DIV3

#define: RCC_PREDIV1_Div4 RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1_DIV4

#define: RCC_PREDIV1_Div5 RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1_DIV5

#define: RCC_PREDIV1_Div6 RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1_DIV6

#define: RCC_PREDIV1_Div7 RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1_DIV7

#define: RCC_PREDIV1_Div8 RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1_DIV8
DocID023800 Rev 1
349/584
Reset and clock control (RCC)
UM1581

#define: RCC_PREDIV1_Div9 RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1_DIV9

#define: RCC_PREDIV1_Div10 RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1_DIV10

#define: RCC_PREDIV1_Div11 RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1_DIV11

#define: RCC_PREDIV1_Div12 RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1_DIV12

#define: RCC_PREDIV1_Div13 RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1_DIV13

#define: RCC_PREDIV1_Div14 RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1_DIV14

#define: RCC_PREDIV1_Div15 RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1_DIV15

#define: RCC_PREDIV1_Div16 RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1_DIV16
RCC_RTC_Clock_Source

#define: RCC_RTCCLKSource_LSE RCC_BDCR_RTCSEL_LSE

#define: RCC_RTCCLKSource_LSI RCC_BDCR_RTCSEL_LSI

#define: RCC_RTCCLKSource_HSE_Div32 RCC_BDCR_RTCSEL_HSE
RCC_System_Clock_Source
350/584
DocID023800 Rev 1

Reset and clock control (RCC)
#define: RCC_SYSCLKSource_HSI RCC_CFGR_SW_HSI

#define: RCC_SYSCLKSource_HSE RCC_CFGR_SW_HSE

#define: RCC_SYSCLKSource_PLLCLK RCC_CFGR_SW_PLL
UM1581
RCC_TIM_clock_source

#define: RCC_TIM1CLK_HCLK ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: RCC_TIM1CLK_PLLCLK RCC_CFGR3_TIM1SW

#define: RCC_TIM8CLK_HCLK ((uint32_t)0x10000000)

#define: RCC_TIM8CLK_PLLCLK ((uint32_t)0x10000200)
RCC_USART_clock_source

#define: RCC_USART1CLK_PCLK ((uint32_t)0x10000000)

#define: RCC_USART1CLK_SYSCLK ((uint32_t)0x10000001)

#define: RCC_USART1CLK_LSE ((uint32_t)0x10000002)

#define: RCC_USART1CLK_HSI ((uint32_t)0x10000003)

#define: RCC_USART2CLK_PCLK ((uint32_t)0x20000000)
DocID023800 Rev 1
351/584
Reset and clock control (RCC)
352/584
UM1581

#define: RCC_USART2CLK_SYSCLK ((uint32_t)0x20010000)

#define: RCC_USART2CLK_LSE ((uint32_t)0x20020000)

#define: RCC_USART2CLK_HSI ((uint32_t)0x20030000)

#define: RCC_USART3CLK_PCLK ((uint32_t)0x30000000)

#define: RCC_USART3CLK_SYSCLK ((uint32_t)0x30040000)

#define: RCC_USART3CLK_LSE ((uint32_t)0x30080000)

#define: RCC_USART3CLK_HSI ((uint32_t)0x300C0000)

#define: RCC_UART4CLK_PCLK ((uint32_t)0x40000000)

#define: RCC_UART4CLK_SYSCLK ((uint32_t)0x40100000)

#define: RCC_UART4CLK_LSE ((uint32_t)0x40200000)

#define: RCC_UART4CLK_HSI ((uint32_t)0x40300000)

#define: RCC_UART5CLK_PCLK ((uint32_t)0x50000000)
DocID023800 Rev 1
Reset and clock control (RCC)
UM1581

#define: RCC_UART5CLK_SYSCLK ((uint32_t)0x50400000)

#define: RCC_UART5CLK_LSE ((uint32_t)0x50800000)

#define: RCC_UART5CLK_HSI ((uint32_t)0x50C00000)
RCC_USB_Device_clock_source

#define: RCC_USBCLKSource_PLLCLK_1Div5 ((uint8_t)0x00)

#define: RCC_USBCLKSource_PLLCLK_Div1 ((uint8_t)0x01)
DocID023800 Rev 1
353/584
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581
19
Real-time clock (RTC)
19.1
RTC Firmware driver registers structures
19.1.1
RTC_TypeDef
RTC_TypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x.h
Data Fields




































__IO uint32_t TR
__IO uint32_t DR
__IO uint32_t CR
__IO uint32_t ISR
__IO uint32_t PRER
__IO uint32_t WUTR
uint32_t RESERVED0
__IO uint32_t ALRMAR
__IO uint32_t ALRMBR
__IO uint32_t WPR
__IO uint32_t SSR
__IO uint32_t SHIFTR
__IO uint32_t TSTR
__IO uint32_t TSDR
__IO uint32_t TSSSR
__IO uint32_t CALR
__IO uint32_t TAFCR
__IO uint32_t ALRMASSR
__IO uint32_t ALRMBSSR
uint32_t RESERVED7
__IO uint32_t BKP0R
__IO uint32_t BKP1R
__IO uint32_t BKP2R
__IO uint32_t BKP3R
__IO uint32_t BKP4R
__IO uint32_t BKP5R
__IO uint32_t BKP6R
__IO uint32_t BKP7R
__IO uint32_t BKP8R
__IO uint32_t BKP9R
__IO uint32_t BKP10R
__IO uint32_t BKP11R
__IO uint32_t BKP12R
__IO uint32_t BKP13R
__IO uint32_t BKP14R
__IO uint32_t BKP15R
Field Documentation
354/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581


























__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::TR

RTC time register, Address offset: 0x00
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::DR

RTC date register, Address offset: 0x04
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::CR

RTC control register, Address offset: 0x08
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::ISR

RTC initialization and status register, Address offset: 0x0C
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::PRER

RTC prescaler register, Address offset: 0x10
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::WUTR

RTC wakeup timer register, Address offset: 0x14
uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::RESERVED0

Reserved, 0x18
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::ALRMAR

RTC alarm A register, Address offset: 0x1C
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::ALRMBR

RTC alarm B register, Address offset: 0x20
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::WPR

RTC write protection register, Address offset: 0x24
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::SSR

RTC sub second register, Address offset: 0x28
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::SHIFTR

RTC shift control register, Address offset: 0x2C
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::TSTR

RTC time stamp time register, Address offset: 0x30
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::TSDR

RTC time stamp date register, Address offset: 0x34
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::TSSSR

RTC time-stamp sub second register, Address offset: 0x38
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::CALR

RTC calibration register, Address offset: 0x3C
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::TAFCR

RTC tamper and alternate function configuration register, Address offset: 0x40
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::ALRMASSR

RTC alarm A sub second register, Address offset: 0x44
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::ALRMBSSR

RTC alarm B sub second register, Address offset: 0x48
uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::RESERVED7

Reserved, 0x4C
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::BKP0R

RTC backup register 0, Address offset: 0x50
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::BKP1R

RTC backup register 1, Address offset: 0x54
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::BKP2R

RTC backup register 2, Address offset: 0x58
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::BKP3R

RTC backup register 3, Address offset: 0x5C
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::BKP4R

RTC backup register 4, Address offset: 0x60
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::BKP5R

RTC backup register 5, Address offset: 0x64
DocID023800 Rev 1
355/584
Real-time clock (RTC)










19.1.2
UM1581
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::BKP6R

RTC backup register 6, Address offset: 0x68
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::BKP7R

RTC backup register 7, Address offset: 0x6C
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::BKP8R

RTC backup register 8, Address offset: 0x70
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::BKP9R

RTC backup register 9, Address offset: 0x74
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::BKP10R

RTC backup register 10, Address offset: 0x78
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::BKP11R

RTC backup register 11, Address offset: 0x7C
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::BKP12R

RTC backup register 12, Address offset: 0x80
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::BKP13R

RTC backup register 13, Address offset: 0x84
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::BKP14R

RTC backup register 14, Address offset: 0x88
__IO uint32_t RTC_TypeDef::BKP15R

RTC backup register 15, Address offset: 0x8C
RTC_InitTypeDef
RTC_InitTypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x_rtc.h
Data Fields



uint32_t RTC_HourFormat
uint32_t RTC_AsynchPrediv
uint32_t RTC_SynchPrediv
Field Documentation



19.1.3
uint32_t RTC_InitTypeDef::RTC_HourFormat

Specifies the RTC Hour Format. This parameter can be a value of
RTC_Hour_Formats
uint32_t RTC_InitTypeDef::RTC_AsynchPrediv

Specifies the RTC Asynchronous Predivider value. This parameter must be set
to a value lower than 0x7F
uint32_t RTC_InitTypeDef::RTC_SynchPrediv

Specifies the RTC Synchronous Predivider value. This parameter must be set to
a value lower than 0x1FFF
RTC_TimeTypeDef
RTC_TimeTypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x_rtc.h
Data Fields
356/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581




uint8_t RTC_Hours
uint8_t RTC_Minutes
uint8_t RTC_Seconds
uint8_t RTC_H12
Field Documentation




19.1.4
uint8_t RTC_TimeTypeDef::RTC_Hours

Specifies the RTC Time Hour. This parameter must be set to a value in the 0-12
range if the RTC_HourFormat_12 is selected or 0-23 range if the
RTC_HourFormat_24 is selected.
uint8_t RTC_TimeTypeDef::RTC_Minutes

Specifies the RTC Time Minutes. This parameter must be set to a value in the 059 range.
uint8_t RTC_TimeTypeDef::RTC_Seconds

Specifies the RTC Time Seconds. This parameter must be set to a value in the
0-59 range.
uint8_t RTC_TimeTypeDef::RTC_H12

Specifies the RTC AM/PM Time. This parameter can be a value of
RTC_AM_PM_Definitions
RTC_DateTypeDef
RTC_DateTypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x_rtc.h
Data Fields




uint8_t RTC_WeekDay
uint8_t RTC_Month
uint8_t RTC_Date
uint8_t RTC_Year
Field Documentation




uint8_t RTC_DateTypeDef::RTC_WeekDay

Specifies the RTC Date WeekDay. This parameter can be a value of
RTC_WeekDay_Definitions
uint8_t RTC_DateTypeDef::RTC_Month

Specifies the RTC Date Month (in BCD format). This parameter can be a value
of RTC_Month_Date_Definitions
uint8_t RTC_DateTypeDef::RTC_Date

Specifies the RTC Date. This parameter must be set to a value in the 1-31
range.
uint8_t RTC_DateTypeDef::RTC_Year

Specifies the RTC Date Year. This parameter must be set to a value in the 0-99
range.
DocID023800 Rev 1
357/584
Real-time clock (RTC)
19.1.5
UM1581
RTC_AlarmTypeDef
RTC_AlarmTypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x_rtc.h
Data Fields




RTC_TimeTypeDef RTC_AlarmTime
uint32_t RTC_AlarmMask
uint32_t RTC_AlarmDateWeekDaySel
uint8_t RTC_AlarmDateWeekDay
Field Documentation




19.2
RTC_TimeTypeDef RTC_AlarmTypeDef::RTC_AlarmTime

Specifies the RTC Alarm Time members.
uint32_t RTC_AlarmTypeDef::RTC_AlarmMask

Specifies the RTC Alarm Masks. This parameter can be a value of
RTC_AlarmMask_Definitions
uint32_t RTC_AlarmTypeDef::RTC_AlarmDateWeekDaySel

Specifies the RTC Alarm is on Date or WeekDay. This parameter can be a value
of RTC_AlarmDateWeekDay_Definitions
uint8_t RTC_AlarmTypeDef::RTC_AlarmDateWeekDay

Specifies the RTC Alarm Date/WeekDay. If the Alarm Date is selected, this
parameter must be set to a value in the 1-31 range. If the Alarm WeekDay is
selected, this parameter can be a value of RTC_WeekDay_Definitions
RTC Firmware driver API description
The following section lists the various functions of the RTC library.
19.2.1
RTC Operating Condition
The real-time clock (RTC) and the RTC backup registers can be powered from the VBAT
voltage when the main VDD supply is powered off. To retain the content of the RTC backup
registers and supply the RTC when VDD is turned off, VBAT pin can be connected to an
optional standby voltage supplied by a battery or by another source.
To allow the RTC to operate even when the main digital supply (VDD) is turned off, the
VBAT pin powers the following blocks:
1.
2.
3.
The RTC
The LSE oscillator
PC13 to PC15 I/Os (when available)
When the backup domain is supplied by VDD (analog switch connected to VDD), the
following functions are available:
1.
2.
PC14 and PC15 can be used as either GPIO or LSE pins
PC13 can be used as a GPIO or as the RTC_AF pin
When the backup domain is supplied by VBAT (analog switch connected to VBAT
because VDD is not present), the following functions are available:
358/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581
1.
2.
19.2.2
PC14 and PC15 can be used as LSE pins only
PC13 can be used as the RTC_AF pin
Backup Domain Reset
The backup domain reset sets all RTC registers and the RCC_BDCR register to their reset
values. A backup domain reset is generated when one of the following events occurs:
1.
2.
19.2.3
Software reset, triggered by setting the BDRST bit in the RCC Backup domain control
register (RCC_BDCR). You can use the RCC_BackupResetCmd().
VDD or VBAT power on, if both supplies have previously been powered off.
Backup Domain Access
After reset, the backup domain (RTC registers and RTC backup data registers) is
protected against possible unwanted write accesses.
To enable access to the Backup Domain and RTC registers, proceed as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
19.2.4
Enable the Power Controller (PWR) APB1 interface clock using the
RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd() function.
Enable access to Backup domain using the PWR_BackupAccessCmd() function.
Select the RTC clock source using the RCC_RTCCLKConfig() function.
Enable RTC Clock using the RCC_RTCCLKCmd() function.
How to use this driver


Enable the backup domain access (see description in the section above)
Configure the RTC Prescaler (Asynchronous and Synchronous) and RTC hour format
using the RTC_Init() function.
Time and Date configuration




To configure the RTC Calendar (Time and Date) use the RTC_SetTime() and
RTC_SetDate() functions.
To read the RTC Calendar, use the RTC_GetTime() and RTC_GetDate() functions.
To read the RTC subsecond, use the RTC_GetSubSecond() function.
Use the RTC_DayLightSavingConfig() function to add or sub one hour to the RTC
Calendar.
Alarm configuration




To configure the RTC Alarm use the RTC_SetAlarm() function.
Enable the selected RTC Alarm using the RTC_AlarmCmd() function.
To read the RTC Alarm, use the RTC_GetAlarm() function.
To read the RTC alarm SubSecond, use the RTC_GetAlarmSubSecond() function.
DocID023800 Rev 1
359/584
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581
RTC Wakeup configuration




Configure the RTC Wakeup Clock source use the RTC_WakeUpClockConfig()
function.
Configure the RTC WakeUp Counter using the RTC_SetWakeUpCounter() function
Enable the RTC WakeUp using the RTC_WakeUpCmd() function
To read the RTC WakeUp Counter register, use the RTC_GetWakeUpCounter()
function.
Outputs configuration
The RTC has 2 different outputs:


AFO_ALARM: this output is used to manage the RTC Alarm A, Alarm B and WaKeUp
signals. To output the selected RTC signal on RTC_AF pin, use the
RTC_OutputConfig() function.
AFO_CALIB: this output is 512Hz signal or 1Hz . To output the RTC Clock on
RTC_AF pin, use the RTC_CalibOutputCmd() function.
Smooth digital Calibration configuration

Configure the RTC Original Digital Calibration Value and the corresponding
calibration cycle period (32s,16s and 8s) using the RTC_SmoothCalibConfig()
function.
TimeStamp configuration



Configure the RTC_AF trigger and enables the RTC TimeStamp using the
RTC_TimeStampCmd() function.
To read the RTC TimeStamp Time and Date register, use the RTC_GetTimeStamp()
function.
To read the RTC TimeStamp SubSecond register, use the
RTC_GetTimeStampSubSecond() function.
Tamper configuration







Configure the Tamper filter count using RTC_TamperFilterConfig() function.
Configure the RTC Tamper trigger Edge or Level according to the Tamper filter (if
equal to 0 Edge else Level) value using the RTC_TamperConfig() function.
Configure the Tamper sampling frequency using RTC_TamperSamplingFreqConfig()
function.
Configure the Tamper precharge or discharge duration using
RTC_TamperPinsPrechargeDuration() function.
Enable the Tamper Pull-UP using RTC_TamperPullUpDisableCmd() function.
Enable the RTC Tamper using the RTC_TamperCmd() function.
Enable the Time stamp on Tamper detection event using
RTC_TSOnTamperDetecCmd() function.
Backup Data Registers configuration


360/584
To write to the RTC Backup Data registers, use the RTC_WriteBackupRegister()
function.
To read the RTC Backup Data registers, use the RTC_ReadBackupRegister()
function.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581
19.2.5
RTC and low power modes
The MCU can be woken up from a low power mode by an RTC alternate function.
The RTC alternate functions are the RTC alarms (Alarm A and Alarm B), RTC wakeup,
RTC tamper event detection and RTC time stamp event detection. These RTC alternate
functions can wake up the system from the Stop and Standby lowpower modes. The
system can also wake up from low power modes without depending on an external
interrupt (Auto-wakeup mode), by using the RTC alarm or the RTC wakeup events.
The RTC provides a programmable time base for waking up from the Stop or Standby
mode at regular intervals. Wakeup from STOP and Standby modes is possible only when
the RTC clock source is LSE or LSI.
19.2.6
Selection of RTC_AF alternate functions
The RTC_AF pin (PC13) can be used for the following purposes:





Wakeup pin 2 (WKUP2) using the PWR_WakeUpPinCmd() function.
AFO_ALARM output
AFO_CALIB output
AFI_TAMPER
AFI_TIMESTAMP
Table 15: Selection of RTC_AF alternate functions
Pin
configuration
and
functions
RTC_ALARM
output
enabled
RTC_CALIB
output
enabled
RTC_TAMPER
input enabled
RTC_TIMESTAMP
input enabled
PC13MODE
bit
PC13VALUE
bit
Alarm out
output OD
1
Don't care
Don't care
Don't care
Don't care
0
Alarm out
output PP
1
Don't care
Don't care
Don't care
Don't care
1
Calibration
out output PP
0
1
Don't care
Don't care
Don't care
Don't care
TAMPER
input floating
0
0
1
0
Don't care
Don't care
TIMESTAMP
and TAMPER
input floating
0
0
1
1
Don't care
Don't care
TIMESTAMP
input floating
0
0
0
1
Don't care
Don't care
Output PP
forced
0
0
0
0
1
PC13 output
Wakeup pin
or Standard
GPIO
0
0
0
0
0
Don't care
DocID023800 Rev 1
361/584
Real-time clock (RTC)
19.2.7
UM1581
Initialization and Configuration functions
This section provide functions allowing to initialize and configure the RTC Prescaler
(Synchronous and Asynchronous), RTC Hour format, disable RTC registers Write
protection, enter and exit the RTC initialization mode, RTC registers synchronization check
and reference clock detection enable.
1.
2.
3.
4.









19.2.8
Backup Data Registers configuration functions


19.2.9
362/584
RTC_OutputTypeConfig()
Shift control synchronisation functions

19.2.11
RTC_WriteBackupRegister()
RTC_ReadBackupRegister()
Output Type Config configuration functions

19.2.10
The RTC Prescaler is programmed to generate the RTC 1Hz time base. It is split into
2 programmable prescalers to minimize power consumption.

A 7-bit asynchronous prescaler and A 13-bit synchronous prescaler.

When both prescalers are used, it is recommended to configure the
asynchronous prescaler to a high value to minimize consumption.
All RTC registers are Write protected. Writing to the RTC registers is enabled by
writing a key into the Write Protection register, RTC_WPR.
To Configure the RTC Calendar, user application should enter initialization mode. In
this mode, the calendar counter is stopped and its value can be updated. When the
initialization sequence is complete, the calendar restarts counting after 4 RTCCLK
cycles.
To read the calendar through the shadow registers after Calendar initialization,
calendar update or after wakeup from low power modes the software must first clear
the RSF flag. The software must then wait until it is set again before reading the
calendar, which means that the calendar registers have been correctly copied into the
RTC_TR and RTC_DR shadow registers. The RTC_WaitForSynchro() function
implements the above software sequence (RSF clear and RSF check).
RTC_DeInit()
RTC_Init()
RTC_StructInit()
RTC_WriteProtectionCmd()
RTC_EnterInitMode()
RTC_ExitInitMode()
RTC_WaitForSynchro()
RTC_RefClockCmd()
RTC_BypassShadowCmd()
RTC_SynchroShiftConfig()
Interrupts and flags management functions
DocID023800 Rev 1
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581
All RTC interrupts are connected to the EXTI controller.









19.2.12
To enable the RTC Alarm interrupt, the following sequence is required:

Configure and enable the EXTI Line 17 in interrupt mode and select the rising
edge sensitivity using the EXTI_Init() function.

Configure and enable the RTC_Alarm IRQ channel in the NVIC using the
NVIC_Init() function.

Configure the RTC to generate RTC alarms (Alarm A and/or Alarm B) using the
RTC_SetAlarm() and RTC_AlarmCmd() functions.
To enable the RTC Wakeup interrupt, the following sequence is required:

Configure and enable the EXTI Line 20 in interrupt mode and select the rising
edge sensitivity using the EXTI_Init() function.

Configure and enable the RTC_WKUP IRQ channel in the NVIC using the
NVIC_Init() function.

Configure the RTC to generate the RTC wakeup timer event using the
RTC_WakeUpClockConfig(), RTC_SetWakeUpCounter() and
RTC_WakeUpCmd() functions.
To enable the RTC Tamper interrupt, the following sequence is required:

Configure and enable the EXTI Line 19 in interrupt mode and select the rising
edge sensitivity using the EXTI_Init() function.

Configure and enable the TAMP_STAMP IRQ channel in the NVIC using the
NVIC_Init() function.

Configure the RTC to detect the RTC tamper event using the
RTC_TamperTriggerConfig() and RTC_TamperCmd() functions.
To enable the RTC TimeStamp interrupt, the following sequence is required:

Configure and enable the EXTI Line 19 in interrupt mode and select the rising
edge sensitivity using the EXTI_Init() function.

Configure and enable the TAMP_STAMP IRQ channel in the NVIC using the
NVIC_Init() function.

Configure the RTC to detect the RTC time-stamp event using the
RTC_TimeStampCmd() functions.
RTC_ITConfig()
RTC_GetFlagStatus()
RTC_ClearFlag()
RTC_GetITStatus()
RTC_ClearITPendingBit()
Time and Date configuration functions
This section provide functions allowing to program and read the RTC Calendar (Time and
Date).







19.2.13
RTC_SetTime()
RTC_TimeStructInit()
RTC_GetTime()
RTC_GetSubSecond()
RTC_SetDate()
RTC_DateStructInit()
RTC_GetDate()
Alarms (Alarm A and Alarm B) configuration functions
This section provides functions allowing to program and read the RTC Alarms.
DocID023800 Rev 1
363/584
Real-time clock (RTC)






19.2.14
UM1581
RTC_SetAlarm()
RTC_AlarmStructInit()
RTC_GetAlarm()
RTC_AlarmCmd()
RTC_AlarmSubSecondConfig()
RTC_GetAlarmSubSecond()
WakeUp Timer configuration functions
This section provide functions allowing to program and read the RTC WakeUp.




19.2.15
RTC_WakeUpClockConfig()
RTC_SetWakeUpCounter()
RTC_GetWakeUpCounter()
RTC_WakeUpCmd()
Daylight Saving configuration functions
This section provide functions allowing to configure the RTC DayLight Saving.


19.2.16
RTC_DayLightSavingConfig()
RTC_GetStoreOperation()
Output pin Configuration function
This section provide functions allowing to configure the RTC Output source.

19.2.17
Digital Calibration configuration functions



19.2.18
RTC_TimeStampCmd()
RTC_GetTimeStamp()
RTC_GetTimeStampSubSecond()
Tampers configuration functions




364/584
RTC_CalibOutputCmd()
RTC_CalibOutputConfig()
RTC_SmoothCalibConfig()
TimeStamp configuration functions



19.2.19
RTC_OutputConfig()
RTC_TamperTriggerConfig()
RTC_TamperCmd()
RTC_TamperFilterConfig()
RTC_TamperSamplingFreqConfig()
DocID023800 Rev 1
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581



19.2.20
RTC_TamperPinsPrechargeDuration()
RTC_TimeStampOnTamperDetectionCmd()
RTC_TamperPullUpCmd()
Initialization and Configuration functions
19.2.20.1 RTC_DeInit
Function Name
ErrorStatus RTC_DeInit ( void )
Function Description
Deinitializes the RTC registers to their default reset values.
Parameters

None.
Return values

An ErrorStatus enumeration value:

SUCCESS: RTC registers are deinitialized

ERROR: RTC registers are not deinitialized
Notes

This function doesn't reset the RTC Clock source and RTC
Backup Data registers.
19.2.20.2 RTC_Init
Function Name
ErrorStatus RTC_Init ( RTC_InitTypeDef * RTC_InitStruct)
Function Description
Initializes the RTC registers according to the specified parameters
in RTC_InitStruct.
Parameters

RTC_InitStruct : pointer to a RTC_InitTypeDef structure that
contains the configuration information for the RTC peripheral.
Return values

An ErrorStatus enumeration value:

SUCCESS: RTC registers are initialized

ERROR: RTC registers are not initialized
Notes

The RTC Prescaler register is write protected and can be
written in initialization mode only.
19.2.20.3 RTC_StructInit
DocID023800 Rev 1
365/584
Real-time clock (RTC)
Function Name
UM1581
void RTC_StructInit ( RTC_InitTypeDef * RTC_InitStruct)
Function Description
Fills each RTC_InitStruct member with its default value.
Parameters

RTC_InitStruct : pointer to a RTC_InitTypeDef structure
which will be initialized.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
19.2.20.4 RTC_WriteProtectionCmd
Function Name
void RTC_WriteProtectionCmd ( FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the RTC registers write protection.
Parameters

NewState : new state of the write protection. This parameter
can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

All the RTC registers are write protected except for
RTC_ISR[13:8], RTC_TAFCR and RTC_BKPxR.
Writing a wrong key reactivates the write protection.
The protection mechanism is not affected by system reset.


19.2.20.5 RTC_EnterInitMode
366/584
Function Name
ErrorStatus RTC_EnterInitMode ( void )
Function Description
Enters the RTC Initialization mode.
Parameters

None.
Return values

An ErrorStatus enumeration value:

SUCCESS: RTC is in Init mode

ERROR: RTC is not in Init mode
Notes

The RTC Initialization mode is write protected, use the
RTC_WriteProtectionCmd(DISABLE) before calling this
function.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581
19.2.20.6 RTC_ExitInitMode
Function Name
void RTC_ExitInitMode ( void )
Function Description
Exits the RTC Initialization mode.
Parameters

None.
Return values

None.
Notes

When the initialization sequence is complete, the calendar
restarts counting after 4 RTCCLK cycles.
The RTC Initialization mode is write protected, use the
RTC_WriteProtectionCmd(DISABLE) before calling this
function.

19.2.20.7 RTC_WaitForSynchro
Function Name
ErrorStatus RTC_WaitForSynchro ( void )
Function Description
Waits until the RTC Time and Date registers (RTC_TR and
RTC_DR) are synchronized with RTC APB clock.
Parameters

None.
Return values

An ErrorStatus enumeration value:

SUCCESS: RTC registers are synchronised

ERROR: RTC registers are not synchronised
Notes

The RTC Resynchronization mode is write protected, use the
RTC_WriteProtectionCmd(DISABLE) before calling this
function.
To read the calendar through the shadow registers after
Calendar initialization, calendar update or after wakeup from
low power modes the software must first clear the RSF flag.
The software must then wait until it is set again before reading
the calendar, which means that the calendar registers have
been correctly copied into the RTC_TR and RTC_DR shadow
registers.

DocID023800 Rev 1
367/584
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581
19.2.20.8 RTC_RefClockCmd
Function Name
ErrorStatus RTC_RefClockCmd ( FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the RTC reference clock detection.
Parameters

NewState : new state of the RTC reference clock. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

An ErrorStatus enumeration value:

SUCCESS: RTC reference clock detection is enabled

ERROR: RTC reference clock detection is disabled
Notes

None.
19.2.20.9 RTC_BypassShadowCmd
19.2.21
Function Name
void RTC_BypassShadowCmd ( FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or Disables the Bypass Shadow feature.
Parameters

NewState : new state of the Bypass Shadow feature. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

When the Bypass Shadow is enabled the calendar value are
taken directly from the Calendar counter.
Backup Data Registers configuration functions
19.2.21.1 RTC_WriteBackupRegister
368/584
Function Name
void RTC_WriteBackupRegister ( uint32_t RTC_BKP_DR,
uint32_t Data)
Function Description
Writes a data in a specified RTC Backup data register.
Parameters

RTC_BKP_DR : RTC Backup data Register number. This
parameter can be: RTC_BKP_DRx where x can be from 0 to
19 to specify the register.
DocID023800 Rev 1

Real-time clock (RTC)
Data : Data to be written in the specified RTC Backup data
register.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
UM1581
19.2.21.2 RTC_ReadBackupRegister
19.2.22
Function Name
uint32_t RTC_ReadBackupRegister ( uint32_t RTC_BKP_DR)
Function Description
Reads data from the specified RTC Backup data Register.
Parameters

RTC_BKP_DR : RTC Backup data Register number. This
parameter can be: RTC_BKP_DRx where x can be from 0 to
19 to specify the register.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
Output Type Config configuration functions
19.2.22.1 RTC_OutputTypeConfig
Function Name
void RTC_OutputTypeConfig ( uint32_t RTC_OutputType)
Function Description
Configures the RTC Output Pin mode.
Parameters

RTC_OutputType : specifies the RTC Output (PC13) pin
mode. This parameter can be one of the following values:

RTC_OutputType_OpenDrain : RTC Output (PC13) is
configured in Open Drain mode.

RTC_OutputType_PushPull : RTC Output (PC13) is
configured in Push Pull mode.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
369/584
Real-time clock (RTC)
19.2.23
UM1581
Shift control synchronisation functions
19.2.23.1 RTC_SynchroShiftConfig
Function Name
ErrorStatus RTC_SynchroShiftConfig ( uint32_t
RTC_ShiftAdd1S, uint32_t RTC_ShiftSubFS)
Function Description
Configures the Synchronization Shift Control Settings.
Parameters


19.2.24
RTC_ShiftAdd1S : : Select to add or not 1 second to the
time Calendar. This parameter can be one of the following
values :

RTC_ShiftAdd1S_Set : Add one second to the clock
calendar.

RTC_ShiftAdd1S_Reset : No effect.
RTC_ShiftSubFS : Select the number of Second Fractions
to Substitute. This parameter can be one any value from 0 to
0x7FFF.
Return values

An ErrorStatus enumeration value:

SUCCESS: RTC Shift registers are configured

ERROR: RTC Shift registers are not configured
Notes

When REFCKON is set, firmware must not write to Shift
control register
Interrupts and flags management functions
19.2.24.1 RTC_ITConfig
Function Name
void RTC_ITConfig ( uint32_t RTC_IT, FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the specified RTC interrupts.
Parameters


370/584
RTC_IT : specifies the RTC interrupt sources to be enabled
or disabled. This parameter can be any combination of the
following values:

RTC_IT_TS : Time Stamp interrupt mask

RTC_IT_WUT : WakeUp Timer interrupt mask

RTC_IT_ALRB : Alarm B interrupt mask

RTC_IT_ALRA : Alarm A interrupt mask

RTC_IT_TAMP : Tamper event interrupt mask
NewState : new state of the specified RTC interrupts. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581
19.2.24.2 RTC_GetFlagStatus
Function Name
FlagStatus RTC_GetFlagStatus ( uint32_t RTC_FLAG)
Function Description
Checks whether the specified RTC flag is set or not.
Parameters

RTC_FLAG : specifies the flag to check. This parameter can
be one of the following values:

RTC_FLAG_RECALPF : RECALPF event flag

RTC_FLAG_TAMP3F : Tamper 3 event flag

RTC_FLAG_TAMP2F : Tamper 2 event flag

RTC_FLAG_TAMP1F : Tamper 1 event flag

RTC_FLAG_TSOVF : Time Stamp OverFlow flag

RTC_FLAG_TSF : Time Stamp event flag

RTC_FLAG_WUTF : WakeUp Timer flag

RTC_FLAG_ALRBF : Alarm B flag

RTC_FLAG_ALRAF : Alarm A flag

RTC_FLAG_INITF : Initialization mode flag

RTC_FLAG_RSF : Registers Synchronized flag

RTC_FLAG_INITS : Registers Configured flag : Shift
operation pending flag.

RTC_FLAG_WUTWF : WakeUp Timer Write flag

RTC_FLAG_ALRBWF : Alarm B Write flag

RTC_FLAG_ALRAWF : Alarm A write flag
Return values

The new state of RTC_FLAG (SET or RESET).
Notes

None.
19.2.24.3 RTC_ClearFlag
Function Name
void RTC_ClearFlag ( uint32_t RTC_FLAG)
Function Description
Clears the RTC's pending flags.
Parameters

RTC_FLAG : specifies the RTC flag to clear. This parameter
can be any combination of the following values:

RTC_FLAG_TAMP3F : Tamper 3 event flag

RTC_FLAG_TAMP2F : Tamper 2 event flag

RTC_FLAG_TAMP1F : Tamper 1 event flag

RTC_FLAG_TSOVF : Time Stamp Overflow flag

RTC_FLAG_TSF : Time Stamp event flag
DocID023800 Rev 1
371/584
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581




RTC_FLAG_WUTF : WakeUp Timer flag
RTC_FLAG_ALRBF : Alarm B flag
RTC_FLAG_ALRAF : Alarm A flag
RTC_FLAG_RSF : Registers Synchronized flag
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
19.2.24.4 RTC_GetITStatus
Function Name
ITStatus RTC_GetITStatus ( uint32_t RTC_IT)
Function Description
Checks whether the specified RTC interrupt has occurred or not.
Parameters

RTC_IT : specifies the RTC interrupt source to check. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

RTC_IT_TS : Time Stamp interrupt

RTC_IT_WUT : WakeUp Timer interrupt

RTC_IT_ALRB : Alarm B interrupt

RTC_IT_ALRA : Alarm A interrupt

RTC_IT_TAMP1 : Tamper1 event interrupt

RTC_IT_TAMP2 : Tamper2 event interrupt

RTC_IT_TAMP3 : Tamper3 event interrupt
Return values

The new state of RTC_IT (SET or RESET).
Notes

None.
19.2.24.5 RTC_ClearITPendingBit
372/584
Function Name
void RTC_ClearITPendingBit ( uint32_t RTC_IT)
Function Description
Clears the RTC's interrupt pending bits.
Parameters

RTC_IT : specifies the RTC interrupt pending bit to clear.
This parameter can be any combination of the following
values:

RTC_IT_TS : Time Stamp interrupt

RTC_IT_WUT : WakeUp Timer interrupt

RTC_IT_ALRB : Alarm B interrupt

RTC_IT_ALRA : Alarm A interrupt

RTC_IT_TAMP1 : Tamper1 event interrupt

RTC_IT_TAMP2 : Tamper2 event interrupt
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581

19.2.25
Real-time clock (RTC)
RTC_IT_TAMP3 : Tamper3 event interrupt
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
Time and Date configuration functions
19.2.25.1 RTC_SetTime
Function Name
ErrorStatus RTC_SetTime ( uint32_t RTC_Format,
RTC_TimeTypeDef * RTC_TimeStruct)
Function Description
Set the RTC current time.
Parameters


RTC_Format : specifies the format of the entered
parameters. This parameter can be one of the following
values:

RTC_Format_BIN : Binary data format

RTC_Format_BCD : BCD data format
RTC_TimeStruct : pointer to a RTC_TimeTypeDef structure
that contains the time configuration information for the RTC.
Return values

An ErrorStatus enumeration value:

SUCCESS: RTC Time register is configured

ERROR: RTC Time register is not configured
Notes

None.
19.2.25.2 RTC_TimeStructInit
Function Name
void RTC_TimeStructInit ( RTC_TimeTypeDef *
RTC_TimeStruct)
Function Description
Fills each RTC_TimeStruct member with its default value (Time =
00h:00min:00sec).
Parameters

RTC_TimeStruct : pointer to a RTC_TimeTypeDef structure
which will be initialized.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
373/584
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581
19.2.25.3 RTC_GetTime
Function Name
void RTC_GetTime ( uint32_t RTC_Format, RTC_TimeTypeDef
* RTC_TimeStruct)
Function Description
Get the RTC current Time.
Parameters


RTC_Format : specifies the format of the returned
parameters. This parameter can be one of the following
values:

RTC_Format_BIN : Binary data format

RTC_Format_BCD : BCD data format
RTC_TimeStruct : pointer to a RTC_TimeTypeDef structure
that will contain the returned current time configuration.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
19.2.25.4 RTC_GetSubSecond
Function Name
uint32_t RTC_GetSubSecond ( void )
Function Description
Gets the RTC current Calendar Subseconds value.
Parameters

None.
Return values

RTC current Calendar Subseconds value.
Notes

This function freeze the Time and Date registers after reading
the SSR register.
19.2.25.5 RTC_SetDate
374/584
Function Name
ErrorStatus RTC_SetDate ( uint32_t RTC_Format,
RTC_DateTypeDef * RTC_DateStruct)
Function Description
Set the RTC current date.
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Parameters


Real-time clock (RTC)
RTC_Format : specifies the format of the entered
parameters. This parameter can be one of the following
values:

RTC_Format_BIN : Binary data format

RTC_Format_BCD : BCD data format
RTC_DateStruct : pointer to a RTC_DateTypeDef structure
that contains the date configuration information for the RTC.
Return values

An ErrorStatus enumeration value:

SUCCESS: RTC Date register is configured

ERROR: RTC Date register is not configured
Notes

None.
19.2.25.6 RTC_DateStructInit
Function Name
void RTC_DateStructInit ( RTC_DateTypeDef *
RTC_DateStruct)
Function Description
Fills each RTC_DateStruct member with its default value
(Monday, January 01 xx00).
Parameters

RTC_DateStruct : pointer to a RTC_DateTypeDef structure
which will be initialized.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
19.2.25.7 RTC_GetDate
Function Name
void RTC_GetDate ( uint32_t RTC_Format, RTC_DateTypeDef
* RTC_DateStruct)
Function Description
Get the RTC current date.
Parameters


RTC_Format : specifies the format of the returned
parameters. This parameter can be one of the following
values:

RTC_Format_BIN : Binary data format

RTC_Format_BCD : BCD data format
RTC_DateStruct : pointer to a RTC_DateTypeDef structure
that will contain the returned current date configuration.
DocID023800 Rev 1
375/584
Real-time clock (RTC)
Return values
Notes
19.2.26
UM1581

None.

None.
Alarm configuration functions
19.2.26.1 RTC_SetAlarm
Function Name
void RTC_SetAlarm ( uint32_t RTC_Format, uint32_t
RTC_Alarm, RTC_AlarmTypeDef * RTC_AlarmStruct)
Function Description
Set the specified RTC Alarm.
Parameters



RTC_Format : specifies the format of the returned
parameters. This parameter can be one of the following
values:

RTC_Format_BIN : Binary data format

RTC_Format_BCD : BCD data format
RTC_Alarm : specifies the alarm to be configured. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

RTC_Alarm_A : to select Alarm A

RTC_Alarm_B : to select Alarm B
RTC_AlarmStruct : pointer to a RTC_AlarmTypeDef
structure that contains the alarm configuration parameters.
Return values

None.
Notes

The Alarm register can only be written when the
corresponding Alarm is disabled (Use the
RTC_AlarmCmd(DISABLE)).
19.2.26.2 RTC_AlarmStructInit
376/584
Function Name
void RTC_AlarmStructInit ( RTC_AlarmTypeDef *
RTC_AlarmStruct)
Function Description
Fills each RTC_AlarmStruct member with its default value (Time =
00h:00mn:00sec / Date = 1st day of the month/Mask = all fields
are masked).
Parameters

RTC_AlarmStruct : pointer to a RTC_AlarmTypeDef
structure which will be initialized.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581
19.2.26.3 RTC_GetAlarm
Function Name
void RTC_GetAlarm ( uint32_t RTC_Format, uint32_t
RTC_Alarm, RTC_AlarmTypeDef * RTC_AlarmStruct)
Function Description
Get the RTC Alarm value and masks.
Parameters



RTC_Format : specifies the format of the output parameters.
This parameter can be one of the following values:

RTC_Format_BIN : Binary data format

RTC_Format_BCD : BCD data format
RTC_Alarm : specifies the alarm to be read. This parameter
can be one of the following values:

RTC_Alarm_A : to select Alarm A

RTC_Alarm_B : to select Alarm B
RTC_AlarmStruct : pointer to a RTC_AlarmTypeDef
structure that will contains the output alarm configuration
values.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
19.2.26.4 RTC_AlarmCmd
Function Name
ErrorStatus RTC_AlarmCmd ( uint32_t RTC_Alarm,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the specified RTC Alarm.
Parameters


RTC_Alarm : specifies the alarm to be configured. This
parameter can be any combination of the following values:

RTC_Alarm_A : to select Alarm A

RTC_Alarm_B : to select Alarm B
NewState : new state of the specified alarm. This parameter
can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

An ErrorStatus enumeration value:

SUCCESS: RTC Alarm is enabled/disabled

ERROR: RTC Alarm is not enabled/disabled
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
377/584
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581
19.2.26.5 RTC_AlarmSubSecondConfig
Function Name
void RTC_AlarmSubSecondConfig ( uint32_t RTC_Alarm,
uint32_t RTC_AlarmSubSecondValue, uint32_t
RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask)
Function Description
Configures the RTC AlarmA/B Subseconds value and mask.
Parameters



378/584
RTC_Alarm : specifies the alarm to be configured. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

RTC_Alarm_A : to select Alarm A

RTC_Alarm_B : to select Alarm B
RTC_AlarmSubSecondValue : specifies the Subseconds
value. This parameter can be a value from 0 to 0x00007FFF.
RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask : specifies the Subseconds
Mask. This parameter can be any combination of the following
values:

RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_All : All Alarm SS fields
are masked. There is no comparison on sub seconds for
Alarm.

RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_1 : SS[14:1] are
don't care in Alarm comparison. Only SS[0] is compared

RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_2 : SS[14:2] are
don't care in Alarm comparison. Only SS[1:0] are
compared

RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_3 : SS[14:3] are
don't care in Alarm comparison. Only SS[2:0] are
compared

RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_4 : SS[14:4] are
don't care in Alarm comparison. Only SS[3:0] are
compared

RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_5 : SS[14:5] are
don't care in Alarm comparison. Only SS[4:0] are
compared

RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_6 : SS[14:6] are
don't care in Alarm comparison. Only SS[5:0] are
compared

RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_7 : SS[14:7] are
don't care in Alarm comparison. Only SS[6:0] are
compared

RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_8 : SS[14:8] are
don't care in Alarm comparison. Only SS[7:0] are
compared

RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_9 : SS[14:9] are
don't care in Alarm comparison. Only SS[8:0] are
compared

RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_10 : SS[14:10]
are don't care in Alarm comparison. Only SS[9:0] are
compared

RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_11 : SS[14:11]
are don't care in Alarm comparison. Only SS[10:0] are
compared

RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_12 : SS[14:12]
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581



Real-time clock (RTC)
are don't care in Alarm comparison. Only SS[11:0] are
compared
RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_13 : SS[14:13]
are don't care in Alarm comparison. Only SS[12:0] are
compared
RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14 : SS[14] is don't
care in Alarm comparison. Only SS[13:0] are compared
RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_None : SS[14:0] are
compared and must match to activate alarm
Return values

None.
Notes

This function is performed only when the Alarm is disabled.
19.2.26.6 RTC_GetAlarmSubSecond
19.2.27
Function Name
uint32_t RTC_GetAlarmSubSecond ( uint32_t RTC_Alarm)
Function Description
Gets the RTC Alarm Subseconds value.
Parameters

RTC_Alarm.
Return values

RTC Alarm Subseconds value.
Notes

None.
WakeUp timer configuration functions
19.2.27.1 RTC_WakeUpClockConfig
Function Name
void RTC_WakeUpClockConfig ( uint32_t RTC_WakeUpClock)
Function Description
Configures the RTC Wakeup clock source.
Parameters

RTC_WakeUpClock : Wakeup Clock source. This parameter
can be one of the following values:

RTC_WakeUpClock_RTCCLK_Div16 : RTC Wakeup
Counter Clock = RTCCLK/16

RTC_WakeUpClock_RTCCLK_Div8 : RTC Wakeup
Counter Clock = RTCCLK/8

RTC_WakeUpClock_RTCCLK_Div4 : RTC Wakeup
Counter Clock = RTCCLK/4

RTC_WakeUpClock_RTCCLK_Div2 : RTC Wakeup
Counter Clock = RTCCLK/2
DocID023800 Rev 1
379/584
Real-time clock (RTC)


UM1581
RTC_WakeUpClock_CK_SPRE_16bits : RTC Wakeup
Counter Clock = CK_SPRE
RTC_WakeUpClock_CK_SPRE_17bits : RTC Wakeup
Counter Clock = CK_SPRE
Return values

None.
Notes

The WakeUp Clock source can only be changed when the
RTC WakeUp is disabled (Use the
RTC_WakeUpCmd(DISABLE)).
19.2.27.2 RTC_SetWakeUpCounter
Function Name
void RTC_SetWakeUpCounter ( uint32_t
RTC_WakeUpCounter)
Function Description
Configures the RTC Wakeup counter.
Parameters

RTC_WakeUpCounter : specifies the WakeUp counter. This
parameter can be a value from 0x0000 to 0xFFFF.
Return values

None.
Notes

The RTC WakeUp counter can only be written when the RTC
WakeUp is disabled (Use the RTC_WakeUpCmd(DISABLE)).
19.2.27.3 RTC_GetWakeUpCounter
380/584
Function Name
uint32_t RTC_GetWakeUpCounter ( void )
Function Description
Returns the RTC WakeUp timer counter value.
Parameters

None.
Return values

The RTC WakeUp Counter value.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581
19.2.27.4 RTC_WakeUpCmd
19.2.28
Function Name
ErrorStatus RTC_WakeUpCmd ( FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or Disables the RTC WakeUp timer.
Parameters

NewState : new state of the WakeUp timer. This parameter
can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
Daylight saving configuration functions
19.2.28.1 RTC_DayLightSavingConfig
Function Name
void RTC_DayLightSavingConfig ( uint32_t
RTC_DayLightSaving, uint32_t RTC_StoreOperation)
Function Description
Adds or substract one hour from the current time.
Parameters


RTC_DayLightSaveOperation : the value of hour
adjustment. This parameter can be one of the following
values:

RTC_DayLightSaving_SUB1H : Substract one hour
(winter time)

RTC_DayLightSaving_ADD1H : Add one hour
(summer time)
RTC_StoreOperation : Specifies the value to be written in
the BCK bit in CR register to store the operation. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

RTC_StoreOperation_Reset : BCK Bit Reset

RTC_StoreOperation_Set : BCK Bit Set
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
381/584
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581
19.2.28.2 RTC_GetStoreOperation
19.2.29
Function Name
uint32_t RTC_GetStoreOperation ( void )
Function Description
Returns the RTC Day Light Saving stored operation.
Parameters

None.
Return values

RTC Day Light Saving stored operation.

RTC_StoreOperation_Reset

RTC_StoreOperation_Set
Notes

None.
Output pin configuration functions
19.2.29.1 RTC_OutputConfig
Function Name
void RTC_OutputConfig ( uint32_t RTC_Output, uint32_t
RTC_OutputPolarity)
Function Description
Configures the RTC output source (AFO_ALARM).
Parameters


382/584
RTC_Output : Specifies which signal will be routed to the
RTC output. This parameter can be one of the following
values:

RTC_Output_Disable : No output selected

RTC_Output_AlarmA : signal of AlarmA mapped to
output

RTC_Output_AlarmB : signal of AlarmB mapped to
output

RTC_Output_WakeUp : signal of WakeUp mapped to
output
RTC_OutputPolarity : Specifies the polarity of the output
signal. This parameter can be one of the following:

RTC_OutputPolarity_High : The output pin is high
when the ALRAF/ALRBF/WUTF is high (depending on
OSEL)

RTC_OutputPolarity_Low : The output pin is low when
the ALRAF/ALRBF/WUTF is high (depending on OSEL)
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581
19.2.30
Digital calibration configuration functions
19.2.30.1 RTC_CalibOutputCmd
Function Name
void RTC_CalibOutputCmd ( FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the RTC clock to be output through the
relative pin.
Parameters

NewState : new state of the digital calibration Output. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
19.2.30.2 RTC_CalibOutputConfig
Function Name
void RTC_CalibOutputConfig ( uint32_t RTC_CalibOutput)
Function Description
Configures the Calibration Pinout (RTC_CALIB) Selection (1Hz or
512Hz).
Parameters

RTC_CalibOutput : : Select the Calibration output Selection
. This parameter can be one of the following values:

RTC_CalibOutput_512Hz : A signal has a regular
waveform at 512Hz.

RTC_CalibOutput_1Hz : A signal has a regular
waveform at 1Hz.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
19.2.30.3 RTC_SmoothCalibConfig
Function Name
ErrorStatus RTC_SmoothCalibConfig ( uint32_t
RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod, uint32_t
RTC_SmoothCalibPlusPulses, uint32_t
RTC_SmouthCalibMinusPulsesValue)
Function Description
Configures the Smooth Calibration Settings.
DocID023800 Rev 1
383/584
Real-time clock (RTC)
Parameters



19.2.31
UM1581
RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod : : Select the Smooth Calibration
Period. This parameter can be can be one of the following
values:

RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod_32sec : The smooth
calibration periode is 32s.

RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod_16sec : The smooth
calibration periode is 16s.

RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod_8sec : The smooth
calibartion periode is 8s.
RTC_SmoothCalibPlusPulses : : Select to Set or reset the
CALP bit. This parameter can be one of the following values:

RTC_SmoothCalibPlusPulses_Set : Add one
RTCCLK puls every 2**11 pulses.

RTC_SmoothCalibPlusPulses_Reset : No RTCCLK
pulses are added.
RTC_SmouthCalibMinusPulsesValue : Select the value of
CALM[8:0] bits. This parameter can be one any value from 0
to 0x000001FF.
Return values

An ErrorStatus enumeration value:

SUCCESS: RTC Calib registers are configured

ERROR: RTC Calib registers are not configured
Notes

None.
Timestamp configuration functions
19.2.31.1 RTC_TimeStampCmd
Function Name
void RTC_TimeStampCmd ( uint32_t RTC_TimeStampEdge,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or Disables the RTC TimeStamp functionality with the
specified time stamp pin stimulating edge.
Parameters


384/584
RTC_TimeStampEdge : Specifies the pin edge on which the
TimeStamp is activated. This parameter can be one of the
following:

RTC_TimeStampEdge_Rising : the Time stamp event
occurs on the rising edge of the related pin.

RTC_TimeStampEdge_Falling : the Time stamp event
occurs on the falling edge of the related pin.
NewState : new state of the TimeStamp. This parameter can
be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581
19.2.31.2 RTC_GetTimeStamp
Function Name
void RTC_GetTimeStamp ( uint32_t RTC_Format,
RTC_TimeTypeDef * RTC_StampTimeStruct,
RTC_DateTypeDef * RTC_StampDateStruct)
Function Description
Gets the RTC TimeStamp value and masks.
Parameters



RTC_Format : specifies the format of the output parameters.
This parameter can be one of the following values:

RTC_Format_BIN : Binary data format

RTC_Format_BCD : BCD data format
RTC_StampTimeStruct : pointer to a RTC_TimeTypeDef
structure that will contains the TimeStamp time values.
RTC_StampDateStruct : pointer to a RTC_DateTypeDef
structure that will contains the TimeStamp date values.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
19.2.31.3 RTC_GetTimeStampSubSecond
19.2.32
Function Name
uint32_t RTC_GetTimeStampSubSecond ( void )
Function Description
Gets the RTC timestamp Subseconds value.
Parameters

None.
Return values

RTC current timestamp Subseconds value.
Notes

None.
Tamper configuration functions
19.2.32.1 RTC_TamperTriggerConfig
Function Name
void RTC_TamperTriggerConfig ( uint32_t RTC_Tamper,
DocID023800 Rev 1
385/584
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581
uint32_t RTC_TamperTrigger)
Function Description
Configures the select Tamper pin edge.
Parameters


RTC_Tamper : Selected tamper pin. This parameter can be
any combination of the following values:

RTC_Tamper_1 : Select Tamper 1.

RTC_Tamper_2 : Select Tamper 2.

RTC_Tamper_3 : Select Tamper 3.
RTC_TamperTrigger : Specifies the trigger on the tamper
pin that stimulates tamper event. This parameter can be one
of the following values:

RTC_TamperTrigger_RisingEdge : Rising Edge of the
tamper pin causes tamper event.

RTC_TamperTrigger_FallingEdge : Falling Edge of
the tamper pin causes tamper event.

RTC_TamperTrigger_LowLevel : Low Level of the
tamper pin causes tamper event.

RTC_TamperTrigger_HighLevel : High Level of the
tamper pin causes tamper event.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
19.2.32.2 RTC_TamperCmd
Function Name
void RTC_TamperCmd ( uint32_t RTC_Tamper,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or Disables the Tamper detection.
Parameters


386/584
RTC_Tamper : Selected tamper pin. This parameter can be
any combination of the following values:

RTC_Tamper_1 : Select Tamper 1.

RTC_Tamper_2 : Select Tamper 2.

RTC_Tamper_3 : Select Tamper 3.
NewState : new state of the tamper pin. This parameter can
be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581
19.2.32.3 RTC_TamperFilterConfig
Function Name
void RTC_TamperFilterConfig ( uint32_t RTC_TamperFilter)
Function Description
Configures the Tampers Filter.
Parameters

RTC_TamperFilter : Specifies the tampers filter. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

RTC_TamperFilter_Disable : Tamper filter is disabled.

RTC_TamperFilter_2Sample : Tamper is activated
after 2 consecutive samples at the active level

RTC_TamperFilter_4Sample : Tamper is activated
after 4 consecutive samples at the active level

RTC_TamperFilter_8Sample : Tamper is activated
after 8 consecutive samples at the active level
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
19.2.32.4 RTC_TamperSamplingFreqConfig
Function Name
void RTC_TamperSamplingFreqConfig ( uint32_t
RTC_TamperSamplingFreq)
Function Description
Configures the Tampers Sampling Frequency.
Parameters

RTC_TamperSamplingFreq : Specifies the tampers
Sampling Frequency. This parameter can be one of the
following values:

RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div32768 :
Each of the tamper inputs are sampled with a frequency
= RTCCLK / 32768

RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div16384 :
Each of the tamper inputs are sampled with a frequency
= RTCCLK / 16384

RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div8192 :
Each of the tamper inputs are sampled with a frequency
= RTCCLK / 8192

RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div4096 :
Each of the tamper inputs are sampled with a frequency
= RTCCLK / 4096

RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div2048 :
Each of the tamper inputs are sampled with a frequency
= RTCCLK / 2048

RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div1024 :
Each of the tamper inputs are sampled with a frequency
= RTCCLK / 1024
DocID023800 Rev 1
387/584
Real-time clock (RTC)


UM1581
RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div512 : Each
of the tamper inputs are sampled with a frequency =
RTCCLK / 512
RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div256 : Each
of the tamper inputs are sampled with a frequency =
RTCCLK / 256
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
19.2.32.5 RTC_TamperPinsPrechargeDuration
Function Name
void RTC_TamperPinsPrechargeDuration ( uint32_t
RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration)
Function Description
Configures the Tampers Pins input Precharge Duration.
Parameters

RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration : Specifies the Tampers
Pins input Precharge Duration. This parameter can be one of
the following values:

RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration_1RTCCLK : Tamper
pins are pre-charged before sampling during 1 RTCCLK
cycle

RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration_2RTCCLK : Tamper
pins are pre-charged before sampling during 2 RTCCLK
cycle

RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration_4RTCCLK : Tamper
pins are pre-charged before sampling during 4 RTCCLK
cycle

RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration_8RTCCLK : Tamper
pins are pre-charged before sampling during 8 RTCCLK
cycle
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
19.2.32.6 RTC_TimeStampOnTamperDetectionCmd
388/584
Function Name
void RTC_TimeStampOnTamperDetectionCmd (
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or Disables the TimeStamp on Tamper Detection Event.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Parameters

Real-time clock (RTC)
NewState : new state of the timestamp on tamper event.
This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

The timestamp is valid even the TSE bit in tamper control
register is reset.
UM1581
19.2.32.7 RTC_TamperPullUpCmd
Function Name
void RTC_TamperPullUpCmd ( FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or Disables the Precharge of Tamper pin.
Parameters

NewState : new state of tamper pull up. This parameter can
be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
19.3
RTC Firmware driver defines
19.3.1
RTC
RTC
RTC_Add_1_Second_Parameter_Definitions

#define: RTC_ShiftAdd1S_Reset ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: RTC_ShiftAdd1S_Set ((uint32_t)0x80000000)
RTC_AlarmDateWeekDay_Definitions

#define: RTC_AlarmDateWeekDaySel_Date ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: RTC_AlarmDateWeekDaySel_WeekDay ((uint32_t)0x40000000)
DocID023800 Rev 1
389/584
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581
RTC_AlarmMask_Definitions

#define: RTC_AlarmMask_None ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: RTC_AlarmMask_DateWeekDay ((uint32_t)0x80000000)

#define: RTC_AlarmMask_Hours ((uint32_t)0x00800000)

#define: RTC_AlarmMask_Minutes ((uint32_t)0x00008000)

#define: RTC_AlarmMask_Seconds ((uint32_t)0x00000080)

#define: RTC_AlarmMask_All ((uint32_t)0x80808080)
RTC_Alarms_Definitions

#define: RTC_Alarm_A ((uint32_t)0x00000100)

#define: RTC_Alarm_B ((uint32_t)0x00000200)
RTC_Alarm_Sub_Seconds_Masks_Definitions

#define: RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_All ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
All Alarm SS fields are masked. There is no comparison on sub seconds for Alarm

#define: RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_1 ((uint32_t)0x01000000)
SS[14:1] are don't care in Alarm comparison. Only SS[0] is compared.

#define: RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_2 ((uint32_t)0x02000000)
SS[14:2] are don't care in Alarm comparison. Only SS[1:0] are compared
390/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581

#define: RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_3 ((uint32_t)0x03000000)
SS[14:3] are don't care in Alarm comparison. Only SS[2:0] are compared

#define: RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_4 ((uint32_t)0x04000000)
SS[14:4] are don't care in Alarm comparison. Only SS[3:0] are compared

#define: RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_5 ((uint32_t)0x05000000)
SS[14:5] are don't care in Alarm comparison. Only SS[4:0] are compared

#define: RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_6 ((uint32_t)0x06000000)
SS[14:6] are don't care in Alarm comparison. Only SS[5:0] are compared

#define: RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_7 ((uint32_t)0x07000000)
SS[14:7] are don't care in Alarm comparison. Only SS[6:0] are compared

#define: RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_8 ((uint32_t)0x08000000)
SS[14:8] are don't care in Alarm comparison. Only SS[7:0] are compared

#define: RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_9 ((uint32_t)0x09000000)
SS[14:9] are don't care in Alarm comparison. Only SS[8:0] are compared

#define: RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_10 ((uint32_t)0x0A000000)
SS[14:10] are don't care in Alarm comparison. Only SS[9:0] are compared

#define: RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_11 ((uint32_t)0x0B000000)
SS[14:11] are don't care in Alarm comparison. Only SS[10:0] are compared

#define: RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_12 ((uint32_t)0x0C000000)
SS[14:12] are don't care in Alarm comparison.Only SS[11:0] are compared

#define: RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_13 ((uint32_t)0x0D000000)
SS[14:13] are don't care in Alarm comparison. Only SS[12:0] are compared

#define: RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14 ((uint32_t)0x0E000000)
SS[14] is don't care in Alarm comparison.Only SS[13:0] are compared
DocID023800 Rev 1
391/584
Real-time clock (RTC)

UM1581
#define: RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_None ((uint32_t)0x0F000000)
SS[14:0] are compared and must match to activate alarm.
RTC_AM_PM_Definitions

#define: RTC_H12_AM ((uint8_t)0x00)

#define: RTC_H12_PM ((uint8_t)0x40)
RTC_Backup_Registers_Definitions
392/584

#define: RTC_BKP_DR0 ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: RTC_BKP_DR1 ((uint32_t)0x00000001)

#define: RTC_BKP_DR2 ((uint32_t)0x00000002)

#define: RTC_BKP_DR3 ((uint32_t)0x00000003)

#define: RTC_BKP_DR4 ((uint32_t)0x00000004)

#define: RTC_BKP_DR5 ((uint32_t)0x00000005)

#define: RTC_BKP_DR6 ((uint32_t)0x00000006)

#define: RTC_BKP_DR7 ((uint32_t)0x00000007)
DocID023800 Rev 1
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581

#define: RTC_BKP_DR8 ((uint32_t)0x00000008)

#define: RTC_BKP_DR9 ((uint32_t)0x00000009)

#define: RTC_BKP_DR10 ((uint32_t)0x0000000A)

#define: RTC_BKP_DR11 ((uint32_t)0x0000000B)

#define: RTC_BKP_DR12 ((uint32_t)0x0000000C)

#define: RTC_BKP_DR13 ((uint32_t)0x0000000D)

#define: RTC_BKP_DR14 ((uint32_t)0x0000000E)

#define: RTC_BKP_DR15 ((uint32_t)0x0000000F)
RTC_Calib_Output_selection_Definitions

#define: RTC_CalibOutput_512Hz ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: RTC_CalibOutput_1Hz ((uint32_t)0x00080000)
RTC_DayLightSaving_Definitions

#define: RTC_DayLightSaving_SUB1H ((uint32_t)0x00020000)

#define: RTC_DayLightSaving_ADD1H ((uint32_t)0x00010000)
DocID023800 Rev 1
393/584
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581

#define: RTC_StoreOperation_Reset ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: RTC_StoreOperation_Set ((uint32_t)0x00040000)
RTC_Digital_Calibration_Definitions

#define: RTC_CalibSign_Positive ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: RTC_CalibSign_Negative ((uint32_t)0x00000080)
RTC_Flags_Definitions
394/584

#define: RTC_FLAG_RECALPF ((uint32_t)0x00010000)

#define: RTC_FLAG_TAMP3F ((uint32_t)0x00008000)

#define: RTC_FLAG_TAMP2F ((uint32_t)0x00004000)

#define: RTC_FLAG_TAMP1F ((uint32_t)0x00002000)

#define: RTC_FLAG_TSOVF ((uint32_t)0x00001000)

#define: RTC_FLAG_TSF ((uint32_t)0x00000800)

#define: RTC_FLAG_WUTF ((uint32_t)0x00000400)
DocID023800 Rev 1
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581

#define: RTC_FLAG_ALRBF ((uint32_t)0x00000200)

#define: RTC_FLAG_ALRAF ((uint32_t)0x00000100)

#define: RTC_FLAG_INITF ((uint32_t)0x00000040)

#define: RTC_FLAG_RSF ((uint32_t)0x00000020)

#define: RTC_FLAG_INITS ((uint32_t)0x00000010)

#define: RTC_FLAG_SHPF ((uint32_t)0x00000008)

#define: RTC_FLAG_WUTWF ((uint32_t)0x00000004)

#define: RTC_FLAG_ALRBWF ((uint32_t)0x00000002)

#define: RTC_FLAG_ALRAWF ((uint32_t)0x00000001)
RTC_Hour_Formats

#define: RTC_HourFormat_24 ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: RTC_HourFormat_12 ((uint32_t)0x00000040)
RTC_Input_parameter_format_definitions
DocID023800 Rev 1
395/584
Real-time clock (RTC)

#define: RTC_Format_BIN ((uint32_t)0x000000000)

#define: RTC_Format_BCD ((uint32_t)0x000000001)
RTC_Interrupts_Definitions

#define: RTC_IT_TS ((uint32_t)0x00008000)

#define: RTC_IT_WUT ((uint32_t)0x00004000)

#define: RTC_IT_ALRB ((uint32_t)0x00002000)

#define: RTC_IT_ALRA ((uint32_t)0x00001000)

#define: RTC_IT_TAMP ((uint32_t)0x00000004)

#define: RTC_IT_TAMP1 ((uint32_t)0x00020000)

#define: RTC_IT_TAMP2 ((uint32_t)0x00040000)

#define: RTC_IT_TAMP3 ((uint32_t)0x00080000)
RTC_Month_Date_Definitions
396/584

#define: RTC_Month_January ((uint8_t)0x01)

#define: RTC_Month_February ((uint8_t)0x02)
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581

#define: RTC_Month_March ((uint8_t)0x03)

#define: RTC_Month_April ((uint8_t)0x04)

#define: RTC_Month_May ((uint8_t)0x05)

#define: RTC_Month_June ((uint8_t)0x06)

#define: RTC_Month_July ((uint8_t)0x07)

#define: RTC_Month_August ((uint8_t)0x08)

#define: RTC_Month_September ((uint8_t)0x09)

#define: RTC_Month_October ((uint8_t)0x10)

#define: RTC_Month_November ((uint8_t)0x11)

#define: RTC_Month_December ((uint8_t)0x12)
RTC_Output_Polarity_Definitions

#define: RTC_OutputPolarity_High ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
DocID023800 Rev 1
397/584
Real-time clock (RTC)

#define: RTC_OutputPolarity_Low ((uint32_t)0x00100000)
UM1581
RTC_Output_selection_Definitions

#define: RTC_Output_Disable ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: RTC_Output_AlarmA ((uint32_t)0x00200000)

#define: RTC_Output_AlarmB ((uint32_t)0x00400000)

#define: RTC_Output_WakeUp ((uint32_t)0x00600000)
RTC_Output_Type_ALARM_OUT

#define: RTC_OutputType_OpenDrain ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: RTC_OutputType_PushPull ((uint32_t)0x00040000)
RTC_Smooth_calib_period_Definitions

#define: RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod_32sec ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
if RTCCLK = 32768 Hz, Smooth calibation period is 32s, else 2exp20 RTCCLK seconds

#define: RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod_16sec ((uint32_t)0x00002000)
if RTCCLK = 32768 Hz, Smooth calibation period is 16s, else 2exp19 RTCCLK seconds

#define: RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod_8sec ((uint32_t)0x00004000)
if RTCCLK = 32768 Hz, Smooth calibation period is 8s, else 2exp18 RTCCLK seconds
RTC_Smooth_calib_Plus_pulses_Definitions

#define: RTC_SmoothCalibPlusPulses_Set ((uint32_t)0x00008000)
The number of RTCCLK pulses added during a X -second window = Y - CALM[8:0]. with Y
= 512, 256, 128 when X = 32, 16, 8
398/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
Real-time clock (RTC)
UM1581

#define: RTC_SmoothCalibPlusPulses_Reset ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
The number of RTCCLK pulses subbstited during a 32-second window = CALM[8:0].
RTC_Tamper_Filter_Definitions

#define: RTC_TamperFilter_Disable ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
Tamper filter is disabled

#define: RTC_TamperFilter_2Sample ((uint32_t)0x00000800)
Tamper is activated after 2 consecutive samples at the active level

#define: RTC_TamperFilter_4Sample ((uint32_t)0x00001000)
Tamper is activated after 4 consecutive samples at the active level

#define: RTC_TamperFilter_8Sample ((uint32_t)0x00001800)
Tamper is activated after 8 consecutive samples at the active leve.
RTC_Tamper_Pins_Definitions

#define: RTC_Tamper_1 RTC_TAFCR_TAMP1E
Tamper detection enable for input tamper 1

#define: RTC_Tamper_2 RTC_TAFCR_TAMP2E
Tamper detection enable for input tamper 2

#define: RTC_Tamper_3 RTC_TAFCR_TAMP3E
Tamper detection enable for input tamper 3
RTC_Tamper_Pin_Precharge_Duration_Definitions

#define: RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration_1RTCCLK ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
Tamper pins are pre-charged before sampling during 1 RTCCLK cycle

#define: RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration_2RTCCLK ((uint32_t)0x00002000)
Tamper pins are pre-charged before sampling during 2 RTCCLK cycles

#define: RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration_4RTCCLK ((uint32_t)0x00004000)
Tamper pins are pre-charged before sampling during 4 RTCCLK cycles
DocID023800 Rev 1
399/584
Real-time clock (RTC)

UM1581
#define: RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration_8RTCCLK ((uint32_t)0x00006000)
Tamper pins are pre-charged before sampling during 8 RTCCLK cycles
RTC_Tamper_Sampling_Frequencies_Definitions

#define: RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div32768 ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
Each of the tamper inputs are sampled with a frequency = RTCCLK / 32768

#define: RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div16384 ((uint32_t)0x000000100)
Each of the tamper inputs are sampled with a frequency = RTCCLK / 16384

#define: RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div8192 ((uint32_t)0x00000200)
Each of the tamper inputs are sampled with a frequency = RTCCLK / 8192

#define: RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div4096 ((uint32_t)0x00000300)
Each of the tamper inputs are sampled with a frequency = RTCCLK / 4096

#define: RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div2048 ((uint32_t)0x00000400)
Each of the tamper inputs are sampled with a frequency = RTCCLK / 2048

#define: RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div1024 ((uint32_t)0x00000500)
Each of the tamper inputs are sampled with a frequency = RTCCLK / 1024

#define: RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div512 ((uint32_t)0x00000600)
Each of the tamper inputs are sampled with a frequency = RTCCLK / 512

#define: RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div256 ((uint32_t)0x00000700)
Each of the tamper inputs are sampled with a frequency = RTCCLK / 256
RTC_Tamper_Trigger_Definitions
400/584

#define: RTC_TamperTrigger_RisingEdge ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: RTC_TamperTrigger_FallingEdge ((uint32_t)0x00000001)
DocID023800 Rev 1

Real-time clock (RTC)
#define: RTC_TamperTrigger_LowLevel ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: RTC_TamperTrigger_HighLevel ((uint32_t)0x00000001)
UM1581
RTC_Time_Stamp_Edges_definitions

#define: RTC_TimeStampEdge_Rising ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: RTC_TimeStampEdge_Falling ((uint32_t)0x00000008)
RTC_Wakeup_Timer_Definitions

#define: RTC_WakeUpClock_RTCCLK_Div16 ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: RTC_WakeUpClock_RTCCLK_Div8 ((uint32_t)0x00000001)

#define: RTC_WakeUpClock_RTCCLK_Div4 ((uint32_t)0x00000002)

#define: RTC_WakeUpClock_RTCCLK_Div2 ((uint32_t)0x00000003)

#define: RTC_WakeUpClock_CK_SPRE_16bits ((uint32_t)0x00000004)

#define: RTC_WakeUpClock_CK_SPRE_17bits ((uint32_t)0x00000006)
RTC_WeekDay_Definitions

#define: RTC_Weekday_Monday ((uint8_t)0x01)
DocID023800 Rev 1
401/584
Real-time clock (RTC)

#define: RTC_Weekday_Tuesday ((uint8_t)0x02)
402/584

#define: RTC_Weekday_Wednesday ((uint8_t)0x03)

#define: RTC_Weekday_Thursday ((uint8_t)0x04)

#define: RTC_Weekday_Friday ((uint8_t)0x05)

#define: RTC_Weekday_Saturday ((uint8_t)0x06)

#define: RTC_Weekday_Sunday ((uint8_t)0x07)
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)
UM1581
20
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)
20.1
SPI Firmware driver registers structures
20.1.1
SPI_TypeDef
SPI_TypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x.h
Data Fields


















__IO uint16_t CR1
uint16_t RESERVED0
__IO uint16_t CR2
uint16_t RESERVED1
__IO uint16_t SR
uint16_t RESERVED2
__IO uint16_t DR
uint16_t RESERVED3
__IO uint16_t CRCPR
uint16_t RESERVED4
__IO uint16_t RXCRCR
uint16_t RESERVED5
__IO uint16_t TXCRCR
uint16_t RESERVED6
__IO uint16_t I2SCFGR
uint16_t RESERVED7
__IO uint16_t I2SPR
uint16_t RESERVED8
Field Documentation









__IO uint16_t SPI_TypeDef::CR1

SPI Control register 1 (not used in I2S mode), Address offset: 0x00
uint16_t SPI_TypeDef::RESERVED0

Reserved, 0x02
__IO uint16_t SPI_TypeDef::CR2

SPI Control register 2, Address offset: 0x04
uint16_t SPI_TypeDef::RESERVED1

Reserved, 0x06
__IO uint16_t SPI_TypeDef::SR

SPI Status register, Address offset: 0x08
uint16_t SPI_TypeDef::RESERVED2

Reserved, 0x0A
__IO uint16_t SPI_TypeDef::DR

SPI data register, Address offset: 0x0C
uint16_t SPI_TypeDef::RESERVED3

Reserved, 0x0E
__IO uint16_t SPI_TypeDef::CRCPR

SPI CRC polynomial register (not used in I2S mode), Address offset: 0x10
DocID023800 Rev 1
403/584
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)









20.1.2
UM1581
uint16_t SPI_TypeDef::RESERVED4

Reserved, 0x12
__IO uint16_t SPI_TypeDef::RXCRCR

SPI Rx CRC register (not used in I2S mode), Address offset: 0x14
uint16_t SPI_TypeDef::RESERVED5

Reserved, 0x16
__IO uint16_t SPI_TypeDef::TXCRCR

SPI Tx CRC register (not used in I2S mode), Address offset: 0x18
uint16_t SPI_TypeDef::RESERVED6

Reserved, 0x1A
__IO uint16_t SPI_TypeDef::I2SCFGR

SPI_I2S configuration register, Address offset: 0x1C
uint16_t SPI_TypeDef::RESERVED7

Reserved, 0x1E
__IO uint16_t SPI_TypeDef::I2SPR

SPI_I2S prescaler register, Address offset: 0x20
uint16_t SPI_TypeDef::RESERVED8

Reserved, 0x22
SPI_InitTypeDef
SPI_InitTypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x_spi.h
Data Fields









uint16_t SPI_Direction
uint16_t SPI_Mode
uint16_t SPI_DataSize
uint16_t SPI_CPOL
uint16_t SPI_CPHA
uint16_t SPI_NSS
uint16_t SPI_BaudRatePrescaler
uint16_t SPI_FirstBit
uint16_t SPI_CRCPolynomial
Field Documentation





404/584
uint16_t SPI_InitTypeDef::SPI_Direction

Specifies the SPI unidirectional or bidirectional data mode. This parameter can
be a value of SPI_data_direction
uint16_t SPI_InitTypeDef::SPI_Mode

Specifies the SPI mode (Master/Slave). This parameter can be a value of
SPI_mode
uint16_t SPI_InitTypeDef::SPI_DataSize

Specifies the SPI data size. This parameter can be a value of SPI_data_size
uint16_t SPI_InitTypeDef::SPI_CPOL

Specifies the serial clock steady state. This parameter can be a value of
SPI_Clock_Polarity
uint16_t SPI_InitTypeDef::SPI_CPHA
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)
Specifies the clock active edge for the bit capture. This parameter can be a value
of SPI_Clock_Phase
uint16_t SPI_InitTypeDef::SPI_NSS

Specifies whether the NSS signal is managed by hardware (NSS pin) or by
software using the SSI bit. This parameter can be a value of
SPI_Slave_Select_management
uint16_t SPI_InitTypeDef::SPI_BaudRatePrescaler

Specifies the Baud Rate prescaler value which will be used to configure the
transmit and receive SCK clock. This parameter can be a value of
SPI_BaudRate_Prescaler.
uint16_t SPI_InitTypeDef::SPI_FirstBit

Specifies whether data transfers start from MSB or LSB bit. This parameter can
be a value of SPI_MSB_LSB_transmission
uint16_t SPI_InitTypeDef::SPI_CRCPolynomial

Specifies the polynomial used for the CRC calculation.





20.1.3
I2S_InitTypeDef
I2S_InitTypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x_spi.h
Data Fields






uint16_t I2S_Mode
uint16_t I2S_Standard
uint16_t I2S_DataFormat
uint16_t I2S_MCLKOutput
uint32_t I2S_AudioFreq
uint16_t I2S_CPOL
Field Documentation






uint16_t I2S_InitTypeDef::I2S_Mode

Specifies the I2S operating mode. This parameter can be a value of I2S_Mode
uint16_t I2S_InitTypeDef::I2S_Standard

Specifies the standard used for the I2S communication. This parameter can be a
value of I2S_Standard
uint16_t I2S_InitTypeDef::I2S_DataFormat

Specifies the data format for the I2S communication. This parameter can be a
value of I2S_Data_Format
uint16_t I2S_InitTypeDef::I2S_MCLKOutput

Specifies whether the I2S MCLK output is enabled or not. This parameter can be
a value of I2S_MCLK_Output
uint32_t I2S_InitTypeDef::I2S_AudioFreq

Specifies the frequency selected for the I2S communication. This parameter can
be a value of I2S_Audio_Frequency
uint16_t I2S_InitTypeDef::I2S_CPOL

Specifies the idle state of the I2S clock. This parameter can be a value of
I2S_Clock_Polarity
DocID023800 Rev 1
405/584
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)
20.2
UM1581
SPI Firmware driver API description
The following section lists the various functions of the SPI library.
20.2.1
How to use this driver
1.
Enable peripheral clock using RCC_APBPeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1,
ENABLE) function for SPI1 or using
RCC_APBPeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI2, ENABLE) function for SPI2.
2.
Enable SCK, MOSI, MISO and NSS GPIO clocks using RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd()
function.
3.
Peripherals alternate function:

Connect the pin to the desired peripherals' Alternate Function (AF) using
GPIO_PinAFConfig() function.

Configure the desired pin in alternate function by: GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode
= GPIO_Mode_AF.

Select the type, pull-up/pull-down and output speed via GPIO_PuPd,
GPIO_OType and GPIO_Speed members.

Call GPIO_Init() function.
4.
Program the Polarity, Phase, First Data, Baud Rate Prescaler, Slave Management,
Peripheral Mode and CRC Polynomial values using the SPI_Init() function in SPI
mode. In I2S mode, program the Mode, Standard, Data Format, MCLK Output, Audio
frequency and Polarity using I2S_Init() function.
5.
Configure the FIFO threshold using SPI_RxFIFOThresholdConfig() to select at which
threshold the RXNE event is generated.
6.
Enable the NVIC and the corresponding interrupt using the function
SPI_I2S_ITConfig() if you need to use interrupt mode.
7.
When using the DMA mode

Configure the DMA using DMA_Init() function.

Active the needed channel Request using SPI_I2S_DMACmd() function.
8.
Enable the SPI using the SPI_Cmd() function or enable the I2S using I2S_Cmd().
9.
Enable the DMA using the DMA_Cmd() function when using DMA mode.
10. Optionally you can enable/configure the following parameters without re-initialization
(i.e there is no need to call again SPI_Init() function):

When bidirectional mode (SPI_Direction_1Line_Rx or SPI_Direction_1Line_Tx)
is programmed as Data direction parameter using the SPI_Init() function it can be
possible to switch between SPI_Direction_Tx or SPI_Direction_Rx using the
SPI_BiDirectionalLineConfig() function.

When SPI_NSS_Soft is selected as Slave Select Management parameter using
the SPI_Init() function it can be possible to manage the NSS internal signal using
the SPI_NSSInternalSoftwareConfig() function.

Reconfigure the data size using the SPI_DataSizeConfig() function.

Enable or disable the SS output using the SPI_SSOutputCmd() function.
11. To use the CRC Hardware calculation feature refer to the Peripheral CRC hardware
Calculation subsection.
It is possible to use SPI in I2S full duplex mode, in this case, each SPI peripheral is able to
manage sending and receiving data simultaneously using two data lines. Each SPI
peripheral has an extended block called I2Sxext (ie. I2S2ext for SPI2 and I2S3ext for
SPI3). The extension block is not a full SPI IP, it is used only as I2S slave to implement full
duplex mode. The extension block uses the same clock sources as its master. To configure
I2S full duplex you have to:
406/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
1.
2.
3.
4.
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)
Configure SPIx in I2S mode (I2S_Init() function) as described above.
Call the I2S_FullDuplexConfig() function using the same strucutre passed to I2S_Init()
function.
Call I2S_Cmd() for SPIx then for its extended block.
Configure interrupts or DMA requests and to get/clear flag status, use I2Sxext
instance for the extension block.
Functions that can be called with I2Sxext instances are: I2S_Cmd(),
I2S_FullDuplexConfig(), SPI_I2S_ReceiveData16(), SPI_I2S_SendData16(),
SPI_I2S_DMACmd(), SPI_I2S_ITConfig(), SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus(), SPI_I2S_ClearFlag(),
SPI_I2S_GetITStatus() and SPI_I2S_ClearITPendingBit().
Example: To use SPI3 in Full duplex mode (SPI3 is Master Tx, I2S3ext is Slave Rx):
RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3, ENABLE);
I2S_StructInit(&I2SInitStruct); I2SInitStruct.Mode = I2S_Mode_MasterTx; I2S_Init(SPI3,
&I2SInitStruct); I2S_FullDuplexConfig(SPI3ext, &I2SInitStruct) I2S_Cmd(SPI3, ENABLE);
I2S_Cmd(SPI3ext, ENABLE); ... while (SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus(SPI2, SPI_FLAG_TXE) ==
RESET) {} SPI_I2S_SendData16(SPI3, txdata[i]); ... while
(SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus(I2S3ext, SPI_FLAG_RXNE) == RESET) {} rxdata[i] =
SPI_I2S_ReceiveData16(I2S3ext); ...
In SPI mode: To use the SPI TI mode, call the function SPI_TIModeCmd() just
after calling the function SPI_Init().
20.2.2
Initialization and Configuration functions
This section provides a set of functions allowing to initialize the SPI Direction, SPI Mode,
SPI Data Size, SPI Polarity, SPI Phase, SPI NSS Management, SPI Baud Rate Prescaler,
SPI First Bit and SPI CRC Polynomial.
The SPI_Init() function follows the SPI configuration procedures for Master mode and
Slave mode (details for these procedures are available in reference manual).
When the Software NSS management (SPI_InitStruct->SPI_NSS = SPI_NSS_Soft) is
selected, use the following function to manage the NSS bit: void
SPI_NSSInternalSoftwareConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_NSSInternalSoft);
In Master mode, when the Hardware NSS management (SPI_InitStruct->SPI_NSS =
SPI_NSS_Hard) is selected, use the follwoing function to enable the NSS output feature.
void SPI_SSOutputCmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, FunctionalState NewState);
The NSS pulse mode can be managed by the SPI TI mode when enabling it using the
following function: void SPI_TIModeCmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, FunctionalState NewState);
And it can be managed by software in the SPI Motorola mode using this function: void
SPI_NSSPulseModeCmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, FunctionalState NewState);
This section provides also functions to initialize the I2S Mode, Standard, Data Format,
MCLK Output, Audio frequency and Polarity.
The I2S_Init() function follows the I2S configuration procedures for Master mode and
Slave mode.



SPI_I2S_DeInit()
SPI_StructInit()
SPI_Init()
DocID023800 Rev 1
407/584
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)












20.2.3
UM1581
I2S_StructInit()
I2S_Init()
SPI_Cmd()
SPI_TIModeCmd()
I2S_Cmd()
SPI_DataSizeConfig()
SPI_RxFIFOThresholdConfig()
SPI_BiDirectionalLineConfig()
SPI_NSSInternalSoftwareConfig()
I2S_FullDuplexConfig()
SPI_SSOutputCmd()
SPI_NSSPulseModeCmd()
Data transfers functions
This section provides a set of functions allowing to manage the SPI or I2S data transfers.
In reception, data are received and then stored into an internal Rx buffer while In
transmission, data are first stored into an internal Tx buffer before being transmitted.
The read access of the SPI_DR register can be done using the SPI_I2S_ReceiveData()
function and returns the Rx buffered value. Whereas a write access to the SPI_DR can be
done using SPI_I2S_SendData() function and stores the written data into Tx buffer.




20.2.4
SPI_SendData8()
SPI_I2S_SendData16()
SPI_ReceiveData8()
SPI_I2S_ReceiveData16()
Hardware CRC Calculation functions
This section provides a set of functions allowing to manage the SPI CRC hardware
calculation.
SPI communication using CRC is possible through the following procedure:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Program the Data direction, Polarity, Phase, First Data, Baud Rate Prescaler, Slave
Management, Peripheral Mode and CRC Polynomial values using the SPI_Init()
function.
Enable the CRC calculation using the SPI_CalculateCRC() function.
Enable the SPI using the SPI_Cmd() function
Before writing the last data to the TX buffer, set the CRCNext bit using the
SPI_TransmitCRC() function to indicate that after transmission of the last data, the
CRC should be transmitted.
After transmitting the last data, the SPI transmits the CRC. The SPI_CR1_CRCNEXT
bit is reset. The CRC is also received and compared against the SPI_RXCRCR value.
If the value does not match, the SPI_FLAG_CRCERR flag is set and an interrupt can
be generated when the SPI_I2S_IT_ERR interrupt is enabled.


408/584
It is advised to don't read the calculate CRC values during the
communication.
When the SPI is in slave mode, be careful to enable CRC calculation only
when the clock is stable, that is, when the clock is in the steady state. If not,
a wrong CRC calculation may be done. In fact, the CRC is sensitive to the
DocID023800 Rev 1
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)
UM1581





SCK slave input clock as soon as CRCEN is set, and this, whatever the
value of the SPE bit.
With high bitrate frequencies, be careful when transmitting the CRC. As the
number of used CPU cycles has to be as low as possible in the CRC transfer
phase, it is forbidden to call software functions in the CRC transmission
sequence to avoid errors in the last data and CRC reception. In fact,
CRCNEXT bit has to be written before the end of the transmission/reception
of the last data.
For high bit rate frequencies, it is advised to use the DMA mode to avoid the
degradation of the SPI speed performance due to CPU accesses impacting
the SPI bandwidth.
When the STM32F30x are configured as slaves and the NSS hardware
mode is used, the NSS pin needs to be kept low between the data phase and
the CRC phase.
When the SPI is configured in slave mode with the CRC feature enabled,
CRC calculation takes place even if a high level is applied on the NSS pin.
This may happen for example in case of a multislave environment where the
communication master addresses slaves alternately.
Between a slave deselection (high level on NSS) and a new slave selection
(low level on NSS), the CRC value should be cleared on both master and
slave sides in order to resynchronize the master and slave for their
respective CRC calculation.
To clear the CRC, follow the procedure below:
1.
2.
3.
4.





20.2.5
SPI_CRCLengthConfig()
SPI_CalculateCRC()
SPI_TransmitCRC()
SPI_GetCRC()
SPI_GetCRCPolynomial()
DMA transfers management functions


20.2.6
Disable SPI using the SPI_Cmd() function.
Disable the CRC calculation using the SPI_CalculateCRC() function.
Enable the CRC calculation using the SPI_CalculateCRC() function.
Enable SPI using the SPI_Cmd() function.
SPI_I2S_DMACmd()
SPI_LastDMATransferCmd()
Interrupts and flags management functions
This section provides a set of functions allowing to configure the SPI/I2S Interrupts
sources and check or clear the flags or pending bits status. The user should identify which
mode will be used in his application to manage the communication: Polling mode, Interrupt
mode or DMA mode.
Polling Mode
In Polling Mode, the SPI/I2S communication can be managed by 9 flags:
DocID023800 Rev 1
409/584
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)
UM1581
1.
SPI_I2S_FLAG_TXE : to indicate the status of the transmit buffer register.
2.
SPI_I2S_FLAG_RXNE : to indicate the status of the receive buffer register.
3.
SPI_I2S_FLAG_BSY : to indicate the state of the communication layer of the SPI.
4.
SPI_FLAG_CRCERR : to indicate if a CRC Calculation error occur.
5.
SPI_FLAG_MODF : to indicate if a Mode Fault error occur.
6.
SPI_I2S_FLAG_OVR : to indicate if an Overrun error occur.
7.
SPI_I2S_FLAG_FRE: to indicate a Frame Format error occurs.
8.
I2S_FLAG_UDR: to indicate an Underrun error occurs.
9.
I2S_FLAG_CHSIDE: to indicate Channel Side.
Do not use the BSY flag to handle each data transmission or reception. It is
better to use the TXE and RXNE flags instead.
In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:


FlagStatus SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_I2S_FLAG);
void SPI_I2S_ClearFlag(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_I2S_FLAG);
Interrupt Mode
In Interrupt Mode, the SPI/I2S communication can be managed by 3 interrupt sources and
5 pending bits:
Pending Bits:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
SPI_I2S_IT_TXE : to indicate the status of the transmit buffer register.
SPI_I2S_IT_RXNE : to indicate the status of the receive buffer register.
SPI_I2S_IT_OVR : to indicate if an Overrun error occur.
I2S_IT_UDR : to indicate an Underrun Error occurs.
SPI_I2S_FLAG_FRE : to indicate a Frame Format error occurs.
Interrupt Source:
1.
2.
3.
SPI_I2S_IT_TXE: specifies the interrupt source for the Tx buffer empty interrupt.
SPI_I2S_IT_RXNE : specifies the interrupt source for the Rx buffer not empty
interrupt.
SPI_I2S_IT_ERR : specifies the interrupt source for the errors interrupt.
In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:


void SPI_I2S_ITConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint8_t SPI_I2S_IT, FunctionalState
NewState);
ITStatus SPI_I2S_GetITStatus(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint8_t SPI_I2S_IT);
FIFO Status
It is possible to monitor the FIFO status when a transfer is ongoing using the following
function:

uint32_t SPI_GetFIFOStatus(uint8_t SPI_FIFO_Direction);
DMA Mode
In DMA Mode, the SPI communication can be managed by 2 DMA Channel requests:
1.
2.
SPI_I2S_DMAReq_Tx: specifies the Tx buffer DMA transfer request.
SPI_I2S_DMAReq_Rx: specifies the Rx buffer DMA transfer request.
In this Mode it is advised to use the following function:
410/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581







Serial peripheral interface (SPI)
void SPI_I2S_DMACmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_I2S_DMAReq,
FunctionalState NewState);
SPI_I2S_ITConfig()
SPI_GetTransmissionFIFOStatus()
SPI_GetReceptionFIFOStatus()
SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus()
SPI_I2S_ClearFlag()
SPI_I2S_GetITStatus()
20.2.7
Initialization and configuration functions
20.2.7.1
SPI_I2S_DeInit
20.2.7.2
20.2.7.3
Function Name
void SPI_I2S_DeInit ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx)
Function Description
Deinitializes the SPIx peripheral registers to their default reset
values.
Parameters

SPIx : To select the SPIx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2 or
3 in SPI mode.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
SPI_StructInit
Function Name
void SPI_StructInit ( SPI_InitTypeDef * SPI_InitStruct)
Function Description
Fills each SPI_InitStruct member with its default value.
Parameters

SPI_InitStruct : pointer to a SPI_InitTypeDef structure which
will be initialized.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
SPI_Init
Function Name
void SPI_Init ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx, SPI_InitTypeDef *
DocID023800 Rev 1
411/584
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)
UM1581
SPI_InitStruct)
20.2.7.4
20.2.7.5
412/584
Function Description
Initializes the SPIx peripheral according to the specified
parameters in the SPI_InitStruct.
Parameters


SPIx : where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
SPI_InitStruct : pointer to a SPI_InitTypeDef structure that
contains the configuration information for the specified SPI
peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
I2S_StructInit
Function Name
void I2S_StructInit ( I2S_InitTypeDef * I2S_InitStruct)
Function Description
Fills each I2S_InitStruct member with its default value.
Parameters

I2S_InitStruct : : pointer to a I2S_InitTypeDef structure
which will be initialized.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
I2S_Init
Function Name
void I2S_Init ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx, I2S_InitTypeDef *
I2S_InitStruct)
Function Description
Initializes the SPIx peripheral according to the specified
parameters in the I2S_InitStruct.
Parameters


SPIx:To : select the SPIx peripheral, where x can be: 2 or 3
in I2S mode.
I2S_InitStruct : pointer to an I2S_InitTypeDef structure that
contains the configuration information for the specified SPI
peripheral configured in I2S mode.
Return values

None.
Notes

The function calculates the optimal prescaler needed to
obtain the most accurate audio frequency (depending on the
I2S clock source, the PLL values and the product
DocID023800 Rev 1
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)
configuration). But in case the prescaler value is greater than
511, the default value (0x02) will be configured instead.
UM1581
20.2.7.6
20.2.7.7
SPI_Cmd
Function Name
void SPI_Cmd ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx, FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the specified SPI peripheral.
Parameters


SPIx : where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
NewState : new state of the SPIx peripheral. This parameter
can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
SPI_TIModeCmd
Function Name
void SPI_TIModeCmd ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx, FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the TI Mode.
Parameters


SPIx : where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
NewState : new state of the selected SPI TI communication
mode. This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

This function can be called only after the SPI_Init() function
has been called.
When TI mode is selected, the control bits SSM, SSI, CPOL
and CPHA are not taken into consideration and are
configured by hardware respectively to the TI mode
requirements.

DocID023800 Rev 1
413/584
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)
20.2.7.8
20.2.7.9
414/584
UM1581
I2S_Cmd
Function Name
void I2S_Cmd ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx, FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the specified SPI peripheral (in I2S mode).
Parameters


SPIx:To : select the SPIx peripheral, where x can be: 2 or 3
in I2S mode or I2Sxext for I2S full duplex mode.
NewState : new state of the SPIx peripheral. This parameter
can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
SPI_DataSizeConfig
Function Name
void SPI_DataSizeConfig ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx, uint16_t
SPI_DataSize)
Function Description
Configures the data size for the selected SPI.
Parameters


SPIx : where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
SPI_DataSize : specifies the SPI data size. For the SPIx
peripheral this parameter can be one of the following values:

SPI_DataSize_4b : Set data size to 4 bits

SPI_DataSize_5b : Set data size to 5 bits

SPI_DataSize_6b : Set data size to 6 bits

SPI_DataSize_7b : Set data size to 7 bits

SPI_DataSize_8b : Set data size to 8 bits

SPI_DataSize_9b : Set data size to 9 bits

SPI_DataSize_10b : Set data size to 10 bits

SPI_DataSize_11b : Set data size to 11 bits

SPI_DataSize_12b : Set data size to 12 bits

SPI_DataSize_13b : Set data size to 13 bits

SPI_DataSize_14b : Set data size to 14 bits

SPI_DataSize_15b : Set data size to 15 bits

SPI_DataSize_16b : Set data size to 16 bits
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)
UM1581
20.2.7.10 SPI_RxFIFOThresholdConfig
Function Name
void SPI_RxFIFOThresholdConfig ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx,
uint16_t SPI_RxFIFOThreshold)
Function Description
Configures the FIFO reception threshold for the selected SPI.
Parameters


SPIx : where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
SPI_RxFIFOThreshold : specifies the FIFO reception
threshold. This parameter can be one of the following values:

SPI_RxFIFOThreshold_HF : RXNE event is generated
if the FIFO level is greater or equal to 1/2.

SPI_RxFIFOThreshold_QF : RXNE event is generated
if the FIFO level is greater or equal to 1/4.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
20.2.7.11 SPI_BiDirectionalLineConfig
Function Name
void SPI_BiDirectionalLineConfig ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx,
uint16_t SPI_Direction)
Function Description
Selects the data transfer direction in bidirectional mode for the
specified SPI.
Parameters


SPIx : where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
SPI_Direction : specifies the data transfer direction in
bidirectional mode. This parameter can be one of the
following values:

SPI_Direction_Tx : Selects Tx transmission direction

SPI_Direction_Rx : Selects Rx receive direction
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
415/584
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)
UM1581
20.2.7.12 SPI_NSSInternalSoftwareConfig
Function Name
void SPI_NSSInternalSoftwareConfig ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx,
uint16_t SPI_NSSInternalSoft)
Function Description
Configures internally by software the NSS pin for the selected
SPI.
Parameters


SPIx : where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
SPI_NSSInternalSoft : specifies the SPI NSS internal state.
This parameter can be one of the following values:

SPI_NSSInternalSoft_Set : Set NSS pin internally

SPI_NSSInternalSoft_Reset : Reset NSS pin internally
Return values

None.
Notes

This function can be called only after the SPI_Init() function
has been called.
20.2.7.13 I2S_FullDuplexConfig
Function Name
void I2S_FullDuplexConfig ( SPI_TypeDef * I2Sxext,
I2S_InitTypeDef * I2S_InitStruct)
Function Description
Configures the full duplex mode for the I2Sx peripheral using its
extension I2Sxext according to the specified parameters in the
I2S_InitStruct.
Parameters


I2Sxext : where x can be 2 or 3 to select the I2S peripheral
extension block.
I2S_InitStruct : pointer to an I2S_InitTypeDef structure that
contains the configuration information for the specified I2S
peripheral extension.
Return values

None.
Notes

The structure pointed by I2S_InitStruct parameter should be
the same used for the master I2S peripheral. In this case, if
the master is configured as transmitter, the slave will be
receiver and vice versa. Or you can force a different mode by
modifying the field I2S_Mode to the value I2S_SlaveRx or
I2S_SlaveTx indepedently of the master configuration.
The I2S full duplex extension can be configured in slave
mode only.

416/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)
UM1581
20.2.7.14 SPI_SSOutputCmd
Function Name
void SPI_SSOutputCmd ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the SS output for the selected SPI.
Parameters


SPIx : where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
NewState : new state of the SPIx SS output. This parameter
can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

This function can be called only after the SPI_Init() function
has been called and the NSS hardware management mode is
selected.
20.2.7.15 SPI_NSSPulseModeCmd
Function Name
void SPI_NSSPulseModeCmd ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the NSS pulse management mode.
Parameters


SPIx : where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
NewState : new state of the NSS pulse management mode.
This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

This function can be called only after the SPI_Init() function
has been called.
When TI mode is selected, the control bits NSSP is not taken
into consideration and are configured by hardware
respectively to the TI mode requirements.

DocID023800 Rev 1
417/584
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)
UM1581
20.2.8
Data transfer functions
20.2.8.1
SPI_SendData8
20.2.8.2
20.2.8.3
418/584
Function Name
void SPI_SendData8 ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx, uint8_t Data)
Function Description
Transmits a Data through the SPIx peripheral.
Parameters


SPIx : where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
Data : Data to be transmitted.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
SPI_I2S_SendData16
Function Name
void SPI_I2S_SendData16 ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx, uint16_t
Data)
Function Description
Transmits a Data through the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral.
Parameters


SPIx : To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1,
2 or 3 in SPI mode or 2 or 3 in I2S mode or I2Sxext for I2S full
duplex mode.
Data : Data to be transmitted.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
SPI_ReceiveData8
Function Name
uint8_t SPI_ReceiveData8 ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx)
Function Description
Returns the most recent received data by the SPIx peripheral.
Parameters

SPIx : where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
Return values

The value of the received data.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)
UM1581
20.2.8.4
SPI_I2S_ReceiveData16
Function Name
uint16_t SPI_I2S_ReceiveData16 ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx)
Function Description
Returns the most recent received data by the SPIx peripheral.
Parameters

SPIx : To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1,
2 or 3 in SPI mode or 2 or 3 in I2S mode or I2Sxext for I2S full
duplex mode.
Return values

The value of the received data.
Notes

None.
20.2.9
Hardware CRC Calculation functions
20.2.9.1
SPI_CRCLengthConfig
Function Name
void SPI_CRCLengthConfig ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx, uint16_t
SPI_CRCLength)
Function Description
Configures the CRC calculation length for the selected SPI.
Parameters


SPIx : where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
SPI_CRCLength : specifies the SPI CRC calculation length.
This parameter can be one of the following values:

SPI_CRCLength_8b : Set CRC Calculation to 8 bits

SPI_CRCLength_16b : Set CRC Calculation to 16 bits
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
419/584
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)
20.2.9.2
20.2.9.3
20.2.9.4
420/584
UM1581
SPI_CalculateCRC
Function Name
void SPI_CalculateCRC ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx, FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the CRC value calculation of the transferred
bytes.
Parameters


SPIx : where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
NewState : new state of the SPIx CRC value calculation.
This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
SPI_TransmitCRC
Function Name
void SPI_TransmitCRC ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx)
Function Description
Transmits the SPIx CRC value.
Parameters

SPIx : where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
SPI_GetCRC
Function Name
uint16_t SPI_GetCRC ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx, uint8_t SPI_CRC)
Function Description
Returns the transmit or the receive CRC register value for the
specified SPI.
Parameters


SPIx : where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
SPI_CRC : specifies the CRC register to be read. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

SPI_CRC_Tx : Selects Tx CRC register

SPI_CRC_Rx : Selects Rx CRC register
Return values

The selected CRC register value..
DocID023800 Rev 1
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)
UM1581
Notes
20.2.9.5
20.2.10

None.
SPI_GetCRCPolynomial
Function Name
uint16_t SPI_GetCRCPolynomial ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx)
Function Description
Returns the CRC Polynomial register value for the specified SPI.
Parameters

SPIx : where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
Return values

The CRC Polynomial register value.
Notes

None.
DMA transfers management functions
20.2.10.1 SPI_I2S_DMACmd
Function Name
void SPI_I2S_DMACmd ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx, uint16_t
SPI_I2S_DMAReq, FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the SPIx/I2Sx DMA interface.
Parameters



SPIx:To : select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1,
2 or 3 in SPI mode or 2 or 3 in I2S mode or I2Sxext for I2S full
duplex mode.
SPI_I2S_DMAReq : specifies the SPI DMA transfer request
to be enabled or disabled. This parameter can be any
combination of the following values:

SPI_I2S_DMAReq_Tx : Tx buffer DMA transfer request

SPI_I2S_DMAReq_Rx : Rx buffer DMA transfer request
NewState : new state of the selected SPI DMA transfer
request. This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
421/584
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)
UM1581
20.2.10.2 SPI_LastDMATransferCmd
20.2.11
Function Name
void SPI_LastDMATransferCmd ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx,
uint16_t SPI_LastDMATransfer)
Function Description
Configures the number of data to transfer type(Even/Odd) for the
DMA last transfers and for the selected SPI.
Parameters


SPIx : where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
SPI_LastDMATransfer : specifies the SPI last DMA
transfers state. This parameter can be one of the following
values:

SPI_LastDMATransfer_TxEvenRxEven : Number of
data for transmission Even and number of data for
reception Even.

SPI_LastDMATransfer_TxOddRxEven : Number of
data for transmission Odd and number of data for
reception Even.

SPI_LastDMATransfer_TxEvenRxOdd : Number of
data for transmission Even and number of data for
reception Odd.

SPI_LastDMATransfer_TxOddRxOdd : RNumber of
data for transmission Odd and number of data for
reception Odd.
Return values

None.
Notes

This function have a meaning only if DMA mode is selected
and if the packing mode is used (data length <= 8 and DMA
transfer size halfword)
Interrupts and flags management functions
20.2.11.1 SPI_I2S_ITConfig
Function Name
void SPI_I2S_ITConfig ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx, uint8_t
SPI_I2S_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the specified SPI/I2S interrupts.
Parameters


422/584
SPIx : To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1,
2 or 3 in SPI mode or 2 or 3 in I2S mode or I2Sxext for I2S full
duplex mode.
SPI_I2S_IT : specifies the SPI interrupt source to be enabled
or disabled. This parameter can be one of the following
values:

SPI_I2S_IT_TXE : Tx buffer empty interrupt mask

SPI_I2S_IT_RXNE : Rx buffer not empty interrupt mask
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

SPI_I2S_IT_ERR : Error interrupt mask
NewState : new state of the specified SPI interrupt. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
20.2.11.2 SPI_GetTransmissionFIFOStatus
Function Name
uint16_t SPI_GetTransmissionFIFOStatus ( SPI_TypeDef *
SPIx)
Function Description
Returns the current SPIx Transmission FIFO filled level.
Parameters

SPIx : where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
Return values

The Transmission FIFO filling state.

SPI_TransmissionFIFOStatus_Empty: when FIFO is
empty

SPI_TransmissionFIFOStatus_1QuarterFull: if more
than 1 quarter-full.

SPI_TransmissionFIFOStatus_HalfFull: if more than
1 half-full.

SPI_TransmissionFIFOStatus_Full: when FIFO is full.
Notes

None.
20.2.11.3 SPI_GetReceptionFIFOStatus
Function Name
uint16_t SPI_GetReceptionFIFOStatus ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx)
Function Description
Returns the current SPIx Reception FIFO filled level.
Parameters

SPIx : where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
Return values

The Reception FIFO filling state.

SPI_ReceptionFIFOStatus_Empty: when FIFO is
empty

SPI_ReceptionFIFOStatus_1QuarterFull: if more than
1 quarter-full.

SPI_ReceptionFIFOStatus_HalfFull: if more than 1
half-full.

SPI_ReceptionFIFOStatus_Full: when FIFO is full.
DocID023800 Rev 1
423/584
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)
Notes
UM1581

None.
20.2.11.4 SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus
Function Name
FlagStatus SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx,
uint16_t SPI_I2S_FLAG)
Function Description
Checks whether the specified SPI flag is set or not.
Parameters


SPIx : To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1,
2 or 3 in SPI mode or 2 or 3 in I2S mode or I2Sxext for I2S full
duplex mode.
SPI_I2S_FLAG : specifies the SPI flag to check. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

SPI_I2S_FLAG_TXE : Transmit buffer empty flag.

SPI_I2S_FLAG_RXNE : Receive buffer not empty flag.

SPI_I2S_FLAG_BSY : Busy flag.

SPI_I2S_FLAG_OVR : Overrun flag.

SPI_I2S_FLAG_MODF : Mode Fault flag.

SPI_I2S_FLAG_CRCERR : CRC Error flag.

SPI_I2S_FLAG_FRE : TI frame format error flag.

I2S_FLAG_UDR : Underrun Error flag.

I2S_FLAG_CHSIDE : Channel Side flag.
Return values

The new state of SPI_I2S_FLAG (SET or RESET).
Notes

None.
20.2.11.5 SPI_I2S_ClearFlag
Function Name
void SPI_I2S_ClearFlag ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx, uint16_t
SPI_I2S_FLAG)
Function Description
Clears the SPIx CRC Error (CRCERR) flag.
Parameters


424/584
SPIx : To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1,
2 or 3 in SPI mode or 2 or 3 in I2S mode or I2Sxext for I2S full
duplex mode.
SPI_I2S_FLAG : specifies the SPI flag to clear. This function
clears only CRCERR flag.
Return values

None.
Notes

OVR (OverRun error) flag is cleared by software sequence: a
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)
read operation to SPI_DR register (SPI_I2S_ReceiveData())
followed by a read operation to SPI_SR register
(SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus()).
MODF (Mode Fault) flag is cleared by software sequence: a
read/write operation to SPI_SR register
(SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus()) followed by a write operation to
SPI_CR1 register (SPI_Cmd() to enable the SPI).
20.2.11.6 SPI_I2S_GetITStatus
Function Name
ITStatus SPI_I2S_GetITStatus ( SPI_TypeDef * SPIx, uint8_t
SPI_I2S_IT)
Function Description
Checks whether the specified SPI/I2S interrupt has occurred or
not.
Parameters


SPIx : To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1,
2 or 3 in SPI mode or 2 or 3 in I2S mode or I2Sxext for I2S full
duplex mode.
SPI_I2S_IT : specifies the SPI interrupt source to check. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

SPI_I2S_IT_TXE : Transmit buffer empty interrupt.

SPI_I2S_IT_RXNE : Receive buffer not empty interrupt.

SPI_IT_MODF : Mode Fault interrupt.

SPI_I2S_IT_OVR : Overrun interrupt.

I2S_IT_UDR : Underrun interrupt.

SPI_I2S_IT_FRE : Format Error interrupt.
Return values

The new state of SPI_I2S_IT (SET or RESET).
Notes

None.
20.3
SPI Firmware driver defines
20.3.1
SPI
SPI
SPI_BaudRate_Prescaler

#define: SPI_BaudRatePrescaler_2 ((uint16_t)0x0000)

#define: SPI_BaudRatePrescaler_4 ((uint16_t)0x0008)
DocID023800 Rev 1
425/584
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)
UM1581

#define: SPI_BaudRatePrescaler_8 ((uint16_t)0x0010)

#define: SPI_BaudRatePrescaler_16 ((uint16_t)0x0018)

#define: SPI_BaudRatePrescaler_32 ((uint16_t)0x0020)

#define: SPI_BaudRatePrescaler_64 ((uint16_t)0x0028)

#define: SPI_BaudRatePrescaler_128 ((uint16_t)0x0030)

#define: SPI_BaudRatePrescaler_256 ((uint16_t)0x0038)
SPI_Clock_Phase

#define: SPI_CPHA_1Edge ((uint16_t)0x0000)

#define: SPI_CPHA_2Edge ((uint16_t)0x0001)
SPI_Clock_Polarity

#define: SPI_CPOL_Low ((uint16_t)0x0000)

#define: SPI_CPOL_High ((uint16_t)0x0002)
SPI_CRC_length

426/584
#define: SPI_CRCLength_8b ((uint16_t)0x0000)
DocID023800 Rev 1
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)
UM1581

#define: SPI_CRCLength_16b ((uint16_t)0x0800)
SPI_CRC_Transmit_Receive

#define: SPI_CRC_Tx ((uint8_t)0x00)

#define: SPI_CRC_Rx ((uint8_t)0x01)
SPI_data_direction

#define: SPI_Direction_2Lines_FullDuplex ((uint16_t)0x0000)

#define: SPI_Direction_2Lines_RxOnly ((uint16_t)0x0400)

#define: SPI_Direction_1Line_Rx ((uint16_t)0x8000)

#define: SPI_Direction_1Line_Tx ((uint16_t)0xC000)
SPI_data_size

#define: SPI_DataSize_4b ((uint16_t)0x0300)

#define: SPI_DataSize_5b ((uint16_t)0x0400)

#define: SPI_DataSize_6b ((uint16_t)0x0500)

#define: SPI_DataSize_7b ((uint16_t)0x0600)
DocID023800 Rev 1
427/584
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)
UM1581

#define: SPI_DataSize_8b ((uint16_t)0x0700)

#define: SPI_DataSize_9b ((uint16_t)0x0800)

#define: SPI_DataSize_10b ((uint16_t)0x0900)

#define: SPI_DataSize_11b ((uint16_t)0x0A00)

#define: SPI_DataSize_12b ((uint16_t)0x0B00)

#define: SPI_DataSize_13b ((uint16_t)0x0C00)

#define: SPI_DataSize_14b ((uint16_t)0x0D00)

#define: SPI_DataSize_15b ((uint16_t)0x0E00)

#define: SPI_DataSize_16b ((uint16_t)0x0F00)
SPI_direction_transmit_receive
428/584

#define: SPI_Direction_Rx ((uint16_t)0xBFFF)

#define: SPI_Direction_Tx ((uint16_t)0x4000)
DocID023800 Rev 1
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)
UM1581
SPI_FIFO_reception_threshold

#define: SPI_RxFIFOThreshold_HF ((uint16_t)0x0000)

#define: SPI_RxFIFOThreshold_QF ((uint16_t)0x1000)
SPI_I2S_DMA_transfer_requests

#define: SPI_I2S_DMAReq_Tx ((uint16_t)0x0002)

#define: SPI_I2S_DMAReq_Rx ((uint16_t)0x0001)
SPI_I2S_flags_definition

#define: SPI_I2S_FLAG_RXNE ((uint16_t)0x0001)

#define: SPI_I2S_FLAG_TXE ((uint16_t)0x0002)

#define: I2S_FLAG_CHSIDE ((uint16_t)0x0004)

#define: I2S_FLAG_UDR ((uint16_t)0x0008)

#define: SPI_FLAG_CRCERR ((uint16_t)0x0010)

#define: SPI_FLAG_MODF ((uint16_t)0x0020)

#define: SPI_I2S_FLAG_OVR ((uint16_t)0x0040)
DocID023800 Rev 1
429/584
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

#define: SPI_I2S_FLAG_BSY ((uint16_t)0x0080)

#define: SPI_I2S_FLAG_FRE ((uint16_t)0x0100)
SPI_I2S_interrupts_definition

#define: SPI_I2S_IT_TXE ((uint8_t)0x71)

#define: SPI_I2S_IT_RXNE ((uint8_t)0x60)

#define: SPI_I2S_IT_ERR ((uint8_t)0x50)

#define: I2S_IT_UDR ((uint8_t)0x53)

#define: SPI_IT_MODF ((uint8_t)0x55)

#define: SPI_I2S_IT_OVR ((uint8_t)0x56)

#define: SPI_I2S_IT_FRE ((uint8_t)0x58)
SPI_last_DMA_transfers
430/584

#define: SPI_LastDMATransfer_TxEvenRxEven ((uint16_t)0x0000)

#define: SPI_LastDMATransfer_TxOddRxEven ((uint16_t)0x4000)

#define: SPI_LastDMATransfer_TxEvenRxOdd ((uint16_t)0x2000)
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)
UM1581

#define: SPI_LastDMATransfer_TxOddRxOdd ((uint16_t)0x6000)
SPI_mode

#define: SPI_Mode_Master ((uint16_t)0x0104)

#define: SPI_Mode_Slave ((uint16_t)0x0000)
SPI_MSB_LSB_transmission

#define: SPI_FirstBit_MSB ((uint16_t)0x0000)

#define: SPI_FirstBit_LSB ((uint16_t)0x0080)
SPI_NSS_internal_software_management

#define: SPI_NSSInternalSoft_Set ((uint16_t)0x0100)

#define: SPI_NSSInternalSoft_Reset ((uint16_t)0xFEFF)
SPI_reception_fifo_status_level

#define: SPI_ReceptionFIFOStatus_Empty ((uint16_t)0x0000)

#define: SPI_ReceptionFIFOStatus_1QuarterFull ((uint16_t)0x0200)

#define: SPI_ReceptionFIFOStatus_HalfFull ((uint16_t)0x0400)
DocID023800 Rev 1
431/584
Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

#define: SPI_ReceptionFIFOStatus_Full ((uint16_t)0x0600)
SPI_Slave_Select_management

#define: SPI_NSS_Soft ((uint16_t)0x0200)

#define: SPI_NSS_Hard ((uint16_t)0x0000)
SPI_transmission_fifo_status_level
432/584

#define: SPI_TransmissionFIFOStatus_Empty ((uint16_t)0x0000)

#define: SPI_TransmissionFIFOStatus_1QuarterFull ((uint16_t)0x0800)

#define: SPI_TransmissionFIFOStatus_HalfFull ((uint16_t)0x1000)

#define: SPI_TransmissionFIFOStatus_Full ((uint16_t)0x1800)
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
System configuration controller (SYSCFG)
UM1581
21
System configuration controller (SYSCFG)
21.1
SYSCFG Firmware driver registers structures
21.1.1
SYSCFG_TypeDef
SYSCFG_TypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x.h
Data Fields




__IO uint32_t CFGR1
__IO uint32_t RCR
__IO uint32_t EXTICR
__IO uint32_t CFGR2
Field Documentation




21.2
__IO uint32_t SYSCFG_TypeDef::CFGR1

SYSCFG configuration register 1, Address offset: 0x00
__IO uint32_t SYSCFG_TypeDef::RCR

SYSCFG CCM SRAM protection register, Address offset: 0x04
__IO uint32_t SYSCFG_TypeDef::EXTICR[4]

SYSCFG external interrupt configuration registers, Address offset: 0x14-0x08
__IO uint32_t SYSCFG_TypeDef::CFGR2

SYSCFG configuration register 2, Address offset: 0x18
SYSCFG Firmware driver API description
The following section lists the various functions of the SYSCFG library.
21.2.1
How to use this driver
The SYSCFG registers can be accessed only when the SYSCFG interface APB clock is
enabled.
To enable SYSCFG APB clock use:
RCC_APBPeriphClockCmd(RCC_APBPeriph_SYSCFG, ENABLE);
21.2.2
SYSCFG Initialization and Configuration functions






SYSCFG_DeInit()
SYSCFG_MemoryRemapConfig()
SYSCFG_DMAChannelRemapConfig()
SYSCFG_TriggerRemapConfig()
SYSCFG_EncoderRemapConfig()
SYSCFG_USBInterruptLineRemapCmd()
DocID023800 Rev 1
433/584
System configuration controller (SYSCFG)








21.2.3
SYSCFG initialization and configuration functions
21.2.3.1
SYSCFG_DeInit
21.2.3.2
434/584
UM1581
SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlusConfig()
SYSCFG_ITConfig()
SYSCFG_EXTILineConfig()
SYSCFG_BreakConfig()
SYSCFG_BypassParityCheckDisable()
SYSCFG_SRAMWRPEnable()
SYSCFG_GetFlagStatus()
SYSCFG_ClearFlag()
Function Name
void SYSCFG_DeInit ( void )
Function Description
Deinitializes the SYSCFG registers to their default reset values.
Parameters

None.
Return values

None.
Notes

MEM_MODE bits are not affected by APB reset.
MEM_MODE bits took the value from the user option bytes.
SYSCFG_MemoryRemapConfig
Function Name
void SYSCFG_MemoryRemapConfig ( uint32_t
SYSCFG_MemoryRemap)
Function Description
Configures the memory mapping at address 0x00000000.
Parameters

SYSCFG_MemoryRemap : selects the memory remapping.
This parameter can be one of the following values:

SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_Flash : Main Flash memory
mapped at 0x00000000

SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_SystemMemory : System
Flash memory mapped at 0x00000000

SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_SRAM : Embedded SRAM
mapped at 0x00000000
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
System configuration controller (SYSCFG)
UM1581
21.2.3.3
SYSCFG_DMAChannelRemapConfig
Function Name
void SYSCFG_DMAChannelRemapConfig ( uint32_t
SYSCFG_DMARemap, FunctionalState NewState)
Function
Description
Configures the DMA channels remapping.
Parameters

SYSCFG_DMARemap : selects the DMA channels remap. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

SYSCFG_DMARemap_TIM17 : Remap TIM17 DMA
requests from DMA1 channel1 to channel2

SYSCFG_DMARemap_TIM16 : Remap TIM16 DMA
requests from DMA1 channel3 to channel4

SYSCFG_DMARemap_TIM6DAC1 : Remap TIM6/DAC1
DMA requests from DMA2 channel 3 to DMA1 channel 3

SYSCFG_DMARemap_TIM7DAC2 : Remap TIM7/DAC2
DMA requests from DMA2 channel 4 to DMA1 channel 4

SYSCFG_DMARemap_ADC2ADC4 : Remap ADC2 and
ADC4 DMA requests from DMA2 channel1/channel3 to
channel3/channel4
NewState : new state of the DMA channel remapping. This
parameter can be: Enable or Disable.

Return values

None.
Notes

When enabled, DMA channel of the selected peripheral is
remapped
When disabled, Default DMA channel is mapped to the selected
peripheral
By default TIM17 DMA requests is mapped to channel 1 use
SYSCFG_DMAChannelRemapConfig(SYSCFG_DMARemap_TI
M17, Enable) to remap TIM17 DMA requests to DMA1 channel 2
use
SYSCFG_DMAChannelRemapConfig(SYSCFG_DMARemap_TI
M17, Disable) to map TIM17 DMA requests to DMA1 channel 1
(default mapping)


21.2.3.4
SYSCFG_TriggerRemapConfig
Function Name
void SYSCFG_TriggerRemapConfig ( uint32_t
SYSCFG_TriggerRemap, FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Configures the remapping capabilities of DAC/TIM triggers.
Parameters

SYSCFG_TriggerRemap : selects the trigger to be
remapped. This parameter can be one of the following values:

SYSCFG_TriggerRemap_DACTIM3 : Remap DAC
DocID023800 Rev 1
435/584
System configuration controller (SYSCFG)

Return values

None.
Notes

ENABLE: Enable fast mode plus driving capability for
selected pin
DISABLE: Disable fast mode plus driving capability for
selected pin

21.2.3.5
21.2.3.6
436/584
UM1581
trigger from TIM8 to TIM3

SYSCFG_TriggerRemap_TIM1TIM17 : Remap TIM1
ITR3 from TIM4 TRGO to TIM17 OC
NewState : new state of the trigger mapping. This parameter
can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
SYSCFG_EncoderRemapConfig
Function Name
void SYSCFG_EncoderRemapConfig ( uint32_t
SYSCFG_EncoderRemap)
Function Description
Configures the remapping capabilities of encoder mode.
Parameters

SYSCFG_EncoderRemap : selects the remap option for
encoder mode. This parameter can be one of the following
values:

SYSCFG_EncoderRemap_No : No remap

SYSCFG_EncoderRemap_TIM2 : Timer 2 IC1 and IC2
connected to TIM15 IC1 and IC2

SYSCFG_EncoderRemap_TIM3 : Timer 3 IC1 and IC2
connected to TIM15 IC1 and IC2

SYSCFG_EncoderRemap_TIM4 : Timer 4 IC1 and IC2
connected to TIM15 IC1 and IC2
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
SYSCFG_USBInterruptLineRemapCmd
Function Name
void SYSCFG_USBInterruptLineRemapCmd ( FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Remaps the USB interrupt lines.
Parameters

NewState : new state of the mapping of USB interrupt lines.
This parameter can be:
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581


21.2.3.7
System configuration controller (SYSCFG)
ENABLE : Remap the USB interrupt line as following:

USB :

USB :

USB :
DISABLE : Use the default USB interrupt line:

USB :

USB :

USB :
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlusConfig
Function Name
void SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlusConfig ( uint32_t
SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus, FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Configures the I2C fast mode plus driving capability.
Parameters


SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus : selects the pin. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_PB6 : Configure fast
mode plus driving capability for PB6

SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_PB7 : Configure fast
mode plus driving capability for PB7

SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_PB8 : Configure fast
mode plus driving capability for PB8

SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_PB9 : Configure fast
mode plus driving capability for PB9

SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_I2C1 : Configure fast
mode plus driving capability for I2C1 pins

SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_I2C2 : Configure fast
mode plus driving capability for I2C2 pins
NewState : new state of the DMA channel remapping. This
parameter can be:

ENABLE : Enable fast mode plus driving capability for
selected I2C pin

DISABLE : Disable fast mode plus driving capability for
selected I2C pin
Return values

None.
Notes

For I2C1, fast mode plus driving capability can be enabled on
all selected I2C1 pins using
SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_I2C1 parameter or
independently on each one of the following pins PB6, PB7,
PB8 and PB9.
For remaing I2C1 pins (PA14, PA15...) fast mode plus driving
capability can be enabled only by using

DocID023800 Rev 1
437/584
System configuration controller (SYSCFG)
UM1581
SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_I2C1 parameter.

For all I2C2 pins fast mode plus driving capability can be
enabled only by using SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_I2C2
parameter.
21.2.3.8
SYSCFG_ITConfig
Function Name
void SYSCFG_ITConfig ( uint32_t SYSCFG_IT,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the selected SYSCFG interrupts.
Parameters


21.2.3.9
438/584
SYSCFG_IT : specifies the SYSCFG interrupt sources to be
enabled or disabled. This parameter can be one of the
following values:

SYSCFG_IT_IXC : Inexact Interrupt

SYSCFG_IT_IDC : Input denormal Interrupt

SYSCFG_IT_OFC : Overflow Interrupt

SYSCFG_IT_UFC : Underflow Interrupt

SYSCFG_IT_DZC : Divide-by-zero Interrupt

SYSCFG_IT_IOC : Invalid operation Interrupt
NewState : new state of the specified SDADC interrupts.
This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
SYSCFG_EXTILineConfig
Function Name
void SYSCFG_EXTILineConfig ( uint8_t
EXTI_PortSourceGPIOx, uint8_t EXTI_PinSourcex)
Function Description
Selects the GPIO pin used as EXTI Line.
Parameters


EXTI_PortSourceGPIOx : : selects the GPIO port to be used
as source for EXTI lines where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F).
EXTI_PinSourcex : specifies the EXTI line to be configured.
This parameter can be EXTI_PinSourcex where x can be
(0..15)
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
System configuration controller (SYSCFG)
UM1581
21.2.3.10 SYSCFG_BreakConfig
Function Name
void SYSCFG_BreakConfig ( uint32_t SYSCFG_Break)
Function Description
Connects the selected parameter to the break input of TIM1.
Parameters

SYSCFG_Break : selects the configuration to be connected
to break input of TIM1 This parameter can be any
combination of the following values:

SYSCFG_Break_PVD : PVD interrupt is connected to
the break input of TIM1.

SYSCFG_Break_SRAMParity : SRAM Parity error is
connected to the break input of TIM1.

SYSCFG_Break_HardFault : Lockup output of
CortexM0 is connected to the break input of TIM1.
Return values

None.
Notes

The selected configuration is locked and can be unlocked by
system reset
21.2.3.11 SYSCFG_BypassParityCheckDisable
Function Name
void SYSCFG_BypassParityCheckDisable ( void )
Function Description
Disables the parity check on RAM.
Parameters

None.
Return values

None.
Notes

Disabling the parity check on RAM locks the configuration bit.
To re-enable the parity check on RAM perform a system
reset.
DocID023800 Rev 1
439/584
System configuration controller (SYSCFG)
UM1581
21.2.3.12 SYSCFG_SRAMWRPEnable
Function Name
void SYSCFG_SRAMWRPEnable ( uint32_t
SYSCFG_SRAMWRP)
Function Description
Enables the ICODE SRAM write protection.
Parameters

None.
Return values

None.
Notes

Enabling the ICODE SRAM write protection locks the
configuration bit. To disable the ICODE SRAM write
protection perform a system reset.
21.2.3.13 SYSCFG_GetFlagStatus
Function Name
FlagStatus SYSCFG_GetFlagStatus ( uint32_t SYSCFG_Flag)
Function Description
Checks whether the specified SYSCFG flag is set or not.
Parameters

SYSCFG_Flag : specifies the SYSCFG flag to check. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

SYSCFG_FLAG_PE : SRAM parity error flag.
Return values

The new state of SYSCFG_Flag (SET or RESET).
Notes

None.
21.2.3.14 SYSCFG_ClearFlag
440/584
Function Name
void SYSCFG_ClearFlag ( uint32_t SYSCFG_Flag)
Function Description
Clears the selected SYSCFG flag.
Parameters

SYSCFG_Flag : selects the flag to be cleared. This
parameter can be any combination of the following values:

SYSCFG_FLAG_PE : SRAM parity error flag.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
System configuration controller (SYSCFG)
UM1581
21.3
SYSCFG Firmware driver defines
21.3.1
SYSCFG
SYSCFG
SYSCFG_DMA_Remap_Config

#define: SYSCFG_DMARemap_TIM17 SYSCFG_CFGR1_TIM17_DMA_RMP
Remap TIM17 DMA requests from channel1 to channel2

#define: SYSCFG_DMARemap_TIM16 SYSCFG_CFGR1_TIM16_DMA_RMP
Remap TIM16 DMA requests from channel3 to channel4

#define: SYSCFG_DMARemap_TIM6DAC1
SYSCFG_CFGR1_TIM6DAC1_DMA_RMP
Remap TIM6/DAC1 DMA requests from DMA2 channel3 to DMA1 channel3

#define: SYSCFG_DMARemap_TIM7DAC2
SYSCFG_CFGR1_TIM7DAC2_DMA_RMP
Remap TIM7/DAC2 DMA requests from DMA2 channel4 to DMA1 channel4

#define: SYSCFG_DMARemap_ADC2ADC4 SYSCFG_CFGR1_ADC24_DMA_RMP
Remap ADC2 and ADC4 DMA requests from DMA2 channel1/channel3 to
channel3/channel4
SYSCFG_EncoderRemap_Config

#define: SYSCFG_EncoderRemap_No ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
No redirection

#define: SYSCFG_EncoderRemap_TIM2 SYSCFG_CFGR1_ENCODER_MODE_0
Timer 2 IC1 and IC2 connected to TIM15 IC1 and IC2

#define: SYSCFG_EncoderRemap_TIM3 SYSCFG_CFGR1_ENCODER_MODE_1
Timer 3 IC1 and IC2 connected to TIM15 IC1 and IC2

#define: SYSCFG_EncoderRemap_TIM4 SYSCFG_CFGR1_ENCODER_MODE
Timer 4 IC1 and IC2 connected to TIM15 IC1 and IC2
DocID023800 Rev 1
441/584
System configuration controller (SYSCFG)
SYSCFG_EXTI_Pin_sources
442/584

#define: EXTI_PinSource0 ((uint8_t)0x00)

#define: EXTI_PinSource1 ((uint8_t)0x01)

#define: EXTI_PinSource2 ((uint8_t)0x02)

#define: EXTI_PinSource3 ((uint8_t)0x03)

#define: EXTI_PinSource4 ((uint8_t)0x04)

#define: EXTI_PinSource5 ((uint8_t)0x05)

#define: EXTI_PinSource6 ((uint8_t)0x06)

#define: EXTI_PinSource7 ((uint8_t)0x07)

#define: EXTI_PinSource8 ((uint8_t)0x08)

#define: EXTI_PinSource9 ((uint8_t)0x09)

#define: EXTI_PinSource10 ((uint8_t)0x0A)

#define: EXTI_PinSource11 ((uint8_t)0x0B)
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
System configuration controller (SYSCFG)
UM1581

#define: EXTI_PinSource12 ((uint8_t)0x0C)

#define: EXTI_PinSource13 ((uint8_t)0x0D)

#define: EXTI_PinSource14 ((uint8_t)0x0E)

#define: EXTI_PinSource15 ((uint8_t)0x0F)
SYSCFG_EXTI_Port_Sources

#define: EXTI_PortSourceGPIOA ((uint8_t)0x00)

#define: EXTI_PortSourceGPIOB ((uint8_t)0x01)

#define: EXTI_PortSourceGPIOC ((uint8_t)0x02)

#define: EXTI_PortSourceGPIOD ((uint8_t)0x03)

#define: EXTI_PortSourceGPIOE ((uint8_t)0x04)

#define: EXTI_PortSourceGPIOF ((uint8_t)0x05)
SYSCFG_flags_definition

#define: SYSCFG_FLAG_PE SYSCFG_CFGR2_SRAM_PE
DocID023800 Rev 1
443/584
System configuration controller (SYSCFG)
UM1581
SYSCFG_FPU_Interrupt_Config

#define: SYSCFG_IT_IXC SYSCFG_CFGR1_FPU_IE_5
Inexact Interrupt enable (interrupt disabled by default)

#define: SYSCFG_IT_IDC SYSCFG_CFGR1_FPU_IE_4
Input denormal Interrupt enable

#define: SYSCFG_IT_OFC SYSCFG_CFGR1_FPU_IE_3
Overflow Interrupt enable

#define: SYSCFG_IT_UFC SYSCFG_CFGR1_FPU_IE_2
Underflow Interrupt enable

#define: SYSCFG_IT_DZC SYSCFG_CFGR1_FPU_IE_1
Divide-by-zero Interrupt enable

#define: SYSCFG_IT_IOC SYSCFG_CFGR1_FPU_IE_0
Invalid operation Interrupt enable
SYSCFG_I2C_FastModePlus_Config

#define: SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_PB6 SYSCFG_CFGR1_I2C_PB6_FMP
Enable Fast Mode Plus on PB6

#define: SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_PB7 SYSCFG_CFGR1_I2C_PB7_FMP
Enable Fast Mode Plus on PB7

#define: SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_PB8 SYSCFG_CFGR1_I2C_PB8_FMP
Enable Fast Mode Plus on PB8

#define: SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_PB9 SYSCFG_CFGR1_I2C_PB9_FMP
Enable Fast Mode Plus on PB9

#define: SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_I2C1 SYSCFG_CFGR1_I2C1_FMP
Enable Fast Mode Plus on I2C1 pins
444/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581

System configuration controller (SYSCFG)
#define: SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_I2C2 SYSCFG_CFGR1_I2C2_FMP
Enable Fast Mode Plus on I2C2 pins
SYSCFG_Lock_Config

#define: SYSCFG_Break_PVD SYSCFG_CFGR2_PVD_LOCK
Enables and locks the PVD connection with TIM1/8/15/16/17 Break Input and also the
PVD_EN and PVDSEL[2:0] bits of the Power Control Interface

#define: SYSCFG_Break_SRAMParity SYSCFG_CFGR2_SRAM_PARITY_LOCK
Enables and locks the SRAM_PARITY error signal with Break Input of TIM1/8/15/16/17

#define: SYSCFG_Break_Lockup SYSCFG_CFGR2_LOCKUP_LOCK
Enables and locks the LOCKUP output of CortexM0 with Break Input of TIM1/8/15/16/17
SYSCFG_Memory_Remap_Config

#define: SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_Flash ((uint8_t)0x00)

#define: SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_SystemMemory ((uint8_t)0x01)

#define: SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_SRAM ((uint8_t)0x03)
SYSCFG_SRAMWRP_Config

#define: SYSCFG_SRAMWRP_Page0 SYSCFG_RCR_PAGE0
ICODE SRAM Write protection page 0

#define: SYSCFG_SRAMWRP_Page1 SYSCFG_RCR_PAGE1
ICODE SRAM Write protection page 1

#define: SYSCFG_SRAMWRP_Page2 SYSCFG_RCR_PAGE2
ICODE SRAM Write protection page 2

#define: SYSCFG_SRAMWRP_Page3 SYSCFG_RCR_PAGE3
ICODE SRAM Write protection page 3
DocID023800 Rev 1
445/584
System configuration controller (SYSCFG)

#define: SYSCFG_SRAMWRP_Page4 SYSCFG_RCR_PAGE4
UM1581
ICODE SRAM Write protection page 4

#define: SYSCFG_SRAMWRP_Page5 SYSCFG_RCR_PAGE5
ICODE SRAM Write protection page 5

#define: SYSCFG_SRAMWRP_Page6 SYSCFG_RCR_PAGE6
ICODE SRAM Write protection page 6

#define: SYSCFG_SRAMWRP_Page7 SYSCFG_RCR_PAGE7
ICODE SRAM Write protection page 7
SYSCFG_Trigger_Remap_Config

#define: SYSCFG_TriggerRemap_DACTIM3 SYSCFG_CFGR1_DAC_TRIG_RMP
Remap DAC trigger to TIM3

#define: SYSCFG_TriggerRemap_TIM1TIM17 SYSCFG_CFGR1_TIM1_ITR3_RMP
Remap TIM1 ITR3 to TIM17 OC
446/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
22
General-purpose timers (TIM)
22.1
TIM Firmware driver registers structures
22.1.1
TIM_TypeDef
TIM_TypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x.h
Data Fields





























__IO uint16_t CR1
uint16_t RESERVED0
__IO uint32_t CR2
__IO uint32_t SMCR
__IO uint32_t DIER
__IO uint32_t SR
__IO uint32_t EGR
__IO uint32_t CCMR1
__IO uint32_t CCMR2
__IO uint32_t CCER
__IO uint32_t CNT
__IO uint16_t PSC
uint16_t RESERVED9
__IO uint32_t ARR
__IO uint16_t RCR
uint16_t RESERVED10
__IO uint32_t CCR1
__IO uint32_t CCR2
__IO uint32_t CCR3
__IO uint32_t CCR4
__IO uint32_t BDTR
__IO uint16_t DCR
uint16_t RESERVED12
__IO uint16_t DMAR
uint16_t RESERVED13
__IO uint16_t OR
__IO uint32_t CCMR3
__IO uint32_t CCR5
__IO uint32_t CCR6
Field Documentation




__IO uint16_t TIM_TypeDef::CR1

TIM control register 1, Address offset: 0x00
uint16_t TIM_TypeDef::RESERVED0

Reserved, 0x02
__IO uint32_t TIM_TypeDef::CR2

TIM control register 2, Address offset: 0x04
__IO uint32_t TIM_TypeDef::SMCR
DocID023800 Rev 1
447/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)

TIM slave mode control register, Address offset: 0x08

__IO uint32_t TIM_TypeDef::DIER

TIM DMA/interrupt enable register, Address offset: 0x0C

__IO uint32_t TIM_TypeDef::SR

TIM status register, Address offset: 0x10

__IO uint32_t TIM_TypeDef::EGR

TIM event generation register, Address offset: 0x14

__IO uint32_t TIM_TypeDef::CCMR1

TIM capture/compare mode register 1, Address offset: 0x18

__IO uint32_t TIM_TypeDef::CCMR2

TIM capture/compare mode register 2, Address offset: 0x1C

__IO uint32_t TIM_TypeDef::CCER

TIM capture/compare enable register, Address offset: 0x20

__IO uint32_t TIM_TypeDef::CNT

TIM counter register, Address offset: 0x24

__IO uint16_t TIM_TypeDef::PSC

TIM prescaler, Address offset: 0x28

uint16_t TIM_TypeDef::RESERVED9

Reserved, 0x2A

__IO uint32_t TIM_TypeDef::ARR

TIM auto-reload register, Address offset: 0x2C

__IO uint16_t TIM_TypeDef::RCR

TIM repetition counter register, Address offset: 0x30

uint16_t TIM_TypeDef::RESERVED10

Reserved, 0x32

__IO uint32_t TIM_TypeDef::CCR1

TIM capture/compare register 1, Address offset: 0x34

__IO uint32_t TIM_TypeDef::CCR2

TIM capture/compare register 2, Address offset: 0x38

__IO uint32_t TIM_TypeDef::CCR3

TIM capture/compare register 3, Address offset: 0x3C

__IO uint32_t TIM_TypeDef::CCR4

TIM capture/compare register 4, Address offset: 0x40

__IO uint32_t TIM_TypeDef::BDTR

TIM break and dead-time register, Address offset: 0x44

__IO uint16_t TIM_TypeDef::DCR

TIM DMA control register, Address offset: 0x48

uint16_t TIM_TypeDef::RESERVED12

Reserved, 0x4A

__IO uint16_t TIM_TypeDef::DMAR

TIM DMA address for full transfer, Address offset: 0x4C

uint16_t TIM_TypeDef::RESERVED13

Reserved, 0x4E

__IO uint16_t TIM_TypeDef::OR

TIM option register, Address offset: 0x50

__IO uint32_t TIM_TypeDef::CCMR3

TIM capture/compare mode register 3, Address offset: 0x54

__IO uint32_t TIM_TypeDef::CCR5

TIM capture/compare register5, Address offset: 0x58

__IO uint32_t TIM_TypeDef::CCR6

TIM capture/compare register 4, Address offset: 0x5C
448/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
22.1.2
TIM_TimeBaseInitTypeDef
TIM_TimeBaseInitTypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x_tim.h
Data Fields





uint16_t TIM_Prescaler
uint16_t TIM_CounterMode
uint32_t TIM_Period
uint16_t TIM_ClockDivision
uint8_t TIM_RepetitionCounter
Field Documentation





22.1.3
uint16_t TIM_TimeBaseInitTypeDef::TIM_Prescaler

Specifies the prescaler value used to divide the TIM clock. This parameter can
be a number between 0x0000 and 0xFFFF
uint16_t TIM_TimeBaseInitTypeDef::TIM_CounterMode

Specifies the counter mode. This parameter can be a value of
TIM_Counter_Mode
uint32_t TIM_TimeBaseInitTypeDef::TIM_Period

Specifies the period value to be loaded into the active Auto-Reload Register at
the next update event. This parameter must be a number between 0x0000 and
0xFFFF.
uint16_t TIM_TimeBaseInitTypeDef::TIM_ClockDivision

Specifies the clock division. This parameter can be a value of
TIM_Clock_Division_CKD
uint8_t TIM_TimeBaseInitTypeDef::TIM_RepetitionCounter

Specifies the repetition counter value. Each time the RCR downcounter reaches
zero, an update event is generated and counting restarts from the RCR value (N).
This means in PWM mode that (N+1) corresponds to: the number of PWM
periods in edge-aligned modethe number of half PWM period in center-aligned
mode This parameter must be a number between 0x00 and 0xFF. This
parameter is valid only for TIM1 and TIM8.
TIM_OCInitTypeDef
TIM_OCInitTypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x_tim.h
Data Fields








uint32_t TIM_OCMode
uint16_t TIM_OutputState
uint16_t TIM_OutputNState
uint32_t TIM_Pulse
uint16_t TIM_OCPolarity
uint16_t TIM_OCNPolarity
uint16_t TIM_OCIdleState
uint16_t TIM_OCNIdleState
DocID023800 Rev 1
449/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
Field Documentation








22.1.4
UM1581
uint32_t TIM_OCInitTypeDef::TIM_OCMode

Specifies the TIM mode. This parameter can be a value of
TIM_Output_Compare_and_PWM_modes
uint16_t TIM_OCInitTypeDef::TIM_OutputState

Specifies the TIM Output Compare state. This parameter can be a value of
TIM_Output_Compare_State
uint16_t TIM_OCInitTypeDef::TIM_OutputNState

Specifies the TIM complementary Output Compare state. This parameter can be
a value of TIM_Output_Compare_N_State
uint32_t TIM_OCInitTypeDef::TIM_Pulse

Specifies the pulse value to be loaded into the Capture Compare Register. This
parameter can be a number between 0x0000 and 0xFFFF
uint16_t TIM_OCInitTypeDef::TIM_OCPolarity

Specifies the output polarity. This parameter can be a value of
TIM_Output_Compare_Polarity
uint16_t TIM_OCInitTypeDef::TIM_OCNPolarity

Specifies the complementary output polarity. This parameter can be a value of
TIM_Output_Compare_N_Polarity
uint16_t TIM_OCInitTypeDef::TIM_OCIdleState

Specifies the TIM Output Compare pin state during Idle state. This parameter
can be a value of TIM_Output_Compare_Idle_State
uint16_t TIM_OCInitTypeDef::TIM_OCNIdleState

Specifies the TIM Output Compare pin state during Idle state. This parameter
can be a value of TIM_Output_Compare_N_Idle_State
TIM_ICInitTypeDef
TIM_ICInitTypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x_tim.h
Data Fields





uint16_t TIM_Channel
uint16_t TIM_ICPolarity
uint16_t TIM_ICSelection
uint16_t TIM_ICPrescaler
uint16_t TIM_ICFilter
Field Documentation



450/584
uint16_t TIM_ICInitTypeDef::TIM_Channel

Specifies the TIM channel. This parameter can be a value of TIM_Channel
uint16_t TIM_ICInitTypeDef::TIM_ICPolarity

Specifies the active edge of the input signal. This parameter can be a value of
TIM_Input_Capture_Polarity
uint16_t TIM_ICInitTypeDef::TIM_ICSelection

Specifies the input. This parameter can be a value of
TIM_Input_Capture_Selection
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581


22.1.5
uint16_t TIM_ICInitTypeDef::TIM_ICPrescaler

Specifies the Input Capture Prescaler. This parameter can be a value of
TIM_Input_Capture_Prescaler
uint16_t TIM_ICInitTypeDef::TIM_ICFilter

Specifies the input capture filter. This parameter can be a number between 0x0
and 0xF
TIM_BDTRInitTypeDef
TIM_BDTRInitTypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x_tim.h
Data Fields







uint16_t TIM_OSSRState
uint16_t TIM_OSSIState
uint16_t TIM_LOCKLevel
uint16_t TIM_DeadTime
uint16_t TIM_Break
uint16_t TIM_BreakPolarity
uint16_t TIM_AutomaticOutput
Field Documentation







uint16_t TIM_BDTRInitTypeDef::TIM_OSSRState

Specifies the Off-State selection used in Run mode. This parameter can be a
value of TIM_OSSR_Off_State_Selection_for_Run_mode_state
uint16_t TIM_BDTRInitTypeDef::TIM_OSSIState

Specifies the Off-State used in Idle state. This parameter can be a value of
TIM_OSSI_Off_State_Selection_for_Idle_mode_state
uint16_t TIM_BDTRInitTypeDef::TIM_LOCKLevel

Specifies the LOCK level parameters. This parameter can be a value of
TIM_Lock_level
uint16_t TIM_BDTRInitTypeDef::TIM_DeadTime

Specifies the delay time between the switching-off and the switching-on of the
outputs. This parameter can be a number between 0x00 and 0xFF
uint16_t TIM_BDTRInitTypeDef::TIM_Break

Specifies whether the TIM Break input is enabled or not. This parameter can be
a value of TIM_Break_Input_enable_disable
uint16_t TIM_BDTRInitTypeDef::TIM_BreakPolarity

Specifies the TIM Break Input pin polarity. This parameter can be a value of
TIM_Break_Polarity
uint16_t TIM_BDTRInitTypeDef::TIM_AutomaticOutput

Specifies whether the TIM Automatic Output feature is enabled or not. This
parameter can be a value of TIM_AOE_Bit_Set_Reset
DocID023800 Rev 1
451/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
22.2
UM1581
TIM Firmware driver API description
The following section lists the various functions of the TIM library.
22.2.1
Output Compare management functions
TIM Driver: how to use it in Output Compare Mode
To use the Timer in Output Compare mode, the following steps are mandatory:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Enable TIM clock using RCC_APBxPeriphClockCmd(RCC_APBxPeriph_TIMx,
ENABLE) function
Configure the TIM pins by configuring the corresponding GPIO pins
Configure the Time base unit as described in the first part of this driver, if needed,
else the Timer will run with the default configuration:

Autoreload value = 0xFFFF

Prescaler value = 0x0000

Counter mode = Up counting

Clock Division = TIM_CKD_DIV1
Fill the TIM_OCInitStruct with the desired parameters including:

The TIM Output Compare mode: TIM_OCMode

TIM Output State: TIM_OutputState

TIM Pulse value: TIM_Pulse

TIM Output Compare Polarity : TIM_OCPolarity
Call TIM_OCxInit(TIMx, &TIM_OCInitStruct) to configure the desired channel with the
corresponding configuration
Call the TIM_Cmd(ENABLE) function to enable the TIM counter.
All other functions can be used separately to modify, if needed, a specific feature
of the Timer.
In case of PWM mode, this function is mandatory: TIM_OCxPreloadConfig(TIMx,
TIM_OCPreload_ENABLE);
If the corresponding interrupt or DMA request are needed, the user should:
1.
2.







452/584
Enable the NVIC (or the DMA) to use the TIM interrupts (or DMA requests).
Enable the corresponding interrupt (or DMA request) using the function
TIM_ITConfig(TIMx, TIM_IT_CCx) (or TIM_DMA_Cmd(TIMx,
TIM_DMA_CCx))
TIM_OC1Init()
TIM_OC2Init()
TIM_OC3Init()
TIM_OC4Init()
TIM_OC5Init()
TIM_OC6Init()
TIM_SelectGC5C1()
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581












































22.2.2
TIM_SelectGC5C2()
TIM_SelectGC5C3()
TIM_OCStructInit()
TIM_SelectOCxM()
TIM_SetCompare1()
TIM_SetCompare2()
TIM_SetCompare3()
TIM_SetCompare4()
TIM_SetCompare5()
TIM_SetCompare6()
TIM_ForcedOC1Config()
TIM_ForcedOC2Config()
TIM_ForcedOC3Config()
TIM_ForcedOC4Config()
TIM_ForcedOC5Config()
TIM_ForcedOC6Config()
TIM_OC1PreloadConfig()
TIM_OC2PreloadConfig()
TIM_OC3PreloadConfig()
TIM_OC4PreloadConfig()
TIM_OC5PreloadConfig()
TIM_OC6PreloadConfig()
TIM_OC1FastConfig()
TIM_OC2FastConfig()
TIM_OC3FastConfig()
TIM_OC4FastConfig()
TIM_ClearOC1Ref()
TIM_ClearOC2Ref()
TIM_ClearOC3Ref()
TIM_ClearOC4Ref()
TIM_ClearOC5Ref()
TIM_ClearOC6Ref()
TIM_SelectOCREFClear()
TIM_OC1PolarityConfig()
TIM_OC1NPolarityConfig()
TIM_OC2PolarityConfig()
TIM_OC2NPolarityConfig()
TIM_OC3PolarityConfig()
TIM_OC3NPolarityConfig()
TIM_OC4PolarityConfig()
TIM_OC5PolarityConfig()
TIM_OC6PolarityConfig()
TIM_CCxCmd()
TIM_CCxNCmd()
How to use this driver
This driver provides functions to configure and program the TIM of all stm32f30x devices.
These functions are split in 9 groups:
1.
TIM TimeBase management: this group includes all needed functions to configure the
TM Timebase unit:
DocID023800 Rev 1
453/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581

Set/Get Prescaler

Set/Get Autoreload

Counter modes configuration

Set Clock division

Select the One Pulse mode

Update Request Configuration

Update Disable Configuration

Auto-Preload Configuration

Enable/Disable the counter
2.
TIM Output Compare management: this group includes all needed functions to
configure the Capture/Compare unit used in Output compare mode:

Configure each channel, independently, in Output Compare mode

Select the output compare modes

Select the Polarities of each channel

Set/Get the Capture/Compare register values

Select the Output Compare Fast mode

Select the Output Compare Forced mode

Output Compare-Preload Configuration

Clear Output Compare Reference

Select the OCREF Clear signal

Enable/Disable the Capture/Compare Channels
3.
TIM Input Capture management: this group includes all needed functions to configure
the Capture/Compare unit used in Input Capture mode:

Configure each channel in input capture mode

Configure Channel1/2 in PWM Input mode

Set the Input Capture Prescaler

Get the Capture/Compare values
4.
Advanced-control timers (TIM1 and TIM8) specific features

Configures the Break input, dead time, Lock level, the OSSI, the OSSR State
and the AOE(automatic output enable)

Enable/Disable the TIM peripheral Main Outputs

Select the Commutation event

Set/Reset the Capture Compare Preload Control bit
5.
TIM interrupts, DMA and flags management

Enable/Disable interrupt sources

Get flags status

Clear flags/ Pending bits

Enable/Disable DMA requests

Configure DMA burst mode

Select CaptureCompare DMA request
6.
TIM clocks management: this group includes all needed functions to configure the
clock controller unit:

Select internal/External clock

Select the external clock mode: ETR(Mode1/Mode2), TIx or ITRx
7.
TIM synchronization management: this group includes all needed functions to
configure the Synchronization unit:

Select Input Trigger

Select Output Trigger

Select Master Slave Mode

ETR Configuration when used as external trigger
8.
TIM specific interface management, this group includes all needed functions to use
the specific TIM interface:

Encoder Interface Configuration
454/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
9.
22.2.3
General-purpose timers (TIM)

Select Hall Sensor
TIM specific remapping management includes the Remapping configuration of
specific timers
TimeBase management functions
TIM Driver: how to use it in Timing(Time base) Mode
To use the Timer in Timing(Time base) mode, the following steps are mandatory:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Enable TIM clock using RCC_APBxPeriphClockCmd(RCC_APBxPeriph_TIMx,
ENABLE) function
Fill the TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct with the desired parameters.
Call TIM_TimeBaseInit(TIMx, &TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct) to configure the Time Base
unit with the corresponding configuration
Enable the NVIC if you need to generate the update interrupt.
Enable the corresponding interrupt using the function TIM_ITConfig(TIMx,
TIM_IT_Update)
Call the TIM_Cmd(ENABLE) function to enable the TIM counter.
All other functions can be used separately to modify, if needed, a specific feature
of the Timer.
















22.2.4
TIM_DeInit()
TIM_TimeBaseInit()
TIM_TimeBaseStructInit()
TIM_PrescalerConfig()
TIM_CounterModeConfig()
TIM_SetCounter()
TIM_SetAutoreload()
TIM_GetCounter()
TIM_GetPrescaler()
TIM_UpdateDisableConfig()
TIM_UpdateRequestConfig()
TIM_UIFRemap()
TIM_ARRPreloadConfig()
TIM_SelectOnePulseMode()
TIM_SetClockDivision()
TIM_Cmd()
Input Capture management functions
TIM Driver: how to use it in Input Capture Mode
To use the Timer in Input Capture mode, the following steps are mandatory:
1.
2.
3.
Enable TIM clock using RCC_APBxPeriphClockCmd(RCC_APBxPeriph_TIMx,
ENABLE) function
Configure the TIM pins by configuring the corresponding GPIO pins
Configure the Time base unit as described in the first part of this driver, if needed,
else the Timer will run with the default configuration:
DocID023800 Rev 1
455/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581

Autoreload value = 0xFFFF

Prescaler value = 0x0000

Counter mode = Up counting

Clock Division = TIM_CKD_DIV1
4.
Fill the TIM_ICInitStruct with the desired parameters including:

TIM Channel: TIM_Channel

TIM Input Capture polarity: TIM_ICPolarity

TIM Input Capture selection: TIM_ICSelection

TIM Input Capture Prescaler: TIM_ICPrescaler

TIM Input CApture filter value: TIM_ICFilter
5.
Call TIM_ICInit(TIMx, &TIM_ICInitStruct) to configure the desired channel with the
corresponding configuration and to measure only frequency or duty cycle of the input
signal, or, Call TIM_PWMIConfig(TIMx, &TIM_ICInitStruct) to configure the desired
channels with the corresponding configuration and to measure the frequency and the
duty cycle of the input signal
6.
Enable the NVIC or the DMA to read the measured frequency.
7.
Enable the corresponding interrupt (or DMA request) to read the Captured value,
using the function TIM_ITConfig(TIMx, TIM_IT_CCx) (or TIM_DMA_Cmd(TIMx,
TIM_DMA_CCx))
8.
Call the TIM_Cmd(ENABLE) function to enable the TIM counter.
9.
Use TIM_GetCapturex(TIMx); to read the captured value.
All other functions can be used separately to modify, if needed, a specific feature
of the Timer.











22.2.5
TIM_ICInit()
TIM_ICStructInit()
TIM_PWMIConfig()
TIM_GetCapture1()
TIM_GetCapture2()
TIM_GetCapture3()
TIM_GetCapture4()
TIM_SetIC1Prescaler()
TIM_SetIC2Prescaler()
TIM_SetIC3Prescaler()
TIM_SetIC4Prescaler()
Advanced-control timers (TIM1 and TIM8) specific features
TIM Driver: how to use the Break feature
After configuring the Timer channel(s) in the appropriate Output Compare mode:
1.
2.
3.
4.


456/584
Fill the TIM_BDTRInitStruct with the desired parameters for the Timer Break Polarity,
dead time, Lock level, the OSSI/OSSR State and the AOE(automatic output enable).
Call TIM_BDTRConfig(TIMx, &TIM_BDTRInitStruct) to configure the Timer
Enable the Main Output using TIM_CtrlPWMOutputs(TIM1, ENABLE)
Once the break even occurs, the Timer's output signals are put in reset state or in a
known state (according to the configuration made in TIM_BDTRConfig() function).
TIM_BDTRConfig()
TIM_Break1Config()
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581







22.2.6
Interrupts, DMA and flags management functions









22.2.7
TIM_ITConfig()
TIM_GenerateEvent()
TIM_GetFlagStatus()
TIM_ClearFlag()
TIM_GetITStatus()
TIM_ClearITPendingBit()
TIM_DMAConfig()
TIM_DMACmd()
TIM_SelectCCDMA()
Clocks management functions





22.2.8
TIM_Break2Config()
TIM_Break1Cmd()
TIM_Break2Cmd()
TIM_BDTRStructInit()
TIM_CtrlPWMOutputs()
TIM_SelectCOM()
TIM_CCPreloadControl()
TIM_InternalClockConfig()
TIM_ITRxExternalClockConfig()
TIM_TIxExternalClockConfig()
TIM_ETRClockMode1Config()
TIM_ETRClockMode2Config()
Synchronization management functions
TIM Driver: how to use it in synchronization Mode
Case of two/several Timers
1.
2.
Configure the Master Timers using the following functions:

void TIM_SelectOutputTrigger(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_TRGOSource);

void TIM_SelectMasterSlaveMode(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_MasterSlaveMode);
Configure the Slave Timers using the following functions:

void TIM_SelectInputTrigger(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_InputTriggerSource);

void TIM_SelectSlaveMode(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_SlaveMode);
Case of Timers and external trigger(ETR pin)
1.
2.
Configure the External trigger using this function:

void TIM_ETRConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler,
uint16_t TIM_ExtTRGPolarity, uint16_t ExtTRGFilter);
Configure the Slave Timers using the following functions:

void TIM_SelectInputTrigger(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_InputTriggerSource);
DocID023800 Rev 1
457/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581

void TIM_SelectSlaveMode(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_SlaveMode);

TIM_SelectInputTrigger()

TIM_SelectOutputTrigger()

TIM_SelectOutputTrigger2()

TIM_SelectSlaveMode()

TIM_SelectMasterSlaveMode()

TIM_ETRConfig()
22.2.9
Specific interface management functions


22.2.10
Specific remapping management function

22.2.11
TIM_EncoderInterfaceConfig()
TIM_SelectHallSensor()
TIM_RemapConfig()
TimeBase management functions
22.2.11.1 TIM_DeInit
Function Name
void TIM_DeInit ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx)
Function Description
Deinitializes the TIMx peripheral registers to their default reset
values.
Parameters

TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 ,7 ,8, 15, 16 or 17 to
select the TIM peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.11.2 TIM_TimeBaseInit
Function Name
void TIM_TimeBaseInit ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx,
TIM_TimeBaseInitTypeDef * TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct)
Function Description
Initializes the TIMx Time Base Unit peripheral according to the
specified parameters in the TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct.
Parameters


458/584
TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 ,7 ,8, 15, 16 or 17 to
select the TIM peripheral.
TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct : pointer to a
TIM_TimeBaseInitTypeDef structure that contains the
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
configuration information for the specified TIM peripheral.
UM1581
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.11.3 TIM_TimeBaseStructInit
Function Name
void TIM_TimeBaseStructInit ( TIM_TimeBaseInitTypeDef *
TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct)
Function Description
Fills each TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct member with its default value.
Parameters

TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct : : pointer to a
TIM_TimeBaseInitTypeDef structure which will be initialized.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.11.4 TIM_PrescalerConfig
Function Name
void TIM_PrescalerConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
Prescaler, uint16_t TIM_PSCReloadMode)
Function Description
Configures the TIMx Prescaler.
Parameters



TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 15, 16 or 17 to select the
TIM peripheral.
Prescaler : specifies the Prescaler Register value
TIM_PSCReloadMode : specifies the TIM Prescaler Reload
mode This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_PSCReloadMode_Update : The Prescaler is
loaded at the update event.

TIM_PSCReloadMode_Immediate : The Prescaler is
loaded immediatly.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
459/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
22.2.11.5 TIM_CounterModeConfig
Function Name
void TIM_CounterModeConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_CounterMode)
Function Description
Specifies the TIMx Counter Mode to be used.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 8 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_CounterMode : specifies the Counter Mode to be used
This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_CounterMode_Up : TIM Up Counting Mode

TIM_CounterMode_Down : TIM Down Counting Mode

TIM_CounterMode_CenterAligned1 : TIM Center
Aligned Mode1

TIM_CounterMode_CenterAligned2 : TIM Center
Aligned Mode2

TIM_CounterMode_CenterAligned3 : TIM Center
Aligned Mode3
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.11.6 TIM_SetCounter
Function Name
void TIM_SetCounter ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint32_t Counter)
Function Description
Sets the TIMx Counter Register value.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 ,7 ,8, 15, 16 or 17 to
select the TIM peripheral.
Counter : specifies the Counter register new value.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.11.7 TIM_SetAutoreload
Function Name
460/584
void TIM_SetAutoreload ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint32_t
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
Autoreload)
Function Description
Sets the TIMx Autoreload Register value.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 ,7 ,8, 15, 16 or 17 to
select the TIM peripheral.
Autoreload : specifies the Autoreload register new value.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.11.8 TIM_GetCounter
Function Name
uint32_t TIM_GetCounter ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx)
Function Description
Gets the TIMx Counter value.
Parameters

TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 ,7 ,8, 15, 16 or 17 to
select the TIM peripheral.
Return values

Counter Register value
Notes

None.
22.2.11.9 TIM_GetPrescaler
Function Name
uint16_t TIM_GetPrescaler ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx)
Function Description
Gets the TIMx Prescaler value.
Parameters

TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 ,7 ,8, 15, 16 or 17 to
select the TIM peripheral.
Return values

Prescaler Register value.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
461/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
22.2.11.10 TIM_UpdateDisableConfig
Function Name
void TIM_UpdateDisableConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or Disables the TIMx Update event.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 ,7 ,8, 15, 16 or 17 to
select the TIM peripheral.
NewState : new state of the TIMx UDIS bit This parameter
can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.11.11 TIM_UpdateRequestConfig
Function Name
void TIM_UpdateRequestConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx,
uint16_t TIM_UpdateSource)
Function Description
Configures the TIMx Update Request Interrupt source.
Parameters


462/584
TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 ,7 ,8, 15, 16 or 17 to
select the TIM peripheral.
TIM_UpdateSource : specifies the Update source. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_UpdateSource_Regular : Source of update is the
counter overflow/underflow or the setting of UG bit, or an
update generation through the slave mode controller.

TIM_UpdateSource_Global : Source of update is
counter overflow/underflow.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
22.2.11.12 TIM_UIFRemap
Function Name
void TIM_UIFRemap ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Sets or resets the update interrupt flag (UIF)status bit Remapping.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 ,7 ,8, 15, 16 or 17 to
select the TIM peripheral.
NewState : new state of the UIFREMAP bit. This parameter
can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.11.13 TIM_ARRPreloadConfig
Function Name
void TIM_ARRPreloadConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables TIMx peripheral Preload register on ARR.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 ,7 ,8, 15, 16 or 17 to
select the TIM peripheral.
NewState : new state of the TIMx peripheral Preload register
This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.11.14 TIM_SelectOnePulseMode
Function Name
void TIM_SelectOnePulseMode ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx,
uint16_t TIM_OPMode)
Function Description
Selects the TIMx's One Pulse Mode.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 ,7 ,8, 15, 16 or 17 to
select the TIM peripheral.
TIM_OPMode : specifies the OPM Mode to be used. This
parameter can be one of the following values:
DocID023800 Rev 1
463/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581


TIM_OPMode_Single :
TIM_OPMode_Repetitive :
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.11.15 TIM_SetClockDivision
Function Name
void TIM_SetClockDivision ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_CKD)
Function Description
Sets the TIMx Clock Division value.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 15, 16 or 17, to select the
TIM peripheral.
TIM_CKD : specifies the clock division value. This parameter
can be one of the following value:

TIM_CKD_DIV1 : TDTS = Tck_tim

TIM_CKD_DIV2 : TDTS = 2*Tck_tim

TIM_CKD_DIV4 : TDTS = 4*Tck_tim
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.11.16 TIM_Cmd
464/584
Function Name
void TIM_Cmd ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the specified TIM peripheral.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 15, 16 or 17 to
select the TIMx peripheral.
NewState : new state of the TIMx peripheral. This parameter
can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
22.2.12
Output Compare management functions
22.2.12.1 TIM_OC1Init
Function Name
void TIM_OC1Init ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, TIM_OCInitTypeDef *
TIM_OCInitStruct)
Function Description
Initializes the TIMx Channel1 according to the specified
parameters in the TIM_OCInitStruct.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 15, 16 or 17, to select the
TIM peripheral.
TIM_OCInitStruct : pointer to a TIM_OCInitTypeDef
structure that contains the configuration information for the
specified TIM peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.2 TIM_OC2Init
Function Name
void TIM_OC2Init ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, TIM_OCInitTypeDef *
TIM_OCInitStruct)
Function Description
Initializes the TIMx Channel2 according to the specified
parameters in the TIM_OCInitStruct.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8 or 15 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_OCInitStruct : pointer to a TIM_OCInitTypeDef
structure that contains the configuration information for the
specified TIM peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
465/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
22.2.12.3 TIM_OC3Init
Function Name
void TIM_OC3Init ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, TIM_OCInitTypeDef *
TIM_OCInitStruct)
Function Description
Initializes the TIMx Channel3 according to the specified
parameters in the TIM_OCInitStruct.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 8 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_OCInitStruct : pointer to a TIM_OCInitTypeDef
structure that contains the configuration information for the
specified TIM peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.4 TIM_OC4Init
Function Name
void TIM_OC4Init ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, TIM_OCInitTypeDef *
TIM_OCInitStruct)
Function Description
Initializes the TIMx Channel4 according to the specified
parameters in the TIM_OCInitStruct.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 8 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_OCInitStruct : pointer to a TIM_OCInitTypeDef
structure that contains the configuration information for the
specified TIM peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.5 TIM_OC5Init
466/584
Function Name
void TIM_OC5Init ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, TIM_OCInitTypeDef *
TIM_OCInitStruct)
Function Description
Initializes the TIMx Channel5 according to the specified
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
parameters in the TIM_OCInitStruct.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
TIM_OCInitStruct : pointer to a TIM_OCInitTypeDef
structure that contains the configuration information for the
specified TIM peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.6 TIM_OC6Init
Function Name
void TIM_OC6Init ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, TIM_OCInitTypeDef *
TIM_OCInitStruct)
Function Description
Initializes the TIMx Channel6 according to the specified
parameters in the TIM_OCInitStruct.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
TIM_OCInitStruct : pointer to a TIM_OCInitTypeDef
structure that contains the configuration information for the
specified TIM peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.7 TIM_SelectGC5C1
Function Name
void TIM_SelectGC5C1 ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Selects the TIM Group Channel 5 and Channel 1, OC1REFC is
the logical AND of OC1REFC and OC5REF.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIMx peripheral
NewState : new state of the Commutation event. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
467/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
22.2.12.8 TIM_SelectGC5C2
Function Name
void TIM_SelectGC5C2 ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Selects the TIM Group Channel 5 and Channel 2, OC2REFC is
the logical AND of OC2REFC and OC5REF.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIMx peripheral
NewState : new state of the Commutation event. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.9 TIM_SelectGC5C3
Function Name
void TIM_SelectGC5C3 ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Selects the TIM Group Channel 5 and Channel 3, OC3REFC is
the logical AND of OC3REFC and OC5REF.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIMx peripheral
NewState : new state of the Commutation event. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.10 TIM_OCStructInit
468/584
Function Name
void TIM_OCStructInit ( TIM_OCInitTypeDef *
TIM_OCInitStruct)
Function Description
Fills each TIM_OCInitStruct member with its default value.
Parameters

TIM_OCInitStruct : pointer to a TIM_OCInitTypeDef
structure which will be initialized.
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.11 TIM_SelectOCxM
Function Name
void TIM_SelectOCxM ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_Channel, uint32_t TIM_OCMode)
Function Description
Selects the TIM Output Compare Mode.
Parameters



TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 15, 16 or 17 to select the
TIM peripheral.
TIM_Channel : specifies the TIM Channel This parameter
can be one of the following values:

TIM_Channel_1 : TIM Channel 1

TIM_Channel_2 : TIM Channel 2

TIM_Channel_3 : TIM Channel 3

TIM_Channel_4 : TIM Channel 4
TIM_OCMode : specifies the TIM Output Compare Mode.
This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_OCMode_Timing :

TIM_OCMode_Active :

TIM_OCMode_Toggle :

TIM_OCMode_PWM1 :

TIM_OCMode_PWM2 :

TIM_ForcedAction_Active :

TIM_ForcedAction_InActive :

TIM_OCMode_Retrigerrable_OPM1 :

TIM_OCMode_Retrigerrable_OPM2 :

TIM_OCMode_Combined_PWM1 :

TIM_OCMode_Combined_PWM2 :

TIM_OCMode_Asymmetric_PWM1 :

TIM_OCMode_Asymmetric_PWM2 :
Return values

None.
Notes

This function disables the selected channel before changing
the Output Compare Mode. If needed, user has to enable this
channel using TIM_CCxCmd() and TIM_CCxNCmd()
functions.
DocID023800 Rev 1
469/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
22.2.12.12 TIM_SetCompare1
Function Name
void TIM_SetCompare1 ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint32_t
Compare1)
Function Description
Sets the TIMx Capture Compare1 Register value.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 15, 16 or 17 to select the
TIM peripheral.
Compare1 : specifies the Capture Compare1 register new
value.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.13 TIM_SetCompare2
Function Name
void TIM_SetCompare2 ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint32_t
Compare2)
Function Description
Sets the TIMx Capture Compare2 Register value.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8 or 15 to select the TIM
peripheral.
Compare2 : specifies the Capture Compare2 register new
value.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.14 TIM_SetCompare3
Function Name
void TIM_SetCompare3 ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint32_t
Compare3)
Function Description
Sets the TIMx Capture Compare3 Register value.
Parameters


470/584
TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
peripheral.
Compare3 : specifies the Capture Compare3 register new
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
value.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.15 TIM_SetCompare4
Function Name
void TIM_SetCompare4 ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint32_t
Compare4)
Function Description
Sets the TIMx Capture Compare4 Register value.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
peripheral.
Compare4 : specifies the Capture Compare4 register new
value.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.16 TIM_SetCompare5
Function Name
void TIM_SetCompare5 ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint32_t
Compare5)
Function Description
Sets the TIMx Capture Compare5 Register value.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
Compare5 : specifies the Capture Compare5 register new
value.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
471/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
22.2.12.17 TIM_SetCompare6
Function Name
void TIM_SetCompare6 ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint32_t
Compare6)
Function Description
Sets the TIMx Capture Compare6 Register value.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
Compare6 : specifies the Capture Compare5 register new
value.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.18 TIM_ForcedOC1Config
Function Name
void TIM_ForcedOC1Config ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_ForcedAction)
Function Description
Forces the TIMx output 1 waveform to active or inactive level.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 15, 16 or 17 to select the
TIM peripheral.
TIM_ForcedAction : specifies the forced Action to be set to
the output waveform. This parameter can be one of the
following values:

TIM_ForcedAction_Active : Force active level on
OC1REF

TIM_ForcedAction_InActive : Force inactive level on
OC1REF.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.19 TIM_ForcedOC2Config
472/584
Function Name
void TIM_ForcedOC2Config ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_ForcedAction)
Function Description
Forces the TIMx output 2 waveform to active or inactive level.
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Parameters


General-purpose timers (TIM)
TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8 or 15 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_ForcedAction : specifies the forced Action to be set to
the output waveform. This parameter can be one of the
following values:

TIM_ForcedAction_Active : Force active level on
OC2REF

TIM_ForcedAction_InActive : Force inactive level on
OC2REF.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.20 TIM_ForcedOC3Config
Function Name
void TIM_ForcedOC3Config ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_ForcedAction)
Function Description
Forces the TIMx output 3 waveform to active or inactive level.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 8 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_ForcedAction : specifies the forced Action to be set to
the output waveform. This parameter can be one of the
following values:

TIM_ForcedAction_Active : Force active level on
OC3REF

TIM_ForcedAction_InActive : Force inactive level on
OC3REF.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.21 TIM_ForcedOC4Config
Function Name
void TIM_ForcedOC4Config ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_ForcedAction)
Function Description
Forces the TIMx output 4 waveform to active or inactive level.
Parameters

TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 8 to select the TIM
peripheral.
DocID023800 Rev 1
473/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)

UM1581
TIM_ForcedAction : specifies the forced Action to be set to
the output waveform. This parameter can be one of the
following values:

TIM_ForcedAction_Active : Force active level on
OC4REF

TIM_ForcedAction_InActive : Force inactive level on
OC4REF.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.22 TIM_ForcedOC5Config
Function Name
void TIM_ForcedOC5Config ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_ForcedAction)
Function Description
Forces the TIMx output 5 waveform to active or inactive level.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
TIM_ForcedAction : specifies the forced Action to be set to
the output waveform. This parameter can be one of the
following values:

TIM_ForcedAction_Active : Force active level on
OC5REF

TIM_ForcedAction_InActive : Force inactive level on
OC5REF.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.23 TIM_ForcedOC6Config
474/584
Function Name
void TIM_ForcedOC6Config ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_ForcedAction)
Function Description
Forces the TIMx output 6 waveform to active or inactive level.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
TIM_ForcedAction : specifies the forced Action to be set to
the output waveform. This parameter can be one of the
following values:

TIM_ForcedAction_Active : Force active level on
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581

General-purpose timers (TIM)
OC5REF
TIM_ForcedAction_InActive : Force inactive level on
OC5REF.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.24 TIM_OC1PreloadConfig
Function Name
void TIM_OC1PreloadConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_OCPreload)
Function Description
Enables or disables the TIMx peripheral Preload register on
CCR1.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 15, 16 or 17 to select the
TIM peripheral.
TIM_OCPreload : new state of the TIMx peripheral Preload
register This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_OCPreload_Enable :

TIM_OCPreload_Disable :
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.25 TIM_OC2PreloadConfig
Function Name
void TIM_OC2PreloadConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_OCPreload)
Function Description
Enables or disables the TIMx peripheral Preload register on
CCR2.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8 or 15 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_OCPreload : new state of the TIMx peripheral Preload
register This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_OCPreload_Enable :

TIM_OCPreload_Disable :
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
475/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
22.2.12.26 TIM_OC3PreloadConfig
Function Name
void TIM_OC3PreloadConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_OCPreload)
Function Description
Enables or disables the TIMx peripheral Preload register on
CCR3.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 8 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_OCPreload : new state of the TIMx peripheral Preload
register This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_OCPreload_Enable :

TIM_OCPreload_Disable :
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.27 TIM_OC4PreloadConfig
Function Name
void TIM_OC4PreloadConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_OCPreload)
Function Description
Enables or disables the TIMx peripheral Preload register on
CCR4.
Parameters


476/584
TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 8 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_OCPreload : new state of the TIMx peripheral Preload
register This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_OCPreload_Enable :

TIM_OCPreload_Disable :
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
22.2.12.28 TIM_OC5PreloadConfig
Function Name
void TIM_OC5PreloadConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_OCPreload)
Function Description
Enables or disables the TIMx peripheral Preload register on
CCR5.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
TIM_OCPreload : new state of the TIMx peripheral Preload
register This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_OCPreload_Enable :

TIM_OCPreload_Disable :
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.29 TIM_OC6PreloadConfig
Function Name
void TIM_OC6PreloadConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_OCPreload)
Function Description
Enables or disables the TIMx peripheral Preload register on
CCR6.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
TIM_OCPreload : new state of the TIMx peripheral Preload
register This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_OCPreload_Enable :

TIM_OCPreload_Disable :
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.30 TIM_OC1FastConfig
Function Name
void TIM_OC1FastConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_OCFast)
Function Description
Configures the TIMx Output Compare 1 Fast feature.
DocID023800 Rev 1
477/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
Parameters


UM1581
TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 15, 16 or 17 to select the
TIM peripheral.
TIM_OCFast : new state of the Output Compare Fast Enable
Bit. This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_OCFast_Enable : TIM output compare fast enable

TIM_OCFast_Disable : TIM output compare fast
disable
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.31 TIM_OC2FastConfig
Function Name
void TIM_OC2FastConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_OCFast)
Function Description
Configures the TIMx Output Compare 2 Fast feature.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8 or 15 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_OCFast : new state of the Output Compare Fast Enable
Bit. This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_OCFast_Enable : TIM output compare fast enable

TIM_OCFast_Disable : TIM output compare fast
disable
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.32 TIM_OC3FastConfig
Function Name
void TIM_OC3FastConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_OCFast)
Function Description
Configures the TIMx Output Compare 3 Fast feature.
Parameters


478/584
TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 8 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_OCFast : new state of the Output Compare Fast Enable
Bit. This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_OCFast_Enable : TIM output compare fast enable

TIM_OCFast_Disable : TIM output compare fast
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
disable
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.33 TIM_OC4FastConfig
Function Name
void TIM_OC4FastConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_OCFast)
Function Description
Configures the TIMx Output Compare 4 Fast feature.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 8 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_OCFast : new state of the Output Compare Fast Enable
Bit. This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_OCFast_Enable : TIM output compare fast enable

TIM_OCFast_Disable : TIM output compare fast
disable
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.34 TIM_ClearOC1Ref
Function Name
void TIM_ClearOC1Ref ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_OCClear)
Function Description
Clears or safeguards the OCREF1 signal on an external event.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 15, 16 or 17 to select the
TIM peripheral.
TIM_OCClear : new state of the Output Compare Clear
Enable Bit. This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_OCClear_Enable : TIM Output clear enable

TIM_OCClear_Disable : TIM Output clear disable
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
479/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
22.2.12.35 TIM_ClearOC2Ref
Function Name
void TIM_ClearOC2Ref ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_OCClear)
Function Description
Clears or safeguards the OCREF2 signal on an external event.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8 or 15 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_OCClear : new state of the Output Compare Clear
Enable Bit. This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_OCClear_Enable : TIM Output clear enable

TIM_OCClear_Disable : TIM Output clear disable
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.36 TIM_ClearOC3Ref
Function Name
void TIM_ClearOC3Ref ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_OCClear)
Function Description
Clears or safeguards the OCREF3 signal on an external event.
Parameters


480/584
TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 8 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_OCClear : new state of the Output Compare Clear
Enable Bit. This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_OCClear_Enable : TIM Output clear enable

TIM_OCClear_Disable : TIM Output clear disable
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
22.2.12.37 TIM_ClearOC4Ref
Function Name
void TIM_ClearOC4Ref ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_OCClear)
Function Description
Clears or safeguards the OCREF4 signal on an external event.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 8 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_OCClear : new state of the Output Compare Clear
Enable Bit. This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_OCClear_Enable : TIM Output clear enable

TIM_OCClear_Disable : TIM Output clear disable
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.38 TIM_ClearOC5Ref
Function Name
void TIM_ClearOC5Ref ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_OCClear)
Function Description
Clears or safeguards the OCREF5 signal on an external event.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
TIM_OCClear : new state of the Output Compare Clear
Enable Bit. This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_OCClear_Enable : TIM Output clear enable

TIM_OCClear_Disable : TIM Output clear disable
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.39 TIM_ClearOC6Ref
Function Name
void TIM_ClearOC6Ref ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_OCClear)
Function Description
Clears or safeguards the OCREF6 signal on an external event.
DocID023800 Rev 1
481/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
Parameters


UM1581
TIMx : where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
TIM_OCClear : new state of the Output Compare Clear
Enable Bit. This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_OCClear_Enable : TIM Output clear enable

TIM_OCClear_Disable : TIM Output clear disable
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.40 TIM_SelectOCREFClear
Function Name
void TIM_SelectOCREFClear ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_OCReferenceClear)
Function Description
Selects the OCReference Clear source.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 15, 16 or 17 to select the
TIM peripheral.
TIM_OCReferenceClear : specifies the OCReference Clear
source. This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_OCReferenceClear_ETRF : The internal
OCreference clear input is connected to ETRF.

TIM_OCReferenceClear_OCREFCLR : The internal
OCreference clear input is connected to OCREF_CLR
input.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.41 TIM_OC1PolarityConfig
Function Name
void TIM_OC1PolarityConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_OCPolarity)
Function Description
Configures the TIMx channel 1 polarity.
Parameters


482/584
TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 15, 16 or 17 to select the
TIM peripheral.
TIM_OCPolarity : specifies the OC1 Polarity This parameter
can be one of the following values:

TIM_OCPolarity_High : Output Compare active high

TIM_OCPolarity_Low : Output Compare active low
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.42 TIM_OC1NPolarityConfig
Function Name
void TIM_OC1NPolarityConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_OCNPolarity)
Function Description
Configures the TIMx Channel 1N polarity.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 8, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_OCNPolarity : specifies the OC1N Polarity This
parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_OCNPolarity_High : Output Compare active high

TIM_OCNPolarity_Low : Output Compare active low
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.43 TIM_OC2PolarityConfig
Function Name
void TIM_OC2PolarityConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_OCPolarity)
Function Description
Configures the TIMx channel 2 polarity.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4 8 or 15 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_OCPolarity : specifies the OC2 Polarity This parameter
can be one of the following values:

TIM_OCPolarity_High : Output Compare active high

TIM_OCPolarity_Low : Output Compare active low
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
483/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
22.2.12.44 TIM_OC2NPolarityConfig
Function Name
void TIM_OC2NPolarityConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_OCNPolarity)
Function Description
Configures the TIMx Channel 2N polarity.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
TIM_OCNPolarity : specifies the OC2N Polarity This
parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_OCNPolarity_High : Output Compare active high

TIM_OCNPolarity_Low : Output Compare active low
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.45 TIM_OC3PolarityConfig
Function Name
void TIM_OC3PolarityConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_OCPolarity)
Function Description
Configures the TIMx channel 3 polarity.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 8 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_OCPolarity : specifies the OC3 Polarity This parameter
can be one of the following values:

TIM_OCPolarity_High : Output Compare active high

TIM_OCPolarity_Low : Output Compare active low
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.46 TIM_OC3NPolarityConfig
484/584
Function Name
void TIM_OC3NPolarityConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_OCNPolarity)
Function Description
Configures the TIMx Channel 3N polarity.
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
General-purpose timers (TIM)
TIMx : where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
TIM_OCNPolarity : specifies the OC3N Polarity This
parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_OCNPolarity_High : Output Compare active high

TIM_OCNPolarity_Low : Output Compare active low
Parameters


Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.47 TIM_OC4PolarityConfig
Function Name
void TIM_OC4PolarityConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_OCPolarity)
Function Description
Configures the TIMx channel 4 polarity.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 8 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_OCPolarity : specifies the OC4 Polarity This parameter
can be one of the following values:

TIM_OCPolarity_High : Output Compare active high

TIM_OCPolarity_Low : Output Compare active low
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.48 TIM_OC5PolarityConfig
Function Name
void TIM_OC5PolarityConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_OCPolarity)
Function Description
Configures the TIMx channel 5 polarity.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
TIM_OCPolarity : specifies the OC5 Polarity This parameter
can be one of the following values:

TIM_OCPolarity_High : Output Compare active high

TIM_OCPolarity_Low : Output Compare active low
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
485/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
22.2.12.49 TIM_OC6PolarityConfig
Function Name
void TIM_OC6PolarityConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_OCPolarity)
Function Description
Configures the TIMx channel 6 polarity.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
TIM_OCPolarity : specifies the OC6 Polarity This parameter
can be one of the following values:

TIM_OCPolarity_High : Output Compare active high

TIM_OCPolarity_Low : Output Compare active low
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.12.50 TIM_CCxCmd
Function Name
void TIM_CCxCmd ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_Channel, uint16_t TIM_CCx)
Function Description
Enables or disables the TIM Capture Compare Channel x.
Parameters



486/584
TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 15, 16 or 17 to select the
TIM peripheral.
TIM_Channel : specifies the TIM Channel This parameter
can be one of the following values:

TIM_Channel_1 : TIM Channel 1

TIM_Channel_2 : TIM Channel 2

TIM_Channel_3 : TIM Channel 3

TIM_Channel_4 : TIM Channel 4

TIM_Channel_5 : TIM Channel 5

TIM_Channel_6 : TIM Channel 6
TIM_CCx : specifies the TIM Channel CCxE bit new state.
This parameter can be: TIM_CCx_Enable or
TIM_CCx_Disable.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
22.2.12.51 TIM_CCxNCmd
Function Name
void TIM_CCxNCmd ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_Channel, uint16_t TIM_CCxN)
Function Description
Enables or disables the TIM Capture Compare Channel xN.
Parameters



22.2.13
TIMx : where x can be 1, 8, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_Channel : specifies the TIM Channel This parameter
can be one of the following values:

TIM_Channel_1 : TIM Channel 1

TIM_Channel_2 : TIM Channel 2

TIM_Channel_3 : TIM Channel 3
TIM_CCxN : specifies the TIM Channel CCxNE bit new
state. This parameter can be: TIM_CCxN_Enable or
TIM_CCxN_Disable.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
Input Capture management functions
22.2.13.1 TIM_ICInit
Function Name
void TIM_ICInit ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, TIM_ICInitTypeDef *
TIM_ICInitStruct)
Function Description
Initializes the TIM peripheral according to the specified
parameters in the TIM_ICInitStruct.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 15, 16 or 17 to select the
TIM peripheral.
TIM_ICInitStruct : pointer to a TIM_ICInitTypeDef structure
that contains the configuration information for the specified
TIM peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
487/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
22.2.13.2 TIM_ICStructInit
Function Name
void TIM_ICStructInit ( TIM_ICInitTypeDef * TIM_ICInitStruct)
Function Description
Fills each TIM_ICInitStruct member with its default value.
Parameters

TIM_ICInitStruct : pointer to a TIM_ICInitTypeDef structure
which will be initialized.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.13.3 TIM_PWMIConfig
Function Name
void TIM_PWMIConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx,
TIM_ICInitTypeDef * TIM_ICInitStruct)
Function Description
Configures the TIM peripheral according to the specified
parameters in the TIM_ICInitStruct to measure an external PWM
signal.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8 or 15 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_ICInitStruct : pointer to a TIM_ICInitTypeDef structure
that contains the configuration information for the specified
TIM peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.13.4 TIM_GetCapture1
488/584
Function Name
uint32_t TIM_GetCapture1 ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx)
Function Description
Gets the TIMx Input Capture 1 value.
Parameters

TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 15, 16 or 17 to select the
TIM peripheral.
Return values

Capture Compare 1 Register value.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
22.2.13.5 TIM_GetCapture2
Function Name
uint32_t TIM_GetCapture2 ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx)
Function Description
Gets the TIMx Input Capture 2 value.
Parameters

TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8 or 15 to select the TIM
peripheral.
Return values

Capture Compare 2 Register value.
Notes

None.
22.2.13.6 TIM_GetCapture3
Function Name
uint32_t TIM_GetCapture3 ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx)
Function Description
Gets the TIMx Input Capture 3 value.
Parameters

TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 8 to select the TIM
peripheral.
Return values

Capture Compare 3 Register value.
Notes

None.
22.2.13.7 TIM_GetCapture4
Function Name
uint32_t TIM_GetCapture4 ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx)
Function Description
Gets the TIMx Input Capture 4 value.
Parameters

TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 8 to select the TIM
peripheral.
Return values

Capture Compare 4 Register value.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
489/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
22.2.13.8 TIM_SetIC1Prescaler
Function Name
void TIM_SetIC1Prescaler ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_ICPSC)
Function Description
Sets the TIMx Input Capture 1 prescaler.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 15, 16 or 17 to select the
TIM peripheral.
TIM_ICPSC : specifies the Input Capture1 prescaler new
value. This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_ICPSC_DIV1 : no prescaler

TIM_ICPSC_DIV2 : capture is done once every 2
events

TIM_ICPSC_DIV4 : capture is done once every 4
events

TIM_ICPSC_DIV8 : capture is done once every 8
events
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.13.9 TIM_SetIC2Prescaler
Function Name
void TIM_SetIC2Prescaler ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_ICPSC)
Function Description
Sets the TIMx Input Capture 2 prescaler.
Parameters


490/584
TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8 or 15 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_ICPSC : specifies the Input Capture2 prescaler new
value. This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_ICPSC_DIV1 : no prescaler

TIM_ICPSC_DIV2 : capture is done once every 2
events

TIM_ICPSC_DIV4 : capture is done once every 4
events

TIM_ICPSC_DIV8 : capture is done once every 8
events
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
22.2.13.10 TIM_SetIC3Prescaler
Function Name
void TIM_SetIC3Prescaler ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_ICPSC)
Function Description
Sets the TIMx Input Capture 3 prescaler.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 8 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_ICPSC : specifies the Input Capture3 prescaler new
value. This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_ICPSC_DIV1 : no prescaler

TIM_ICPSC_DIV2 : capture is done once every 2
events

TIM_ICPSC_DIV4 : capture is done once every 4
events

TIM_ICPSC_DIV8 : capture is done once every 8
events
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.13.11 TIM_SetIC4Prescaler
Function Name
void TIM_SetIC4Prescaler ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_ICPSC)
Function Description
Sets the TIMx Input Capture 4 prescaler.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 8 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_ICPSC : specifies the Input Capture4 prescaler new
value. This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_ICPSC_DIV1 : no prescaler

TIM_ICPSC_DIV2 : capture is done once every 2
events

TIM_ICPSC_DIV4 : capture is done once every 4
events

TIM_ICPSC_DIV8 : capture is done once every 8
events
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
491/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
22.2.14
UM1581
Advanced-control timers (TIM1, TIM8) specific features
22.2.14.1 TIM_BDTRConfig
Function Name
void TIM_BDTRConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx,
TIM_BDTRInitTypeDef * TIM_BDTRInitStruct)
Function Description
Configures the Break feature, dead time, Lock level, OSSI/OSSR
State and the AOE(automatic output enable).
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 8, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIM
TIM_BDTRInitStruct : pointer to a TIM_BDTRInitTypeDef
structure that contains the BDTR Register configuration
information for the TIM peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.14.2 TIM_Break1Config
Function Name
void TIM_Break1Config ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint32_t
TIM_Break1Polarity, uint8_t TIM_Break1Filter)
Function Description
Configures the Break1 feature.
Parameters



492/584
TIMx : where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIM
TIM_Break1Polarity : specifies the Break1 polarity. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_Break1Polarity_Low : Break1 input is active low

TIM_Break1Polarity_High : Break1 input is active high
TIM_Break1Filter : specifies the Break1 filter value. This
parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
22.2.14.3 TIM_Break2Config
Function Name
void TIM_Break2Config ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint32_t
TIM_Break2Polarity, uint8_t TIM_Break2Filter)
Function Description
Configures the Break2 feature.
Parameters



TIMx : where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIM
TIM_Break2Polarity : specifies the Break2 polarity. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_Break2Polarity_Low : Break2 input is active low

TIM_Break2Polarity_High : Break2 input is active high
TIM_Break2Filter : specifies the Break2 filter value. This
parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.14.4 TIM_Break1Cmd
Function Name
void TIM_Break1Cmd ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the TIM Break1 input.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 8, 1, 16 or 17 to select the TIMx
peripheral.
NewState : new state of the TIM Break1 input. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.14.5 TIM_Break2Cmd
Function Name
void TIM_Break2Cmd ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the TIM Break2 input.
DocID023800 Rev 1
493/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
Parameters


UM1581
TIMx : where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIMx peripheral.
NewState : new state of the TIM Break2 input. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.14.6 TIM_BDTRStructInit
Function Name
void TIM_BDTRStructInit ( TIM_BDTRInitTypeDef *
TIM_BDTRInitStruct)
Function Description
Fills each TIM_BDTRInitStruct member with its default value.
Parameters

TIM_BDTRInitStruct : pointer to a TIM_BDTRInitTypeDef
structure which will be initialized.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.14.7 TIM_CtrlPWMOutputs
494/584
Function Name
void TIM_CtrlPWMOutputs ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the TIM peripheral Main Outputs.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 8, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIMx
peripheral.
NewState : new state of the TIM peripheral Main Outputs.
This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
22.2.14.8 TIM_SelectCOM
Function Name
void TIM_SelectCOM ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Selects the TIM peripheral Commutation event.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 8, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIMx
peripheral
NewState : new state of the Commutation event. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.14.9 TIM_CCPreloadControl
22.2.15
Function Name
void TIM_CCPreloadControl ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Sets or Resets the TIM peripheral Capture Compare Preload
Control bit.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIMx peripheral
NewState : new state of the Capture Compare Preload
Control bit This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
Interrupts DMA and flags management functions
22.2.15.1 TIM_ITConfig
Function Name
void TIM_ITConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t TIM_IT,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the specified TIM interrupts.
Parameters

TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 15, 16 or 17 to
select the TIMx peripheral.
DocID023800 Rev 1
495/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)

UM1581
TIM_IT : specifies the TIM interrupts sources to be enabled
or disabled. This parameter can be any combination of the
following values:

TIM_IT_Update : TIM update Interrupt source

TIM_IT_CC1 : TIM Capture Compare 1 Interrupt source

TIM_IT_CC2 : TIM Capture Compare 2 Interrupt source

TIM_IT_CC3 : TIM Capture Compare 3 Interrupt source

TIM_IT_CC4 : TIM Capture Compare 4 Interrupt source

TIM_IT_COM : TIM Commutation Interrupt source

TIM_IT_Trigger : TIM Trigger Interrupt source

TIM_IT_Break : TIM Break Interrupt source
Parameters

NewState : new state of the TIM interrupts. This parameter
can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

For TIM6 and TIM7 only the parameter TIM_IT_Update can
be used
For TIM9 and TIM12 only one of the following parameters can
be used: TIM_IT_Update, TIM_IT_CC1, TIM_IT_CC2 or
TIM_IT_Trigger.
For TIM10, TIM11, TIM13 and TIM14 only one of the following
parameters can be used: TIM_IT_Update or TIM_IT_CC1
TIM_IT_COM and TIM_IT_Break can be used only with TIM1
and TIM8



22.2.15.2 TIM_GenerateEvent
Function Name
void TIM_GenerateEvent ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_EventSource)
Function Description
Configures the TIMx event to be generate by software.
Parameters


496/584
TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 15, 16 or 17 to
select the TIM peripheral.
TIM_EventSource : specifies the event source. This
parameter can be one or more of the following values:

TIM_EventSource_Update : Timer update Event
source

TIM_EventSource_CC1 : Timer Capture Compare 1
Event source

TIM_EventSource_CC2 : Timer Capture Compare 2
Event source

TIM_EventSource_CC3 : Timer Capture Compare 3
Event source

TIM_EventSource_CC4 : Timer Capture Compare 4
Event source

TIM_EventSource_COM : Timer COM event source
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581


General-purpose timers (TIM)
TIM_EventSource_Trigger : Timer Trigger Event
source
TIM_EventSource_Break : Timer Break event source
Return values

None.
Notes


TIM6 and TIM7 can only generate an update event.
TIM_EventSource_COM and TIM_EventSource_Break are
used only with TIM1 and TIM8.
22.2.15.3 TIM_GetFlagStatus
Function Name
FlagStatus TIM_GetFlagStatus ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint32_t
TIM_FLAG)
Function Description
Checks whether the specified TIM flag is set or not.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 15, 16 or 17 to
select the TIM peripheral.
TIM_FLAG : specifies the flag to check. This parameter can
be one of the following values:

TIM_FLAG_Update : TIM update Flag

TIM_FLAG_CC1 : TIM Capture Compare 1 Flag

TIM_FLAG_CC2 : TIM Capture Compare 2 Flag

TIM_FLAG_CC3 : TIM Capture Compare 3 Flag

TIM_FLAG_CC4 : TIM Capture Compare 4 Flag

TIM_FLAG_CC5 : TIM Capture Compare 5 Flag

TIM_FLAG_CC6 : TIM Capture Compare 6 Flag

TIM_FLAG_COM : TIM Commutation Flag

TIM_FLAG_Trigger : TIM Trigger Flag

TIM_FLAG_Break : TIM Break Flag

TIM_FLAG_CC1OF : TIM Capture Compare 1 over
capture Flag

TIM_FLAG_CC2OF : TIM Capture Compare 2 over
capture Flag

TIM_FLAG_CC3OF : TIM Capture Compare 3 over
capture Flag

TIM_FLAG_CC4OF : TIM Capture Compare 4 over
capture Flag
Return values

The new state of TIM_FLAG (SET or RESET).
Notes


TIM6 and TIM7 can have only one update flag.
TIM_FLAG_COM and TIM_FLAG_Break are used only with
TIM1 and TIM8.
DocID023800 Rev 1
497/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
22.2.15.4 TIM_ClearFlag
Function Name
void TIM_ClearFlag ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_FLAG)
Function Description
Clears the TIMx's pending flags.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 15, 16 or 17 to
select the TIM peripheral.
TIM_FLAG : specifies the flag bit to clear. This parameter
can be any combination of the following values:

TIM_FLAG_Update : TIM update Flag

TIM_FLAG_CC1 : TIM Capture Compare 1 Flag

TIM_FLAG_CC2 : TIM Capture Compare 2 Flag

TIM_FLAG_CC3 : TIM Capture Compare 3 Flag

TIM_FLAG_CC4 : TIM Capture Compare 4 Flag

TIM_FLAG_CC5 : TIM Capture Compare 5 Flag

TIM_FLAG_CC6 : TIM Capture Compare 6 Flag

TIM_FLAG_COM : TIM Commutation Flag

TIM_FLAG_Trigger : TIM Trigger Flag

TIM_FLAG_Break : TIM Break Flag

TIM_FLAG_CC1OF : TIM Capture Compare 1 over
capture Flag

TIM_FLAG_CC2OF : TIM Capture Compare 2 over
capture Flag

TIM_FLAG_CC3OF : TIM Capture Compare 3 over
capture Flag

TIM_FLAG_CC4OF : TIM Capture Compare 4 over
capture Flag
Return values

None.
Notes


TIM6 and TIM7 can have only one update flag.
TIM_FLAG_COM and TIM_FLAG_Break are used only with
TIM1 and TIM8.
22.2.15.5 TIM_GetITStatus
Function Name
ITStatus TIM_GetITStatus ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_IT)
Function Description
Checks whether the TIM interrupt has occurred or not.
Parameters


498/584
TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 15, 16 or 17 to
select the TIM peripheral.
TIM_IT : specifies the TIM interrupt source to check. This
parameter can be one of the following values:
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581








General-purpose timers (TIM)
TIM_IT_Update : TIM update Interrupt source
TIM_IT_CC1 : TIM Capture Compare 1 Interrupt source
TIM_IT_CC2 : TIM Capture Compare 2 Interrupt source
TIM_IT_CC3 : TIM Capture Compare 3 Interrupt source
TIM_IT_CC4 : TIM Capture Compare 4 Interrupt source
TIM_IT_COM : TIM Commutation Interrupt source
TIM_IT_Trigger : TIM Trigger Interrupt source
TIM_IT_Break : TIM Break Interrupt source
Return values

The new state of the TIM_IT(SET or RESET).
Notes


TIM6 and TIM7 can generate only an update interrupt.
TIM_IT_COM and TIM_IT_Break are used only with TIM1 and
TIM8.
22.2.15.6 TIM_ClearITPendingBit
Function Name
void TIM_ClearITPendingBit ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_IT)
Function Description
Clears the TIMx's interrupt pending bits.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 15, 16 or 17 to
select the TIM peripheral.
TIM_IT : specifies the pending bit to clear. This parameter
can be any combination of the following values:

TIM_IT_Update : TIM1 update Interrupt source

TIM_IT_CC1 : TIM Capture Compare 1 Interrupt source

TIM_IT_CC2 : TIM Capture Compare 2 Interrupt source

TIM_IT_CC3 : TIM Capture Compare 3 Interrupt source

TIM_IT_CC4 : TIM Capture Compare 4 Interrupt source

TIM_IT_COM : TIM Commutation Interrupt source

TIM_IT_Trigger : TIM Trigger Interrupt source

TIM_IT_Break : TIM Break Interrupt source
Return values

None.
Notes


TIM6 and TIM7 can generate only an update interrupt.
TIM_IT_COM and TIM_IT_Break are used only with TIM1 and
TIM8.
DocID023800 Rev 1
499/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
22.2.15.7 TIM_DMAConfig
Function Name
void TIM_DMAConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_DMABase, uint16_t TIM_DMABurstLength)
Function Description
Configures the TIMx's DMA interface.
Parameters



TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 8 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_DMABase : DMA Base address. This parameter can be
one of the following values:

TIM_DMABase_CR1 :

TIM_DMABase_CR2 :

TIM_DMABase_SMCR :

TIM_DMABase_DIER :

TIM1_DMABase_SR :

TIM_DMABase_EGR :

TIM_DMABase_CCMR1 :

TIM_DMABase_CCMR2 :

TIM_DMABase_CCER :

TIM_DMABase_CNT :

TIM_DMABase_PSC :

TIM_DMABase_ARR :

TIM_DMABase_RCR :

TIM_DMABase_CCR1 :

TIM_DMABase_CCR2 :

TIM_DMABase_CCR3 :

TIM_DMABase_CCR4 :

TIM_DMABase_BDTR :

TIM_DMABase_DCR :
TIM_DMABurstLength : DMA Burst length. This parameter
can be one value between: TIM_DMABurstLength_1Transfer
and TIM_DMABurstLength_18Transfers.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.15.8 TIM_DMACmd
500/584
Function Name
void TIM_DMACmd ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_DMASource, FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the TIMx's DMA Requests.
Parameters

TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 15, 16 or 17 to
select the TIM peripheral.
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
TIM_DMASource : specifies the DMA Request sources. This
parameter can be any combination of the following values:

TIM_DMA_Update : TIM update Interrupt source

TIM_DMA_CC1 : TIM Capture Compare 1 DMA source

TIM_DMA_CC2 : TIM Capture Compare 2 DMA source

TIM_DMA_CC3 : TIM Capture Compare 3 DMA source

TIM_DMA_CC4 : TIM Capture Compare 4 DMA source

TIM_DMA_COM : TIM Commutation DMA source

TIM_DMA_Trigger : TIM Trigger DMA source
NewState : new state of the DMA Request sources. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
UM1581


Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.15.9 TIM_SelectCCDMA
22.2.16
Function Name
void TIM_SelectCCDMA ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Selects the TIMx peripheral Capture Compare DMA source.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 15, 16 or 17 to select the
TIM peripheral.
NewState : new state of the Capture Compare DMA source
This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
Clock management functions
22.2.16.1 TIM_InternalClockConfig
Function Name
void TIM_InternalClockConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx)
Function Description
Configures the TIMx internal Clock.
Parameters

TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8 or 15 to select the TIM
peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
501/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
22.2.16.2 TIM_ITRxExternalClockConfig
Function Name
void TIM_ITRxExternalClockConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx,
uint16_t TIM_InputTriggerSource)
Function Description
Configures the TIMx Internal Trigger as External Clock.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8 or 15 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_InputTriggerSource : Trigger source. This parameter
can be one of the following values:

TIM_TS_ITR0 : Internal Trigger 0

TIM_TS_ITR1 : Internal Trigger 1

TIM_TS_ITR2 : Internal Trigger 2

TIM_TS_ITR3 : Internal Trigger 3
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.16.3 TIM_TIxExternalClockConfig
Function Name
void TIM_TIxExternalClockConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx,
uint16_t TIM_TIxExternalCLKSource, uint16_t TIM_ICPolarity,
uint16_t ICFilter)
Function Description
Configures the TIMx Trigger as External Clock.
Parameters




502/584
TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8 or 15 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_TIxExternalCLKSource : Trigger source. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_TIxExternalCLK1Source_TI1ED : TI1 Edge
Detector

TIM_TIxExternalCLK1Source_TI1 : Filtered Timer
Input 1

TIM_TIxExternalCLK1Source_TI2 : Filtered Timer
Input 2
TIM_ICPolarity : specifies the TIx Polarity. This parameter
can be one of the following values:

TIM_ICPolarity_Rising :

TIM_ICPolarity_Falling :
ICFilter : specifies the filter value. This parameter must be a
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
value between 0x0 and 0xF.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.16.4 TIM_ETRClockMode1Config
Function Name
void TIM_ETRClockMode1Config ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx,
uint16_t TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler, uint16_t TIM_ExtTRGPolarity,
uint16_t ExtTRGFilter)
Function Description
Configures the External clock Mode1.
Parameters




TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 8 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler : The external Trigger Prescaler.
This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_ExtTRGPSC_OFF : ETRP Prescaler OFF.

TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV2 : ETRP frequency divided by 2.

TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV4 : ETRP frequency divided by 4.

TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV8 : ETRP frequency divided by 8.
TIM_ExtTRGPolarity : The external Trigger Polarity. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_ExtTRGPolarity_Inverted : active low or falling
edge active.

TIM_ExtTRGPolarity_NonInverted : active high or
rising edge active.
ExtTRGFilter : External Trigger Filter. This parameter must
be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.16.5 TIM_ETRClockMode2Config
Function Name
void TIM_ETRClockMode2Config ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx,
uint16_t TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler, uint16_t TIM_ExtTRGPolarity,
uint16_t ExtTRGFilter)
Function Description
Configures the External clock Mode2.
Parameters

TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 8 to select the TIM
DocID023800 Rev 1
503/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)



22.2.17
UM1581
peripheral.
TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler : The external Trigger Prescaler.
This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_ExtTRGPSC_OFF : ETRP Prescaler OFF.

TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV2 : ETRP frequency divided by 2.

TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV4 : ETRP frequency divided by 4.

TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV8 : ETRP frequency divided by 8.
TIM_ExtTRGPolarity : The external Trigger Polarity. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_ExtTRGPolarity_Inverted : active low or falling
edge active.

TIM_ExtTRGPolarity_NonInverted : active high or
rising edge active.
ExtTRGFilter : External Trigger Filter. This parameter must
be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
Synchronization management functions
22.2.17.1 TIM_SelectInputTrigger
Function Name
void TIM_SelectInputTrigger ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_InputTriggerSource)
Function Description
Selects the Input Trigger source.
Parameters


504/584
TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8 or 15 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_InputTriggerSource : The Input Trigger source. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_TS_ITR0 : Internal Trigger 0

TIM_TS_ITR1 : Internal Trigger 1

TIM_TS_ITR2 : Internal Trigger 2

TIM_TS_ITR3 : Internal Trigger 3

TIM_TS_TI1F_ED : TI1 Edge Detector

TIM_TS_TI1FP1 : Filtered Timer Input 1

TIM_TS_TI2FP2 : Filtered Timer Input 2

TIM_TS_ETRF : External Trigger input
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
22.2.17.2 TIM_SelectOutputTrigger
Function Name
void TIM_SelectOutputTrigger ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_TRGOSource)
Function Description
Selects the TIMx Trigger Output Mode.
Parameters

Notes

TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 15 to select the
TIM peripheral.
TIM_TRGOSource : specifies the Trigger Output source.
This parameter can be one of the following values:

None.
22.2.17.3 TIM_SelectOutputTrigger2
Function Name
void TIM_SelectOutputTrigger2 ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx,
uint32_t TIM_TRGO2Source)
Function Description
Selects the TIMx Trigger Output Mode2 (TRGO2).
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
TIM_TRGO2Source : specifies the Trigger Output source.
This parameter can be one of the following values:
Notes

None.
22.2.17.4 TIM_SelectSlaveMode
Function Name
void TIM_SelectSlaveMode ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint32_t
TIM_SlaveMode)
Function Description
Selects the TIMx Slave Mode.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8 or 15 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_SlaveMode : specifies the Timer Slave Mode. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_SlaveMode_Reset : Rising edge of the selected
trigger signal(TRGI) reinitialize the counter and triggers
an update of the registers

TIM_SlaveMode_Gated : The counter clock is enabled
DocID023800 Rev 1
505/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)



UM1581
when the trigger signal (TRGI) is high
TIM_SlaveMode_Trigger : The counter starts at a
rising edge of the trigger TRGI
TIM_SlaveMode_External1 : Rising edges of the
selected trigger (TRGI) clock the counter
TIM_SlaveMode_Combined_ResetTrigger : Rising
edge of the selected trigger input (TRGI) reinitializes the
counter, generates an update of the registers and starts
the counter.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.17.5 TIM_SelectMasterSlaveMode
Function Name
void TIM_SelectMasterSlaveMode ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx,
uint16_t TIM_MasterSlaveMode)
Function Description
Sets or Resets the TIMx Master/Slave Mode.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8 or 15 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_MasterSlaveMode : specifies the Timer Master Slave
Mode. This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_MasterSlaveMode_Enable : synchronization
between the current timer and its slaves (through TRGO)

TIM_MasterSlaveMode_Disable : No action
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
22.2.17.6 TIM_ETRConfig
Function Name
void TIM_ETRConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler, uint16_t TIM_ExtTRGPolarity, uint16_t
ExtTRGFilter)
Function Description
Configures the TIMx External Trigger (ETR).
Parameters


506/584
TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 8 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler : The external Trigger Prescaler.
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581


22.2.18
General-purpose timers (TIM)
This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_ExtTRGPSC_OFF : ETRP Prescaler OFF.

TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV2 : ETRP frequency divided by 2.

TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV4 : ETRP frequency divided by 4.

TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV8 : ETRP frequency divided by 8.
TIM_ExtTRGPolarity : The external Trigger Polarity. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_ExtTRGPolarity_Inverted : active low or falling
edge active.

TIM_ExtTRGPolarity_NonInverted : active high or
rising edge active.
ExtTRGFilter : External Trigger Filter. This parameter must
be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
Specific interface management functions
22.2.18.1 TIM_EncoderInterfaceConfig
Function Name
void TIM_EncoderInterfaceConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx,
uint16_t TIM_EncoderMode, uint16_t TIM_IC1Polarity, uint16_t
TIM_IC2Polarity)
Function Description
Configures the TIMx Encoder Interface.
Parameters




Return values

TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 8 to select the TIM
peripheral.
TIM_EncoderMode : specifies the TIMx Encoder Mode. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM_EncoderMode_TI1 : Counter counts on TI1FP1
edge depending on TI2FP2 level.

TIM_EncoderMode_TI2 : Counter counts on TI2FP2
edge depending on TI1FP1 level.

TIM_EncoderMode_TI12 : Counter counts on both
TI1FP1 and TI2FP2 edges depending on the level of the
other input.
TIM_IC1Polarity : specifies the IC1 Polarity This parameter
can be one of the following values:

TIM_ICPolarity_Falling : IC Falling edge.

TIM_ICPolarity_Rising : IC Rising edge.
TIM_IC2Polarity : specifies the IC2 Polarity This parameter
can be one of the following values:

TIM_ICPolarity_Falling : IC Falling edge.

TIM_ICPolarity_Rising : IC Rising edge.
None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
507/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
Notes
UM1581

None.
22.2.18.2 TIM_SelectHallSensor
22.2.19
Function Name
void TIM_SelectHallSensor ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the TIMx's Hall sensor interface.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 8 or 15 to select the TIM
peripheral.
NewState : new state of the TIMx Hall sensor interface. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
Specific remapping management functions
22.2.19.1 TIM_RemapConfig
508/584
Function Name
void TIM_RemapConfig ( TIM_TypeDef * TIMx, uint16_t
TIM_Remap)
Function Description
Configures the TIM16 Remapping input Capabilities.
Parameters


TIMx : where x can be 1, 8 or 16 to select the TIM peripheral.
TIM_Remap : specifies the TIM input reampping source.
This parameter can be one of the following values:

TIM16_GPIO : TIM16 Channel 1 is connected to GPIO.

TIM16_RTC_CLK : TIM16 Channel 1 is connected to
RTC input clock.

TIM16_HSE_DIV32 : TIM16 Channel 1 is connected to
HSE/32 clock.

TIM16_MCO : TIM16 Channel 1 is connected to MCO
clock.

TIM1_ADC1_AWDG1 : TIM1 ETR is connected to
ADC1 AWDG1.

TIM1_ADC1_AWDG2 : TIM1 ETR is connected to
ADC1 AWDG2.

TIM1_ADC1_AWDG3 : TIM1 ETR is connected to
ADC1 AWDG3.
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581









TIM1_ADC4_AWDG1 :
ADC4 AWDG1.
TIM1_ADC4_AWDG2 :
ADC4 AWDG2.
TIM1_ADC4_AWDG3 :
ADC4 AWDG3.
TIM8_ADC2_AWDG1 :
ADC2 AWDG1.
TIM8_ADC2_AWDG2 :
ADC2 AWDG2.
TIM8_ADC2_AWDG3 :
ADC2 AWDG3.
TIM8_ADC4_AWDG1 :
ADC4 AWDG1.
TIM8_ADC4_AWDG2 :
ADC4 AWDG2.
TIM8_ADC4_AWDG3 :
ADC4 AWDG3.
Return values

: None
Notes

None.
22.3
TIM Firmware driver defines
22.3.1
TIM
General-purpose timers (TIM)
TIM1 ETR is connected to
TIM1 ETR is connected to
TIM1 ETR is connected to
TIM8 ETR is connected to
TIM8 ETR is connected to
TIM8 ETR is connected to
TIM8 ETR is connected to
TIM8 ETR is connected to
TIM8 ETR is connected to
TIM
TIM_AOE_Bit_Set_Reset

#define: TIM_AutomaticOutput_Enable ((uint16_t)0x4000)

#define: TIM_AutomaticOutput_Disable ((uint16_t)0x0000)
TIM_Break1_Input_enable_disable

#define: TIM_Break1_Enable ((uint32_t)0x00001000)

#define: TIM_Break1_Disable ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
TIM_Break1_Polarity
DocID023800 Rev 1
509/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)

#define: TIM_Break1Polarity_Low ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: TIM_Break1Polarity_High ((uint32_t)0x00002000)
TIM_Break2_Input_enable_disable

#define: TIM_Break2_Enable ((uint32_t)0x01000000)

#define: TIM_Break2_Disable ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
TIM_Break2_Polarity

#define: TIM_Break2Polarity_Low ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: TIM_Break2Polarity_High ((uint32_t)0x02000000)
TIM_Break_Input_enable_disable

#define: TIM_Break_Enable ((uint16_t)0x1000)

#define: TIM_Break_Disable ((uint16_t)0x0000)
TIM_Break_Polarity

#define: TIM_BreakPolarity_Low ((uint16_t)0x0000)

#define: TIM_BreakPolarity_High ((uint16_t)0x2000)
TIM_Capture_Compare_N_State

510/584
#define: TIM_CCxN_Enable ((uint16_t)0x0004)
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581

#define: TIM_CCxN_Disable ((uint16_t)0x0000)
TIM_Capture_Compare_State

#define: TIM_CCx_Enable ((uint16_t)0x0001)

#define: TIM_CCx_Disable ((uint16_t)0x0000)
TIM_Channel

#define: TIM_Channel_1 ((uint16_t)0x0000)

#define: TIM_Channel_2 ((uint16_t)0x0004)

#define: TIM_Channel_3 ((uint16_t)0x0008)

#define: TIM_Channel_4 ((uint16_t)0x000C)

#define: TIM_Channel_5 ((uint16_t)0x0010)

#define: TIM_Channel_6 ((uint16_t)0x0014)
TIM_Clock_Division_CKD

#define: TIM_CKD_DIV1 ((uint16_t)0x0000)

#define: TIM_CKD_DIV2 ((uint16_t)0x0100)
DocID023800 Rev 1
511/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)

UM1581
#define: TIM_CKD_DIV4 ((uint16_t)0x0200)
TIM_Counter_Mode

#define: TIM_CounterMode_Up ((uint16_t)0x0000)

#define: TIM_CounterMode_Down ((uint16_t)0x0010)

#define: TIM_CounterMode_CenterAligned1 ((uint16_t)0x0020)

#define: TIM_CounterMode_CenterAligned2 ((uint16_t)0x0040)

#define: TIM_CounterMode_CenterAligned3 ((uint16_t)0x0060)
TIM_DMA_Base_address
512/584

#define: TIM_DMABase_CR1 ((uint16_t)0x0000)

#define: TIM_DMABase_CR2 ((uint16_t)0x0001)

#define: TIM_DMABase_SMCR ((uint16_t)0x0002)

#define: TIM_DMABase_DIER ((uint16_t)0x0003)

#define: TIM_DMABase_SR ((uint16_t)0x0004)
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581

#define: TIM_DMABase_EGR ((uint16_t)0x0005)

#define: TIM_DMABase_CCMR1 ((uint16_t)0x0006)

#define: TIM_DMABase_CCMR2 ((uint16_t)0x0007)

#define: TIM_DMABase_CCER ((uint16_t)0x0008)

#define: TIM_DMABase_CNT ((uint16_t)0x0009)

#define: TIM_DMABase_PSC ((uint16_t)0x000A)

#define: TIM_DMABase_ARR ((uint16_t)0x000B)

#define: TIM_DMABase_RCR ((uint16_t)0x000C)

#define: TIM_DMABase_CCR1 ((uint16_t)0x000D)

#define: TIM_DMABase_CCR2 ((uint16_t)0x000E)

#define: TIM_DMABase_CCR3 ((uint16_t)0x000F)

#define: TIM_DMABase_CCR4 ((uint16_t)0x0010)
DocID023800 Rev 1
513/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581

#define: TIM_DMABase_BDTR ((uint16_t)0x0011)

#define: TIM_DMABase_DCR ((uint16_t)0x0012)

#define: TIM_DMABase_OR ((uint16_t)0x0013)

#define: TIM_DMABase_CCMR3 ((uint16_t)0x0014)

#define: TIM_DMABase_CCR5 ((uint16_t)0x0015)

#define: TIM_DMABase_CCR6 ((uint16_t)0x0016)
TIM_DMA_Burst_Length
514/584

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_1Transfer ((uint16_t)0x0000)

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_2Transfers ((uint16_t)0x0100)

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_3Transfers ((uint16_t)0x0200)

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_4Transfers ((uint16_t)0x0300)

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_5Transfers ((uint16_t)0x0400)

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_6Transfers ((uint16_t)0x0500)
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_7Transfers ((uint16_t)0x0600)

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_8Transfers ((uint16_t)0x0700)

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_9Transfers ((uint16_t)0x0800)

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_10Transfers ((uint16_t)0x0900)

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_11Transfers ((uint16_t)0x0A00)

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_12Transfers ((uint16_t)0x0B00)

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_13Transfers ((uint16_t)0x0C00)

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_14Transfers ((uint16_t)0x0D00)

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_15Transfers ((uint16_t)0x0E00)

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_16Transfers ((uint16_t)0x0F00)

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_17Transfers ((uint16_t)0x1000)

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_18Transfers ((uint16_t)0x1100)
DocID023800 Rev 1
515/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
TIM_DMA_sources

#define: TIM_DMA_Update ((uint16_t)0x0100)

#define: TIM_DMA_CC1 ((uint16_t)0x0200)

#define: TIM_DMA_CC2 ((uint16_t)0x0400)

#define: TIM_DMA_CC3 ((uint16_t)0x0800)

#define: TIM_DMA_CC4 ((uint16_t)0x1000)

#define: TIM_DMA_COM ((uint16_t)0x2000)

#define: TIM_DMA_Trigger ((uint16_t)0x4000)
TIM_Encoder_Mode

#define: TIM_EncoderMode_TI1 ((uint16_t)0x0001)

#define: TIM_EncoderMode_TI2 ((uint16_t)0x0002)

#define: TIM_EncoderMode_TI12 ((uint16_t)0x0003)
TIM_Event_Source

516/584
#define: TIM_EventSource_Update ((uint16_t)0x0001)
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581

#define: TIM_EventSource_CC1 ((uint16_t)0x0002)

#define: TIM_EventSource_CC2 ((uint16_t)0x0004)

#define: TIM_EventSource_CC3 ((uint16_t)0x0008)

#define: TIM_EventSource_CC4 ((uint16_t)0x0010)

#define: TIM_EventSource_COM ((uint16_t)0x0020)

#define: TIM_EventSource_Trigger ((uint16_t)0x0040)

#define: TIM_EventSource_Break ((uint16_t)0x0080)

#define: TIM_EventSource_Break2 ((uint16_t)0x0100)
TIM_External_Trigger_Polarity

#define: TIM_ExtTRGPolarity_Inverted ((uint16_t)0x8000)

#define: TIM_ExtTRGPolarity_NonInverted ((uint16_t)0x0000)
TIM_External_Trigger_Prescaler

#define: TIM_ExtTRGPSC_OFF ((uint16_t)0x0000)
DocID023800 Rev 1
517/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581

#define: TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV2 ((uint16_t)0x1000)

#define: TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV4 ((uint16_t)0x2000)

#define: TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV8 ((uint16_t)0x3000)
TIM_Flags
518/584

#define: TIM_FLAG_Update ((uint32_t)0x00001)

#define: TIM_FLAG_CC1 ((uint32_t)0x00002)

#define: TIM_FLAG_CC2 ((uint32_t)0x00004)

#define: TIM_FLAG_CC3 ((uint32_t)0x00008)

#define: TIM_FLAG_CC4 ((uint32_t)0x00010)

#define: TIM_FLAG_COM ((uint32_t)0x00020)

#define: TIM_FLAG_Trigger ((uint32_t)0x00040)

#define: TIM_FLAG_Break ((uint32_t)0x00080)

#define: TIM_FLAG_Break2 ((uint32_t)0x00100)
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581

#define: TIM_FLAG_CC1OF ((uint32_t)0x00200)

#define: TIM_FLAG_CC2OF ((uint32_t)0x00400)

#define: TIM_FLAG_CC3OF ((uint32_t)0x00800)

#define: TIM_FLAG_CC4OF ((uint32_t)0x01000)

#define: TIM_FLAG_CC5 ((uint32_t)0x10000)

#define: TIM_FLAG_CC6 ((uint32_t)0x20000)
TIM_Forced_Action

#define: TIM_ForcedAction_Active ((uint16_t)0x0050)

#define: TIM_ForcedAction_InActive ((uint16_t)0x0040)
TIM_Input_Capture_Polarity

#define: TIM_ICPolarity_Rising ((uint16_t)0x0000)

#define: TIM_ICPolarity_Falling ((uint16_t)0x0002)

#define: TIM_ICPolarity_BothEdge ((uint16_t)0x000A)
DocID023800 Rev 1
519/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
TIM_Input_Capture_Prescaler

#define: TIM_ICPSC_DIV1 ((uint16_t)0x0000)
Capture performed each time an edge is detected on the capture input.

#define: TIM_ICPSC_DIV2 ((uint16_t)0x0004)
Capture performed once every 2 events.

#define: TIM_ICPSC_DIV4 ((uint16_t)0x0008)
Capture performed once every 4 events.

#define: TIM_ICPSC_DIV8 ((uint16_t)0x000C)
Capture performed once every 8 events.
TIM_Input_Capture_Selection

#define: TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI ((uint16_t)0x0001)
TIM Input 1, 2, 3 or 4 is selected to be connected to IC1, IC2, IC3 or IC4, respectively

#define: TIM_ICSelection_IndirectTI ((uint16_t)0x0002)
TIM Input 1, 2, 3 or 4 is selected to be connected to IC2, IC1, IC4 or IC3, respectively.

#define: TIM_ICSelection_TRC ((uint16_t)0x0003)
TIM Input 1, 2, 3 or 4 is selected to be connected to TRC.
TIM_Internal_Trigger_Selection
520/584

#define: TIM_TS_ITR0 ((uint16_t)0x0000)

#define: TIM_TS_ITR1 ((uint16_t)0x0010)

#define: TIM_TS_ITR2 ((uint16_t)0x0020)

#define: TIM_TS_ITR3 ((uint16_t)0x0030)
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581

#define: TIM_TS_TI1F_ED ((uint16_t)0x0040)

#define: TIM_TS_TI1FP1 ((uint16_t)0x0050)

#define: TIM_TS_TI2FP2 ((uint16_t)0x0060)

#define: TIM_TS_ETRF ((uint16_t)0x0070)
TIM_interrupt_sources

#define: TIM_IT_Update ((uint16_t)0x0001)

#define: TIM_IT_CC1 ((uint16_t)0x0002)

#define: TIM_IT_CC2 ((uint16_t)0x0004)

#define: TIM_IT_CC3 ((uint16_t)0x0008)

#define: TIM_IT_CC4 ((uint16_t)0x0010)

#define: TIM_IT_COM ((uint16_t)0x0020)

#define: TIM_IT_Trigger ((uint16_t)0x0040)

#define: TIM_IT_Break ((uint16_t)0x0080)
DocID023800 Rev 1
521/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
TIM_Legacy
522/584

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_1Byte TIM_DMABurstLength_1Transfer

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_2Bytes TIM_DMABurstLength_2Transfers

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_3Bytes TIM_DMABurstLength_3Transfers

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_4Bytes TIM_DMABurstLength_4Transfers

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_5Bytes TIM_DMABurstLength_5Transfers

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_6Bytes TIM_DMABurstLength_6Transfers

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_7Bytes TIM_DMABurstLength_7Transfers

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_8Bytes TIM_DMABurstLength_8Transfers

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_9Bytes TIM_DMABurstLength_9Transfers

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_10Bytes TIM_DMABurstLength_10Transfers

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_11Bytes TIM_DMABurstLength_11Transfers
DocID023800 Rev 1

General-purpose timers (TIM)
#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_12Bytes TIM_DMABurstLength_12Transfers

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_13Bytes TIM_DMABurstLength_13Transfers

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_14Bytes TIM_DMABurstLength_14Transfers

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_15Bytes TIM_DMABurstLength_15Transfers

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_16Bytes TIM_DMABurstLength_16Transfers

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_17Bytes TIM_DMABurstLength_17Transfers

#define: TIM_DMABurstLength_18Bytes TIM_DMABurstLength_18Transfers
UM1581
TIM_Lock_level

#define: TIM_LOCKLevel_OFF ((uint16_t)0x0000)

#define: TIM_LOCKLevel_1 ((uint16_t)0x0100)

#define: TIM_LOCKLevel_2 ((uint16_t)0x0200)

#define: TIM_LOCKLevel_3 ((uint16_t)0x0300)
TIM_Master_Slave_Mode

#define: TIM_MasterSlaveMode_Enable ((uint16_t)0x0080)
DocID023800 Rev 1
523/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)

UM1581
#define: TIM_MasterSlaveMode_Disable ((uint16_t)0x0000)
TIM_OCReferenceClear

#define: TIM_OCReferenceClear_ETRF ((uint16_t)0x0008)

#define: TIM_OCReferenceClear_OCREFCLR ((uint16_t)0x0000)
TIM_One_Pulse_Mode

#define: TIM_OPMode_Single ((uint16_t)0x0008)

#define: TIM_OPMode_Repetitive ((uint16_t)0x0000)
TIM_OSSI_Off_State_Selection_for_Idle_mode_state

#define: TIM_OSSIState_Enable ((uint16_t)0x0400)

#define: TIM_OSSIState_Disable ((uint16_t)0x0000)
TIM_OSSR_Off_State_Selection_for_Run_mode_state

#define: TIM_OSSRState_Enable ((uint16_t)0x0800)

#define: TIM_OSSRState_Disable ((uint16_t)0x0000)
TIM_Output_Compare_and_PWM_modes

524/584
#define: TIM_OCMode_Timing ((uint32_t)0x00000)
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581

#define: TIM_OCMode_Active ((uint32_t)0x00010)

#define: TIM_OCMode_Inactive ((uint32_t)0x00020)

#define: TIM_OCMode_Toggle ((uint32_t)0x00030)

#define: TIM_OCMode_PWM1 ((uint32_t)0x00060)

#define: TIM_OCMode_PWM2 ((uint32_t)0x00070)

#define: TIM_OCMode_Retrigerrable_OPM1 ((uint32_t)0x10000)

#define: TIM_OCMode_Retrigerrable_OPM2 ((uint32_t)0x10010)

#define: TIM_OCMode_Combined_PWM1 ((uint32_t)0x10040)

#define: TIM_OCMode_Combined_PWM2 ((uint32_t)0x10050)

#define: TIM_OCMode_Asymmetric_PWM1 ((uint32_t)0x10060)

#define: TIM_OCMode_Asymmetric_PWM2 ((uint32_t)0x10070)
TIM_Output_Compare_Clear_State

#define: TIM_OCClear_Enable ((uint16_t)0x0080)
DocID023800 Rev 1
525/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)

UM1581
#define: TIM_OCClear_Disable ((uint16_t)0x0000)
TIM_Output_Compare_Fast_State

#define: TIM_OCFast_Enable ((uint16_t)0x0004)

#define: TIM_OCFast_Disable ((uint16_t)0x0000)
TIM_Output_Compare_Idle_State

#define: TIM_OCIdleState_Set ((uint16_t)0x0100)

#define: TIM_OCIdleState_Reset ((uint16_t)0x0000)
TIM_Output_Compare_N_Idle_State

#define: TIM_OCNIdleState_Set ((uint16_t)0x0200)

#define: TIM_OCNIdleState_Reset ((uint16_t)0x0000)
TIM_Output_Compare_N_Polarity

#define: TIM_OCNPolarity_High ((uint16_t)0x0000)

#define: TIM_OCNPolarity_Low ((uint16_t)0x0008)
TIM_Output_Compare_N_State

526/584
#define: TIM_OutputNState_Disable ((uint16_t)0x0000)
DocID023800 Rev 1
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581

#define: TIM_OutputNState_Enable ((uint16_t)0x0004)
TIM_Output_Compare_Polarity

#define: TIM_OCPolarity_High ((uint16_t)0x0000)

#define: TIM_OCPolarity_Low ((uint16_t)0x0002)
TIM_Output_Compare_Preload_State

#define: TIM_OCPreload_Enable ((uint16_t)0x0008)

#define: TIM_OCPreload_Disable ((uint16_t)0x0000)
TIM_Output_Compare_State

#define: TIM_OutputState_Disable ((uint16_t)0x0000)

#define: TIM_OutputState_Enable ((uint16_t)0x0001)
TIM_Prescaler_Reload_Mode

#define: TIM_PSCReloadMode_Update ((uint16_t)0x0000)

#define: TIM_PSCReloadMode_Immediate ((uint16_t)0x0001)
TIM_Remap

#define: TIM16_GPIO ((uint16_t)0x0000)
DocID023800 Rev 1
527/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)

#define: TIM16_RTC_CLK ((uint16_t)0x0001)
528/584

#define: TIM16_HSEDiv32 ((uint16_t)0x0002)

#define: TIM16_MCO ((uint16_t)0x0003)

#define: TIM1_ADC1_AWDG1 ((uint16_t)0x0001)

#define: TIM1_ADC1_AWDG2 ((uint16_t)0x0002)

#define: TIM1_ADC1_AWDG3 ((uint16_t)0x0003)

#define: TIM1_ADC4_AWDG1 ((uint16_t)0x0004)

#define: TIM1_ADC4_AWDG2 ((uint16_t)0x0008)

#define: TIM1_ADC4_AWDG3 ((uint16_t)0x000C)

#define: TIM8_ADC2_AWDG1 ((uint16_t)0x0001)

#define: TIM8_ADC2_AWDG2 ((uint16_t)0x0002)

#define: TIM8_ADC2_AWDG3 ((uint16_t)0x0003)
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581

#define: TIM8_ADC3_AWDG1 ((uint16_t)0x0004)

#define: TIM8_ADC3_AWDG2 ((uint16_t)0x0008)

#define: TIM8_ADC3_AWDG3 ((uint16_t)0x000C)
TIM_Slave_Mode

#define: TIM_SlaveMode_Reset ((uint32_t)0x00004)

#define: TIM_SlaveMode_Gated ((uint32_t)0x00005)

#define: TIM_SlaveMode_Trigger ((uint32_t)0x00006)

#define: TIM_SlaveMode_External1 ((uint32_t)0x00007)

#define: TIM_SlaveMode_Combined_ResetTrigger ((uint32_t)0x10000)
TIM_TIx_External_Clock_Source

#define: TIM_TIxExternalCLK1Source_TI1 ((uint16_t)0x0050)

#define: TIM_TIxExternalCLK1Source_TI2 ((uint16_t)0x0060)

#define: TIM_TIxExternalCLK1Source_TI1ED ((uint16_t)0x0040)
TIM_Trigger_Output_Source
DocID023800 Rev 1
529/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)

#define: TIM_TRGOSource_Reset ((uint16_t)0x0000)
530/584

#define: TIM_TRGOSource_Enable ((uint16_t)0x0010)

#define: TIM_TRGOSource_Update ((uint16_t)0x0020)

#define: TIM_TRGOSource_OC1 ((uint16_t)0x0030)

#define: TIM_TRGOSource_OC1Ref ((uint16_t)0x0040)

#define: TIM_TRGOSource_OC2Ref ((uint16_t)0x0050)

#define: TIM_TRGOSource_OC3Ref ((uint16_t)0x0060)

#define: TIM_TRGOSource_OC4Ref ((uint16_t)0x0070)

#define: TIM_TRGO2Source_Reset ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: TIM_TRGO2Source_Enable ((uint32_t)0x00100000)

#define: TIM_TRGO2Source_Update ((uint32_t)0x00200000)

#define: TIM_TRGO2Source_OC1 ((uint32_t)0x00300000)
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581

General-purpose timers (TIM)
#define: TIM_TRGO2Source_OC1Ref ((uint32_t)0x00400000)

#define: TIM_TRGO2Source_OC2Ref ((uint32_t)0x00500000)

#define: TIM_TRGO2Source_OC3Ref ((uint32_t)0x00600000)

#define: TIM_TRGO2Source_OC4Ref ((uint32_t)0x00700000)

#define: TIM_TRGO2Source_OC5Ref ((uint32_t)0x00800000)

#define: TIM_TRGO2Source_OC6Ref ((uint32_t)0x00900000)

#define: TIM_TRGO2Source_OC4Ref_RisingFalling ((uint32_t)0x00A00000)

#define: TIM_TRGO2Source_OC6Ref_RisingFalling ((uint32_t)0x00B00000)

#define: TIM_TRGO2Source_OC4RefRising_OC6RefRising
((uint32_t)0x00C00000)

#define: TIM_TRGO2Source_OC4RefRising_OC6RefFalling
((uint32_t)0x00D00000)

#define: TIM_TRGO2Source_OC5RefRising_OC6RefRising
((uint32_t)0x00E00000)

#define: TIM_TRGO2Source_OC5RefRising_OC6RefFalling
((uint32_t)0x00F00000)
UM1581
DocID023800 Rev 1
531/584
General-purpose timers (TIM)
UM1581
TIM_Update_Source

#define: TIM_UpdateSource_Global ((uint16_t)0x0000)
Source of update is the counter overflow/underflow or the setting of UG bit, or an update
generation through the slave mode controller.

#define: TIM_UpdateSource_Regular ((uint16_t)0x0001)
Source of update is counter overflow/underflow.
532/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
UM1581
23
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
23.1
USART Firmware driver registers structures
23.1.1
USART_TypeDef
USART_TypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x.h
Data Fields
















__IO uint32_t CR1
__IO uint32_t CR2
__IO uint32_t CR3
__IO uint16_t BRR
uint16_t RESERVED1
__IO uint16_t GTPR
uint16_t RESERVED2
__IO uint32_t RTOR
__IO uint16_t RQR
uint16_t RESERVED3
__IO uint32_t ISR
__IO uint32_t ICR
__IO uint16_t RDR
uint16_t RESERVED4
__IO uint16_t TDR
uint16_t RESERVED5
Field Documentation









__IO uint32_t USART_TypeDef::CR1

USART Control register 1, Address offset: 0x00
__IO uint32_t USART_TypeDef::CR2

USART Control register 2, Address offset: 0x04
__IO uint32_t USART_TypeDef::CR3

USART Control register 3, Address offset: 0x08
__IO uint16_t USART_TypeDef::BRR

USART Baud rate register, Address offset: 0x0C
uint16_t USART_TypeDef::RESERVED1

Reserved, 0x0E
__IO uint16_t USART_TypeDef::GTPR

USART Guard time and prescaler register, Address offset: 0x10
uint16_t USART_TypeDef::RESERVED2

Reserved, 0x12
__IO uint32_t USART_TypeDef::RTOR

USART Receiver Time Out register, Address offset: 0x14
__IO uint16_t USART_TypeDef::RQR
DocID023800 Rev 1
533/584
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)

USART Request register, Address offset: 0x18

uint16_t USART_TypeDef::RESERVED3

Reserved, 0x1A

__IO uint32_t USART_TypeDef::ISR

USART Interrupt and status register, Address offset: 0x1C

__IO uint32_t USART_TypeDef::ICR

USART Interrupt flag Clear register, Address offset: 0x20

__IO uint16_t USART_TypeDef::RDR

USART Receive Data register, Address offset: 0x24

uint16_t USART_TypeDef::RESERVED4

Reserved, 0x26

__IO uint16_t USART_TypeDef::TDR

USART Transmit Data register, Address offset: 0x28

uint16_t USART_TypeDef::RESERVED5

Reserved, 0x2A
23.1.2
UM1581
USART_InitTypeDef
USART_InitTypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x_usart.h
Data Fields






uint32_t USART_BaudRate
uint32_t USART_WordLength
uint32_t USART_StopBits
uint32_t USART_Parity
uint32_t USART_Mode
uint32_t USART_HardwareFlowControl
Field Documentation






534/584
uint32_t USART_InitTypeDef::USART_BaudRate

This member configures the USART communication baud rate. The baud rate is
computed using the following formula: IntegerDivider = ((PCLKx) / (16 *
(USART_InitStruct->USART_BaudRate)))FractionalDivider = ((IntegerDivider ((uint32_t) IntegerDivider)) * 16) + 0.5
uint32_t USART_InitTypeDef::USART_WordLength

Specifies the number of data bits transmitted or received in a frame. This
parameter can be a value of USART_Word_Length
uint32_t USART_InitTypeDef::USART_StopBits

Specifies the number of stop bits transmitted. This parameter can be a value of
USART_Stop_Bits
uint32_t USART_InitTypeDef::USART_Parity

Specifies the parity mode. This parameter can be a value of USART_Parity
uint32_t USART_InitTypeDef::USART_Mode

Specifies wether the Receive or Transmit mode is enabled or disabled. This
parameter can be a value of USART_Mode
uint32_t USART_InitTypeDef::USART_HardwareFlowControl
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581

23.1.3
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
Specifies wether the hardware flow control mode is enabled or disabled. This
parameter can be a value of USART_Hardware_Flow_Control
USART_ClockInitTypeDef
USART_ClockInitTypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x_usart.h
Data Fields




uint32_t USART_Clock
uint32_t USART_CPOL
uint32_t USART_CPHA
uint32_t USART_LastBit
Field Documentation




23.2
uint32_t USART_ClockInitTypeDef::USART_Clock

Specifies whether the USART clock is enabled or disabled. This parameter can
be a value of USART_Clock
uint32_t USART_ClockInitTypeDef::USART_CPOL

Specifies the steady state of the serial clock. This parameter can be a value of
USART_Clock_Polarity
uint32_t USART_ClockInitTypeDef::USART_CPHA

Specifies the clock transition on which the bit capture is made. This parameter
can be a value of USART_Clock_Phase
uint32_t USART_ClockInitTypeDef::USART_LastBit

Specifies whether the clock pulse corresponding to the last transmitted data bit
(MSB) has to be output on the SCLK pin in synchronous mode. This parameter
can be a value of USART_Last_Bit
USART Firmware driver API description
The following section lists the various functions of the USART library.
23.2.1
How to use this driver
1.
2.
3.
Enable peripheral clock using
RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_USART1, ENABLE) function for
USART1 or using RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_USARTx,
ENABLE) function for USART2, USART3, UART4 and UART5.
According to the USART mode, enable the GPIO clocks using
RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd() function. (The I/O can be TX, RX, CTS, or and SCLK).
Peripheral's alternate function:

Connect the pin to the desired peripherals' Alternate Function (AF) using
GPIO_PinAFConfig() function.
DocID023800 Rev 1
535/584
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
UM1581
transmitter (USART)

Configure the desired pin in alternate function by: GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode
= GPIO_Mode_AF.

Select the type, pull-up/pull-down and output speed via GPIO_PuPd,
GPIO_OType and GPIO_Speed members.

Call GPIO_Init() function.
4.
Program the Baud Rate, Word Length , Stop Bit, Parity, Hardware flow control and
Mode(Receiver/Transmitter) using the SPI_Init() function.
5.
For synchronous mode, enable the clock and program the polarity, phase and last bit
using the USART_ClockInit() function.
6.
Enable the NVIC and the corresponding interrupt using the function
USART_ITConfig() if you need to use interrupt mode.
7.
When using the DMA mode:

Configure the DMA using DMA_Init() function.

Active the needed channel Request using USART_DMACmd() function.
8.
Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
9.
Enable the DMA using the DMA_Cmd() function, when using DMA mode.
Refer to Multi-Processor, LIN, half-duplex, Smartcard, IrDA sub-sections for more details.
23.2.2
Initialization and Configuration functions
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to initialize the USART in
asynchronous and in synchronous modes.

For the asynchronous mode only these parameters can be configured:

Baud Rate.

Word Length.

Stop Bit.

Parity: If the parity is enabled, then the MSB bit of the data written in the data
register is transmitted but is changed by the parity bit. Depending on the frame
length defined by the M bit (8-bits or 9-bits), the possible USART frame formats
are as listed in the following table:
M bit
PCE bit
UART frame
0
0
SB | 8 bit data | STB
0
1
SB | 7 bit data | PB | STB
1
0
SB | 9 bit data | STB
1
1
SB | 8 bit data | PB | STB
(++) Hardware flow control. (++) Receiver/transmitter modes.
The USART_Init() function follows the USART asynchronous configuration
procedure(details for the procedure are available in reference manual.

536/584
For the synchronous mode in addition to the asynchronous mode parameters these
parameters should be also configured:

USART Clock Enabled.

USART polarity.

USART phase.

USART LastBit.
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
These parameters can be configured using the USART_ClockInit() function.
















23.2.3
USART_DeInit()
USART_Init()
USART_StructInit()
USART_ClockInit()
USART_ClockStructInit()
USART_Cmd()
USART_DirectionModeCmd()
USART_OverSampling8Cmd()
USART_OneBitMethodCmd()
USART_MSBFirstCmd()
USART_DataInvCmd()
USART_InvPinCmd()
USART_SWAPPinCmd()
USART_ReceiverTimeOutCmd()
USART_SetReceiverTimeOut()
USART_SetPrescaler()
RS485 mode functions
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART RS485 flow
control.
RS485 flow control (Driver enable feature) handling is possible through the following
procedure:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Program the Baud rate, Word length = 8 bits, Stop bits, Parity, Transmitter/Receiver
modes and hardware flow control values using the USART_Init() function.
Enable the Driver Enable using the USART_DECmd() function.
Configures the Driver Enable polarity using the USART_DEPolarityConfig() function.
Configures the Driver Enable assertion time using USART_SetDEAssertionTime()
function and deassertion time using the USART_SetDEDeassertionTime() function.
Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
The assertion and dessertion times are expressed in sample time units (1/8 or
1/16 bit time, depending on the oversampling rate).




23.2.4
USART_DECmd()
USART_DEPolarityConfig()
USART_SetDEAssertionTime()
USART_SetDEDeassertionTime()
DMA transfers management functions
This section provides two functions that can be used only in DMA mode.
In DMA Mode, the USART communication can be managed by 2 DMA Channel requests:
1.
2.
USART_DMAReq_Tx: specifies the Tx buffer DMA transfer request.
USART_DMAReq_Rx: specifies the Rx buffer DMA transfer request.
DocID023800 Rev 1
537/584
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
In this Mode it is advised to use the following function:



23.2.5
UM1581
void USART_DMACmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_DMAReq,
FunctionalState NewState).
USART_DMACmd()
USART_DMAReceptionErrorConfig()
Interrupts and flags management functions
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to configure the USART Interrupts
sources, Requests and check or clear the flags or pending bits status. The user should
identify which mode will be used in his application to manage the communication: Polling
mode, Interrupt mode.
Polling Mode
In Polling Mode, the SPI communication can be managed by these flags:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
USART_FLAG_REACK: to indicate the status of the Receive Enable acknowledge
flag
USART_FLAG_TEACK: to indicate the status of the Transmit Enable acknowledge
flag.
USART_FLAG_WUF: to indicate the status of the Wake up flag.
USART_FLAG_RWU: to indicate the status of the Receive Wake up flag.
USART_FLAG_SBK: to indicate the status of the Send Break flag.
USART_FLAG_CMF: to indicate the status of the Character match flag.
USART_FLAG_BUSY: to indicate the status of the Busy flag.
USART_FLAG_ABRF: to indicate the status of the Auto baud rate flag.
USART_FLAG_ABRE: to indicate the status of the Auto baud rate error flag.
USART_FLAG_EOBF: to indicate the status of the End of block flag.
USART_FLAG_RTOF: to indicate the status of the Receive time out flag.
USART_FLAG_nCTSS: to indicate the status of the Inverted nCTS input bit status.
USART_FLAG_TXE: to indicate the status of the transmit buffer register.
USART_FLAG_RXNE: to indicate the status of the receive buffer register.
USART_FLAG_TC: to indicate the status of the transmit operation.
USART_FLAG_IDLE: to indicate the status of the Idle Line.
USART_FLAG_CTS: to indicate the status of the nCTS input.
USART_FLAG_LBD: to indicate the status of the LIN break detection.
USART_FLAG_NE: to indicate if a noise error occur.
USART_FLAG_FE: to indicate if a frame error occur.
USART_FLAG_PE: to indicate if a parity error occur.
USART_FLAG_ORE: to indicate if an Overrun error occur.
In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:


FlagStatus USART_GetFlagStatus(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t
USART_FLAG).
void USART_ClearFlag(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_FLAG).
Interrupt Mode
In Interrupt Mode, the USART communication can be managed by 8 interrupt sources and
10 pending bits:

538/584
Pending Bits:
a.
USART_IT_WU: to indicate the status of the Wake up interrupt.
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
b.
USART_IT_CM: to indicate the status of Character match interrupt.
c.
USART_IT_EOB: to indicate the status of End of block interrupt.
d.
USART_IT_RTO: to indicate the status of Receive time out interrupt.
e.
USART_IT_CTS: to indicate the status of CTS change interrupt.
f.
USART_IT_LBD: to indicate the status of LIN Break detection interrupt.
g.
USART_IT_TC: to indicate the status of Transmission complete interrupt.
h.
USART_IT_IDLE: to indicate the status of IDLE line detected interrupt.
i.
USART_IT_ORE: to indicate the status of OverRun Error interrupt.
j.
USART_IT_NE: to indicate the status of Noise Error interrupt.
k.
USART_IT_FE: to indicate the status of Framing Error interrupt.
l.
USART_IT_PE: to indicate the status of Parity Error interrupt.
Interrupt Source:
a.
USART_IT_WU: specifies the interrupt source for Wake up interrupt.
b.
USART_IT_CM: specifies the interrupt source for Character match interrupt.
c.
USART_IT_EOB: specifies the interrupt source for End of block interrupt.
d.
USART_IT_RTO: specifies the interrupt source for Receive time-out interrupt.
e.
USART_IT_CTS: specifies the interrupt source for CTS change interrupt.
f.
USART_IT_LBD: specifies the interrupt source for LIN Break detection interrupt.
g.
USART_IT_TXE: specifies the interrupt source for Tansmit Data Register empty
interrupt.
h.
USART_IT_TC: specifies the interrupt source for Transmission complete
interrupt.
i.
USART_IT_RXNE: specifies the interrupt source for Receive Data register not
empty interrupt.
j.
USART_IT_IDLE: specifies the interrupt source for Idle line detection interrupt.
k.
USART_IT_PE: specifies the interrupt source for Parity Error interrupt.
l.
USART_IT_ERR: specifies the interrupt source for Error interrupt (Frame error,
noise error, overrun error) Some parameters are coded in order to use them as
interrupt source or as pending bits.
In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:










23.2.6
void USART_ITConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_IT,
FunctionalState NewState).
ITStatus USART_GetITStatus(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_IT).
void USART_ClearITPendingBit(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_IT).
USART_ITConfig()
USART_RequestCmd()
USART_OverrunDetectionConfig()
USART_GetFlagStatus()
USART_ClearFlag()
USART_GetITStatus()
USART_ClearITPendingBit()
STOP Mode functions
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage WakeUp from STOP
mode.
The USART is able to WakeUp from Stop Mode if USART clock is set to HSI or LSI.
The WakeUp source is configured by calling USART_StopModeWakeUpSourceConfig()
function.
DocID023800 Rev 1
539/584
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
After configuring the source of WakeUp and before entering in Stop Mode
USART_STOPModeCmd() function should be called to allow USART WakeUp.


23.2.7
UM1581
USART_STOPModeCmd()
USART_StopModeWakeUpSourceConfig()
AutoBaudRate functions
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the AutoBaudRate
detections.
Before Enabling AutoBaudRate detection using USART_AutoBaudRateCmd () The
character patterns used to calculate baudrate must be chosen by calling
USART_AutoBaudRateConfig() function. These function take as parameter :
1.
2.
USART_AutoBaudRate_StartBit : any character starting with a bit 1.
USART_AutoBaudRate_FallingEdge : any character starting with a 10xx bit pattern.
At any later time, another request for AutoBaudRate detection can be performed using
USART_RequestCmd() function.
The AutoBaudRate detection is monitored by the status of ABRF flag which indicate that
the AutoBaudRate detection is completed. In addition to ABRF flag, the ABRE flag indicate
that this procedure is completed without success. USART_GetFlagStatus () function should
be used to monitor the status of these flags.


23.2.8
USART_AutoBaudRateCmd()
USART_AutoBaudRateConfig()
Data transfers functions
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART data transfers.
During an USART reception, data shifts in least significant bit first through the RX pin.
When a transmission is taking place, a write instruction to the USART_TDR register stores
the data in the shift register.
The read access of the USART_RDR register can be done using the
USART_ReceiveData() function and returns the RDR value. Whereas a write access to the
USART_TDR can be done using USART_SendData() function and stores the written data
into TDR.


23.2.9
USART_SendData()
USART_ReceiveData()
Multi-Processor Communication functions
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART multiprocessor
communication.
For instance one of the USARTs can be the master, its TX output is connected to the RX
input of the other USART. The others are slaves, their respective TX outputs are logically
ANDed together and connected to the RX input of the master. USART multiprocessor
communication is possible through the following procedure:
540/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
Program the Baud rate, Word length = 9 bits, Stop bits, Parity, Mode transmitter or
Mode receiver and hardware flow control values using the USART_Init() function.
Configures the USART address using the USART_SetAddress() function.
Configures the wake up methode (USART_WakeUp_IdleLine or
USART_WakeUp_AddressMark) using USART_WakeUpConfig() function only for the
slaves.
Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
Enter the USART slaves in mute mode using USART_ReceiverWakeUpCmd()
function.
The USART Slave exit from mute mode when receive the wake up condition.




23.2.10
USART_SetAddress()
USART_MuteModeCmd()
USART_MuteModeWakeUpConfig()
USART_AddressDetectionConfig()
LIN mode functions
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART LIN Mode
communication.
In LIN mode, 8-bit data format with 1 stop bit is required in accordance with the LIN
standard.
Only this LIN Feature is supported by the USART IP:

LIN Master Synchronous Break send capability and LIN slave break detection
capability : 13-bit break generation and 10/11 bit break detection.
USART LIN Master transmitter communication is possible through the following procedure:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Program the Baud rate, Word length = 8bits, Stop bits = 1bit, Parity, Mode transmitter
or Mode receiver and hardware flow control values using the USART_Init() function.
Enable the LIN mode using the USART_LINCmd() function.
Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
Send the break character using USART_SendBreak() function.
USART LIN Master receiver communication is possible through the following procedure:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Program the Baud rate, Word length = 8bits, Stop bits = 1bit, Parity, Mode transmitter
or Mode receiver and hardware flow control values using the USART_Init() function.
Configures the break detection length using the
USART_LINBreakDetectLengthConfig() function.
Enable the LIN mode using the USART_LINCmd() function.
Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
In LIN mode, the following bits must be kept cleared:




CLKEN in the USART_CR2 register.
STOP[1:0], SCEN, HDSEL and IREN in the USART_CR3 register.
USART_LINBreakDetectLengthConfig()
USART_LINCmd()
DocID023800 Rev 1
541/584
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
23.2.11
UM1581
Half-duplex mode function
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART Half-duplex
communication.
The USART can be configured to follow a single-wire half-duplex protocol where the TX
and RX lines are internally connected.
USART Half duplex communication is possible through the following procedure:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Program the Baud rate, Word length, Stop bits, Parity, Mode transmitter or Mode
receiver and hardware flow control values using the USART_Init() function.
Configures the USART address using the USART_SetAddress() function.
Enable the half duplex mode using USART_HalfDuplexCmd() function.
Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
The RX pin is no longer used.
In Half-duplex mode the following bits must be kept cleared:



23.2.12
LINEN and CLKEN bits in the USART_CR2 register.
SCEN and IREN bits in the USART_CR3 register.
USART_HalfDuplexCmd()
Smartcard mode functions
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART Smartcard
communication.
The Smartcard interface is designed to support asynchronous protocol Smartcards as
defined in the ISO 7816-3 standard. The USART can provide a clock to the smartcard
through the SCLK output. In smartcard mode, SCLK is not associated to the
communication but is simply derived from the internal peripheral input clock through a 5-bit
prescaler.
Smartcard communication is possible through the following procedure:
1.
2.
3.
4.
542/584
Configures the Smartcard Prsecaler using the USART_SetPrescaler() function.
Configures the Smartcard Guard Time using the USART_SetGuardTime() function.
Program the USART clock using the USART_ClockInit() function as following:

USART Clock enabled.

USART CPOL Low.

USART CPHA on first edge.

USART Last Bit Clock Enabled.
Program the Smartcard interface using the USART_Init() function as following:

Word Length = 9 Bits.

1.5 Stop Bit.

Even parity.

BaudRate = 12096 baud.
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
5.
6.
7.
8.
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)

Hardware flow control disabled (RTS and CTS signals).

Tx and Rx enabled
Optionally you can enable the parity error interrupt using the USART_ITConfig()
function.
Enable the Smartcard NACK using the USART_SmartCardNACKCmd() function.
Enable the Smartcard interface using the USART_SmartCardCmd() function.
Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
Please refer to the ISO 7816-3 specification for more details.
It is also possible to choose 0.5 stop bit for receiving but it is recommended to
use 1.5 stop bits for both transmitting and receiving to avoid switching between
the two configurations.
In smartcard mode, the following bits must be kept cleared:







23.2.13
LINEN bit in the USART_CR2 register.
HDSEL and IREN bits in the USART_CR3 register.
USART_SetGuardTime()
USART_SmartCardCmd()
USART_SmartCardNACKCmd()
USART_SetAutoRetryCount()
USART_SetBlockLength()
IrDA mode functions
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART IrDA
communication.
IrDA is a half duplex communication protocol. If the Transmitter is busy, any data on the
IrDA receive line will be ignored by the IrDA decoder and if the Receiver is busy, data on
the TX from the USART to IrDA will not be encoded by IrDA. While receiving data,
transmission should be avoided as the data to be transmitted could be corrupted.
IrDA communication is possible through the following procedure:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Program the Baud rate, Word length = 8 bits, Stop bits, Parity, Transmitter/Receiver
modes and hardware flow control values using the USART_Init() function.
Configures the IrDA pulse width by configuring the prescaler using the
USART_SetPrescaler() function.
Configures the IrDA USART_IrDAMode_LowPower or USART_IrDAMode_Normal
mode using the USART_IrDAConfig() function.
Enable the IrDA using the USART_IrDACmd() function.
Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
A pulse of width less than two and greater than one PSC period(s) may or may
not be rejected.
DocID023800 Rev 1
543/584
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
UM1581
The receiver set up time should be managed by software. The IrDA physical layer
specification specifies a minimum of 10 ms delay between transmission and
reception (IrDA is a half duplex protocol).
In IrDA mode, the following bits must be kept cleared:




23.2.14
LINEN, STOP and CLKEN bits in the USART_CR2 register.
SCEN and HDSEL bits in the USART_CR3 register.
USART_IrDAConfig()
USART_IrDACmd()
Initialization and Configuration functions
23.2.14.1 USART_DeInit
Function Name
void USART_DeInit ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx)
Function Description
Deinitializes the USARTx peripheral registers to their default reset
values.
Parameters

USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
23.2.14.2 USART_Init
Function Name
void USART_Init ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx,
USART_InitTypeDef * USART_InitStruct)
Function Description
Initializes the USARTx peripheral according to the specified
parameters in the USART_InitStruct .
Parameters

Return values
544/584

USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
USART_InitStruct : pointer to a USART_InitTypeDef
structure that contains the configuration information for the
specified USART peripheral.

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
UM1581
Notes

None.
23.2.14.3 USART_StructInit
Function Name
void USART_StructInit ( USART_InitTypeDef *
USART_InitStruct)
Function Description
Fills each USART_InitStruct member with its default value.
Parameters

USART_InitStruct : pointer to a USART_InitTypeDef
structure which will be initialized.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
23.2.14.4 USART_ClockInit
Function Name
void USART_ClockInit ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx,
USART_ClockInitTypeDef * USART_ClockInitStruct)
Function Description
Initializes the USARTx peripheral Clock according to the specified
parameters in the USART_ClockInitStruct.
Parameters


USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3.
USART_ClockInitStruct : pointer to a
USART_ClockInitTypeDef structure that contains the
configuration information for the specified USART peripheral.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
23.2.14.5 USART_ClockStructInit
DocID023800 Rev 1
545/584
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
UM1581
transmitter (USART)
Function Name
void USART_ClockStructInit ( USART_ClockInitTypeDef *
USART_ClockInitStruct)
Function Description
Fills each USART_ClockInitStruct member with its default value.
Parameters

USART_ClockInitStruct : pointer to a
USART_ClockInitTypeDef structure which will be initialized.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
23.2.14.6 USART_Cmd
Function Name
void USART_Cmd ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the specified USART peripheral.
Parameters


USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
NewState : new state of the USARTx peripheral. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
23.2.14.7 USART_DirectionModeCmd
Function Name
void USART_DirectionModeCmd ( USART_TypeDef *
USARTx, uint32_t USART_DirectionMode, FunctionalState
NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the USART's transmitter or receiver.
Parameters


546/584
USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
USART_Direction : specifies the USART direction. This
parameter can be any combination of the following values:

USART_Mode_Tx : USART Transmitter

USART_Mode_Rx : USART Receiver
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
NewState : new state of the USART transfer direction. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
23.2.14.8 USART_OverSampling8Cmd
Function Name
void USART_OverSampling8Cmd ( USART_TypeDef *
USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the USART's 8x oversampling mode.
Parameters


USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
NewState : new state of the USART 8x oversampling mode.
This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

This function has to be called before calling USART_Init()
function in order to have correct baudrate Divider value.
23.2.14.9 USART_OneBitMethodCmd
Function Name
void USART_OneBitMethodCmd ( USART_TypeDef *
USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the USART's one bit sampling method.
Parameters


USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
NewState : new state of the USART one bit sampling
method. This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

This function has to be called before calling USART_Cmd()
function.
DocID023800 Rev 1
547/584
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
UM1581
23.2.14.10 USART_MSBFirstCmd
Function Name
void USART_MSBFirstCmd ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the USART's most significant bit first
transmitted/received following the start bit.
Parameters


USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
NewState : new state of the USART most significant bit first
transmitted/received following the start bit. This parameter
can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

This function has to be called before calling USART_Cmd()
function.
23.2.14.11 USART_DataInvCmd
Function Name
void USART_DataInvCmd ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the binary data inversion.
Parameters


548/584
USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
NewState : new defined levels for the USART data. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.

ENABLE : Logical data from the data register are
send/received in negative logic. (1=L, 0=H). The parity
bit is also inverted.

DISABLE : Logical data from the data register are
send/received in positive logic. (1=H, 0=L)
Return values

None.
Notes

This function has to be called before calling USART_Cmd()
function.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
UM1581
23.2.14.12 USART_InvPinCmd
Function Name
void USART_InvPinCmd ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx,
uint32_t USART_InvPin, FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the Pin(s) active level inversion.
Parameters



USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
USART_InvPin : specifies the USART pin(s) to invert. This
parameter can be any combination of the following values:

USART_InvPin_Tx : USART Tx pin active level
inversion.

USART_InvPin_Rx : USART Rx pin active level
inversion.
NewState : new active level status for the USART pin(s).
This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.

ENABLE : pin(s) signal values are inverted (Vdd =0,
Gnd =1).

DISABLE : pin(s) signal works using the standard logic
levels (Vdd =1, Gnd =0).
Return values

None.
Notes

This function has to be called before calling USART_Cmd()
function.
23.2.14.13 USART_SWAPPinCmd
Function Name
void USART_SWAPPinCmd ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the swap Tx/Rx pins.
Parameters


Return values

USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
NewState : new state of the USARTx TX/RX pins pinout.
This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.

ENABLE : The TX and RX pins functions are swapped.

DISABLE : TX/RX pins are used as defined in standard
pinout
None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
549/584
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
UM1581
transmitter (USART)
Notes

This function has to be called before calling USART_Cmd()
function.
23.2.14.14 USART_ReceiverTimeOutCmd
Function Name
void USART_ReceiverTimeOutCmd ( USART_TypeDef *
USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the receiver Time Out feature.
Parameters


USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
NewState : new state of the USARTx receiver Time Out.
This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
23.2.14.15 USART_SetReceiverTimeOut
Function Name
void USART_SetReceiverTimeOut ( USART_TypeDef *
USARTx, uint32_t USART_ReceiverTimeOut)
Function Description
Sets the receiver Time Out value.
Parameters


550/584
USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
USART_ReceiverTimeOut : specifies the Receiver Time
Out value.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
UM1581
23.2.14.16 USART_SetPrescaler
23.2.15
Function Name
void USART_SetPrescaler ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx,
uint8_t USART_Prescaler)
Function Description
Sets the system clock prescaler.
Parameters


USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
USART_Prescaler : specifies the prescaler clock.
Return values

None.
Notes

This function has to be called before calling USART_Cmd()
function.
RS485 mode function
23.2.15.1 USART_DECmd
Function Name
void USART_DECmd ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the USART's DE functionality.
Parameters


USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
NewState : new state of the driver enable mode. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
23.2.15.2 USART_DEPolarityConfig
Function Name
void USART_DEPolarityConfig ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx,
uint32_t USART_DEPolarity)
DocID023800 Rev 1
551/584
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
Function Description
Configures the USART's DE polarity.
Parameters

UM1581

USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
USART_DEPolarity : specifies the DE polarity. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

USART_DEPolarity_Low :

USART_DEPolarity_High :
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
23.2.15.3 USART_SetDEAssertionTime
Function Name
void USART_SetDEAssertionTime ( USART_TypeDef *
USARTx, uint32_t USART_DEAssertionTime)
Function Description
Sets the specified RS485 DE assertion time.
Parameters


USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
USART_AssertionTime : specifies the time between the
activation of the DE signal and the beginning of the start bit
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
23.2.15.4 USART_SetDEDeassertionTime
Function Name
void USART_SetDEDeassertionTime ( USART_TypeDef *
USARTx, uint32_t USART_DEDeassertionTime)
Function Description
Sets the specified RS485 DE deassertion time.
Parameters


552/584
USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
USART_DeassertionTime : specifies the time between the
middle of the last stop bit in a transmitted message and the
DocID023800 Rev 1
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
de-activation of the DE signal
UM1581
23.2.16
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DMA transfers management functions
23.2.16.1 USART_DMACmd
Function Name
void USART_DMACmd ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx, uint32_t
USART_DMAReq, FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the USART's DMA interface.
Parameters



USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4.
USART_DMAReq : specifies the DMA request. This
parameter can be any combination of the following values:

USART_DMAReq_Tx : USART DMA transmit request

USART_DMAReq_Rx : USART DMA receive request
NewState : new state of the DMA Request sources. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
23.2.16.2 USART_DMAReceptionErrorConfig
Function Name
void USART_DMAReceptionErrorConfig ( USART_TypeDef *
USARTx, uint32_t USART_DMAOnError)
Function Description
Enables or disables the USART's DMA interface when reception
error occurs.
Parameters


USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4.
USART_DMAOnError : specifies the DMA status in case of
reception error. This parameter can be any combination of the
following values:
DocID023800 Rev 1
553/584
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
UM1581
transmitter (USART)

USART_DMAOnError_Enable : DMA receive request
enabled when the USART DMA reception error is
asserted.

USART_DMAOnError_Disable : DMA receive request
disabled when the USART DMA reception error is
asserted.
23.2.17
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
Interrupts and flags management functions
23.2.17.1 USART_ITConfig
Function Name
void USART_ITConfig ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx, uint32_t
USART_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the specified USART interrupts.
Parameters



554/584
USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
USART_IT : specifies the USART interrupt sources to be
enabled or disabled. This parameter can be one of the
following values:

USART_IT_WU : Wake up interrupt.

USART_IT_CM : Character match interrupt.

USART_IT_EOB : End of block interrupt.

USART_IT_RTO : Receive time out interrupt.

USART_IT_CTS : CTS change interrupt.

USART_IT_LBD : LIN Break detection interrupt.

USART_IT_TXE : Tansmit Data Register empty
interrupt.

USART_IT_TC : Transmission complete interrupt.

USART_IT_RXNE : Receive Data register not empty
interrupt.

USART_IT_IDLE : Idle line detection interrupt.

USART_IT_PE : Parity Error interrupt.

USART_IT_ERR : Error interrupt(Frame error, noise
error, overrun error)
NewState : new state of the specified USARTx interrupts.
This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
UM1581
23.2.17.2 USART_RequestCmd
Function Name
void USART_RequestCmd ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx,
uint32_t USART_Request, FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables the specified USART's Request.
Parameters



USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
USART_Request : specifies the USART request. This
parameter can be any combination of the following values:

USART_Request_TXFRQ : Transmit data flush
ReQuest

USART_Request_RXFRQ : Receive data flush
ReQuest

USART_Request_MMRQ : Mute Mode ReQuest

USART_Request_SBKRQ : Send Break ReQuest

USART_Request_ABRRQ : Auto Baud Rate ReQuest
NewState : new state of the DMA interface when reception
error occurs. This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
23.2.17.3 USART_OverrunDetectionConfig
Function Name
void USART_OverrunDetectionConfig ( USART_TypeDef *
USARTx, uint32_t USART_OVRDetection)
Function Description
Enables or disables the USART's Overrun detection.
Parameters


USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
USART_OVRDetection : specifies the OVR detection status
in case of OVR error. This parameter can be any combination
of the following values:

USART_OVRDetection_Enable : OVR error detection
enabled when the USART OVR error is asserted.

USART_OVRDetection_Disable : OVR error detection
disabled when the USART OVR error is asserted.
DocID023800 Rev 1
555/584
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
Return values

None.
Notes

UM1581
None.
23.2.17.4 USART_GetFlagStatus
Function Name
FlagStatus USART_GetFlagStatus ( USART_TypeDef *
USARTx, uint32_t USART_FLAG)
Function Description
Checks whether the specified USART flag is set or not.
Parameters


556/584
USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
USART_FLAG : specifies the flag to check. This parameter
can be one of the following values:

USART_FLAG_REACK : Receive Enable acknowledge
flag.

USART_FLAG_TEACK : Transmit Enable acknowledge
flag.

USART_FLAG_WUF : Wake up flag.

USART_FLAG_RWU : Receive Wake up flag.

USART_FLAG_SBK : Send Break flag.

USART_FLAG_CMF : Character match flag.

USART_FLAG_BUSY : Busy flag.

USART_FLAG_ABRF : Auto baud rate flag.

USART_FLAG_ABRE : Auto baud rate error flag.

USART_FLAG_EOBF : End of block flag.

USART_FLAG_RTOF : Receive time out flag.

USART_FLAG_nCTSS : Inverted nCTS input bit status.

USART_FLAG_CTS : CTS Change flag.

USART_FLAG_LBD : LIN Break detection flag.

USART_FLAG_TXE : Transmit data register empty flag.

USART_FLAG_TC : Transmission Complete flag.

USART_FLAG_RXNE : Receive data register not
empty flag.

USART_FLAG_IDLE : Idle Line detection flag.

USART_FLAG_ORE : OverRun Error flag.

USART_FLAG_NE : Noise Error flag.

USART_FLAG_FE : Framing Error flag.

USART_FLAG_PE : Parity Error flag.
Return values

The new state of USART_FLAG (SET or RESET).
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
UM1581
23.2.17.5 USART_ClearFlag
Function Name
void USART_ClearFlag ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx, uint32_t
USART_FLAG)
Function Description
Clears the USARTx's pending flags.
Parameters


USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
USART_FLAG : specifies the flag to clear. This parameter
can be any combination of the following values:

USART_FLAG_WUF : Wake up flag.

USART_FLAG_CMF : Character match flag.

USART_FLAG_EOBF : End of block flag.

USART_FLAG_RTOF : Receive time out flag.

USART_FLAG_CTS : CTS Change flag.

USART_FLAG_LBD : LIN Break detection flag.

USART_FLAG_TC : Transmission Complete flag.

USART_FLAG_IDLE : IDLE line detected flag.

USART_FLAG_ORE : OverRun Error flag.

USART_FLAG_NE : Noise Error flag.

USART_FLAG_FE : Framing Error flag.

USART_FLAG_PE : Parity Errorflag.
Return values

None.
Notes

RXNE pending bit is cleared by a read to the USART_RDR
register (USART_ReceiveData()) or by writing 1 to the
RXFRQ in the register USART_RQR
(USART_RequestCmd()).TC flag can be also cleared by
software sequence: a read operation to USART_SR register
(USART_GetFlagStatus()) followed by a write operation to
USART_TDR register (USART_SendData()).TXE flag is
cleared by a write to the USART_TDR register
(USART_SendData()) or by writing 1 to the TXFRQ in the
register USART_RQR (USART_RequestCmd()).SBKF flag is
cleared by 1 to the SBKRQ in the register USART_RQR
(USART_RequestCmd()).
DocID023800 Rev 1
557/584
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
UM1581
23.2.17.6 USART_GetITStatus
Function Name
ITStatus USART_GetITStatus ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx,
uint32_t USART_IT)
Function Description
Checks whether the specified USART interrupt has occurred or
not.
Parameters


USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
USART_IT : specifies the USART interrupt source to check.
This parameter can be one of the following values:

USART_IT_WU : Wake up interrupt.

USART_IT_CM : Character match interrupt.

USART_IT_EOB : End of block interrupt.

USART_IT_RTO : Receive time out interrupt.

USART_IT_CTS : CTS change interrupt.

USART_IT_LBD : LIN Break detection interrupt.

USART_IT_TXE : Tansmit Data Register empty
interrupt.

USART_IT_TC : Transmission complete interrupt.

USART_IT_RXNE : Receive Data register not empty
interrupt.

USART_IT_IDLE : Idle line detection interrupt.

USART_IT_ORE : OverRun Error interrupt.

USART_IT_NE : Noise Error interrupt.

USART_IT_FE : Framing Error interrupt.

USART_IT_PE : Parity Error interrupt.
Return values

The new state of USART_IT (SET or RESET).
Notes

None.
23.2.17.7 USART_ClearITPendingBit
Function Name
void USART_ClearITPendingBit ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx,
uint32_t USART_IT)
Function Description
Clears the USARTx's interrupt pending bits.
Parameters


558/584
USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
USART_IT : specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear. This
parameter can be one of the following values:
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581












23.2.18
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
USART_IT_WU : Wake up interrupt.
USART_IT_CM : Character match interrupt.
USART_IT_EOB : End of block interrupt.
USART_IT_RTO : Receive time out interrupt.
USART_IT_CTS : CTS change interrupt.
USART_IT_LBD : LIN Break detection interrupt.
USART_IT_TC : Transmission complete interrupt.
USART_IT_IDLE : IDLE line detected interrupt.
USART_IT_ORE : OverRun Error interrupt.
USART_IT_NE : Noise Error interrupt.
USART_IT_FE : Framing Error interrupt.
USART_IT_PE : Parity Error interrupt.
Return values

None.
Notes

RXNE pending bit is cleared by a read to the USART_RDR
register (USART_ReceiveData()) or by writing 1 to the
RXFRQ in the register USART_RQR
(USART_RequestCmd()).TC pending bit can be also cleared
by software sequence: a read operation to USART_SR
register (USART_GetITStatus()) followed by a write operation
to USART_TDR register (USART_SendData()).TXE pending
bit is cleared by a write to the USART_TDR register
(USART_SendData()) or by writing 1 to the TXFRQ in the
register USART_RQR (USART_RequestCmd()).
STOP mode functions
23.2.18.1 USART_STOPModeCmd
Function Name
void USART_STOPModeCmd ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the specified USART peripheral in STOP
Mode.
Parameters


USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
NewState : new state of the USARTx peripheral state in stop
mode. This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

This function has to be called when USART clock is set to
HSI or LSE.
DocID023800 Rev 1
559/584
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
UM1581
23.2.18.2 USART_StopModeWakeUpSourceConfig
Function Name
void USART_StopModeWakeUpSourceConfig (
USART_TypeDef * USARTx, uint32_t USART_WakeUpSource)
Function Description
Selects the USART WakeUp method form stop mode.
Parameters


23.2.19
USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
USART_WakeUp : specifies the selected USART wakeup
method. This parameter can be one of the following values:

USART_WakeUpSource_AddressMatch : WUF active
on address match.

USART_WakeUpSource_StartBit : WUF active on
Start bit detection.

USART_WakeUpSource_RXNE : WUF active on
RXNE.
Return values

None.
Notes

This function has to be called before calling USART_Cmd()
function.
Data transfer functions
23.2.19.1 USART_SendData
560/584
Function Name
void USART_SendData ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx, uint16_t
Data)
Function Description
Transmits single data through the USARTx peripheral.
Parameters


USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
Data : the data to transmit.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
UM1581
23.2.19.2 USART_ReceiveData
23.2.20
Function Name
uint16_t USART_ReceiveData ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx)
Function Description
Returns the most recent received data by the USARTx peripheral.
Parameters

USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
Return values

The received data.
Notes

None.
AutoBaudRate functions
23.2.20.1 USART_AutoBaudRateCmd
Function Name
void USART_AutoBaudRateCmd ( USART_TypeDef *
USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the Auto Baud Rate.
Parameters


USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
NewState : new state of the USARTx auto baud rate. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
23.2.20.2 USART_AutoBaudRateConfig
Function Name
void USART_AutoBaudRateConfig ( USART_TypeDef *
USARTx, uint32_t USART_AutoBaudRate)
Function Description
Selects the USART auto baud rate method.
Parameters

USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
DocID023800 Rev 1
561/584
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
UM1581
transmitter (USART)
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.

USART_AutoBaudRate : specifies the selected USART
auto baud rate method. This parameter can be one of the
following values:

USART_AutoBaudRate_StartBit : Start Bit duration
measurement.

USART_AutoBaudRate_FallingEdge : Falling edge to
falling edge measurement.

USART_AutoBaudRate_0x7FFrame : 0x7F frame.

USART_AutoBaudRate_0x55Frame : 0x55 frame.
23.2.21
Return values

None.
Notes

This function has to be called before calling USART_Cmd()
function.
MultiProcessor Communication functions
23.2.21.1 USART_SetAddress
Function Name
void USART_SetAddress ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx,
uint8_t USART_Address)
Function Description
Sets the address of the USART node.
Parameters


USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
USART_Address : Indicates the address of the USART
node.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
23.2.21.2 USART_MuteModeCmd
562/584
Function Name
void USART_MuteModeCmd ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the USART's mute mode.
Parameters

USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
NewState : new state of the USART mute mode. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
23.2.21.3 USART_MuteModeWakeUpConfig
Function Name
void USART_MuteModeWakeUpConfig ( USART_TypeDef *
USARTx, uint32_t USART_WakeUp)
Function Description
Selects the USART WakeUp method from mute mode.
Parameters


USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
USART_WakeUp : specifies the USART wakeup method.
This parameter can be one of the following values:

USART_WakeUp_IdleLine : WakeUp by an idle line
detection

USART_WakeUp_AddressMark : WakeUp by an
address mark
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
23.2.21.4 USART_AddressDetectionConfig
Function Name
void USART_AddressDetectionConfig ( USART_TypeDef *
USARTx, uint32_t USART_AddressLength)
Function Description
Configure the the USART Address detection length.
Parameters


USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
USART_AddressLength : specifies the USART address
length detection. This parameter can be one of the following
values:
DocID023800 Rev 1
563/584
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
UM1581
transmitter (USART)

USART_AddressLength_4b : 4-bit address length
detection

USART_AddressLength_7b : 7-bit address length
detection
23.2.22
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
LIN mode functions
23.2.22.1 USART_LINBreakDetectLengthConfig
Function Name
void USART_LINBreakDetectLengthConfig ( USART_TypeDef
* USARTx, uint32_t USART_LINBreakDetectLength)
Function Description
Sets the USART LIN Break detection length.
Parameters


USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
USART_LINBreakDetectLength : specifies the LIN break
detection length. This parameter can be one of the following
values:

USART_LINBreakDetectLength_10b : 10-bit break
detection

USART_LINBreakDetectLength_11b : 11-bit break
detection
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
23.2.22.2 USART_LINCmd
564/584
Function Name
void USART_LINCmd ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the USART's LIN mode.
Parameters

USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581

23.2.23
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
NewState : new state of the USART LIN mode. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
Halfduplex mode function
23.2.23.1 USART_HalfDuplexCmd
Function Name
void USART_HalfDuplexCmd ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the USART's Half Duplex communication.
Parameters


23.2.24
USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
NewState : new state of the USART Communication. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
Smartcard mode functions
23.2.24.1 USART_SetGuardTime
Function Name
void USART_SetGuardTime ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx,
uint8_t USART_GuardTime)
Function Description
Sets the specified USART guard time.
Parameters


USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3.
USART_GuardTime : specifies the guard time.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
565/584
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
UM1581
23.2.24.2 USART_SmartCardCmd
Function Name
void USART_SmartCardCmd ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the USART's Smart Card mode.
Parameters


USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3.
NewState : new state of the Smart Card mode. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
23.2.24.3 USART_SmartCardNACKCmd
Function Name
void USART_SmartCardNACKCmd ( USART_TypeDef *
USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables NACK transmission.
Parameters


566/584
USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3.
NewState : new state of the NACK transmission. This
parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
UM1581
23.2.24.4 USART_SetAutoRetryCount
Function Name
void USART_SetAutoRetryCount ( USART_TypeDef *
USARTx, uint8_t USART_AutoCount)
Function Description
Sets the Smart Card number of retries in transmit and receive.
Parameters


USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3.
USART_AutoCount : specifies the Smart Card auto retry
count.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
23.2.24.5 USART_SetBlockLength
Function Name
void USART_SetBlockLength ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx,
uint8_t USART_BlockLength)
Function Description
Sets the Smart Card Block length.
Parameters


23.2.25
USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3.
USART_BlockLength : specifies the Smart Card block
length.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
IrDA mode functions
23.2.25.1 USART_IrDAConfig
Function Name
void USART_IrDAConfig ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx,
uint32_t USART_IrDAMode)
DocID023800 Rev 1
567/584
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
Function Description
Configures the USART's IrDA interface.
Parameters

UM1581

USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
USART_IrDAMode : specifies the IrDA mode. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

USART_IrDAMode_LowPower :

USART_IrDAMode_Normal :
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
23.2.25.2 USART_IrDACmd
Function Name
void USART_IrDACmd ( USART_TypeDef * USARTx,
FunctionalState NewState)
Function Description
Enables or disables the USART's IrDA interface.
Parameters


USARTx : Select the USART peripheral. This parameter can
be one of the following values: USART1 or USART2 or
USART3 or UART4 or UART5.
NewState : new state of the IrDA mode. This parameter can
be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
23.3
USART Firmware driver defines
23.3.1
USART
USART
USART_Address_Detection
568/584

#define: USART_AddressLength_4b ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: USART_AddressLength_7b USART_CR2_ADDM7
DocID023800 Rev 1
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
UM1581
USART_AutoBaudRate_Mode

#define: USART_AutoBaudRate_StartBit ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: USART_AutoBaudRate_FallingEdge USART_CR2_ABRMODE_0

#define: USART_AutoBaudRate_0x7FFrame USART_CR2_ABRMODE_1

#define: USART_AutoBaudRate_0x55Frame (USART_CR2_ABRMODE_0 |
USART_CR2_ABRMODE_1)
USART_Clock

#define: USART_Clock_Disable ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: USART_Clock_Enable USART_CR2_CLKEN
USART_Clock_Phase

#define: USART_CPHA_1Edge ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: USART_CPHA_2Edge USART_CR2_CPHA
USART_Clock_Polarity

#define: USART_CPOL_Low ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: USART_CPOL_High USART_CR2_CPOL
DocID023800 Rev 1
569/584
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
USART_DE_Polarity

#define: USART_DEPolarity_High ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: USART_DEPolarity_Low USART_CR3_DEP
USART_DMA_Recception_Error

#define: USART_DMAOnError_Enable ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: USART_DMAOnError_Disable USART_CR3_DDRE
USART_DMA_Requests

#define: USART_DMAReq_Tx USART_CR3_DMAT

#define: USART_DMAReq_Rx USART_CR3_DMAR
USART_Flags
570/584

#define: USART_FLAG_REACK USART_ISR_REACK

#define: USART_FLAG_TEACK USART_ISR_TEACK

#define: USART_FLAG_WU USART_ISR_WUF

#define: USART_FLAG_RWU USART_ISR_RWU

#define: USART_FLAG_SBK USART_ISR_SBKF
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
UM1581

#define: USART_FLAG_CM USART_ISR_CMF

#define: USART_FLAG_BUSY USART_ISR_BUSY

#define: USART_FLAG_ABRF USART_ISR_ABRF

#define: USART_FLAG_ABRE USART_ISR_ABRE

#define: USART_FLAG_EOB USART_ISR_EOBF

#define: USART_FLAG_RTO USART_ISR_RTOF

#define: USART_FLAG_nCTSS USART_ISR_CTS

#define: USART_FLAG_CTS USART_ISR_CTSIF

#define: USART_FLAG_LBD USART_ISR_LBD

#define: USART_FLAG_TXE USART_ISR_TXE

#define: USART_FLAG_TC USART_ISR_TC

#define: USART_FLAG_RXNE USART_ISR_RXNE
DocID023800 Rev 1
571/584
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)

#define: USART_FLAG_IDLE USART_ISR_IDLE

#define: USART_FLAG_ORE USART_ISR_ORE

#define: USART_FLAG_NE USART_ISR_NE

#define: USART_FLAG_FE USART_ISR_FE

#define: USART_FLAG_PE USART_ISR_PE
USART_Hardware_Flow_Control

#define: USART_HardwareFlowControl_None ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: USART_HardwareFlowControl_RTS USART_CR3_RTSE

#define: USART_HardwareFlowControl_CTS USART_CR3_CTSE

#define: USART_HardwareFlowControl_RTS_CTS (USART_CR3_RTSE |
USART_CR3_CTSE)
USART_Interrupt_definition
572/584

#define: USART_IT_WU ((uint32_t)0x00140316)

#define: USART_IT_CM ((uint32_t)0x0011010E)
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
UM1581

#define: USART_IT_EOB ((uint32_t)0x000C011B)

#define: USART_IT_RTO ((uint32_t)0x000B011A)

#define: USART_IT_PE ((uint32_t)0x00000108)

#define: USART_IT_TXE ((uint32_t)0x00070107)

#define: USART_IT_TC ((uint32_t)0x00060106)

#define: USART_IT_RXNE ((uint32_t)0x00050105)

#define: USART_IT_IDLE ((uint32_t)0x00040104)

#define: USART_IT_LBD ((uint32_t)0x00080206)

#define: USART_IT_CTS ((uint32_t)0x0009030A)

#define: USART_IT_ERR ((uint32_t)0x00000300)

#define: USART_IT_ORE ((uint32_t)0x00030300)

#define: USART_IT_NE ((uint32_t)0x00020300)
DocID023800 Rev 1
573/584
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)

#define: USART_IT_FE ((uint32_t)0x00010300)
USART_Inversion_Pins

#define: USART_InvPin_Tx USART_CR2_TXINV

#define: USART_InvPin_Rx USART_CR2_RXINV
USART_IrDA_Low_Power

#define: USART_IrDAMode_LowPower USART_CR3_IRLP

#define: USART_IrDAMode_Normal ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
USART_Last_Bit

#define: USART_LastBit_Disable ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: USART_LastBit_Enable USART_CR2_LBCL
USART_LIN_Break_Detection_Length

#define: USART_LINBreakDetectLength_10b ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: USART_LINBreakDetectLength_11b USART_CR2_LBDL
USART_Mode

574/584
#define: USART_Mode_Rx USART_CR1_RE
DocID023800 Rev 1
UM1581
UM1581

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)
#define: USART_Mode_Tx USART_CR1_TE
USART_MuteMode_WakeUp_methods

#define: USART_WakeUp_IdleLine ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: USART_WakeUp_AddressMark USART_CR1_WAKE
USART_OVR_DETECTION

#define: USART_OVRDetection_Enable ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: USART_OVRDetection_Disable USART_CR3_OVRDIS
USART_Parity

#define: USART_Parity_No ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: USART_Parity_Even USART_CR1_PCE

#define: USART_Parity_Odd (USART_CR1_PCE | USART_CR1_PS)
USART_Request

#define: USART_Request_ABRRQ USART_RQR_ABRRQ

#define: USART_Request_SBKRQ USART_RQR_SBKRQ

#define: USART_Request_MMRQ USART_RQR_MMRQ
DocID023800 Rev 1
575/584
Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
transmitter (USART)

#define: USART_Request_RXFRQ USART_RQR_RXFRQ

#define: USART_Request_TXFRQ USART_RQR_TXFRQ
UM1581
USART_StopMode_WakeUp_methods

#define: USART_WakeUpSource_AddressMatch ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: USART_WakeUpSource_StartBit USART_CR3_WUS_1

#define: USART_WakeUpSource_RXNE (uint32_t)(USART_CR3_WUS_0 |
USART_CR3_WUS_1)
USART_Stop_Bits

#define: USART_StopBits_1 ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: USART_StopBits_2 USART_CR2_STOP_1

#define: USART_StopBits_1_5 (USART_CR2_STOP_0 | USART_CR2_STOP_1)
USART_Word_Length
576/584

#define: USART_WordLength_8b ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: USART_WordLength_9b USART_CR1_M
DocID023800 Rev 1
Window watchdog (WWDG)
UM1581
24
Window watchdog (WWDG)
24.1
WWDG Firmware driver registers structures
24.1.1
WWDG_TypeDef
WWDG_TypeDef is defined in the stm32f30x.h
Data Fields



__IO uint32_t CR
__IO uint32_t CFR
__IO uint32_t SR
Field Documentation



24.2
__IO uint32_t WWDG_TypeDef::CR

WWDG Control register, Address offset: 0x00
__IO uint32_t WWDG_TypeDef::CFR

WWDG Configuration register, Address offset: 0x04
__IO uint32_t WWDG_TypeDef::SR

WWDG Status register, Address offset: 0x08
WWDG Firmware driver API description
The following section lists the various functions of the WWDG library.
24.2.1
WWDG features
Once enabled the WWDG generates a system reset on expiry of a programmed time
period, unless the program refreshes the counter (downcounter) before to reach 0x3F
value (i.e. a reset is generated when the counter value rolls over from 0x40 to 0x3F).
An MCU reset is also generated if the counter value is refreshed before the counter has
reached the refresh window value. This implies that the counter must be refreshed in a
limited window.
Once enabled the WWDG cannot be disabled except by a system reset.
WWDGRST flag in RCC_CSR register can be used to inform when a WWDG reset occurs.
The WWDG counter input clock is derived from the APB clock divided by a programmable
prescaler.
WWDG counter clock = PCLK1 / Prescaler.
WWDG timeout = (WWDG counter clock) * (counter value).
Min-max timeout value @36MHz (PCLK1): ~114us / ~58.3ms.
DocID023800 Rev 1
577/584
Window watchdog (WWDG)
24.2.2
How to use this driver
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
24.2.3
WWDG_DeInit()
WWDG_SetPrescaler()
WWDG_SetWindowValue()
WWDG_EnableIT()
WWDG_SetCounter()
WWDG activation function

24.2.5
Enable WWDG clock using RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_WWDG,
ENABLE) function.
Configure the WWDG prescaler using WWDG_SetPrescaler() function.
Configure the WWDG refresh window using WWDG_SetWindowValue() function.
Set the WWDG counter value and start it using WWDG_Enable() function. When the
WWDG is enabled the counter value should be configured to a value greater than
0x40 to prevent generating an immediate reset.
Optionally you can enable the Early wakeup interrupt which is generated when the
counter reach 0x40. Once enabled this interrupt cannot be disabled except by a
system reset.
Then the application program must refresh the WWDG counter at regular intervals
during normal operation to prevent an MCU reset, using WWDG_SetCounter()
function. This operation must occur only when the counter value is lower than the
refresh window value, programmed using WWDG_SetWindowValue().
Prescaler, Refresh window and Counter configuration functions





24.2.4
UM1581
WWDG_Enable()
Interrupts and flags management functions


WWDG_GetFlagStatus()
WWDG_ClearFlag()
24.2.6
Prescaler, Refresh window and Counter configuration functions
24.2.6.1
WWDG_DeInit
578/584
Function Name
void WWDG_DeInit ( void )
Function Description
Deinitializes the WWDG peripheral registers to their default reset
values.
Parameters

None.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Window watchdog (WWDG)
UM1581
24.2.6.2
24.2.6.3
WWDG_SetPrescaler
Function Name
void WWDG_SetPrescaler ( uint32_t WWDG_Prescaler)
Function Description
Sets the WWDG Prescaler.
Parameters

WWDG_Prescaler : specifies the WWDG Prescaler. This
parameter can be one of the following values:

WWDG_Prescaler_1 : WWDG counter clock =
(PCLK1/4096)/1

WWDG_Prescaler_2 : WWDG counter clock =
(PCLK1/4096)/2

WWDG_Prescaler_4 : WWDG counter clock =
(PCLK1/4096)/4

WWDG_Prescaler_8 : WWDG counter clock =
(PCLK1/4096)/8
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
WWDG_SetWindowValue
Function Name
void WWDG_SetWindowValue ( uint8_t WindowValue)
Function Description
Sets the WWDG window value.
Parameters

WindowValue : specifies the window value to be compared
to the downcounter. This parameter value must be lower than
0x80.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
579/584
Window watchdog (WWDG)
24.2.6.4
24.2.6.5
UM1581
WWDG_EnableIT
Function Name
void WWDG_EnableIT ( void )
Function Description
Enables the WWDG Early Wakeup interrupt(EWI).
Parameters

None.
Return values

None.
Notes

Once enabled this interrupt cannot be disabled except by a
system reset.
WWDG_SetCounter
Function Name
void WWDG_SetCounter ( uint8_t Counter)
Function Description
Sets the WWDG counter value.
Parameters

Counter : specifies the watchdog counter value. This
parameter must be a number between 0x40 and 0x7F (to
prevent generating an immediate reset).
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
24.2.7
WWDG activation functions
24.2.7.1
WWDG_Enable
580/584
Function Name
void WWDG_Enable ( uint8_t Counter)
Function Description
Enables WWDG and load the counter value.
Parameters

Counter : specifies the watchdog counter value. This
parameter must be a number between 0x40 and 0x7F (to
prevent generating an immediate reset).
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
DocID023800 Rev 1
Window watchdog (WWDG)
UM1581
24.2.8
Interrupts and flags management functions
24.2.8.1
WWDG_GetFlagStatus
24.2.8.2
Function Name
FlagStatus WWDG_GetFlagStatus ( void )
Function Description
Checks whether the Early Wakeup interrupt flag is set or not.
Parameters

None.
Return values

The new state of the Early Wakeup interrupt flag (SET or
RESET).
Notes

None.
WWDG_ClearFlag
Function Name
void WWDG_ClearFlag ( void )
Function Description
Clears Early Wakeup interrupt flag.
Parameters

None.
Return values

None.
Notes

None.
24.3
WWDG Firmware driver defines
24.3.1
WWDG
WWDG
WWDG_Prescaler

#define: WWDG_Prescaler_1 ((uint32_t)0x00000000)

#define: WWDG_Prescaler_2 ((uint32_t)0x00000080)
DocID023800 Rev 1
581/584
Window watchdog (WWDG)
582/584
UM1581

#define: WWDG_Prescaler_4 ((uint32_t)0x00000100)

#define: WWDG_Prescaler_8 ((uint32_t)0x00000180)
DocID023800 Rev 1
Revision history
UM1581
25
Revision history
Table 16: Revision history
Date
Revision
Changes
25-Oct-2012
1
Initial release.
DocID023800 Rev 1
583/584
UM1581
Please Read Carefully
Information in this document is provided solely in connection with ST products. STMicroelectronics
NV and its subsidiaries (“ST”) reserve the right to make changes, corrections, modifications or
improvements, to this document, and the products and services described herein at anytime, without
notice.
All ST products are sold pursuant to ST‟s terms and conditions of sale.
Purchasers are solely responsible for the choice, selection and use of the ST products and services
described herein, and ST assumes no liability whatsoever relating to the choice, selection or use of
the ST products and services described herein.
No license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any intellectual property rights is granted
under this document. If any part of this document refers to any third party products or services it shall
not be deemed a license grant by ST for the use of such third party products or services, or any
intellectual property contained therein or considered as a warranty covering the use in any manner
whatsoever of such third party products or services or any intellectual property contained therein.
UNLESS OTHERWISE SET FORTH IN ST’S TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE ST DISCLAIMS
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY WITH RESPECT TO THE USE AND/OR SALE OF ST
PRODUCTS INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE (AND THEIR EQUIVALENTS
UNDER THE LAWS OF ANY JURISDICTION), OR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT,
COPYRIGHT OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHT.
UNLESS EXPRESSLY APPROVED IN WRITING BY TWO AUTHORIZED ST
REPRESENTATIVES, ST PRODUCTS ARE NOT RECOMMENDED, AUTHORIZED OR
WARRANTED FOR USE IN MILITARY, AIR CRAFT, SPACE, LIFE SAVING, OR LIFE
SUSTAINING APPLICATIONS, NOR IN PRODUCTS OR SYSTEMS WHERE FAILURE OR
MALFUNCTION MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH, OR SEVERE PROPERTY OR
ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE. ST PRODUCTS WHICH ARE NOT SPECIFIED AS "AUTOMOTIVE
GRADE" MAY ONLY BE USED IN AUTOMOTIVE APPLICATIONS AT USER’S OWN RISK.
Resale of ST products with provisions different from the statements and/or technical features set
forth in this document shall immediately voidany warranty granted by ST for the ST product or service
described herein and shall not create or extend in any manner whatsoever, any liability of ST.
ST and the ST logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of ST in various countries.
Information in this document supersedes and replaces all information previously supplied.
The ST logo is a registered trademark of STMicroelectronics. All other names are the property of their
respective owners.
© 2012 STMicroelectronics - All rights reserved
STMicroelectronics group of companies
Australia - Belgium - Brazil - Canada - China - Czech Republic - Finland - France - Germany - Hong
Kong - India - Israel - Italy - Japan - Malaysia - Malta - Morocco - Philippines - Singapore - Spain Sweden - Switzerland - United Kingdom - United States of America
www.st.com
584/584
DocID023800 Rev 1
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement